Home

VoIP Gateway User Manual R4-5

1. Gatekeeper LAN Digital L Microsoft 3 a NetMeeting Clients N 4400 Seat Ethernet Client Ethernet IP Address Packet Switched VoIP Network VPN i Central Site wAn WAN Remote Site H 245 H 245 VoIP H 323 Gateway BEONE IP H 32 2p WAN Fo lao wee 7 7 PSTN BRI A an Fallback A l Telephone o Deadman Q we og l Relay Switch 7 g Euro l PBX 1 ee ISDN Key System ISDN NO AMER at om Pots PSTN NESE N Ba a Analog VoIP H 323 Gateway EA Elements of Converged Voice Data Packet Switched VoIP Network and Circuit Switched PSTN Page 1 9 H 323 VoIP Gateway Voice and Convergence Features H 323 VoIP Gateway Voice and Convergence Features As shown below the main functions handled by Alcatel s H 323 VoIP Gateway include the following Telephony Signaling used to communicate with the PSTN or Customer Premises Equipment CPE Payload Packetization and Digital Signal Processing via DSP converts PCM voice packets from circuit switched network to H 323 packets on IP network and the reverse H 323 Network Call Control handles
2. Specify time to wait for E amp M wink on outgoing calls 5 96 Specify minimum E amp M wink duration 5 97 Specify maximum E amp M wink duration 5 98 Signaling Attributes E amp M Immediate Start Signaling Digital only Specify E amp M immediate start time to remain off hook when congested 5 99 Specify E amp M immediate start time to wait before beginning digit collection 5 100 Signaling Attributes E amp M Delay Start Signaling Digital only Specify minimum E amp M delay start response to off hook dial tone state 5 101 Specify maximum E amp M delay start response to off hook dial tone state 5 102 Specify time to ignore incoming digits after E amp M delay start 5 103 Specify E amp M delay start signal detection 5 104 Specify minimum E amp M delay start detection time on M lead 5 105 Specify maximum E amp M delay start detection time on M lead 5 106 Specify maximum time to wait for E amp M delay start detection 5 107 Signaling Attributes Foreign Exchange Station FXS Loop Start Signaling Specify FXS loop start debounce interval to on hook transition 5 108 Specify FXS loop start debounce interval to off hook transition 5 109 Specify FXS loop start time to wait before declaring off hook 5 110 Specify FXS loop start minimum time to wait before declaring on hook by originator 5 111 Specify FXS loop start minimum time to wait before declaring on hook by answerer 5 112
3. istripped iy ae te gs ee ae digits D Extensions 81 000 to 799 HTI Voice off of PBX 1 A t 27 Daughtercard z 000 1 6 s i Ea IP 192 168 11 2 S 799 Port 1720 WAN l Extensions H Voice pit OLTEK KE T1 Daughtercard i 000 es 2 Jil 799 a 82 000 to 799 T1 E IP 192 168 12 2 i stripped Port 1720 Ree eneh SaBAECE ree geneti manai mA digits Example 10 Strip Digit Length 2 LEGEND for Diagram Components PBX 1 Configuration PBX 2 Configuration Expects to receive three digits on trunk D and then uses these digits to route calls to lines A Expects to receive three digits on trunk and then uses these digits to route calls to lines B Routes calls starting with 0 7 to lines A Routes calls starting with 0 7 to lines B Routes calls starting with 82 to trunk G and then the VoIP network uses these digits to route calls to trunk Routes calls starting with 81 to trunk CH and then the VoIP network uses these digits to route calls to trunk D Page 3 25 VoIP Networks without PSTN Example 10 Remarks Supported VoIP features and main CLI commands used with this dialing scheme are as follows Features Supported H 323 gateway to voice daughtercard A Primary CLI Commands Used
4. IP address Source VoIP H 323 Gateway VoIP H 323 Gateway Destinati estination IP Address S ao Se es os gt S J IP Address PBX 1 i PBX 2 I VoIP Call Scenario Step 2 Call Progress As the caller dials the H 323 VoIP gateway collects the dialed digits and then ultimately trans lates the digits using a pre configured Numbering Plan and Phone Group into the IP address A VoIP session is then initiated with the remote gateway when gatekeeper not used After the gateways determine that the VoIP call can be placed across the IP network the gate ways negotiate call capabilities using preconfigured coding profiles and then optionally strip before sending the extension digits from the local to the remote gateway where they are delivered either to the phone PBX or keyset The call can be processed as either a local or long distance call depending on how the remote gateway is configured A ringing or busy signal is transmitted to the caller once the call is connected If the call is answered the gate way sends the voice or fax transmissions If the wide area network is unavailable calls may not go through in which case callers receive a busy signal When a caller hangs up the receiver the VoIP call session is terminated Multiple gateway trunks may be used for all calls except those initiated from keysets which must go directly to the gateway Page 1 5 VoIP Telephone C
5. 5 114 voice signaling fxs Is callerid 2 es 5 115 voice signaling fxs ls ringing debounce yo 64 4 4 4 83 pai oho a Ghee 5 116 voice signaling fxo ls supervisory disconnect detection 5 117 voice signaling fxo ls supervisory disconnect 0 000002 ee eee 5 118 voice signaling fxo Is guard out 2 ee 5 119 voice signaling fxo Is ringing inter cycle naana anaana a 5 120 voice signaling fxo Is ringing inter pulse 2 aaa 5 121 voice signaling fxo Is callerid 2 0 ee 5 122 voice signaling fxo ls answer after 2 0 ee 5 123 voice signaling fxo ls loop current debounce 00 00005 5 124 voice signaling fxo ls battery reversal debounce 0 0 0 0 00000 5 125 voice signaling fxs gs seize detect 2 0 kee 5 126 voice signaling fxs gs on hook debounce 1 2 0000000 cee ee 5 127 voice signaling fxs gs originate clear detect 0 0 2 0 000 0000 5 128 voice signaling fxs gs answer clear detect n on anaua 5 129 voice signaling fxs gs min ring ground 1 0 0 0 00 eee 5 130 voice signaling fxs gs max wait loop 2 2 0 ee 5 131 voice signaling fxs gs min loop open 00 0 ee 5 132 voice signaling fxs gs callerid 2 eee 5 133 voice signaling fxs gs off hook debounce 1 0 0 0 000 ce ee 5 134 voice signaling fxs gs ring ground debounce 0 0 00 a 5 135 voice signaling fxs gs ring 1A fh iy ek ek i we ow ew Bae bes 5 136 voice s
6. Optional Y 4 BRI Phones J s wl Euro BRI p2 Voice rer 68 gape Chan 1 Daughtercard Q B Chan 2 _ 2 p4 IP 192 168 12 2 Port 1720 Example 25 Other PBXs with Euro BRI Page 3 63 VoIP Networks with Interoperability Example 25 LEGEND for Diagram Components Voice Daughtercard 1 Configuration Voice Daughtercard 2 Configuration to route calls via the VoIP network Expects to receive four digit ISDN address e g Expects to receive four digit ISDN address e g 2001 on ports 1 2 3 or 4 and then uses these digits 1001 on ports 1 2 3 or 4 and then uses these digits to route calls via the VoIP network Routes calls starting with 1001 to port 1 and calls Routes calls starting with 2001 to port 1 B Channel starting with 1003 to port 3 and then the TE side of the 1 and calls starting with 2003 to port 3 B Channel 1 connection routes the call to the specific TEI of a If B Channel 1 is busy then the calls are automatically device routed to B Channel 2 on the corresponding port starting with 2004 to port 4 Routes calls starting with 1002 to port 2 and calls Routes calls starting with 2002 to port 2 and calls starting with 2004 to port 4 Remarks Supported VoIP features and main CLI commands used with this dial
7. 1 800 555 9001 Example 13 North American PSTN Calls Outbound LEGEND for Diagram Components PBX 1 Configuration Voice Daughtercard 1 Configuration Routes all calls to trunk J and sends four digits to Expects to receive one to 24 digits on trunk Q voice daughtercard See next diagram No Amer PSTN and then uses these digits to route calls to either Inbound trunk Q information trunk R or the VoIP network Page 3 34 VoIP Networks with PSTN Example 13 North American PSTN Calls Inbound DID Direct Inward Dial This diagram demonstrates how inbound North American DID calls from the PSTN are handled Extensions off of PBX 1 Voice es Daughtercard 2000 2999 1 IP 192 168 11 2 m 2000 2999 m Port 1720 See Diagrams No Amer Calls Overview Outbound VoIP Network Example 13 North American PSTN Calls Inbound DID LEGEND for Diagram Components PBX 1 Configuration Voice Daughtercard 1 Configuration Expects to receive four digits on trunk Q and then uses these digits to route calls starting with 2 to lines A See previous diagram No Amer PSTN Out bound trunk Q information Expects to receive four digits on trunk R and then uses these digits to route calls to either trunk Q or VoIP network Page 3 35 VoIP
8. VoIP Feature Dialing Scheme H 323 gateway to voice daughtercard A All H 323 gateway to H 323 gatekeeper RADVision B 12 H 323 gateway to H 323 device C 19 21 Local channel 48 individual hunt groups One channel per group D 8 17 18 Local channel four hunt groups 12 T1 channels per group CE 7 Local channel two hunt groups 24 T1 channels per group F 1 3 5 7 9 16 19 24 Local channel one hunt group 48 channels across two T1s G 5 6 Local channel one hunt group 60 channels across two E1s CH 4 Site prefix no site prefix D 1 9 12 14 15 19 24 Site prefix single or multiple digits Q 9 11 13 19 21 Voice phone group type three digit local extensions K 9 10 Voice phone group type four digit local extensions L 1 8 11 12 20 Voice phone group type eleven digit local extensions M 11 19 21 24 Voice phone group type NANP extensions N 13 18 Voice phone group type INTL extension O 14 22 23 Voice phone group type PSTN NANP P 13 18 Voice phone group type PSTN International NTL Q 25 Strip digit length no strip digits CR 1 9 12 17 24 Strip digit length 2 D 10 Strip digit length 7 V 11 13 16 19 24 Digital Interface type T1 W 1 3 5 16 19 24 Digital Interface type E1 QSIG CX 22 Digital Interface type E1 ISDN PRI Euro PRD Y 4 14 23 Digital Interface type Euro BRI Z 25 Digital Interface type FXS AA
9. Command Usage Specify time to wait to tear down fax call channel timing i e set the fax call holdover delay The delay occurs after an on hook state is detected during fax mode operation and before a call clear signal is generated on the line Syntax Options voice signaling channel lt s ol porl startChannel endChannel gt fax holdover lt value gt Definitions slot port startChannel endChannel value Default Command Examples voice signaling channel 2 1 1 12 fax holdover 2000 voice signaling channel 2 2 13 24 fax holdover 0 voice signaling channel 2 3 1 30 fax holdover 65534 Specifies chassis slot number where VSM is installed e g 2 Specifies physical port number on voice daughtercard e g 1 The first number in the range of voice channels e g 1 The last number in the range of voice channels e g 30 Syntax Note Be sure to separate the start and end range numbers with a hyphen e g 1 30 Specifies the fax call holdover delay in milliseconds from 0 ms to 65 534 e g 2000 Syntax Note Do not use commas when entering the fax call holdover value for example 2 000 will return a syntax error message The default value is 2000 Page 5 76 VoIP Commands voice signaling companding Command Usage Define companding type Mu Law A Law for signaling power at the digital signal processing pulse code modulation PCM interface
10. Definitions slot Specifies chassis slot number where VSM is installed e g 2 port Specifies physical port number on voice daughtercard e g 1 startChannel The first number in the range of voice channels e g 1 endChannel The last number in the range of voice channels e g 30 Syntax Note Be sure to separate the start and end range numbers with a hyphen e g 1 30 Default None Command Examples view voice signaling channel 2 1 1 12 view voice signaling channel 2 2 13 12 view voice signaling channel 2 3 31 30 Screen Output To view parameters for a voice signaling channel type view voice signaling channel and a valid voice signaling channel e g view voice signaling channel 4 1 1 and then press lt Enter gt A screen similar to the following displays kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Viewing Signaling Channel kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk voice signaling channel 4 1 1 protocol emi voice signaling channel 4 1 1 companding mulaw Voice signaling channel 4 1 14 em dial tone on voice signaling channel 4 1 14 emi glare report 5500 voice signaling channel emi digit wait 250 Page 5 67 VoIP Commands voice signaling protocol Command Usage Specify the protocol to use for Telephony Signaling Syntax Options voice signaling channel lt s ol port startChannel endChannel gt protocol fxs Is fxo Is fxs gs fxo gs emi
11. Remarks The voice signaling protocol command must be set to the corresponding protocol type before any commands for E amp M Wink Start Immediate Start and Delay Start Signaling and FXS FXO Loop and Ground Start commands will take effect Page 5 144 VoIP Commands voice signaling fxo gs loop current debounce Command Usage Specify Foreign Exchange Office FXO Ground Start GS debounce interval for loop current detector Syntax Options voice signaling channel lt s ol port startChannel endChannel gt fxo gs loop current debounce lt value gt Definitions slot Specifies chassis slot number where VSM is installed e g 2 port Specifies physical port number on voice daughtercard e g 1 startChannel The first number in the range of voice channels e g 1 endChannel The last number in the range of voice channels e g 30 Syntax Note Be sure to separate the start and end range numbers with a hyphen e g 1 30 value Specifies the debounce delay interval for debouncing the loop current detector in milli seconds from 1 to 1 000 e g 20 Syntax Note Do not use commas when entering the fxs gs debounce interval value for loop current detection for example 1 000 will return a syntax error message Default The default value is 20 milliseconds Command Examples voice signaling channel 2 1 1 12 fxo gs loop current debounce 20 voice signaling channel 2 2 13 24 fxo gs loop
12. 0 00000 ee ee 5 247 voice phone group delete numbers 44 46 cs eed eee ee eS GRE RRS 5 248 voice numbering plane Materai soea eed RA Be Bey BRE a ates Ais a 5 249 voice no numbering plan 2 ee 5 250 view voice numbering plan 2 0 ee 5 251 voice numbering plan activate o a anaa ee 5 253 voice numbering plan hunt method 0 0 0 000 eee eee 5 255 voice numbering plan description e454 04 4 ud ae dows Dos Owe he aoss Ries 5 256 voice numbering plan destination member 20000000000 5 257 voice numbering plan phone group member 00000 5 258 Table of Contents System Wide VoIP Commands 00000 ne eens 5 259 view voice daughter card A co cris en ave ghee Los Legs LO gh ah pee Ge nt ae Male as 5 260 yew VOICE PONE 8h 185 POS 6 5b C8 Dig Re wl hel a ent aah a iee 5 261 vew voicechannel i GIP ML Cita Ltd 64 ot S64 its oh ts Ae ok er a as 5 262 view VOICE network cardio oars wie coat orton eer a a Bile Balle Bae 4 5 263 voice daughter card statistics collection 00 0 ne 5 264 voice channel reset all statistics 2 2 0 00 eee 5 265 view voice channel telephony level stats 05265 seek Be ws es 5 266 view voice channel telephony channel stats 0000000005 5 267 view voice channel voice playout stats 2 0 eee 5 268 view voice channel dsp stats 2 0 0 eee 5 269 view voice channel error stats 2 0 eee 5 270 view voice channel modem stats 0 0 00 00
13. Cable Supported RJ 48C and Telset RJ 11 Power Consumption 5 50 amps Additional 2 0 amps per VSD or VSB Additional 3 55 amps per VSA daughtercard Additional 5 25 amps per VSA with one FXS or FXO grand daughtercard Additional 7 0 amps per VSA with two FXS or FXO grand daughtercards Page 2 25 VSX Switching Module Page 2 26 See also VSD Front Panel on page 2 7 Configure as voice port 1 Configure as voice port 2 Configure as voice port 3 Configure as voice port 4 O O x OO w O O Wi a Y O O m1 O O wi O O mi Module LEDs OK1 Hardware Status On Green when the module has passed diagnostic tests success fully On Amber when the hardware has failed diagnostics or if the corresponding image file for the module is not in flash mem ory OK2 Software Status Blinking Green when the module soft ware was downloaded success fully and the module is communicating with the MPX Blinking Amber when the mod ule is in a transitional state On solid Amber if the module failed to download software from the MPX VSX Switching Module with two VSDs VSX Switching Module See alsoVSA Front Panel on page 2 21 Configure from left to right as voice channels 1 4 Configure from left to right as voice channels 5 6 Configure from left to right as voice channels 7 10 Configure from
14. Only one coding profile per codec is allowed At least one coding profile must be created before activating the voice switching daughtercard The maximum number of coding profiles allowed per voice switching daughtercard is 128 Before creating a coding profile note that there are already five default coding profiles in the master vsmboot asc file used with the voice daughtercard namely cp1 cp2 cp3 cp4 and cp5 If only the default coding profiles are used then there is no need to create a coding profile All five default coding profiles are automatically made available for every single voice chan nel upon power up of the voice switching daughtercard The default coding profiles each contain preconfigured CLI commands pertaining to the selected codec type See view voice coding profile command for more details and screen output for the command There is no default coding profile for modem codecs The cp5 coding profile can be used with the OmniPCX by changing the VPI to 30 See the voice coding profile voice packet interval command for details Page 5 174 VoIP Commands voice no coding profile Command Usage Delete coding profile with specified name Syntax Options voice no coding profile lt codingProfName gt Definitions codingProfName Identifies coding profile by name e g salemprof1 maximum length of 40 characters The following characters are permitted in the coding profile name
15. Page 5 165 VoIP Commands voice signaling override in band codec switching Command Usage Override call signaling for in band codec switching on off This command should only be used under the supervision of trained personnel Syntax Options voice signaling channel lt s ol pori startChannel endChannel gt no override in band codec switching on off Definitions slot Specifies chassis slot number where VSM is installed e g 2 port Specifies physical port number on voice daughtercard e g 1 startChannel The first number in the range of voice channels e g 1 endChannel The last number in the range of voice channels e g 30 Syntax Note Be sure to separate the start and end range numbers with a hyphen e g 1 30 no Optional command syntax Syntax Note If no is used then ON and OFF cannot be specified on Turns ON in band codec switching for specified telephony signaling channel off Turns OFF in band codec switching for specified telephony signaling channel Syntax Note To use this command call signaling must be set to voice via the call signaling voice fax modem data setup command Default The default setting is no override in band codec switching Command Examples voice signaling channel 2 1 1 12 no override in band codec switching voice signaling channel 2 2 13 24 override in band codec switching on voice signaling channel 2 3 1 30 override in band codec switching of
16. Pre configured modifiable AVNDS Alcatel VoIP Network Dialing Schemes with corre sponding text based ASCID configuration boot files vsmboot asc files VoIP Text based Command Line Interface CLI configuration tool Note When used separately the terms E1 and ETSI both entail European PRI and BRI interfaces E1 ETSI used together as one term refers specifically to Euro PRI Page 1 3 VoIP Telephone Calls VoIP Telephone Calls H 323 VoIP telephone calls which can carry either voice facsimile or modem transmissions over IP networks are switched to the packet based network and connected to the calling destination an IP device via a unique IP address and local remote dialing plan actually two Alcatel VoIP Network Dialing Schemes rolled into one The numerical IP address also serv ing to identify calls intended for VoIP networks is determined and translated from a destina tion telephone number in a phone directory database while it is being entered and the call is in progress It should be noted here that callers do not need to remember the IP addresses only the called party or destination phone number See Chapter 3 Network Dialing Schemes for more information on the AVNDS H 323 VoIP telephone calls are transparent so callers don t have to worry about any special procedures except being aware of a dialing plan that may require them to dial a prefix such as 7 before a call can be placed across the VoIP
17. Pulse Code Modulation PCM 1 13 5 77 Q QoS ToS Type of Service 4 2 gos img 4 1 Quality of Service ToS Type of Service bit 1 12 R RADVision gatekeeper 1 8 3 5 3 29 4 2 5 222 RAS Registration Admission and Status protocol 1 15 Real Time Protocol RTP 1 12 real time voice processing 1 12 Reboot command 4 7 rebooting vs dynamic reconfiguration 5 254 redundancy 2 4 robbed bit signaling 1 13 round robin hunt method 3 17 3 19 routing groups and VoIP gateway 4 5 RTP Real Time Protocol 1 12 RTP RTCP Real Time Protocol Real Time Conferencing Protocol 5 225 S scalability 1 2 2 4 2 25 signal gains 5 78 silence detection simultaneous calls site prefix 3 5 Spanning Tree and VoIP gateways 4 5 Statistics 5 259 strip digits 3 3 switch backplane interface 1 10 1 12 5 172 2 4 2 6 T T1 2 2 5 34 fractional 3 3 tleldrv img 4 1 TCID Telephony Channel Identifier 5 149 Page I 4 telephone calls international 3 38 telephone handset 1 7 2 2 telephone number hunting 5 257 telephony signaling 1 10 TELNET 4 1 terminal emulation program 4 4 Terminal Equipment TE 2 16 terminals 1 7 text_cfg img 4 1 toll fraud 3 1 3 31 toll saving fax calls 3 4 tone detection 5 151 top down hunt method 3 11 3 13 3 15 trap generation 5 50 trunk deadlock 5 98 TX RX pinout wiring 2 10 U Uninterruptable Power Supply UPS 2 22 V V 18 Annex A tone 5 195 view commands 4 4 5 2
18. Supported VoIP features and main CLI commands used with this dialing scheme are as follows Features Supported H 323 gateway to voice daughtercard A Primary CLI Commands Used voice destination local channel page 5 231 Local channel two hunt groups 24 channels per group T1 F voice numbering plan hunt method page 5 255 voice numbering plan destination member page 5 257 voice numbering plan phone group member page 5 258 Local channel one hunt group 48 channels across two T1s G voice numbering plan hunt method page 5 255 voice numbering plan destination member page 5 257 voice numbering plan phone group member page 5 258 Site prefix no site prefix 1 voice phone group site prefix page 5 238 Voice phone group type four digit local extensions L voice phone group type page 5 240 voice phone group format page 5 243 voice phone group add numbers page 5 247 Strip digit length no strip digits CR Digital Interface type Euro BRI Z voice phone group strip digit length page 5 244 voice port interface type page 5 34 Page 3 16 VoIP Networks without PSTN Example 6 VoIP Networks without PSTN Example 6 One Hunt Group 144 Channels Across Six T1s This dialing scheme has six T1 lines connected to one PBX In this dialing scheme one hunt group spans six T1 lines using three voice switching daughtercards spanning
19. voice daughter card 2 2 h 323 out fast start on Remarks Fast Start commands take effect immediately and do not require use of the voice daughter card activate command This command selects H 323 Fast Start mode on the outgoing side of the link Fast Start mode reduces the number of messages exchanged between endpoints H 323 Fast Start calls connect after a single round trip message The Fast Start information is attached to H 225 messages from general setup H 225 setup messages contain information about voice channels proposed by the originator of the call The terminating endpoint accepts one of the proposed channels and informs the originator through the connect message The connected endpoints then establish logical channels and switch to voice mode Ringback is sent inband and the voice path exists when the remote endpoint picks up the phone If the terminating endpoint picks up the phone before the voice channels are established the origi nator receives the voice signal directly with no preceding ringback If Fast Start calls do not connect in the voice switching daughtercard the switch automati cally reverts the call to the general H 323 setup this prevents Fast Start calls from being dropped H 225 which provides the call setup and control signaling needed to connect h 323 endpoints is part of the H 323 signaling protocol stack Q 931 is a similar protocol used over ISDN lines to set up maintain and terminate calls be
20. Four Hunt Groups 12 Channels Per Hunt Group This dialing scheme is used to split a T1 line in half and demonstrates one way of having redundant T1 lines on one switch In this example one hunt group is half of a T1 line or 12 channels Each T1 trunk is split into an incoming and outgoing hunt group Dialing Scheme Examples 7 and 8 showing fractional T1 hunt groups apply only to digital VSD and Euro BRI VSB voice switching daughtercards See Chapter 2 VoIP Daughter cards for a description of the various daughtercards and Chapter 4 Setup and Installation for details on installation Hunt groups are called voice numbering plans in the AVNDS Voice numbering plans relate phone groups and destinations In this example the voice daughtercards are using the round robin hunt method to determine where new calls will be routed _ Channels D 1 12 Voice 13 24 Daughtercard 1000 to 1999 Extensions off of PBX 1 f IP 192 168 11 2 gaj 1000 eee E 1999 Port 1720 4 Hunt Groups Channels T12 13 24 Daughtercard an 2000 1 12 2 Ba 2000 2000 te 2999 q Pie eee 13 24 Port 1720 Extensions ax off of PBX 2 2000 to 2999 m Example 7 Four Hunt Groups 12 Channels Per Hunt Group LEGEND for Diagram Components PBX 1 C
21. Page 5 223 VoIP Commands voice network h 323 display name Command Usage Specify H 323 display name for voice switching daughtercard gateway Syntax Options voice network card lt sloi card_number h 323 display name lt string gt Definitions slot Specifies the chassis slot number where VSM is installed e g 2 card_number Specifies the voice daughtercard position number e g 1 string Any string up to 64 bytes e g salemgway The display name is carried as an H 323_ID alias name Syntax Note H 323 display name string must be specified before the voice switching daughtercard is activated A non null string value is required Default None Command Example voice network card 2 1 h 323 display name salemgway voice network card 2 2 h 323 display name calabgway Remarks This command is used to set the display name information that is carried in the H 323 setup messages The display name string is inserted into the Q 931 display information and source address field of the H 323 setup UUIE Page 5 224 VoIP Commands voice network h 323 rtp port mode Command Usage Set RTP RTCP Real Time Protocol Real Time Conferencing Protocol port mode for voice switching daughtercard H 323 gateway dynamic sequential Syntax Options voice network card lt sloi card_number h 323 rtp port mode dynamic sequential Definitions slot Specifies the
22. Ss HA_ amp I OLL frozen Specifies voice echo canceller configuration refresh state for specified coding profile refresh Specifies voice echo canceller configuration refresh state is frozen for specified coding pro file Default The default setting is frozen Command Example voice coding profile salemprof1 echo canceller refresh configuration frozen voice coding profile calabprof2 echo canceller refresh configuration refresh Remarks In the configuration refresh state the echo canceller automatically adjusts as the call progresses based upon the PCM sample Page 5 202 VoIP Commands voice coding profile echo canceller refresh state Command Usage Specify coding profile echo refresh state Syntax Options voice coding profile lt codingProfName gt echo canceller refresh state on off Definitions codingProfName Identifies coding profile by name e g salemprof1 maximum length of 40 characters The following characters are permitted in the coding profile name a z A Z 0 9 space and Sss HA_ amp I lt gt CQO It on Turns ON resets voice echo canceller refresh state for specified coding profile off Turns OFF voice echo canceller refresh state for specified coding profile normal state Default The default setting is on Command Example voice coding profile salemprof1 echo canceller refresh state on voice coding profile calabprof2 echo
23. VoIP Daughtercards for details Note 4 When used separately the terms E1 and ETSI both entail European PRI and BRI interfaces E1 ETSI used together as one term refers specifically to Euro PRI Page 5 51 VoIP Commands For VSB jumpers J29 and J30 only the following five NT LT TE port configurations are allowed e All four ports can be configured as TE ports are TE TE TE TE e All four ports can be configured as NT Ports are NT NT NT NT e Ports 1 2 and 3 configured as TE and port 4 configured as NT ports are TE TE TE NT e Ports 1 and 3 configured as TE and port 2 and 4 configured as NT ports are TE NT TE NT e Port 1 configured as TE and port 2 3 and 4 configured as NT ports are TE NT NT NT Warning Failure to properly configure the VSB to use one of the five NT LT TE port configurations above will cause unexpected results and can cause physical damage to the hardware Page 5 52 VoIP Commands voice port isdn switch type Command Usage Specify ISDN connection switch type for ISDN ports Syntax Options voice port lt slot port gt isdn switch type net3 net5 Definitions slot Specifies slot number of voice switching daughtercard installed in switching module e g 2 port Specifies physical port number on voice daughtercard e g 1 net3 Sets ISDN connection switch type to Euro ISDN BRI E1 2 B D channels net5 Sets ISDN co
24. VoIP Networks without PSTN Example 1 VoIP Networks without PSTN Example 1 Four Digit Extensions and Two Voice Daughtercards This is one of the simplest dialing schemes to implement in a VoIP network It uses two voice switching daughtercards to translate four digit extensions Extensions are unique across the entire enterprise network and the PBX handles all calls to the PSTN Since incoming and outgoing trunks are separated this dialing scheme guarantees that no inseize collisions will occur Voice Daughtercard 1 f IP 192 168 11 2 aa 1000 E 1999 Port 1720 Extensions off of PBX 1 laH 1000 to 1999 PBX 2 Extensions off of PBX 2 2000 to 2999 Daughtercard A 2000 gt 2 a 2999 IP 192 168 12 2 Port 1720 Example 1 Four Digit Extensions and Two Voice Daughtercards LEGEND for Diagram Components PBX 1 Configuration PBX 2 Configuration Expects to receive four digits on trunk D and then Expects to receive four digits on trunk and then uses these digits to route calls to lines A uses these digits to route calls to lines B Routes calls starting with 1 to lines A Routes calls starting with 2 to lines B Routes calls starting with 2 to trunk G and then Routes calls starting with 1 to trunk H and then the VoIP network uses these digits to route calls to th
25. hands free Set acoustic echo canceller output to hands free for specified telephony signaling channel Syntax Note To use this command the acoustic echo canceller must be enabled via the voice signaling acoustic echo canceller non linear processor command Default The default setting is hands free Command Example voice signaling channel 2 1 1 12 acoustic echo canceller output handset voice signaling channel 2 2 13 24 acoustic echo canceller output hands free Remarks Acoustic echo cancellers handle signal transmission echoes on calls originating from or being sent to IP telephones by isolating and filtering the signals Acoustic echo cancellers function as comfort noise generators Page 5 160 VoIP Commands voice signaling acoustic echo canceller handset speaker gain Command Usage Set acoustic voice echo canceller processor handset speaker gain Syntax Options voice signaling channel lt s ol porl startChannel endChannel gt acoustic echo canceller handset speaker gain lt value gt Definitions slot Specifies chassis slot number where VSM is installed e g 2 port Specifies physical port number on voice daughtercard e g 1 startChannel The first number in the range of voice channels e g 1 endChannel The last number in the range of voice channels e g 30 Syntax Note Be sure to separate the start and end range numbers with a hyphen e g 1 30 value Specif
26. nologies in network based VoIP communications systems VoIP Networks Alcatel s H 323 VoIP gateway for packet switched IP networks combines the speed versatility and low cost of IP telephony with standard telephone features for enterprises in North Ameri can and Europe this necessarily entails other continents or countries such as Mexico that may have the same requirements These networks are referred to as VoIP networks Because data networks as such usually operate with extra carrying capacity bandwidth most IP networks are easily able to accommodate voice fax traffic once the VoIP network is set up The Internet Protocol IP is used mainly because it is supported over many layer 1 and 2 network technologies including Ethernet 10 100 1000 Mbps Token Ring FDDI and Frame Relay to name a few including leased lines and satellites Nearly every router frame relay device and network switch used today supports the Internet Protocol IP delivers any trans port media used between local and wide area networks Enterprise IP networks consist of local area networks LANs installed at corporate offices often joined together by corporate wide area networks WANs Usually the local area networks support IP on various types of standard data communications technologies such as Ethernet Token Ring ATM Asynchronous Transfer Mode and FDDI Fiber Distributed Data Interface Page 1 1 Introduction Wide area networks are used to s
27. sions N voice phone group type page 5 240 voice phone group format page 5 243 voice phone group add numbers page 5 247 Page 3 67 AVNDS Master List of Features by CLI Command Features Supported Primary CLI Commands Used Voice phone group type INTL extension voice phone group type page 5 240 voice phone group format page 5 243 voice phone group add numbers page 5 247 Voice phone group type PSTN NANP voice phone group type page 5 240 P voice phone group format page 5 243 voice phone group add numbers page 5 247 Voice phone group type PSTN INTL Q voice phone group type page 5 240 voice phone group format page 5 243 voice phone group add numbers page 5 247 Strip digit length no strip digits R voice phone group strip digit length page 5 244 Strip digit length 1 S voice phone group strip digit length page 5 244 Strip digit length 2 1 voice phone group strip digit length page 5 244 Strip digit length 4 U voice phone group strip digit length page 5 244 Strip digit length 7 V voice phone group strip digit length page 5 244 Digital Interface type T1 W voice port interface type page 5 34 Digital Interface type E1 QSIG CX voice port interface type page 5 34 voice signaling companding page 5 77 Digital Interface type E1 ISDN PRI Euro voice port interface type page 5 34
28. unique phone group site prefix for routing VoIP calls on off unique phone group site prefix digits for routing VoIP calls voice phone group dialing type voice phone group format of tel number and number of outbound digits to dial Additional Inbound Outbound Digit Processing number of outbound digits to strip in voice phone group site before forwarding call allow forwarding of phone group prefix phone group site digits to prefix before forwarding call on off Digit Dialing Ranges voice phone group site numbers to include in range of digits for phone format string voice phone group site numbers to remove from range of digits for phone format string Numbering Plan create or delete numbering plan view voice numbering plan activate voice numbering plan Numbering Plan Hunt Method outgoing hunting method of voice numbering plan destinations group Page 5 228 VoIP Commands Numbering Plan Description voice numbering plan optional Associate Numbering Plan associate or disassociate destinations with numbering plans associate or disassociate phone groups with numbering plans Page 5 229 VoIP Commands voice destination h 323 endpoint Command Usage Create an endpoint destination with specified name that uses the H 323 protocol Syntax Options voice destination lt endpointDestName gt h 323 endpoint lt address gt portAddr Definitions endpointDest
29. voice destination local channel page 5 231 Local channel two hunt groups 24 channels per group T1 F voice numbering plan hunt method page 5 255 voice numbering plan destination member page 5 257 voice numbering plan phone group member page 5 258 Site prefix single or multiple digits Q voice phone group site prefix page 5 238 voice phone group site prefix digits page 5 239 Voice phone group type three digit local extensions K voice phone group type page 5 240 voice phone group format page 5 243 voice phone group add numbers page 5 247 Strip digit length 2 D voice phone group strip digit length page 5 244 Digital Interface type T1 W voice port interface type page 5 34 Page 3 26 VoIP Networks without PSTN Example 11 VoIP Networks without PSTN Example 11 Trunk Groups and Eleven Digit Extensions This dialing scheme can be used with two voice daughtercards to translate seven digit trunk prefixes and four digit extensions The seven digit site prefix rather than the four digits exten sions are unique across the VoIP network This enables each PBX site to handle the same or overlapping phone extensions The site prefix digits are used to send the VoIP calls to the correct PBX node When a caller dials a specific site prefix e g 1 603 598 it routes the call to the corresponding PBX and then dials a prefix to get a specific t
30. 0 9 space and t HA_ amp I lt gt CQO Ih adaptive Sets voice network buffer delay buffer mode for to adaptive for the specified coding pro file static Sets voice network buffer delay mode to static for the specified coding profile Default The default setting is static Command Example voice coding profile salemprof1 voice network delay buffer mode adaptive voice coding profile calabprof2 voice network delay buffer mode static Remarks This command is used to configure the adaptive playback function mode for coding profiles When the voice network delay buffer mode is set to static adaptive playout disabled the nominal and maximum playout values are valid When the voice network buffer mode is set to adaptive adaptive playout enabled the nomi nal and maximum playout values remain constant and the DSP adjusts the nominal delay playout point to reflect any observed jitter The formula for calculating nominal delay ND and maximum delay MD for the voice play out buffer given the specified voice packet interval VPD size is as follows ND PT k and MD PT j where k and j are integers k is 2 j is k 2 Page 5 186 VoIP Commands voice coding profile voice network delay buffer nominal delay Command Usage Specify coding profile nominal delay Syntax Options voice coding profile lt codingProfName gt voice network delay buffer nominal delay lt value
31. 17 18 Digital Interface type FXO AB 17 18 Page 3 5 Introduction Trunk List for AVNDS Examples The trunk list below is also provided as a general reference guideline to each of the diagrams used in the dialing scheme examples Note that most examples use only one or two PBXs and Page 3 6 one or two voice daughtercards Lines A Telephone Fax lines off of PBX 1 Lines B Telephone Fax lines off of PBX 2 Lines C Telephone Fax lines off of PBX 3 Trunk D Inbound trunk to PBX 1 Trunk Inbound trunk to PBX 2 Trunk F Inbound trunk to PBX 3 Trunk G Inbound trunk to Voice Daughtercard 1 Trunk GH Inbound trunk to Voice Daughtercard 2 Trunk D Inbound trunk to Voice Daughtercard 3 Trunk X Inbound trunk to Voice Daughtercard 4 Trunks Q GK Inbound Outbound trunk to Voice Daughtercard 1 Trunks CL M Inbound Outbound trunk to Voice Daughtercard 2 Trunks N O Inbound Outbound trunk to Voice Daughtercard 3 Trunks P Q Inbound Outbound trunk to Voice Daughtercard 4 Trunk R S Inbound Outbound trunk between Voice Daughtercard 1 and PSTN Trunk T CU Inbound Outbound trunk between Voice Daughtercard 2 and PSTN Trunk V Inbound Outbound trunk between Voice Daughtercard 3 and PSTN Trunk W Inbound Outbound trunk between Voice Daughtercard 4 and PSTN Ethernet WAN Z Inbound Ethernet WAN to H 323 Device
32. 7 default Definitions slot Specifies chassis slot number where VSM is installed e g 2 card_number Specifies the voice daughtercard position number e g 1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Specifies variance in continental ring tone for either North America or Europe e g 2 as per selected coefficient The value 0 is the same as default default Sets the tone variance to the default setting i e 0 Syntax Note This command must be set in relation to the voice daughter card vsa cadence coefficient command Default The default setting is 0 Command Examples voice daughter card 2 1 vsa ring id default voice daughter card 2 2 vsa ring id 0 voice daughter card 2 3 vsa ring id 7 Page 5 31 VoIP Commands voice daughter card vsb clock source Command Usage Set clock source for the BRI interface for each port on the VSB daughtercard Syntax Options voice daughter card lt s ot card_number gt vsb clock source external free running Definitions slot card_number external free running Default Command Example voice daughter card 2 1 vsb clock source external voice daughter card 2 2 vsb clock source free running Specifies slot number of voice switching daughtercard installed in switching module e g 2 Specifies the voice daughtercard position number e g 1 Sets BRI interface to use an external clock source Sets BRI interface to use the free running
33. Local channel two hunt groups 24 channels per group T1 F voice numbering plan hunt method page 5 255 voice numbering plan destination member page 5 257 voice numbering plan phone group member page 5 258 Site prefix no site prefix D voice phone group site prefix page 5 238 Site prefix single or multiple digits Q Voice phone group type three digit local extensions K voice phone group site prefix page 5 238 voice phone group site prefix digits page 5 239 voice phone group type page 5 240 voice phone group format page 5 243 voice phone group add numbers page 5 247 Strip digit length no strip digits CR voice phone group strip digit length page 5 244 Digital Interface type T1 W voice port interface type page 5 34 Page 3 24 VoIP Networks without PSTN Example 10 VoIP Networks without PSTN Strip Digit Length 2 Example 10 In this dialing scheme the PBX uses the first two digits received to route calls The PBX first dials an 8 to go to the VoIP network The 2nd digit dialed 1 or 2 determines the site PBX to which the call is sent A 1 means the call goes to PBX 1 and a 2 means the call goes to PBX 2 The two digit prefix is stripped before the destination voice switching daugh tercard sends the digits to the PBX
34. Page 1 19 VoIP and VLANs Page 1 20 2 VoIP Daughtercards Introduction This chapter describes the voice switching daughtercards that can be installed in Alcatel switches to provide H 323 VoIP gateways in VoIP networks Using ITU H 323 IP telephony standards the H 323 VoIP gateway converts telephone or fax calls between the circuit switched Public Switched Telephone Network PSTN and packet switched VoIP networks Alcatel s H 323 VoIP gateways are typically used to handle VoIP calls as such placed across local and wide area networks between branch offices in remote enterprises although the gateways are suitable for use in carrier applications too See Chapter 1 VoIP Overview for a more in depth description of Alcatel s VoIP H 323 gateway operations Different VoIP daughtercards as described below are required depending on the telephony interface required to transmit and receive calls in the VoIP network Furthermore to digitize the VoIP calls the daughtercards utilize digital signal processors DSPs containing a speci fied number of channels which in turn determine the maximum number of calls that can be placed at one time on the card The VoIP daughtercards are referred to as voice switching daughtercards and when installed in the switch they are sometimes referred to as Voice Switching Modules VSMs Currently the VoIP daughtercards can be installed in either the OmniAccess 512 or Omni Switch Router A blade ins
35. Site prefix single digit Q voice phone group site prefix page 5 238 voice phone group site prefix digits page 5 239 Voice phone group type eleven digit local extensions M voice phone group type page 5 240 voice phone group format page 5 243 voice phone group add numbers page 5 247 Strip digit length no strip digits CR Digital Interface type T1 W voice phone group strip digit length page 5 244 voice port interface type page 5 34 Page 3 56 VoIP Networks with Interoperability Example 22 VoIP Networks with Interoperability Example 22 OmniPCX 4400 and E1 QSIG This dialing scheme is used to connect an OmniPCX 4400 to an E1 QSIG port on a voice daughtercard Extensions off of PBX 1 1 818 878 2000 to 878 2999 OmniPCX jw 8188782000 es to 8188782999 Extensions off of PBX 2 aa 001331 5567000 001 33 0 1 55 67 00 0 to 55 67 99 9 OmniPCX to 7999 Voice Daughtercard 1 IP 192 168 11 2 Port 1720 Voice Daughtercard 2 _ H E1 QSIG IP 192 168 12 2 Port 1720 Example 22 OmniPCX 4400 and E1 QSIG LEGEND for Diagram Components OmniPCX 1 Configuration OmniPCX 2 Configuration Expects to receive eleven digits on trunk D and then uses these di
36. Syntax Options voice signaling channel lt s ol port stantChannel endChannel gt companding alaw mulaw Definitions slot Specifies chassis slot number where VSM is installed e g 2 port Specifies physical port number on voice daughtercard e g 1 startChannel The first number in the range of voice channels e g 1 endChannel The last number in the range of voice channels e g 30 Syntax Note Be sure to separate the start and end range numbers with a hyphen e g 1 30 alaw Specifies PCM A Law companding mulaw Specifies PCM Mu Law companding Default For VSD only the default setting is mulaw For VSB only the default setting is alaw Command Examples voice signaling channel 2 1 1 12 companding mulaw voice signaling channel 2 2 13 24 companding alaw Remarks A Law companding should be used when the voice port interface type is set to E1 or E1 ISDN PRI or Euro BRI Mu Law companding cannot be used on the VSB daughtercard Page 5 77 VoIP Commands voice signaling receive gain Command Usage Specify gain in signaling power inserted at receiver Syntax Options voice signaling channel lt s oi port startChannel endChannel gt receive gain lt gain_value gt Definitions slot Specifies chassis slot number where VSM is installed e g 2 port Specifies physical port number on voice daughtercard e g 1 startChannel The first number in the range of voice channe
37. codingProfName gt fax t 38 high speed packet rate 10 20 30 40 Definitions codingProfName Identifies coding profile by name e g salemprof1 maximum length of 40 characters The following characters are permitted in the coding profile name a z A Z 0 9 space and Ss 2 HA_ amp I lt gt CQO IKI 10 20 30 40 Specifies rate at which high speed data is sent across network for specified fax coding pro file Default The default fax rate is 20 Command Example voice coding profile salemprof1 fax t 38 high speed packet rate 20 voice coding profile calabprof2 fax t 38 high speed packet rate 40 Page 5 208 VoIP Commands voice coding profile fax t 38 low speed redundancy Command Usage Specify coding profile T 38 low speed packet redundancy Syntax Options voice coding profile lt codingProf Name gt fax t 38 low speed redundancy 0 1 3 4 5 Definitions codingProfName Identifies coding profile by name e g salemprof1 maximum length of 40 characters The following characters are permitted in the coding profile name a z A Z 0 9 space and Sss HA_ amp Il lt gt CO IK 0 1 3 415 Specifies packet level redundancy for low speed data transmission i e T 30 handshaking info for specified fax coding profile Default The default value is 4 Command Example voice coding profile salemprof1 fax t 38 low speed redund
38. commands will take effect Page 5 114 VoIP Commands voice signaling fxs ls caller id Command Usage Set Foreign Exchange Station Loop Start FXS LS to generate outbound caller ID on off Syntax Options voice signaling channel lt s ol port stantChannel endChannel gt fxs Is caller id on off Definitions slot Specifies chassis slot number where VSM is installed e g 2 port Specifies physical port number on voice daughtercard e g 1 startChannel The first number in the range of voice channels e g 1 endChannel The last number in the range of voice channels e g 30 Syntax Note Be sure to separate the start and end range numbers with a hyphen e g 1 30 on Turns ON fxs Is caller ID for specified telephony signaling channel off Turns OFF fxs ls caller ID for specified telephony signaling channel Syntax Note The voice coding profile caller id command must be enabled to use this command Default The default setting is off Command Examples voice signaling channel 2 1 1 12 fxs Is caller id off voice signaling channel 2 2 13 24 fxs Is caller id on Remarks The voice signaling protocol command must be set to the corresponding protocol type before any commands for E amp M Wink Start Immediate Start and Delay Start Signaling and FXS FXO Loop and Ground Start commands will take effect Page 5 115 VoIP Commands voice signaling fxs ls ringing deboun
39. conversations to mimic real time voice resonating by nature in continu ous analog waveform DSPs are used further to reduce the delays from conversion and compression to ensure quality voice communications without affecting the real time voice processing and compression that occurs simultaneously To transmit the compressed data digitized voice across the IP network the Real Time Proto col RTP is used RTP streamlines and then transports voice packets including interactive multimedia packets over IP although it does so without any guarantees or quality of service provisioning Note 4 H 323 VoIP telephone calls automatically receive the highest priority in the VoIP network via the Quality of Service ToS bit For more information see the switch manual Page 1 12 H 323 VoIP Gateway Voice and Convergence Features Voice packet transmissions or the payload are expedited by engaging the User Datagram Protocol UDP for faster delivery packets which by necessity include the IP network call transport header information Resultant jitter caused by delays imposed on the payload pack ets upon arrival to their destinations is also handled by the DSPs 4 Layer 2 IP UDP Di On Voice Fax Header Header Header ZY seas H Data Payload Voice Packet Transmission UDP is needed by RTP to keep pace with Real Time Voice but lacks controls and error checking capability DSPs can monitor calls in progress d
40. debounce interval for tip ground detector Syntax Options voice signaling channel lt s ol port startChannel endChannel gt fxo gs tip ground debounce lt value gt Definitions slot Specifies chassis slot number where VSM is installed e g 2 port Specifies physical port number on voice daughtercard e g 1 startChannel The first number in the range of voice channels e g 1 endChannel The last number in the range of voice channels e g 30 Syntax Note Be sure to separate the start and end range numbers with a hyphen e g 1 30 value Specifies the debounce delay interval for debouncing the tip ground detector in millisec onds from 1 to 1 000 e g 20 Syntax Note Do not use commas when entering the fxs gs debounce interval value for loop open detection for example 1 000 will return a syntax error message Default The default value is 20 milliseconds Command Examples voice signaling channel 2 1 1 12 fxo gs tip ground debounce 20 voice signaling channel 2 2 13 24 fxo gs tip ground debounce 500 voice signaling channel 2 3 1 30 fxo gs tip ground debounce 1000 Remarks The voice signaling protocol command must be set to the corresponding protocol type before any commands for E amp M Wink Start Immediate Start and Delay Start Signaling and FXS FXO Loop and Ground Start commands will take effect Page 5 139 VoIP Commands voice signaling fxo gs ringing debounce Com
41. e Comfort Noise and Jitter Buffer generates slight background noise white noise on the voice conversation so callers do not think the connection has failed Digital Signal Processors or DSPs as they are more commonly known are math intensive coprocessors used to convert and manipulate information especially in telecommunications systems systems that transmit all types of data including voice and video They are also programmable chips well suited for VoIP as DSPs have the ability not only to convert but to compress analog signals into various digital formats i e perform digital signal processing Although DSPs do not have any direct analog input output since they are actually digital devices they can accept digitized analog data rather than raw analog signals As a result DSPs are used in the digital and analog VoIP daughtercards developed by Alcatel to bring switch enabled VoIP to enterprises however before the digitized and compressed voice signals can be delivered as voice data in a VoIP network they must be packetized into H 323 packets Packetized voice is digitized voice compressed into finite bit stream of IP packets that carry the voice payload between remote and distant locations across the IP network and make processing VoIP calls in IP networks possible Once compressed and packetized periodic delays Gitter to make the call sound smoother must be imposed on the transmission of these packetized voice
42. e g 2 startChannel The first number in the range of voice channels e g 1 endChannel The last number in the range of voice channels e g 30 Syntax Note Be sure to separate the start and end range numbers with a hyphen e g 1 30 codingProfName Identifies coding profile by name e g salemprof1 maximum length of 40 characters The following characters are permitted in the coding profile name a z A Z 0 9 space and Ss 2 HA_ amp I lt gt CQO IKI all Indicates channel uses all available coding profiles Not available this release Default None Command Example voice channel 2 1 1 12 unavailable coding profile salemprof1 voice channel 2 2 13 24 unavailable coding profile calabprof2 voice channel 2 3 1 30 available coding profile cp1 voice channel 2 4 1 12 available coding profile calabprof2 voice channel 3 1 13 24 unavailable coding profile all voice channel 3 2 1 30 available coding profile cp2 Remarks When all is used in the syntax of this command it means that all coding profiles are marked accordingly as either available or unavailable for the specified channels By default cp1 through cp5 default coding profiles are automatically made available to all VoIP channels in all ports and slots Page 5 181 VoIP Commands voice channel assign preferred coding profile Command Usage Specify preferred coding profile voice fax modem data for calls on voice cha
43. internal clock Syntax Notes To use this command the port connection type must be set to bri euro via the voice port interface type command This command must be set in relation to the voice daughtercard vsb external clock port command When this command is entered whether at the command line prompt or in the vsmboot asc file the voice daughter card vsb clock source command line must precede the voice daughter card vsb clock port command line The default setting is external Page 5 32 VoIP Commands voice daughter card vsb external clock port Command Usage Specifies which port on the VSB daughtercard to use for the master clock signal Syntax Options voice daughter card lt s ot card_number gt vsb external clock port lt value gt Definitions slot Specifies slot number of voice switching daughtercard installed in switching module e g 2 card_number Specifies the voice daughtercard position number e g 1 value Specifies physical port number on voice daughtercard e g 1 Syntax Notes To use this command the port connection type must be set to bri euro via the voice port interface type command To use this command the vsb clock source must be set to exter nal via the voice daughter card vsb clock source command When this command is used the voice daughter card vsb clock source command line in the vsmboot asc file must precede the voice daughter card
44. page 5 243 voice phone group add numbers page 5 247 Strip digit length no strip digits CR voice phone group strip digit length page 5 244 Digital Interface type T1 W voice port interface type page 5 34 Page 3 20 VoIP Networks without PSTN Example 8 VoIP Networks without PSTN Example 8 48 Individual Hunt Groups One Channel Per Group This dialing scheme shows how to divide a single T1 line into smaller or fractional T1 trunk groups Additionally each channel has a unique telephone number and is also associated with a single telephone number and a single channel Often this dialing scheme is used to test individual channels on a T1 line but it can also be used to bypass hunt group behavior Since each hunt group has only one channel hunting is in effect disabled Dialing Scheme Examples 7 and 8 showing fractional T1 hunt groups apply only to digital VSD and Euro BRI VSB voice switching daughtercards See Chapter 2 VoIP Daughter cards for a description of the various daughtercards and Chapter 4 Setup and Installation for details on installation Hunt groups relate phone groups and destinations In the command line syntax hunt groups are called voice numbering plans Ext Channel 6 i 5 d Voice laor c Daughtercard al gt 1 Extensions off of PBX 1 1001 1002 1024 24 D IP 192 168 11 2 Port 1
45. rt AMENUALON sxs ri ruin tea ee eS a el See he Gee 5 42 voice port Cable ty pers i Pa Re La a He Dew Pw a Ree eed bal Pads 5 43 WOME port line coding soseda de Uae ed x den ae Vea se ok Pate a RAR RIA ORR Rae 5 44 voice port facilities data link protocol 0 0 0 00 002 eee 5 45 voice port facilities data link port role 123 464 Von lk meee eRe 5 46 voice port transmit clock source 20 ee 5 47 voice port loop back mode 1 0 000 0c eee 5 48 voice port signaling mode 0 2 0 000 eee 5 49 voice port trap generation 2 2 ee 5 50 voice port isdn protocol 2 saaa aae eee 5 51 voice port isdn switch type 0 0 ee 5 53 voice port bri line type s reari si ea E eee 5 54 voice channel isdn d channel 1 0 0 00 000 ee 5 55 voice channel isdn b channel oana uaaa aa 5 57 ChannelsPropertes Aee wee cts ce Goins a E e Vas ted yuna ene nite E NE EAE 5 58 voice channel mod oneds Eor ne oh ESE RR a Bee 5 59 voice channel dial in private line automatic ringdown 0 5 60 Voice CNET BES soe so tae src pe wegen an denean de ak eet a Bi ge ami gh ust Go ne ees 5 61 page viii Table of Contents Telephony Signaling Attributes n ga alee kt RAE ERE OOO ES 5 62 view voice signaling channel fue ee Sele Lets Le el pee ena ei ely 5 67 voice signaling protocol boc 4 Ae oh owe ah DehGe pe wht eae eee oe 5 68 voice signaling out wait fate Mis tole Sool te LSA EN Sh eg ke Cs 5 69 voice signali
46. use this command Default The default setting is off Command Examples voice signaling channel 2 1 1 12 fxs gs caller id off voice signaling channel 2 2 13 24 fxs gs caller id on Remarks The voice signaling protocol command must be set to the corresponding protocol type before any commands for E amp M Wink Start Immediate Start and Delay Start Signaling and FXS FXO Loop and Ground Start commands will take effect Page 5 133 VoIP Commands voice signaling fxs gs off hook debounce Command Usage Specify Foreign Exchange Station Ground Start FXS GS debounce interval for off hook Syntax Options voice signaling channel lt s ol port startChannel endChannel gt fxs gs off hook debounce lt value gt Definitions slot Specifies chassis slot number where VSM is installed e g 2 port Specifies physical port number on voice daughtercard e g 1 startChannel The first number in the range of voice channels e g 1 endChannel The last number in the range of voice channels e g 30 Syntax Note Be sure to separate the start and end range numbers with a hyphen e g 1 30 value Specifies the debounce delay interval transition time to off hook condition in millisec onds from 0 to 1 000 e g 20 Syntax Note Do not use commas when entering the fxs gs debounce interval on hook transition value for example 1 000 will return a syntax error message Default The default va
47. voice phone group salem_engr2 strip digit 1 voice phone group salem_engr3 strip digit 2 Page 5 246 VoIP Commands voice phone group add numbers Command Usage Specify phone group numbers to include in range of digits for phone format string Syntax Options voice phone group lt PhoneGroupName gt add numbers lt StartRange gt thru EndRange Definitions PhoneGroupNam Identifies the phone group by name e g salem_engr1 maximum length of 40 charac ters The following characters are permitted in the phone group name a z A Z 0 9 space and A_ amp I1 lt gt OLL StartRange Specifies starting digits to add to designated phone group as per format specified in voice phone format string command e g extension 4600 thru EndRange Specifies ending digits to add to designated phone group as per format specified in voice phone group format string command e g extension thru 4800 Optional command syn tax Syntax Notes Ranges must be unique across the entire network numbering scheme and digits specified must match the allowed number of digits as specified in the format string via the voice phone group format string command Termination digits as specified via the VSD termination digit command cannot be specified in either range Multiples of this command can be issued to have a cumulative effect If no number is entered for the end range then th
48. 1 endChannel The last number in the range of voice channels e g 30 Syntax Note Be sure to separate the start and end range numbers with a hyphen e g 1 30 value Specifies the time to use as a debouncer delay interval for debouncing the battery rever sal detector in milliseconds from 0 to 60 000 e g 20 Syntax Note Do not use commas when entering the fxo ls debounce value for the battery reversal detector for example 10 000 will return a syntax error message Default The default value is 20 milliseconds Command Examples voice signaling channel 2 1 1 12 fxo Is battery reversal debounce 20 voice signaling channel 2 2 13 24 fxo Is battery reversal debounce 30000 voice signaling channel 2 3 1 30 fxo Is battery reversal debounce 60000 Remarks The voice signaling protocol command must be set to the corresponding protocol type before any commands for E amp M Wink Start Immediate Start and Delay Start Signaling and FXS FXO Loop and Ground Start commands will take effect Page 5 125 VoIP Commands voice signaling fxs gs seize detect Command Usage Specify Foreign Exchange Station Ground Start FXO GS time to wait before declaring off hook Syntax Options voice signaling channel lt s ol port startChannel endChannel gt fxs gs seize detect lt value gt Definitions slot Specifies chassis slot number where VSM is installed e g 2 port Specifies physical port number on
49. 1 1 12 and then press lt Enter gt A screen similar to the following displays kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Viewing Channel kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk voice channel 4 1 1 mode telephony voice channel 4 1 2 mode telephony voice channel 4 1 3 mode telephony voice channel 4 1 4 mode telephony voice channel 4 1 5 mode telephony voice channel 4 1 6 mode telephony voice channel 4 1 7 mode telephony voice channel 4 1 8 mode telephony voice channel 4 1 9 mode telephony voice channel 4 1 10 mode telephony voice channel 4 1 11 mode telephony voice channel 4 1 12 mode telephony Page 5 262 VoIP Commands view voice network card Command Usage Display voice switching daughtercard parameters at the network level for H 323 purposes Syntax Options view voice network card lt slol card_number gt Definitions slot Specifies chassis slot number where VSM is installed e g 2 card_number Specifies the voice daughtercard position number e g 1 Default None Command Example view voice network card 2 1 view voice network card 2 2 view voice network card 3 1 view voice network card 3 2 Screen Output No screen output available at this time Page 5 263 VoIP Commands voice daughter card statistics collection Command Usage Sets statistics collection for specified voice daughter card on off Wot available this release Syntax Opti
50. 12 emw in wink digit ignore 30 voice signaling channel 2 2 13 24 emw in wink digit ignore 5 voice signaling channel 2 3 1 30 emw in wink digit ignore 1000 Remarks The voice signaling protocol command must be set to the corresponding protocol type before any commands for E amp M Wink Start Immediate Start and Delay Start Signaling and FXS FXO Loop and Ground Start commands will take effect Page 5 95 VoIP Commands voice signaling emw out wink wait max Command Usage Specify time to wait for E amp M wink on outgoing calls Syntax Options voice signaling channel lt s ol port startChannel endChannel gt emw out wink wait max imum lt value gt Definitions slot Specifies chassis slot number where VSM is installed e g 2 port Specifies physical port number on voice daughtercard e g 1 startChannel The first number in the range of voice channels e g 1 endChannel The last number in the range of voice channels e g 30 Syntax Note Be sure to separate the start and end range numbers with a hyphen e g 1 30 imum Optional command syntax Type either max or maximum in the command line value Specifies the maximum time to wait for a wink response on the M lead after going off hook on the E lead in milliseconds from 5 to 60 000 e g 8000 Syntax Note Do not use commas when entering the E amp M maximum time to wait value for a wink response on outgoing calls for ex
51. 2 2 13 24 mode pass through voice channel 2 2 1 12 mode plar Remarks In the telephony mode digits come from voice path or signaling Upon in seize the voice switching daughtercard collects inbound digits then uses the Numbering Plan to complete calls to the specified hunted destination In the passthrough mode no digit processing is performed by the DSPs on the voice switch ing daughtercard and no routing is performed Upon in seize the channel is immediately connected to another channel via Numbering Plan processing In the PLAR mode no inbound digit processing takes place Upon in seize the PLAR tele phone number is immediately routed based upon the dialing plan The telephone number must be configured to automatically dial using the dial plan Page 5 59 VoIP Commands voice channel dial in private line automatic ringdown Command Usage Specify voice channel Private Line Automatic Ringdown PLAR dial in phone number This command is used to configure the number to be dialed in Switched CAS mode when a speci fied channel goes off hook Syntax Options voice channel lt s ot porl startChannel endChamnnel gt dial in private line automatic ringdown lt plar phone number gt Definitions slot Specifies slot number of voice daughtercard installed in switching module e g 2 port Specifies physical port number on voice daughtercard e g 2 startChannel The first number in the ran
52. 2 Configuration Expects to receive four digits on trunk D and then uses these digits to route calls to lines A Expects to receive four digits on trunk and then uses these digits to route calls to lines B Routes calls starting with 1 to lines A Routes calls starting with 2 to lines B Routes calls starting with 2 to trunk G The VoIP network then routes the call to the gatekeeper and the gatekeeper uses these digits to route calls to trunk Routes calls starting with 1 to trunk H The VoIP network then routes the call to the gatekeeper and the gatekeeper uses these digits to route calls to trunk D Page 3 29 VoIP Networks without PSTN Example 12 Remarks Supported VoIP features and main CLI commands used with this dialing scheme are as follows Features Supported H 323 gateway to voice daughtercard A Primary CLI Commands Used voice destination local channel page 5 231 H 323 gateway to H 323 gatekeeper RADVision B Local channel two hunt groups 24 channels per group T1 F voice network card h 323 gatekeeper control page 5 217 voice network h 323 gatekeeper mode page 5 218 voice network h 323 gatekeeper address page 5 219 voice network h 323 gatekeeper associate page 5 223 voice numbering plan hunt method page 5 255 voice numbering plan destination member page 5 257 voice numbering plan phone gr
53. 20 through 20 e g 13 2 0 4 13 etc Syntax Notes To use this command the voice activity detector mode must be enabled via the voice coding profile voice activity detector command This command is only valid when the VAD mode is set to rela tive if the VAD mode is adaptive then this command is ignored If the supervisory disconnect connection command is turned OFF in the switch this value is automatically 32767 dBm Default The default threshold level is 13 Command Example voice coding profile salemprof1 voice activity detection threshold level 13 voice coding profile salemprof2 voice activity detection threshold level 0 voice coding profile calabprof1 voice activity detection threshold level 20 voice coding profile calabprof2 voice activity detection threshold level 1 Remarks This command is used to set the audio threshold level in dBm for the voice activity detec tor VAD for a coding profile to be adaptive or relative to a reference level of 30 dBm Page 5 191 VoIP Commands voice coding profile voice dtmf relay Command Usage Set voice coding profile for Dual Tone Multi Frequency DTMF relay on off Syntax Options voice coding profile lt codingProf Name gt voice dtmf relay on off Definitions codingProfName Identifies coding profile by name e g salemprof1 maximum length of 40 characters The following characters are permitted in the coding profile
54. 5 213 VoIP Commands voice coding profile g 711 modem resampling mode Command Usage Specify g 711 PCM Mu Law PCM A Law modem coding resampling Syntax Options voice coding profile lt codingProfName gt g 711 modem resampling mode on off Definitions codingProfName on off Default Command Example voice coding profile salemprof1 g 711 modem resampling on voice coding profile calabprof2 g 711 modem resampling off Identifies coding profile by name e g salemprof1 maximum length of 40 characters The following characters are permitted in the coding profile name a z A Z 0 9 space and Ss 2 HA_ amp Il lt gt QO IKI Turns ON g 711 Mu Law A Law modem resampling mode for specified coding profile Turns OFF g 711 Mu Law A Law modem resampling mode for specified coding profile Syntax Notes The following settings must be made to use this command The voice coding profile codec type must be set to g 711 via the voice coding profile codec type command The voice coding profile adaptive playout delay must be disabled via the voice network delay buffer mode command The voice coding profile maximum network buffer delay must be set to maximum via the voice network delay buffer maximum delay command The voice coding profile nominal network buffer delay must be set to half of the maximum buffer delay via the network delay buffer nominal delay command T
55. DID VoIP Network 1 XXX XXX stripped digits ma Voice Daughtercard 2 IP 192 168 12 2 Extensions off of PBX 2 q 2000 2999 o r Port 1720 411 911 1 npa 603 598 Example 13 North American PSTN Calls Overview LEGEND for Diagram Components PBX 1 Configuration PBX 2 Configuration Expects to receive four digits on trunk J and then Expects to receive four digits on trunk L and then uses these digits to route calls to lines A uses these digits to route calls to lines B Routes all calls starting with 2 to lines A Routes all calls starting with 2 to lines B Page 3 32 VoIP Networks with PSTN Example 13 LEGEND for Diagram Components extensions Routes all 0 411 911 and 1 npa calls to trunk J and then the VoIP network uses these digits to route calls to trunk CL or trunk R if non PSTN Routes all 0 411 911 and 1 npa calls to trunk L and then the VoIP network uses these digits to route calls to trunk J or trunk D if non PSTN extensions Remarks Supported VoIP features and main CLI commands used with this dialing scheme are as follows and are applicable to the outbound inbound DID and North American VoIP calls Features Supported Primary CLI Commands Used H 323 gat
56. Default The default value is 20 milliseconds Command Examples voice signaling channel 2 1 1 12 fxs gs ring ground debounce 20 voice signaling channel 2 2 13 24 fxs gs ring ground debounce 500 voice signaling channel 2 3 1 30 fxs gs ring ground debounce 1000 Remarks The voice signaling protocol command must be set to the corresponding protocol type before any commands for E amp M Wink Start Immediate Start and Delay Start Signaling and FXS FXO Loop and Ground Start commands will take effect Page 5 135 VoIP Commands voice signaling fxs gs ring id Command Usage Set Foreign Exchange Station Ground Start FXS GS ring ID or continental ring tone vari ance for North America or Europe Syntax Options voice signaling channel lt s ol port stantChannel endChannel gt fxs gs ring id 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 default Definitions slot Specifies chassis slot number where VSM is installed e g 2 port Specifies physical port number on voice daughtercard e g 1 startChannel The first number in the range of voice channels e g 1 endChannel The last number in the range of voice channels e g 30 Syntax Note Be sure to separate the start and end range numbers with a hyphen e g 1 30 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Specifies variance in continental ring tone for either North America or Europe e g 2 as per selected coefficient The value 0 is the same as default default Sets the tone variance t
57. Do not use commas when entering the duration of the fxo Is guard out value for example 10 000 will return a syntax error message Default The default value is 2000 milliseconds Command Examples voice signaling channel 2 1 1 12 fxo Is guard out 50 voice signaling channel 2 2 13 24 fxo Is guard out 5 voice signaling channel 2 2 1 30 fxo Is guard out 1000 Remarks The voice signaling protocol command must be set to the corresponding protocol type before any commands for E amp M Wink Start Immediate Start and Delay Start Signaling and FXS FXO Loop and Ground Start commands will take effect Page 5 119 VoIP Commands voice signaling fxo ls ringing inter cycle Command Usage Specify Foreign Exchange Office FXO Loop Start time between ring cycles to detect ringing Syntax Options voice signaling channel lt s ol port stantChannel endChannel gt fxo Is ringing inter cycle lt value gt Definitions slot port startChannel endChannel value Default Command Examples voice signaling channel 2 1 1 12 fxo Is ringing inter cycle 2000 voice signaling channel 2 2 13 24 fxo Is ringing inter cycle 30000 voice signaling channel 2 3 1 30 fxo Is ringing inter cycle 60000 Specifies chassis slot number where VSM is installed e g 2 Specifies physical port number on voice daughtercard e g 1 The first number in the range of voice channels e g 1 The last number in the range
58. Features The ability to accommodate voice traffic using VoIP switches installed in data networks is achieved by means of signaling controls and voice interoperability features The VoIP signal ing control and voice interoperability functions includes telephony signaling and payload packetization as described Telephony Signaling Telephony signaling is used for signaling with telephone equipment e g PBX via the tele phony interface as well as to control the communication signaling between the H 323 VoIP gateway and the Customer Premises Equipment CPE It detects the presence of new calls collects dialed digit information telephone number in some form or another entered by the caller to route a call via an AVNDS to its destination point and is also used to detect the end of calls off hook Telephony signaling provides call progress supervision by generating supervisory and call progress tones as well as DTMF Dual Tone Multi Frequency tones for outbound calls It also provides DSP Digital Signal Processor interfacing control and transfer of PCM based voice packets to and from the DSP subsystem or DIMM DSP Interface Management Module It coordinates with the DSPs to select voice coders codecs at startup when a particular vocoder is needed When a call is received telephony signaling is responsible for opening channels and PCM data streams to the DSPs to process the voice data The signaling controls provided by the Telephon
59. H and then the VoIP net work uses these digits to route calls to trunks D or F respectively Routes calls starting with 1 or 2 to trunk D and then the VoIP net work uses these digits to route calls to trunks D or respectively Page 3 9 VoIP Networks without PSTN Example 2 Remarks Supported VoIP features and main CLI commands used with this dialing scheme are as follows Features Supported H 323 gateway to voice daughtercard A Primary CLI Commands Used voice destination local channel page 5 231 Local channel two hunt groups 24 channels per group T1 F voice numbering plan hunt method page 5 255 voice numbering plan destination member page 5 257 voice numbering plan phone group member page 5 258 Site prefix no site prefix GD voice phone group site prefix page 5 238 Voice phone group type four digit local extensions L voice phone group type page 5 240 voice phone group format page 5 243 voice phone group add numbers page 5 247 Strip digit length no strip digits CR voice phone group strip digit length page 5 244 Digital Interface type T1 W voice port interface type page 5 34 Page 3 10 VoIP Networks without PSTN Example 3 VoIP Networks without PSTN Example 3 One Hunt Group 48 Channels Across Two T1s This dialing scheme uses one hunt group spanning two T1 lines to
60. H 245 and H 225 packet processing e g connect disconnect Alcatel VoIP Network Dialing Schemes AVNDS handles conversions between phone numbers and IP address of H 323 devices Network Switch Backplane Interface connects H 323 VoIP gateways to switch and ultimately to IP network These functions can generally be divided into either voice or convergence features based on the controls they provide over VoIP in the switch For the most part the voice features include separate controls for signaling and for voice interoperability whereas the conver gence features encompass H 323 call control and voice data interoperability via the use of AVNDS in IP networks VoIP Network Call Control Telephony Signaling Digital or Analog Signaling H 323 Alarms f lt q ai I DTMF Configuration Digit Switch PSTN Collector Alcatel Switch Bus PCX PBX Voice i Voice Network Backplane gt BRI phone Ports i Dialing Schemes Interface i AVNDS I I Daughtercard Activation eS 3 Z Alarms Payload Packetization RTP Payload Voice Fax Modem Payload Packets Page 1 10 VoIP Daughtercards and Enterprise VoIP Features H 323 VoIP Gateway Voice and Convergence Features Signaling Control and Voice Interoperability Voice
61. International calls Features Supported H 323 gateway to voice daughtercard A Primary CLI Commands Used voice destination local channel page 5 231 Local channel two hunt groups 24 channels per group T1 F voice numbering plan hunt method page 5 255 voice numbering plan destination member page 5 257 voice numbering plan phone group member page 5 258 Site prefix no site prefix D voice phone group site prefix page 5 238 Site prefix single or multiple digits Q Voice phone group type NANP exten sions N voice phone group site prefix page 5 238 voice phone group site prefix digits page 5 239 voice phone group type page 5 240 voice phone group format page 5 243 voice phone group add numbers page 5 247 Voice phone group type INTL extension O voice phone group type page 5 240 voice phone group format page 5 243 voice phone group add numbers page 5 247 Voice phone group type PSTN NANP P voice phone group type page 5 240 voice phone group format page 5 243 voice phone group add numbers page 5 247 Strip digit length 7 V Digital Interface type T1 W voice phone group strip digit length page 5 244 voice port interface type page 5 34 Digital Interface type E1 ISDN PRI Euro PRD Y voice port interface type page 5 34 voice signaling companding page 5 77 Page 3 39 VoIP Networks wit
62. Many forms of call signaling exist to set up and end calls most of which result in the ringing of a phone or connection of a fax machine These forms entail newer line signaling methods that use digital pulses PCM or Pulse Code Modulation analog touch tones such as DTMF Dual Tone Multiple Frequency and other much older analog signals in all their assortments including but not limited to Ear amp Mouth E amp M Loop Start Ground Start Foreign Exchange Subscriber FXS and Wink Start Each signaling method was devel oped through the years by the telephone industry to provide Plain Old Telephone Service POTS E amp M signaling of which there are five interface types is the most widely used method for connecting calls to PBXs telephone switching systems which use channelized T1 or E1 lines to transmit signals and multiplex digitized voice T1 robbed bit signaling is an example of narrow or in band signaling where signaling tones are passed along the same circuit as someone s voice ISDN Integrated Services Digital Network on the other hand is another type of signaling wherein voice transmissions are digitized then placed on separate broad or out of band chan nels so signaling tones are not passed along the same circuit as someone s voice This prevents signaling or other intrusions into the calls and usually provides faster transmission ISDN is a common protocol in the Common Channel Signaling CCS network architectu
63. Networks with PSTN Example 13 North American PSTN Calls VoIP Network This diagram demonstrates how North American calls are handled in a VoIP network When a 1 818 878 2000 extension is called from a 1 603 589 2000 extension the PBX routes calls to Trunk J and then sends 1 603 598 2000 number to Voice Daughtercard 1 The Voice Daughtercard 1 strips the 1st seven digits and forwards the last four digits across the WAN to Voice Daughtercard 2 These four digits are then forwarded to Trunk L PBX 2 receives the four digits and then routes the call to the appropriate extension o 411 911 J Extensions off of PBX 1 Voice x Daughtercard 1 IP 192 168 11 2 B Port 1720 lt lt 2000 2999 1 818 878 R stripped digits 1 xxx xxx WAN 1 n See Diagrams No Amer Calls Overview Outbound Inbound DID 1 XXX XXX stripped digits 0 Y ma Voice Daughtercard al 2000 2999 2 IP 192 168 12 2 ca r Port 1720 2000 0 411 911 Extensions off of PBX 2 1 603 598 Example 13 North American PSTN Calls VoIP Network LEGEND for Diagram Components Voice Daughtercard 1 Configuration Voice Daughtercard 2 Configuration Expects to receive one to 24 digits on trunk J and Expects to
64. Page 5 176 VoIP Commands op as so fs eeek kk ot os ole oh as ole ok oe oe a a oa default voice coding profile Jeee eeek kk fs oh os oe oh ae oe ok os oe a a a he as so fs eeek of as fe os kk oh os oe ok oe oe ok os oe a a a Voice Coding Profile cp1 voice coding profile cp1 voice coding profile cp1 codec type g 729ab voice coding profile cp1 voice packet interval 30 voice coding profile cp1 voice activity detector on voice coding profile cp1 voice network delay buffer nominal delay 60 voice coding profile cp1 voice network delay buffer max delay 120 voice coding profile cp1 voice echo canceller on voice coding profile cp1 voice echo canceller non linear on voice coding profile cp1 voice echo canceller tail 16 voice coding profile cp1 voice network delay buffer mode adaptive voice coding profile cp1 voice dtmf relay on voice coding profile cp1 fax rate 14400 voice coding profile cp1 call progress tone detection on voice coding profile cp1 v 18 tone detection off voice coding profile cp1 single frequency tone detection on voice coding profile cp1 voice activity detection threshold mode adaptive voice coding profile cp1 voice echo canceller comfort noise mode static voice coding profile cp1 voice comfort noise level 40 voice coding profile cp1 echo canceller refresh configuration refresh voice coding profi
65. Remarks The example in this command for the string portion of the syntax sets the site prefix digits to be used to 81 This means that from any channel on the network whenever the digits 81are pressed a certain number of digits is expected to follow If the site prefix is set to 81 and the format is xxx to get to extension 306 for instance the caller would dial 81306 to get to exten sion 306 from anywhere in the VoIP network In this case a two digit dialing prefix is used so the VoIP network can support 999 sites with 100 extensions per site A prefix is an indicator consisting of one or more digits allowing selection of different types of number formats e g local national or international transit networks and or the service Prefixes are part of the number and are signaled over internetwork or international bound aries When prefixes are used the user or automatic calling equipment always enters them Prefixes are used on the source voice switching daughtercard and are sent to the remote end destination H 323 gatekeepers receive prefixes as part of the alias name If the phone group dialing type is either NANP extensions or International extensions then the first digit of the site prefix digit cannot be the same as the first digit of the extension as specified via the phone group numbers to include in range of digits command Page 5 239 VoIP Commands voice phone group type Command Usage Specify phon
66. SCHEME 5 228 Network Dialing Scheme Destinations Specify H 323 endpoint destination name 5 230 Specify a local channel destination name 5 231 Delete destination 5 232 View destination 5 233 Network Dialing Scheme Phone Groups Create phone group with specified name 5 235 Delete phone group 5 236 View phone group 5 237 Network Dialing Scheme Inbound Outbound Digit Processing Set unique phone group site prefix for routing VoIP calls on off 5 238 Specify unique phone group site prefix digits for routing VoIP calls 5 239 Specify voice phone group dialing type 5 240 Specify voice phone group format of telephone number and number of outbound digits to dial 5 243 Network Dialing Scheme Additional Outbound Digit Processing Specify number of outbound collected digits to strip in voice phone group site before forwarding call 5 244 Set voice phone group to allow prefix forwarding on off 5 245 Specify voice phone group site digits to prefix before forwarding call optional 5 246 Page 5 11 VoIP Commands Network Dialing Scheme Digit Dialing Ranges Specify voice phone group site numbers to include in range of digits for phone format string 5 247 Specify voice phone group site numbers to remove from range of digits for phone format string 5 248 Network Dialing Scheme Numbering Plan Create voice numbering plan with specified name 5 249 Delete voice numbering plan 5 250 View v
67. Switching Daughtercard Euro BRI ISDN Set VSB clock source 5 33 Specify VSB external clock port 5 33 VSD Digital Port Confiquration Digital Port Connection Type Set voice port interface type T1 E1 E1 ISDN PRI BRI EURO 5 34 Digital Port Configuration Telephony Interface Specify voice port frame format 5 36 Define voice port circuit identifier optional 5 38 Set E1 voice port NFAS Non Facility Associated Framing enable disable 5 39 Digital Port Configuration Line Build Out Set voice port line haul short haul long haul 5 40 Specify T1 voice port line length 5 41 Page 5 4 VoIP Commands Specify T1 voice port attenuation 5 42 Specify E1 voice port cable type 5 43 Digital Port Configuration Line Coding Specify line coding of voice port 5 44 Digital Port Configuration Facilities Data Link Specify T1 voice port facilities data link protocol 5 45 Set T1 voice port facilities data link port role network user 5 46 Digital Port Configuration Transmit Clock Source Specify voice port transmit clock source 5 47 Digital Port Configuration Loop Back Mode Specify T1 voice port loop back configuration 5 48 Digital Port Configuration Signaling Mode Specify voice port channel signaling mode 5 49 Digital Port Configuration Trap Generation Set E1 voice port trap generation enable disable 5 5
68. This dialing scheme is used to connect a VSB daughtercard to a generic Euro ISDN device using Euro BRI E1 ETSD Note that the two NT ports on Voice Daughtercard 1 are config ured as Point to Multipoint whereas the two NT ports on Voice Daughtercard 2 are config ured as Point to Point Each Euro BRI Point to Point NT interface connects only to one telephone line containing two B channel lines The VSB daughtercard does not support static TEI assignments The VSB daughtercard auto matically assigns TEI numbers e g TEI 64 to BRI TE devices these numbers will vary between 64 and 126 As per ITU T Recommendation E 164 1991 this VSB dialing scheme does not route based upon the ISDN subaddress supplementary service Rather the BRI devices connected to the VSB are responsible for ISDN subaddress routing Subaddressing provides expanded addressing capacity beyond the standard ISDN number Installation of digital voice switching daughtercards i e Euro BRI VSBs must be installed to use this dialing scheme VSB daughtercards also contain jumpers which must be configured in order to process VoIP calls using Euro BRI See Chapter 2 VoIP Daughtercards for details and Chapter 4 Setup and Installation for further details on installation lan TEI 64 lt a Port a Euro BRI 2 Voice Daughtercard TEI 64 gt 3 1 p4 IP 192 168 11 2 Port 1720 WAN
69. VLANs 1 19 4 5 vocoder 1 11 1 14 2 4 voice activity detection 1 12 5 172 voice channel mode 5 58 voice coder 1 11 voice daughtercard activate line 4 4 voice echo cancellers 1 12 5 62 Voice Information Field VIF 3 56 5 184 voice packet 1 12 Voice Packet Interval VPI 3 56 5 184 voice payload 1 12 voice signaling types 1 13 voice switching daughtercard VSD VSB and VSA 3 1 voice switching daughtercards jumper configuration 4 6 Voice Switching Module VSM 1 15 VoIP ascii configuration boot file 1 11 VoIP components 4 1 VoIP daughtercard activation 1 12 VoIP gateway or voice switching daughtercard 4 5 VoIP networks with interoperability 3 3 VoIP networks with PSTN 3 3 Index VoIP networks without PSTN 3 3 VoIP text based configuration boot file 1 11 VSA jumper settings 2 23 Ringing Frequency 2 23 Ringing Voltage 2 23 VSB Impedance 2 16 jumper settings 2 16 NT CT TE 2 16 Power Feeds 2 16 VSD jumper settings 2 12 VSM Voice Switching Module 1 15 2 1 vsmboot asc 1 7 1 11 1 15 3 1 41 4 4 4 7 52255253 vsoa img 4 1 VSX switching module 2 1 2 25 vsx img 4 1 WwW white noise 1 12 wsx img 4 1 Page I 5 Index Page 1 6
70. VoIP network In the event of a digital voice daughtercard power failure the Deadman relay switch on the card goes into PSTN fall back mode to allow new incoming calls to be placed For more details on the Deadman switch see Chapter 2 Voice Daughtercards To use voice and fax on the VoIP network simultaneously the fax modem switchover feature must be turned ON via the voice coding profile switchover command otherwise voice calls will fail See Chapter 5 VoIP Commands for details Voice Daughtercard 1 IP 192 168 11 2 Port 1720 Extensions off of PBX 1 1 818 878 2999 PBX 2 Extensions off of PBX 2 p gt Daughtercard 2 IP 192 168 12 2 Port 1720 1 603 598 2999 p Example 16 Fax over IP Network LEGEND for Diagram Components PBX 1 Configuration PBX 2 Configuration Expects to receive eleven digits on trunk Q and then uses these digits to route calls to lines A Expects to receive eleven digits on trunk L and then uses these strip digits to route calls to lines B Routes calls starting with 1 603 598 to trunk Q and then the VoIP network uses these digits to route calls to trunk L If the voice daughtercard loses power calls will be routed using PSTN fallback to trunk R Routes calls starting with 1 818 878
71. Voltage E fo Ringing Frequency A BEEBE BEET VSA Jumper Settings Ringing Voltage and Ringing Frequency Ringing Voltage The jumper for ringing voltage P33 is used to set the continental ring tone in Vrms voltage mean root square on the VSA daughtercards Default 75 Vrms requires shunts on pins 2_3 and pins 5_6 No Amer European Spec 45 Vrms requires shunts on pins 2_3 and pins 4_5 European Specification 86 Vrms requires shunts on pins 1_2 and pins 5_6 European Specification Page 2 23 Voice Switching Daughtercard Analog Ringing Frequency The jumper for ringing frequency P34 is used to set the frequency of the continental ring tone in Hertz Hz on the VSA daughtercards Default 20 Hz requires shunts on pins 2_3 and pins 5_6 No Amer European Spec 16 Hz requires shunts on pins 2_3 and pins 4_5 European Specification 25 Hz requires shunts on pins 1_2 and pins 5_6 European Specification Other VSA Jumpers The following jumpers are factory set on the VSA daughtercard and should not be changed by the customer unless under the direction of Customer Support Jumper No Shunt Position Default Description P20 Pins 1_2 Pins 4_5 yes Reserved P31 Pins 2_3 Pins 4_5 yes Backplane interface Hbus P46 Pins 2_3 yes Reserved Page 2 24 VSX Switching Module VSX Switching Module As illustrated on the next two pages
72. and required site prefix included Length of site prefix digits which can be any combination of numbers from 0 to 9 cannot exceed 26 digits total when added to the format string Site prefix digits are set via the voice phone group site prefix digits and voice phone group site prefix on off commands e One to three digit country code CC three digit central office CO code field separator and unique four digit subscriber number SN are required cannot exceed 15 digits when field separators not used e Format string must contain dialed digits and limited use of field separators Field separators hyphens in sequence indicate empty field two field sepa rators are not allowed in sequence as part of a valid format string A dialed digit cannot follow an x At least one x is required Format must be compatible with ITU E 164 1 specification e Format is optional if not specified the phone group numbers to include in range of digits command is not allowed Page 5 242 VoIP Commands voice phone group format Command Usage Specify phone group format of telephone number and number of outbound digits to dial Syntax Options voice phone group lt PhoneGroupName gt format lt formaiSiring gt Definitions PhoneGroupName Identifies the phone group by name e g salem_engr1 maximum length of characters 60 The following characters are permitted in the phone group
73. be assigned a unique IP address among other unique gateway identifiers From that point opera tional parameters such as channel and port types can be set using the command line inter face CLD configuration tool Comparable text based ASCID configuration boot files may also be quickly generated to configure multiple VoIP enabled switches with similar requirements Also stored in the vsmboot asc files are voice coding parameters which are pre configured and kept in profiles Coding Profiles are configured directly to the components and define which operational VoIP characteristics will be used and then implemented according to the instructions contained in the profiles Coding Profiles consist of general caller information voice and fax transmission coding decoding settings Preferred Coding Profiles can be auto matically selected based upon payload requirements Coding Profiles are configured at the channel level VoIP configurations for VoIP callers are established by setting up profiles and then assigning the profiles to each individual H 323 VoIP gateway or daughtercard Profiles can be created modified copied and deleted using one of the available configuration tools It should be known that in most circumstances the default settings for the Coding Profiles are sufficient Additional parameters that require configuration include calling Destinations and Network Numbering Schemes the latter being comprised primarily of Numbering Plans P
74. be set to the corresponding protocol type before any commands for E amp M Wink Start Immediate Start and Delay Start Signaling and FXS FXO Loop and Ground Start commands will take effect Page 5 142 VoIP Commands voice signaling fxo gs caller id detection Command Usage Set Foreign Exchange Office FXO Ground Start GS to detect inbound caller ID on off Syntax Options voice signaling channel lt s ol pori stantChannel endChannel gt fxo gs caller id detection on off Definitions slot Specifies chassis slot number where VSM is installed e g 2 port Specifies physical port number on voice daughtercard e g 1 startChannel The first number in the range of voice channels e g 1 endChannel The last number in the range of voice channels e g 30 Syntax Note Be sure to separate the start and end range numbers with a hyphen e g 1 30 on Turns ON fxs gs caller ID detection for specified telephony signaling channel off Turns OFF fxs gs caller ID detection for specified telephony signaling channel Syntax Note The voice coding profile caller id command must be enabled to use this command Default The default setting is off Command Examples voice signaling channel 2 1 1 12 fxo gs caller id detection off voice signaling channel 2 2 13 24 fxo gs caller id detection on Remarks The voice signaling protocol command must be set to the corresponding protocol type b
75. call progress tones 5 62 call signaling capabilities 5 62 caller ID 1 11 3 49 5 58 5 172 5 173 5 215 calls between channels 2 6 CAS Channel Associated Signaling 1 13 5 37 CCS Common Channel Signaling 1 13 channel bank 4 2 channels 2 6 circuit identifier 5 38 Cisco router 3 4 3 53 CLI text based configuration 4 1 CO Central Office 2 2 codec 1 11 1 12 1 14 4 6 5 174 G 711 G 723 1 G 729a 1 17 type 5 184 CODer DECoder 1 14 coding profile 1 2 1 12 4 6 5 2 5 174 5 182 5 188 comfort noise 1 12 5 62 Command Line Interface CLD configuration 4 1 communication link errors 2 9 4 6 companding method 1 14 configuration restrictions 4 3 console port 4 4 continental ring tone 5 30 converged H 323 VoIP network 1 7 CPE Customer Premise Equipment 1 7 1 11 CS ACELP Conjugate Structure Algebraic Code Excited Linear Predictive 1 18 D data channel 2 2 D channel 2 2 destinations 5 228 dial tone generation 5 89 dialing timers 1 11 5 14 5 26 DID Direct Inward Dial 3 4 3 31 digital signal processor 1 11 1 12 digital signals 1 14 digital telephone transmission lines T1 E1 Euro ISDN 1 1 digital telephony device 2 9 digital voice switching daughtercards VSDs and VSBs 2 8 DIMM DSP Interface Management Module 1 11 4 6 DRAM memory 2 6 DSP Digital Signal Processor 1 11 1 12 1 13 1 14 2 1 configurations 2 6 DSP channels 2 20 DSP Interface Management Module DIMM 1 11 D
76. can be provided in the event of a power failure simply by plugging the analog VoIP switch into an Uninterruptable Power Supply UPS For a description of the Deadman switch on the digital voice switching daughtercards see VSD Deadman Switch on page 2 8 VSAs and Cross Over Toggle Switches There are no Cross Over type toggle switches on the VSA daughtercards For a description of the Cross Over toggle switches on the digital voice switching daughtercards see VSD Cross Over Toggle Switch on page 2 9 and VSB NT LT TE Cross Over Toggle Switch on page 2 13 Page 2 22 Voice Switching Daughtercard Analog VSA Jumpers The VSA daughtercard requires the jumpers for Ringing Voltage and Ringing Frequency to be set as follows For additional details on the VSA ringing voltage or ringing frequency see also Chapter 5 VoIP Commands In general the jumpers are set on a per port basis Locations of the jumpers are illustrated below Notes All VSA daughtercards are factory set to the defaults for jumpers P33 and P34 The defaults are applicable to US and Europe versions of the board See also VSD Jumpers on page 2 12 Default jumper settings on VSA daughtercards can be used in Europe but ringing voltage and frequency must also match requirements as per specification of the equipment to be used with a VSA e g telephone facsimile machine terminal equipment TE PBX etc P31 P20 Ua ds ly b Sa Ringing
77. canceller refresh state off Page 5 203 VoIP Commands voice coding profile fax rate Command Usage Specify coding profile maximum allowed fax modem data rate Syntax Options voice coding profile lt codingProfName gt fax rate 2400 4800 7200 9600 12000 14400 Definitions codingProfName 2400 4800 7200 9600 12000 14400 Default Command Example voice coding profile salemprof1 fax rate 14400 voice coding profile calabprof2 fax rate 9600 Identifies coding profile by name e g salemprof1 maximum length of 40 characters The following characters are permitted in the coding profile name a z A Z 0 9 space and HR me OSM Specifies a maximu Specifies a maximu Specifies a maximu Specifies a maximu Specifies a maximu Specifies a maximu The default baud rate is 14400 N_ amp I lt gt OT m fax data baud rate of 2400 bps m fax data baud rate of 4800 bps m fax data baud rate of 7200 bps m fax data baud rate of 9600 bps m fax data baud rate of 12000 bps m fax data baud rate of 14400 bps Page 5 204 VoIP Commands voice coding profile fax transmit level Command Usage Specify coding profile fax modem transmit level gain Syntax Options voice coding profile lt codingProfName gt fax transmit level lt gain_value gt Definitions codingProfName Identifies coding profile by name e g salemp
78. channel lt s ol pori startChannel endChannel gt fxs Is supervisory disconnect wait lt value gt Definitions slot Specifies chassis slot number where VSM is installed e g 2 port Specifies physical port number on voice daughtercard e g 1 startChannel The first number in the range of voice channels e g 1 endChannel The last number in the range of voice channels e g 30 Syntax Note Be sure to separate the start and end range numbers with a hyphen e g 1 30 value Specifies the fxs ls supervisory disconnect CPC signal wait value in milliseconds from 1 to 60 000 e g 200 is generated before on hook condition declared Syntax Note Do not use commas when entering the fxs ls supervisory discon nect wait value for example 1 000 will return a syntax error message Default The default value is 200 milliseconds Command Examples voice signaling channel 2 1 1 12 fxs Is supervisory disconnect wait 200 voice signaling channel 2 2 16 24 fxs Is supervisory disconnect wait 30000 voice signaling channel 2 3 1 30 fxs Is supervisory disconnect wait 60000 Remarks The voice signaling protocol command must be set to the corresponding protocol type before any commands for E amp M Wink Start Immediate Start and Delay Start Signaling and FXS FXO Loop and Ground Start commands will take effect Page 5 113 VoIP Commands voice signaling fxs ls supervisory disconnect duration Command Usage
79. channels e g 30 Syntax Note Be sure to separate the start and end range numbers with a hyphen e g 1 30 callerldNumber Identifies the caller by number e g 8188803500 maximum length of ten characters only 0 9 allowed no _ underscores or spaces allowed private Sets outbound originating caller ID number that transmits to private unavailable Sets outbound originating caller ID number that transmits to unavailable Syntax Note The voice coding profile caller id command must be enabled to use this command Default The default setting is private Command Examples voice signaling channel 2 1 1 12 caller id number 8188803500 voice signaling channel 2 1 1 12 caller id number 8188803500 private voice signaling channel 2 2 13 24 caller id number 8188803501 unavailable Remarks Caller ID time is automatically determined read from the system time on the switch If the caller ID name or number is changed the voice switching daughtercard is initialized with the time automatically Page 5 148 VoIP Commands voice signaling tone table Command Usage Set outbound tone table ringing silence for telephony channel identifier TCID Syntax Options voice signaling channel lt s ol pori stantChannel endChannel gt tone table ringing silence Definitions slot Specifies slot number of voice daughtercard installed in switching module e g 2 port Specif
80. chassis slot number where VSM is installed e g 2 card_number Specifies the voice daughtercard position number e g 1 dynamic Assigns RTP RTCP port numbers dynamically for H 323 gateway sequential Assigns RTP RTCP port numbers sequentially for H 323 gateway Syntax Notes If the starting RTP RTCP port mode for the gateway is set to dynamic then the RTP port base value is automatically set to 0 Starting RTP RTCP port numbers are specified via the h 323 RTP port base command Default The default setting is dynamic Command Example voice network card 2 1 h 323 rtp port mode dynamic voice network card 2 2 h 323 rtp port mode sequential Remarks This command is used to set the port number assignment method for RTP and RTCP ports Page 5 225 VoIP Commands voice network h 323 rtp port base Command Usage Specify starting RTP RTCP port number for voice switching daughtercard gateway if sequen tial Syntax Options voice network card lt s oi card_number gt h 323 rtp port base lt value gt Definitions slot Specifies the chassis slot number where VSM is installed e g 2 card_number Specifies the voice daughtercard position number e g 1 value Specifies starting RTP or RTCP port value from 1 to 65535 e g 30000 If dynamic port assignment is preferred the RTP port base should be set to a value of 0 if dynamic port assignment is used the requirements of the H 323 spe
81. corre sponding protocol type must also be specified via the voice signaling protocol command Default For VSD only the default setting is t1 For VSB only the default setting is bri euro Command Examples voice port 2 1 interface type t1 voice port 2 2 interface type e1 voice port 2 3 interface type e1 isdn pri voice port 2 4 interface type bri euro Remarks The voice port interface type command is used to determine the number of channels allowed per physical port on the voice daughtercard the interfaces as described below are only supported on the digital versions of this card The analog voice switching daughtercard VSA does not support any of these interfaces The T1 interface uses a maximum of 24 DS 0 64 Kpbs channels has a capacity of 1 544 Mbps and follows Mu law companding which is used in North America United States and Canada and Japan Page 5 34 VoIP Commands The E1 QSIG ISDN signaling interface uses a maximum of 32 DS 0 64 Kbps channels has a capacity of 2 048 Mbps and follows A law companding which is used in Europe This inter face is a European CEPT Conference of European Postal and Telecommunications Adminis trations carrier Thirty channels can be used for voice E1 uses timeslots rather than robbed bit signaling Timeslot 0 is for framing synchronization and timeslot 16 is for signaling either Common Channel Signaling CCS i e QSIG ISDN or Channel Associated Signaling CA
82. corre sponding protocol type of EXM Wink Start Immediate Start or Delay Start Signaling Page 5 91 VoIP Commands voice signaling emw in wink wait min Command Usage Specify minimum Ear amp Mouth wink delay on incoming calls Syntax Options voice signaling channel lt s ol port startChannel endChannel gt emw in wink wait min imum lt value gt Definitions slot Specifies chassis slot number where VSM is installed e g 2 port Specifies physical port number on voice daughtercard e g 1 startChannel The first number in the range of voice channels e g 1 endChannel The last number in the range of voice channels e g 30 Syntax Note Be sure to separate the start and end range numbers with a hyphen e g 1 30 imum Optional command syntax Type either min or minimum in the command line value Specifies the minimum delay in milliseconds from 5 to 60 000 e g 150 before begin ning the wink on the E ead after detecting a line seizure on the M lead for incoming calls Syntax Note Do not use commas when entering the minimum E amp M wink delay value on incoming calls for example 24 000 will return a syntax error message Default The default value is 2000 Command Examples voice signaling channel 2 1 1 12 emw in wink wait minimum 150 voice signaling channel 2 2 13 24 emw in wink wait min 30000 voice signaling channel 2 3 1 30 emw in wink wait min 60000 Remarks The v
83. current debounce 500 voice signaling channel 2 3 1 30 fxo gs loop current debounce 1000 Remarks The voice signaling protocol command must be set to the corresponding protocol type before any commands for E amp M Wink Start Immediate Start and Delay Start Signaling and FXS FXO Loop and Ground Start commands will take effect Page 5 145 VoIP Commands voice signaling fxo gs battery reversal debounce Command Usage Specify Foreign Exchange Office FXO Ground Start GS debounce interval for battery rever sal detector Syntax Options voice signaling channel lt s ol port stantChannel endChannel gt fxo gs battery reversal debounce lt value gt Definitions slot Specifies chassis slot number where VSM is installed e g 2 port Specifies physical port number on voice daughtercard e g 1 startChannel The first number in the range of voice channels e g 1 endChannel The last number in the range of voice channels e g 30 Syntax Note Be sure to separate the start and end range numbers with a hyphen e g 1 30 values Specifies the time to use as a debouncer delay interval for debouncing the battery rever sal detector in milliseconds from 1 to 1 000 e g 20 Syntax Note Do not use commas when entering the fxs gs debounce value for the battery reversal detector for example 1 000 will return a syntax error message Default The default value is 20 milliseconds Comman
84. daughtercard installed in switching module e g 2 Specifies physical port number on voice daughtercard e g 1 Specifies unframed voice port frame format Specifies superframe voice port frame format also known as AT amp T D4 format DS 1 Specifies extended superframe ESF voice port frame format DS 1 standard used for Wide Area Networks Specifies CCITT TU Geneva Recommendation G 704 ITU T Recommendation for syn chronous frame structures used at primary and secondary levels double frame FAS Pulse Code Modulation PCM 31 voice port frame format CCITT stands for Consultive Committee on International Telegraphy and Telephony Specifies Cyclic Redundancy Check for transmission CCITT Recommendation G 704 CRC4 multiframe FAS PCM 31 Syntax Notes A frame format none means the frame is unframed If the voice daughtercard connection port type is set to T1 then only superframe extended superframe and no are allowed If the voice daughtercard connection port type is set to E1 E1 ISDN PRI or BRI Euro then only E1 E1 CRC E1 MF E1 CRC MF and no are allowed The port connection type can be set via the voice port interface type command A no frame format superframe or no frame format extended superframe or no frame format E1 or no frame format E1 CRC or no frame format E1 MF or no frame format E1 CRC MF means the frame is unframed in which case superframe extended superframe E1 E1 CRC E1 MF E
85. destinations In this example the voice daughtercards are using the top down hunt method to determine where new calls will be routed Voice Daughtercard 1 i IP 192 168 11 2 Port 1720 Extensions off of PBX 1 Voice Daughtercard lt ga 1000 i ga 338 2 IP 192 168 12 2 Port 1720 Hunt Group PBX 2 N Extensions ff of PBX 2 Voice haha ja Daughtercard 2000 to 2999 2000 3 IP 192 168 13 2 Port 1720 Example 5 One Hunt Group 96 Channels Across Four T1s LEGEND for Diagram Components PBX 1 Configuration PBX 2 Configuration Expects to receive four digits on trunks Q CX Expects to receive four digits on and then uses CL or M and then uses these digits to route calls these digits to route calls to lines B to lines A Routes calls starting with 1 to lines A Routes calls starting with 2 to lines B Routes calls starting with 2 to trunks Q GX CL Routes calls starting with 1 to trunk D and then the or M and then the VoIP network uses these digits VoIP network uses these digits to route calls to trunks J to route calls to trunk KX L or M according to the hunt method used Page 3 15 VoIP Networks without PSTN Example 5 Remarks
86. e g 2 port Specifies physical port number on voice daughtercard e g 1 startChannel The first number in the range of voice channels e g 1 endChannel The last number in the range of voice channels e g 30 Syntax Note Be sure to separate the start and end range numbers with a hyphen e g 1 30 value Specifies the debounce delay interval transition time to on hook seize detect condition in milliseconds from 0 to 1 000 e g 20 Syntax Note Do not use commas when entering the fxs gs debounce interval on hook transition value for example 1 000 will return a syntax error message Default The default value is 20 milliseconds Command Examples voice signaling channel 2 1 1 12 fxs gs on hook debounce 20 voice signaling channel 2 2 13 24 fxs gs on hook debounce 500 voice signaling channel 2 3 1 24 fxs gs on hook debounce 1000 Remarks The voice signaling protocol command must be set to the corresponding protocol type before any commands for E amp M Wink Start Immediate Start and Delay Start Signaling and FXS FXO Loop and Ground Start commands will take effect Page 5 127 VoIP Commands voice signaling fxs gs originate clear detect Command Usage Specify Foreign Exchange Station Ground Start FXS GS minimum time to wait before declar ing on hook by the call originator to the call answerer Syntax Options voice signaling channel lt s ol pori stantChannel endChannel gt
87. emd emw isdn Definitions slot Specifies chassis slot number where VSM is installed e g 2 port Specifies physical port number on voice daughtercard e g 1 fxs Is Specifies CAS foreign exchange station loop start signaling as the signaling protocol fxo Is Specifies CAS foreign exchange office loop start as the signaling protocol fxs gs Specifies CAS foreign exchange station ground start as the signaling protocol fxo gs Specifies CAS foreign exchange office ground start as the signaling protocol emi Specifies CAS E amp M ear amp mouth immediate start as the signaling protocol emd Specifies CAS E amp M ear amp mouth delay start as the signaling protocol emw Specifies CAS E amp M ear amp mouth wink start as the signaling protocol isdn Specifies CCS Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN as the signaling protocol Default The default setting is fxs Is Command Examples voice signaling channel 2 1 1 12 protocol fxs Is voice signaling channel 2 2 13 24 protocol fxo gs voice signaling channel 2 3 1 30 protocol emw voice signaling channel 2 4 1 30 protocol isdn Remarks The voice signaling protocol command must be set to the corresponding protocol type before any commands for E amp M Wink Start Immediate Start and Delay Start Signaling and FXS FXO Loop and Ground Start commands will take effect To use this command for ISDN the voice daughtercard connection type mu
88. end range numbers with a hyphen e g 1 30 on Turns ON fxo ls caller ID for specified telephony signaling channel off Turns OFF fxo ls caller ID for specified telephony signaling channel Syntax Note The voice coding profile caller id command must be enabled to use this command Default The default setting is on Command Examples voice signaling channel 2 1 1 12 fxo Is caller id on voice signaling channel 2 2 13 24 fxo Is caller id off Remarks The voice signaling protocol command must be set to the corresponding protocol type before any commands for E amp M Wink Start Immediate Start and Delay Start Signaling and FXS FXO Loop and Ground Start commands will take effect Page 5 122 VoIP Commands voice signaling fxo ls answer after Command Usage Specify Foreign Exchange Office Loop Start FXO LS number of rings allowed before answer ing an incoming call inseize Syntax Options voice signaling channel lt s ol port startChannel endChannel gt fxo Is answer after lt value gt Definitions slot Specifies chassis slot number where VSM is installed e g 2 port Specifies physical port number on voice daughtercard e g 1 startChannel The first number in the range of voice channels e g 1 endChannel The last number in the range of voice channels e g 30 Syntax Note Be sure to separate the start and end range numbers with a hyphen e g 1 30 value Specifies the
89. exchange recommended by ANSI at amp t 54016 Indicates device uses the dsx1ATT 54016 ESF Extended Super Frame facilities data link exchange t1 403 at amp t Indicates device uses the ANSI t1 403 for ESF Extended Super Frame facilities data link exchange Syntax Notes A no facilities data link protocol means that the frame is unframed A no facilities data link protocol ANSI T1 403 or no facilities data link protocol AT amp T 54016 or no facilities data link proto col T 1403 AT amp T means that the device does not use the facili tites data link protocol The ANSI T1 403 and AT amp T 54106 and T1 403 AT amp T are ignored Default The default setting is none Command Examples voice port 2 1 facilities data link protocol none voice port 2 2 facilities data link protocol ansi t1 403 voice port 2 3 facilities data link protocol at amp t 54016 voice port 2 4 facilities data link protocol t1 403 at amp t Remarks To use this command the voice daughtercard connection interface type must be set to T1 via the voice port interface type command Page 5 45 VoIP Commands voice port facilities data link port role Command Usage Set T1 voice port facilities data link port role network user Syntax Options voice port lt s o port gt facilities data link port role network user Definitions slot Specifies slot number of voice switching daughtercard installed in switchin
90. fxs gs originate clear detect lt value gt Definitions slot Specifies chassis slot number where VSM is installed e g 2 port Specifies physical port number on voice daughtercard e g 1 startChannel The first number in the range of voice channels e g 1 endChannel The last number in the range of voice channels e g 30 Syntax Note Be sure to separate the start and end range numbers with a hyphen e g 1 30 value Specifies the minimum time to wait if call originator hangs up before on hook condition declared in milliseconds from 1 to 60 000 e g 200 Syntax Note Do not use commas when entering the fxs gs call originate clear detect value for example 10 000 will return a syntax error message Default The default value is 200 milliseconds Command Examples voice signaling channel 2 1 1 12 fxs gs originate clear detect 200 voice signaling channel 2 2 13 24 fxs gs originate clear detect 30000 voice signaling channel 2 3 1 30 fxs gs originate clear detect 60000 Remarks The voice signaling protocol command must be set to the corresponding protocol type before any commands for E amp M Wink Start Immediate Start and Delay Start Signaling and FXS FXO Loop and Ground Start commands will take effect Page 5 128 VoIP Commands voice signaling fxs gs answer clear detect Command Usage Specify Foreign Exchange Station Ground Start FXS GS minimum time to wait before declar i
91. g to the PSTN The basic VoIP daughtercards which allow the switch to make these various types of phone connections are listed and described below e VSDs T1 or E1 QSIG and E1 ISDN PRI Digital North America and Europe e VSBs Euro BRI ISDN Digital Europe e VSAs Analog North America and Europe VSD The digital voice switching daughtercards VSDs have two physical port connec tions which can be either T1 or E1 called Dual T1 or Dual E1 Associated with each of the digital physical ports there can be either 48 channels for T1 connections or 60 chan nels for E1 connections The VSD card supports the following protocols or voice port interface connections for VoIP networks in North America T1 The VSD card supports the following protocols or voice port interface connections for VoIP networks in Europe E1 QSIG or E1 ISDN PRI QSIG is another name for ITU Q 931 The VSD card does not support the following protocols T1 ISDN PRI T1 QSIG or Euro BRI ISDN E1 ETSD The VSD 60CH T1 E1 card is considered a high end VoIP daughtercard as it provides the most channels Reliable non digitized voice processing is available only between two ports of the same interface type on a single daughtercard and not between daughtercards See Voice Switching Daughtercard Digital on page 2 6 for more details For more informa tion on the voice port interface types for the digital VoIP daughtercards see also the digi tal port configuration comma
92. gateway to voice daughtercard A Local channel individual hunt groups 48 channels per group T1 D voice destination local channel page 5 231 voice numbering plan hunt method page 5 255 voice numbering plan destination member page 5 257 voice numbering plan phone group member page 5 258 Site prefix no site prefix I voice phone group site prefix page 5 238 Voice phone group type four digit local extensions L voice phone group type page 5 240 voice phone group format page 5 243 voice phone group add numbers page 5 247 Strip digit length no strip digits CR voice phone group strip digit length page 5 244 Digital Interface type T1 W voice port interface type page 5 34 Page 3 22 VoIP Networks without PSTN Example 9 VoIP Networks without PSTN Example 9 Trunk Groups and Mixed Length Extensions This is another dialing scheme that is relatively simple to implement in a VoIP network and demonstrates how to mix different extension lengths in one dialing scheme It uses two voice switching daughtercards to translate a single digit trunk prefix and three digit extensions The single digit site prefix rather than the three digits extensions are unique across the VoIP network The site prefix digit is used to send the VoIP calls to the correct PBX node When a caller dials a site prefix e g 1 it routes the call to the corresponding PBX and
93. glare condi tion trunk ends are seized simultaneously declared on outgoing call in milliseconds from 5 to 60 000 e g 800 Syntax Note Do not use commas when entering the value for the maximum duration of the wink response to the M lead for detection for example 1 000 will return a syntax error message Default The default value is 800 milliseconds Command Example voice signaling channel 2 3 1 30 emw out wink duration max 60000 Remarks The voice signaling protocol command must be set to the corresponding protocol type before any commands for E amp M Wink Start Immediate Start and Delay Start Signaling and FXS FXO Loop and Ground Start commands will take effect Use this command to reduce instances of trunk deadlock caused by glare trunks which are seized on both ends of a call at the same time Page 5 98 VoIP Commands voice signaling emi glare report Command Usage Specify E amp M immediate start time to remain off hook when congested Syntax Options voice signaling channel lt s ol port stantChannel endChannel gt emi glare report lt value gt Definitions slot Specifies chassis slot number where VSM is installed e g 2 port Specifies physical port number on voice daughtercard e g 1 startChannel The first number in the range of voice channels e g 1 endChannel The last number in the range of voice channels e g 30 Syntax Note Be sure to sep
94. gt Definitions codingProfName Identifies coding profile by name e g salemprof1 maximum length of 40 characters The following characters are permitted in the coding profile name a z A Z 0 9 space and Ss 2 HA_ amp I lt gt Ol value Specifies the voice network buffer nominal delay in milliseconds from 1 to 1000 e g 30 Syntax Notes Do not use commas when entering the voice network buffer nominal delay value for example 1 000 will return a syntax error message The nominal delay should be at least twice the packet interval Gn milliseconds NomDelay k packet time where k gt 2 Default The default value is 120 milliseconds Command Example voice coding profile salemprof1 voice network buffer delay nominal delay 120 voice coding profile salemprof2 voice network buffer delay nominal delay 500 voice coding profile calabprof1 voice network buffer delay nominal delay 750 voice coding profile calabprof2 voice network buffer delay nominal delay 1000 Page 5 187 VoIP Commands voice coding profile voice network delay buffer max delay Command Usage Specify coding profile maximum delay Syntax Options voice coding profile lt codingProf Name gt voice network delay buffer max imum delay lt value gt Definitions codingProfName imum value Default Command Example Identifies coding profile by name e g salemprof1 ma
95. into multiframe An E1 multiframe can use Channel Associated Signaling CAS contained in time slot 16 Timeslot 16 in multiframe 0 is used for multiframe synchroni zation and control Timeslot 16 of multiframes 1 through 15 are used to carry A B C and D signaling bits Page 5 37 VoIP Commands voice port circuit identifier Command Usage Define voice port circuit identifier Syntax Options voice port lt s ot port gt circuit identifier text_string slot port text_string Default None Definitions Command Examples voice port 2 1 circuit identifier 38 ivbd 005719 001 pt voice port 2 2 circuit identifier 39 hqac 001 727 000 voice port 2 3 circuit identifier 37 hsgc 305001 508 Specifies slot number of voice switching daughtercard installed in switching module e g 2 Specifies physical port number on voice daughtercard e g 1 Identifies vendor transmission circuit for troubleshooting e g 38 ivbd 005719 001 pt can be a maximum of 30 characters The following characters are permitted in the text string a z A Z 0 9 space and A_ amp I lt gt QOTII 1 Syntax Note Circuit IDs tend to use this baseline format XX XXX XXXXXX XXX At least one ASCII character must be used in the text string and quotes must be located at each end of the circuit identifier Remarks The voice port circuit identifier command is used to iden
96. ip address 127 0 0 0 voite port 4 1 interface type T1 voice coding profile cp1 vaic coding profile cp1 type pcm mulaw voice channel 4 1 1 mode telephony voids channel 4 1 2 mode telephony voice channel 4 1 3 mode telephony vaic channel 4 1 4 mode telephony voice channel 4 1 5 mode telephony v ic channel 4 1 6 mode telephony Voice channel 4 1 7 mode telephony voice channel 4 1 8 mode telephony Voice channel 4 1 9 mode telephony voids channel 4 1 10 mode telephony voice channel 4 1 11 mode telephony vaice channel 4 1 12 mode telephony v ic destination VSD_1 h 323 address 195 167 10 33 1720 wales destination VSD_2 h 323 address 195 167 10 34 1720 voice destination to VSD_1 port 1 local channel VSD_1 1 1 24 voice destination to VSD_2 port 1 local channel VSD_1 1 1 24 voice phone group Ext of PBX__1 voice phone group Ext of PBX__2 Page 5 21 VoIP Commands Page 5 22 voice phone group Ext of PBX__1 type local extensions voice phone group Ext of PBX__2 type local extensions v ice phone group Ext of PBX__1 site prefix off voice phone group Ext of PBX__2 site prefix off voice phone group Ext of PBX__1 format xxxx Joice phone group Ext of PBX_2 format xxxx vice phone group Ext of PBX__1 strip digit length 0 voice phone group Ext of PBX_ 2 strip digit length 0 voice numberin
97. left to right as voice channels 11 12 OK1 Hardware Status On Green when the module has passed diagnostic tests success fully On Amber when the hardware has failed diagnostics or if the corresponding image file for the module is not in flash mem ory OK2 Software Status Blinking Green when the module soft ware was downloaded success fully and the module is communicating with the MPX Blinking Amber when the mod ule is in a transitional state On solid Amber if the module failed to download software from the MPX VSX Switching Module with two VSA FXS FXO Mixed Modules Page 2 27 VoIP Daughtercard Port Numbering Schemes VoIP Daughtercard Port Numbering Schemes The following table is a representation of the port numbering schemes for all VoIP daughter card configurations in either an OmniAccess 512 or an Omni Switch Router Although FXS and FXO installations must include a VSA daughtercard for purposes of this table only the VSA card is not specified a maximum of two FXS or two FXO grand daughtercards can be installed per VSA daughtercard When determining valid port numbers use this list as a refer ence e Each VSD has two ports e Each VSB has four ports e Each VSA FXS has four ports e Each VSA FXO has two ports Notes OSR configurations are currently limited to a maximum capacity of two daughtercards per switc
98. must be set to the corresponding protocol type before any commands for E amp M Wink Start Immediate Start and Delay Start Signaling and FXS FXO Loop and Ground Start commands will take effect Page 5 105 VoIP Commands voice signaling emd out detail duration max Command Usage Specify maximum E amp M delay start detection time on M lead Syntax Options voice signaling channel lt s ol pori startChannel endChannel gt emd out delay duration max imum lt value gt Definitions slot Specifies chassis slot number where VSM is installed e g 2 port Specifies physical port number on voice daughtercard e g 1 startChannel The first number in the range of voice channels e g 1 endChannel The last number in the range of voice channels e g 30 Syntax Note Be sure to separate the start and end range numbers with a hyphen e g 1 30 imum Optional command syntax Type either max or maximum in the command line value Specifies the maximum duration of the delay signal response on the M lead before a glare condition on outgoing calls can be declared in milliseconds from 5 to 60 000 e g 100 Syntax Note Do not use commas when entering the value for the maximum E amp M delay signal response on the M lead before a glare condi tion can be declared for example 1 000 will return a syntax error message Default The default value is 8000 milliseconds Command Examples voice sig
99. name a z A Z 0 9 space and A_ amp 1 lt gt QOTIt JormatString Identifies the phone group format string e g xxx maximum length of characters 24 The only character permitted in the phone group format string x and X Syntax Notes Valid field separators include _ lt or space no hyphens field separators are not allowed for local exten sions For this command only a dialed digit can be 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 and x For the format string a dialed digit cannot follow an x designa tor there must be at least one x up to seven placeholder or designators allowed Format is optional if format specified the phone group numbers to include in range of digits command is not allowed Also if format specified then site prefix digits must be set and turned ON via the voice phone group site prefix digits and voice phone group site prefix on off commands If a termination digit has been set via the VSD termination digit command then that digit cannot be used in this command The digits specified in the site prefix digits and the number of digits implied by the format must be unique on the entire network numbering plan for different types Default None Command Example voice phone group salem_engr1 format 1xxx voice phone group salem_engr2 format 2xxx voice phone group salem_engr3 format 81x xxxx voice phone group calab_engr1 format 818 xxxx voice phone group calab_engr2 form
100. permitted in the numbering plan name a z A Z 0 9 space and A_ amp 1 lt gt C 1 round robin Indicates numbering plan uses round robin hunting method to find open lines for incom ing calls top down Indicates numbering plan uses top down hunting method to find open lines for incoming calls Default The default setting is round robin Command Example voice numbering plan salem plan1 hunt method round robin voice numbering plan calab plan2 hunt method top down Remarks This command also groups related destinations together The round robin hunting method starts from the destination member just after the last used destination member each time a hunt request is received The last used destination member is remembered across sessions The top down hunting method starts from the first destination member in the hunt group each time a new session is started Hunt groups allow telephone lines to be organized so that when the first line tried is unavail able for an incoming call the next available line using either the round robin or top down method is hunted until an open line is located Page 5 255 VoIP Commands voice numbering plan description Command Usage Define numbering plan of specified phone group optional Syntax Options voice numbering plan lt NumberingPlanName gt description lt string gt Definitions NumberingPlanName Identif
101. phone group format page 5 243 voice phone group add numbers page 5 247 Strip digit length no strip digits CR Digital Interface type T1 W voice phone group strip digit length page 5 244 voice port interface type page 5 34 Digital Interface type E1 QSIG CX voice port interface type page 5 34 voice signaling companding page 5 77 Page 3 58 VoIP Networks with Interoperability Example 23 VoIP Networks with Interoperability Example 23 OmniPCX and Euro PRI This dialing scheme is used to connect a voice daughtercard to an OmniPCX using Euro PRI 1 818 878 2000 i Extensions to 878 2999 Voice off of PBX 1 I npa nxx xxxx Daughtercard 1 ae Pee IP 192 168 11 2 8188782999 Port 1720 Extensions 001 33 0 1 55 6 7000 to off of PBX 2 7999 Daughtercard m 001331 2 a3 5567000 IP 192 168 12 2 to 7999 Port 1720 OmniPCX Example 23 OmniPCX 4400 and Euro PRI LEGEND for Diagram Components PBX 1 Configuration PBX 2 Configuration Expects to receive eleven digits on trunk D and Expects to receive one to 23 digits on trunk and then uses these digits to route calls to lines A then uses these digits to route calls to lines B Routes calls starting with 1 818 878 2xxx to Routes calls starting with 011 33 0 1 556 7xx
102. plan calab plan2 Remarks Numbering plans associate one or more groups to one or more destinations hunting targets to be called Page 5 249 VoIP Commands voice no numbering plan Command Usage Delete numbering plan with specified name Syntax Options voice no numbering plan lt NumberingPlanName gt Definitions NumberingPlanName Identifies the numbering plan by name e g salem plan1 maximum length of 40 charac ters The following characters are permitted in the numbering plan name a z A Z 0 9 space and A_ amp 1 lt gt C E Default None Command Example voice no numbering plan salem plan1 voice no numbering plan calab plan2 Page 5 250 VoIP Commands view voice numbering plan Command Usage Delete numbering plan with specified name Syntax Options view voice numbering plan lt NumberingPlanName gt Definitions NumberingPlanName Identifies the numbering plan by name e g salem plan1 maximum length of 40 charac ters The following characters are permitted in the numbering plan name a z A Z 0 9 space and A_ amp 1 lt gt C E Default None Command Example view voice numbering plan salem plan1 view voice numbering plan calab plan2 Screen Output To view a voice numbering plan type view voice numbering plan followed by a valid number ing plan na
103. profile cp5 fax rate 14400 voice coding profile cp5 call progress tone detection on voice coding profile cp5 v 18 tone detection off voice coding profile cp5 single frequency tone detection on voice coding profile cp5 voice activity detection threshold mode adaptive voice coding profile cp5 voice echo canceller comfort noise mode static voice coding profile cp5 voice comfort noise level 40 voice coding profile cp5 echo canceller refresh configuration refresh voice coding profile cp5 echo canceller refresh state on voice coding profile cp5 caller id off voice coding profile cp5 switchover off Page 5 179 VoIP Commands voice coding profile all reset Command Usage Reset all coding profiles for voice switching daughtercard to defaults and delete all existing coding profiles at the same time Not available this release Syntax Options voice coding profile all reset Remarks Coding profile factory default settings are currently available only from the source code Page 5 180 VoIP Commands voice channel available coding profile Command Usage Relate coding profile to specified voice channel Syntax Options voice channel lt s ol portl startChannel endChannel gt unjavailable coding profile codingProfName all Definitions slot Specifies the chassis slot number where VSM is installed
104. route calls to trunk K Routes four digits calls starting with 81 to trunk K and then the VoIP network uses these digits to route calls to trunk Q Routes three digit calls starting with 901 908 to trunk Q and then the VoIP network uses these digits to route calls to the corresponding port line on Voice Routes three digit calls starting with 901 908 to trunk K and then the VoIP network uses these digits to route calls to the corresponding port Cine on Voice Daughtercard 2 Daughtercard 2 Remarks Supported VoIP features and main CLI commands used with this dialing scheme are as follows Features Supported Primary CLI Commands Used H 323 gateway to voice daughtercard A voice destination local channel page 5 231 Local channel two hunt groups 24 channels per group T1 F voice numbering plan hunt method page 5 255 voice numbering plan destination member page 5 257 voice numbering plan phone group member page 5 258 Site prefix no site prefix D Voice phone group type four digit local extensions L voice phone group site prefix page 5 238 voice phone group type page 5 240 voice phone group format page 5 243 voice phone group add numbers page 5 247 Strip digit length no strip digits CR voice phone group strip digit length page 5 244 Digital Interface type E1 ISDN PRI Euro PRD Y Digital Interface ty
105. s See Chapter 4 Setup and Installation Page 5 18 VoIP Commands voice daughter card activate Command Usage Activate previously configured voice switching daughtercard parameters Syntax Options voice daughter card lt s ot card gt activate Definitions slot Specifies slot number of switching module installed in chassis e g 2 card_number Specifies the voice daughtercard position number e g 1 Syntax Note This command is always required and must only be issued after all other relevant VoIP CLI commands have been configured See Chapter 5 Setup and Installation for details regarding its use in the vsmboot asc file If using this command on the CLI all channels should be placed out of service via the voice channel state command Not avail able this release It is recommended that this command be used only during off hours or after connected devices are first instructed to stop rout ing calls to the card Default None Command Examples voice daughter card 2 1 activate voice daughter card 2 2 activate Remarks This command is required and must be included in the master vsmboot asce file as per Chap ter 5 Setup and Installation This command activates all previously configured voice switching daughtercard parameters by transferring cached parameters to the daughtercard and then placing the parameters into service from the card Using
106. set to the corresponding protocol type before any commands for E amp M Wink Start Immediate Start and Delay Start Signaling and FXS FXO Loop and Ground Start commands will take effect Page 5 117 VoIP Commands voice signaling fxo ls supervisory disconnect Command Usage Specify Foreign Exchange Office FXO Loop Start duration of supervisory disconnect detec tion signal Syntax Options Remarks voice signaling channel lt s ol port startChannel endChannel gt fxo Is supervisory disconnect lt value gt Definitions slot Specifies chassis slot number where VSM is installed e g 2 port Specifies physical port number on voice daughtercard e g 1 startChannel The first number in the range of voice channels e g 1 endChannel The last number in the range of voice channels e g 30 Syntax Note Be sure to separate the start and end range numbers with a hyphen e g 1 30 value Specifies the fxo ls incoming ring signal debounce delay interval in milliseconds from 1 to 60 000 e g 600 If the loop current drops below the specified value for a period of time it is not considered a supervisory disconnect of the signal Syntax Notes Do not use commas when entering the duration of the fxo ls supervisory disconnect CPC signal value for example 10 000 will return a syntax error message To use this command detection of the fxo ls supervisory discon nect signal must b
107. setup for specified telephony sig naling channel off Turns OFF voice fax hard coded modem or data call setup for specified telephony sig naling channel Default The default setting is no override data setup Command Examples voice signaling channel 2 1 1 12 no override voice setup voice signaling channel 2 2 13 24 override voice setup on voice signaling channel 2 3 1 30 override modem setup off voice signaling channel 2 1 1 12 no override data setup voice signaling channel 2 2 13 24 override fax setup on voice signaling channel 2 3 1 30 override fax setup off Page 5 171 VoIP Commands Coding Profiles The commands listed and described below are used to relate Coding Profiles to channels and configure the following associated components and functions codecs caller ID voice mode parameters voice network buffers voice activity detection tone detection echo canceller facsimile modem facsimile T 38 mode and silence detection Create Coding Profile Delete Coding Profile View Coding Profile Reset all Coding Profiles to Factory Defaults Relate to Channels voice channel coding profile preferred coding profile voice fax modem data for calls on specified voice channel optional General Parameters codec type for coding profile Voice Mode Parameters coding profile voice packet interval size and field information size Voice Network Buffer coding profile buffer mode adaptive static coding profile no
108. signaling channel 2 3 1 30 em clear confirm wait max 45000 Remarks In order to use this command the voice signaling protocol command must be set to the corre sponding protocol type of EXM Wink Start Immediate Start or Delay Start Signaling Page 5 86 VoIP Commands voice signaling em guard all Command Usage Specify Ear amp Mouth signaling time to wait between termination and origination Syntax Options voice signaling channel lt s ol pori startChannel endChannel gt em guard all lt value gt Definitions slot Specifies chassis slot number where VSM is installed e g 2 port Specifies physical port number on voice daughtercard e g 1 startChannel The first number in the range of voice channels e g 1 endChannel The last number in the range of voice channels e g 30 Syntax Note Be sure to separate the start and end range numbers with a hyphen e g 1 30 value After an aborted call specifies the time period delay interval in milliseconds e g 400 from 0 to 60 000 when neither incoming nor outgoing calls are accepted or initiated Syntax Note Do not use commas when entering the E amp M time span Gn which no incoming or outgoing calls are accepted or initiated for call termination and origination value for example 10 000 will return a syntax error message Default The default value is 400 Command Examples voice signaling channel 2 1 1 12 em guard all 40
109. signaling for network overlap dialing on off 5 168 Override call signaling for information element IE transport on off 5 169 Override call signaling for QSIG information element IE transport on off 5 170 Override call signaling for voice fax modem data setup on off 5 171 CODING PROFILES 5 172 Create coding profile with specified name 5 174 Delete coding profile 5 175 View coding profile 5 176 Reset all coding profiles to factory defaults not available this release 5 180 Coding Profiles Relate to Channels Relate coding profile to specified voice channel 5 181 Set preferred coding profile voice fax modem data for calls on specified voice channel optional 5 182 Coding Profiles General Parameters Specify codec type for coding profile 5 183 Coding Profiles Voice Mode Parameters Specify coding profile voice packet interval size and voice information field size 5 185 Coding Profiles Voice Network Delay Buffer Set coding profile buffer mode adaptive static 5 186 Specify coding profile nominal delay buffer 5 187 Specify coding profile maximum delay buffer 5 188 VoIP Commands Coding Profiles Voice Activity Detector Set coding profile voice activity detector on off 5 189 Set coding profile VAD threshold mode adaptive relative 5 190 Set coding profile VAD audio threshold level adaptive relative adaptive
110. the VSX switching module accepts up to two VoIP daughtercards and can only be installed in the Omni Switch Router as follows e A maximum of two 2 VoIP daughtercards can be installed per OSR switch e One VoIP daughtercard can be installed per VSX in a single slot e Two 2 VoIP daughtercards can be installed in 3 1 left and 3 2 right a VSX in a single slot With two digital daughtercards in a VSX in an OSR for instance it is possible to process up to 96 calls T1 or 120 calls E1 per VSX switching module For port scalability up to seven VSX switching modules with two VoIP daughtercards each of the same type can be installed per OSR maximum capacity configuration not available this release Pertinent specifications for the VSX switching module are as follows Notes 4 VoIP daughtercards cannot be installed in an HSX for interfacing with an OSR however two VoIP daughter cards e g two VSBs can be installed in a VSX HSX H into an OSR with an MPX card if necessary In OSR configurations the use of an HRE X device may be required For more information see the Omni Switch Router user manual VSX Technical Specifications Data Rates Supported 1024 and 2048 Kbps Clocking Internal and External MAC Addresses Supported 4096 H 323 IP Addresses Supported 2 Connections Supported ISDN QSIG master slave ETSI FXS FXO Maximum Number of Simultaneous 120 Voice Data Fax Channels Supported
111. the phone group by name e g salem_engr1 maximum length of 40 charac ters The following characters are permitted in the phone group name a z A Z 0 9 space and A_ amp 1 lt gt QOTIIt Turns ON forwarding of voice phone group prefix Turns OFF forwarding of voice phone group prefix The default setting is off Command Example voice phone group salem_engr1 forwarding prefix off voice phone group salem_engr2 forwarding prefix on Page 5 245 VoIP Commands voice phone group forwarding prefix digits Command Usage Specify voice phone group digits to prefix before forwarding call optional Syntax Options voice phone group lt PhoneGroupName gt forwarding prefix digits lt usm TelephonePrefixNum gt Definitions PhoneGroupName Identifies the phone group by name e g salem_engr1 maximum length of 40 charac ters The following characters are permitted in the phone group name a z A Z 0 9 space and A_ amp 1 lt gt QOTIIt PrefixNum Identifies the forwarding prefix digits in the specified phone group e g 9 maximum string length is 14 MAX_DIAL_DIGITS 1 each digit can be either 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 or Syntax Notes To use this command the phone group forwarding prefix command must first be enabled Default The default PrefixNum value is 0 Command Example voice phone group salem_engr1 strip digit 0
112. then dials a prefix to get a specific trunk PBX 1 Extensions off of PBX 1 1300 1899 Extensions off of PBX 2 ze Voice 1 300 to 899 Daughtercard 1 IP 192 168 11 2 Port 1720 WAN Voice H300 to 899 Daughtercard 2 Pip 192 168 12 2 Port 1720 Example 9 Trunk Groups and Mixed Length Extensions LEGEND for Diagram Components PBX 1 Configuration PBX 2 Configuration then uses these digits to calls to line A Expects to receive four digits on trunk D and Expects to receive three digits on trunk E and then uses these digits to route calls to line B Routes calls starting with 1 to lines A Routes calls starting with 3 to lines B Routes calls starting with 3 to trunk G and then Routes calls starting with 1 to trunk H and then the the VoIP network uses these digits to route calls to VoIP network uses these digits to route calls to trunk CE trunk D Page 3 23 VoIP Networks without PSTN Example 9 Remarks In the CLI commands trunk groups are referred to as Site Prefix Supported VoIP features and main CLI commands used with this dialing scheme are as follows Features Supported H 323 gateway to voice daughtercard A Primary CLI Commands Used voice destination local channel page 5 231
113. this command immediately puts all channels on the voice switching daughtercard out of service shuts down the card and automatically erases the previous configuration this includes disconnecting any calls in progress and ignoring any incoming traffic from either the phone or data networks Once the activation command is issued the configuration should be saved to the flash direc tory on the switch via the global dump command The dump command should only be used after a configured voice switching daughtercard has been activated otherwise an invalid configuration might be saved instead which could prevent the switch from booting properly the next time For more details on using this command see Chapter 4 Setup and Installa tion The dump command can be use to create a text file in the flash directory of the switch To view the contents of the generated text file use the view file command For more information refer to the dump and view file command descriptions in the Command Line Reference Guide Page 5 19 VoIP Commands voice dump Command Usage Save current text based configuration to flash global dump save all command The aggre gate configuration is first captured and then saved to a single text file that can be viewed edited or reapplied to additional switches for implementation Syntax Options dump all eature type file name Definitions all Specifies that information for
114. to trunk L and then the VoIP network uses these digits to route calls to trunk Q If the voice daughtercard loses power calls will be routed using PSTN fallback to trunk T Page 3 45 VoIP Networks with PSTN Example 16 Remarks Supported VoIP features and main CLI commands used with this dialing scheme are as follows Features Supported H 323 gateway to voice daughtercard A Primary CLI Commands Used voice destination local channel page 5 231 Local channel two hunt groups 24 channels per group T1 F voice numbering plan hunt method page 5 255 voice numbering plan destination member page 5 257 voice numbering plan phone group member page 5 258 Site prefix single or multiple digits Q voice phone group site prefix page 5 238 voice phone group site prefix digits page 5 239 Voice phone group type NANP exten sions N voice phone group type page 5 240 voice phone group format page 5 243 voice phone group add numbers page 5 247 Voice phone group type PSTN NANP P voice phone group type page 5 240 voice phone group format page 5 243 voice phone group add numbers page 5 247 Strip digit length 7 V voice phone group strip digit length page 5 244 Digital Interface type T1 W voice port interface type page 5 34 Page 3 46 VoIP Networks with PSTN Example 17 VoIP Networks with PSTN E
115. tone detection on off relative call progress tone detection configuration default alternate V 18 tone detection threshold hang time V 18 tone detection threshold level V 18 single tone detection threshold level V 18 single tone detection threshold time Echo Canceller echo canceller non linear sensitivity Acoustic Echo Canceller acoustic echo canceller mode on off acoustic echo canceller non linear processor on off acoustic echo canceller output on off acoustic echo canceller handset hs speaker gain acoustic echo canceller hands free hf speaker gain Page 5 65 VoIP Commands Override Call Signaling Capabilities override call signaling for in band call progress tones on off override call signaling for full call progress tones on off override call signaling for ring back on off override call signaling for in band codec switching on off override call signaling for packet switch PSU codec switching on off override call signaling for network overlap dialing on off override call signaling for information element IE transport on off override call signaling for QSIG information IE transport on off override call signaling for voice fax modem data setup on off Page 5 66 VoIP Commands view voice signaling channel Command Usage Display Telephony Signaling channel s Syntax Options view voice signaling channel lt s ot port startChannel endChannel gt
116. voice channel 2 2 30 telephony level statistics view voice channel 2 2 30 telephony level stats Page 5 267 VoIP Commands view voice channel voice playout stats Command Usage Display cumulative voice play out statistics for call in progress Not available this release Syntax Options view voice channel lt s ol port startChannel endChannel gt voice playout stat istic s Definitions slot Specifies chassis slot number where VSM is installed e g 2 port Specifies physical port number on voice daughtercard e g 1 channel Specifies port channel number range in which to view DSP voice play out statistics e g 25 cumulative for the current call on specified channel istic Optional command syntax Type either stats or statistics in the command line Syntax Notes This command only works from within the command line inter face and cannot be used from within the vsmboot asc file Default None Command Example view voice channel 2 1 25 voice playout statistics view voice channel 2 1 25 voice playout stats view voice channel 2 2 30 voice playout statistics view voice channel 2 2 30 voice playout stats Page 5 268 VoIP Commands view voice channel dsp stats Command Usage Display cumulative DSP receive and transmit statistics Not available this release Syntax Options view voice channel lt s ol porl startChannel endChannel gt dsp stat isti
117. voice port connections in Alcatel s H 323 VoIP gateways Because many aspects of this card are similar to the VSD T1 E1 previously discussed see also VoIP Daughtercard Types on page 2 2 and Voice Switching Daughtercard Digital on page 2 6 Digital Signal Processors DSPs and Available Channels Unlike the VSD T1 E1 VoIP daughtercard shown previously the VSB card does not support any additional DIMMs only the two standard DSP which provide the VSB with eight chan nels See also Digital Signal Processors DSPs DIMMs and Available Channels on page 2 4 for a more details VSB Deadman Switch There are two Deadman switches on the VSB daughtercards One Deadman switch is for ports A and B 1 and 2 and the other is for ports C and D and 4 on a VSX switching module with two VSBs the relays switches on the second card would be for ports A and B 5 and 6 and for ports C and D ports 7 and 8 For more details on the Deadman switch see VSD Deadman Switch on page 2 8 Port numbers can vary depending on the VoIP switch configuration see also VoIP Daughtercard Port Numbering Schemes on page 2 28 Note 4 For the deadman switch to operate properly on the VSB ports 1 and 3 must be configured as TE and ports 2 and 4 must be configured as NT ports are TE NT TE NT VSB NT LT TE Cross Over Toggle Switch There are four NT LT TE Cross Over toggle switches on the VSB daughtercards Each switch is factory set to NT For more i
118. wait for all tones digits to be dialed Syntax Options voice daughter card lt s oi card_number gt dial time wait duration lt timer_value gt Definitions slot Specifies slot number of switching module installed in chassis e g 2 card_number Specifies the voice daughtercard position number e g 1 timer_value Specifies maximum time for dialing timers to wait for all digits to be dialed from 1 to 4 294 967 295 ms e g 30000 100 ms 1 10 of a second 1 000 ms 1 second 10 000 ms 10 seconds 60 000 ms 1 minute 300 000 5 minutes etc second 1 000 ms 1 second 10 000 ms 10 seconds 60 000 ms 1 minute 300 000 5 minutes etc Refer to conversion table see voice daughtercard first digit wait duration command to quickly determine the proper setting Syntax Note Do not use commas when entering a dialing timer value for example 30 000 30 seconds will return a syntax error message Default The default timer_value is 120000 Command Examples voice daughter card 2 1 dial time wait duration 30000 voice daughter card 2 2 dial time wait duration 60000 Remarks When this timer expires unless a termination digit is dialed it assumes the caller is finished dialing digits The numbering plan in use then attempts a match Page 5 28 VoIP Commands voice daughter card termination digit Command Usage Specify DTMF digit used by voice daughtercar
119. 0 value Specifies the signal duration threshold for V 18 tone detection in milliseconds from 5 to 32767 e g 20 Syntax Note Do not use commas when entering the V 18 tone detection threshold hang time value for example 1 000 will return a syntax error message Default The default value is 20 milliseconds Command Examples voice signaling channel 2 1 1 12 v 18 tone detection threshold hang time 50 voice signaling channel 2 2 13 24 v 18 tone detection threshold hang time 10000 voice signaling channel 2 3 1 30 v 18 tone detection threshold hang time 32767 Remarks V 18 threshold commands are used to specify minimum detectable signal values and are especially geared toward improving telecommunications for the hearing or speech impaired for example various thresholds are available to control duration hang time and strength evel or even incremental fractional signaling Page 5 152 VoIP Commands voice signaling v 18 tone detection threshold level Command Usage Set V 18 Annex A signal strength threshold level for tone detection Syntax Options voice signaling channel lt s ol porl stantChannel endChannel gt v 18 tone detection threshold level lt value gt Definitions slot Specifies chassis slot number where VSM is installed e g 2 port Specifies physical port number on voice daughtercard e g 1 startChannel The first number in the range of voice channels e g 1 e
120. 0 VSD Digital VSB EURO BRI Port Configuration ISDN Set E1 ISDN port connection protocol net user qmaster qslave 5 51 Set E1 ISDN connection switch type Net5 Net3 5 53 VSB EURO BRI Port Configuration Set ISDN BRI Euro line type point to point point to multipoint 5 54 Digital Port Configuration ISDN Control and Bearer Channels Not available this release Specify E1 ISDN control Data or D channels 5 55 Specify E1 ISDN bearer B channels 5 57 CHANNEL PROPERTIES Voice Channel Configuration 5 58 Specify voice channel mode 5 59 Specify voice channel Private Line Automatic Ringdown PLAR dial in phone number 5 60 Channel Configuration Channel Operational State Set voice channel initialization in service out of service 5 61 Page 5 5 VoIP Commands TELEPHONY SIGNALING 5 62 View Telephony Signaling channel 5 67 Specify Telephony Signaling protocol 5 68 Signaling Attributes Dial Out Signaling Tones Specify time to wait before first tone digit is sent dialed out 5 69 Specify duration for a single tone digit 5 70 Specify duration to pause between tones digits 5 71 Specify out dialing port type 5 72 Signaling Attributes Channel Timing Specify maximum call time length 5 73 Specify time to wait for call to be answered 5 74 Specify time to wait to force caller to disconnect 5 75 Specify time to wait to te
121. 0 voice channel available coding profile 0 0000 00 00 eee 5 181 voice channel assign preferred coding profile 004 5 182 voice coding profile coding type 2 00 00 eee 5 183 voice coding profile voice packet interval 0 0 0000000005 5 185 voice coding profile voice network delay buffer mode 5 186 voice coding profile voice network delay buffer nominal delay 5 187 voice coding profile voice network delay buffer max delay 5 188 voice coding profile voice activity detector 0 0 00 0000004 5 189 voice coding profile voice activity detection threshold mode 5 190 voice coding profile voice activity detection threshold level 5 191 voice coding profile voice dimf relay cei ew va we Sw ee 5 192 voice coding profile switchover saaana 0 00000 eee 5 193 voice coding profile call progress tone detection 004 5 194 voice coding profile voice dtmf relay nnau ee eae3 ke Sree ead 5 195 voice coding profile single frequency tone detection 5 196 voice coding profile voice echo canceller 1 0 0 0 0 000000 5 197 voice coding profile voice echo canceller non linear 0 5 198 voice coding profile voice echo canceller comfort noise mode 5 199 voice coding profile echo canceller noise level 06 00 4408 40 ud oe seuss 5 200 voice coding profile voice echo
122. 0 voice signaling channel 2 2 13 24 em guard all 20000 voice signaling channel 2 3 1 30 em guard all 60000 Remarks In order to use this command the voice signaling protocol command must be set to the corre sponding protocol type of E amp M Wink Start Immediate Start or Delay Start Signaling Page 5 87 VoIP Commands voice signaling em guard out Command Usage Specify Ear amp Mouth signaling time to wait between termination and receiving Syntax Options voice signaling channel lt s ol pori stantChannel endChannel gt em guard out lt value gt Definitions slot Specifies chassis slot number where VSM is installed e g 2 port Specifies physical port number on voice daughtercard e g 1 startChannel The first number in the range of voice channels e g 1 endChannel The last number in the range of voice channels e g 30 Syntax Note Be sure to separate the start and end range numbers with a hyphen e g 1 30 value Specifies the time period delay interval in milliseconds e g 400 from 0 to 60 000 when only incoming calls are accepted or initiated Outgoing calls are aborted Syntax Note Do not use commas when entering the E amp M extended time span in which only incoming calls are accepted or initiated for call termination and receiving value for example 10 000 will return a syntax error message Default The default value is 400 Command Examples voice signali
123. 00 voice signaling channel 2 2 13 24 emw in wink wait max 30000 voice signaling channel 2 3 1 30 emw in wink wait max 60000 Remarks The voice signaling protocol command must be set to the corresponding protocol type before any commands for E amp M Wink Start Immediate Start and Delay Start Signaling and FXS FXO Loop and Ground Start commands will take effect Page 5 93 VoIP Commands voice signaling emw in wink duration Command Usage Specify duration of Ear amp Mouth wink delay on incoming calls Syntax Options voice signaling channel lt s ol pori starntChannel endChannel gt emw in wink duration lt value gt Definitions slot Specifies chassis slot number where VSM is installed e g 2 port Specifies physical port number on voice daughtercard e g 1 startChannel The first number in the range of voice channels e g 1 endChannel The last number in the range of voice channels e g 30 Syntax Note Be sure to separate the start and end range numbers with a hyphen e g 1 30 value Specifies the duration of the wink signal on the E lead for incoming calls in milliseconds from 5 to 60 000 e g 200 Syntax Note Do not use commas when entering the E amp M wink duration value for incoming calls for example 200 will return a syntax error message Default The default value is 200 Command Examples voice signaling channel 2 1 1 12 emw in wink duration 200 voice signalin
124. 000 voice signaling channel 2 3 1 30 emi digit wait 60000 Specifies chassis slot number where VSM is installed e g 2 Specifies physical port number on voice daughtercard e g 1 The first number in the range of voice channels e g 1 The last number in the range of voice channels e g 30 Syntax Note Be sure to separate the start and end range numbers with a hyphen e g 1 30 Specifies time period in milliseconds from 0 to 60 000 e g 200 to wait for the voice daughtercard to be ready before collecting digits The line stays off hook and generates a dial tone if glare condition detected in the interim Syntax Note Do not use commas when entering the E amp M immediate start time value i e time to wait for before digit collection is enabled and an off hook congestion tone with glare condition is reported for example 5 000 will return a syntax error message The default value is 200 milliseconds Remarks The voice signaling protocol command must be set to the corresponding protocol type before any commands for E amp M Wink Start Immediate Start and Delay Start Signaling and FXS FXO Loop and Ground Start commands will take effect Page 5 100 VoIP Commands voice signaling emd in delay min Command Usage Specify minimum E amp M delay start response to off hook dial tone state Syntax Options voice signaling channel lt s ol pori stantChannel en
125. 000 00 0200 eee 3 25 Strip Digit Length 2 eresie en bbe ea A eek ee A N 3 25 VoIP Networks without PSTN Example 11 aaa 3 27 Trunk Groups and Eleven Digit Extensions 0 0005 3 27 VoIP Networks without PSTN Example 12 0 2 0 0 0 002000 eee 3 29 Hi523 Gatekeeper oras 485i poo Eb eh a eh ee Beh oad dels 3 29 VoIP Networks with PSTN Example 13 ag4c 4 38 6 pK OS EH ae eR MNS Bes 3 31 North American PSTN and VoIP Calls 0 0 0 0 00 ee 3231 page vi Table of Contents VoIP Networks with PSTN Example 14 aie 546 KE AEE GOR 3 37 North American PSTN International PSTN and VoIP Calls 3 37 VoIP Networks with PSTN Example 15 0 2 0 0 0000 eee ee 3 43 PSTN and Eleven Digit Extensions nananana a 3 43 VoIP Networks with PSTN Example 16 ununa 3 45 FAX Over IP N twork toaca nioge di e e aoto ka et a DRED 3 45 VoIP Networks with PSTN Example 17 sig ih 33 4 aaa a 3 47 Mixed Digital and Analog Voice Daughtercards nnana aaa 3 47 VoIP Networks with PSTN Example 18 auaa 3 49 Caller IDISTA Ge ergs gk e e e E ast Bes a BERD ERE BR Pane AE Maines 3 49 VoIP Networks with Interoperability Example 19 0 3 51 H 323 Gateway to Microsoft NetMeeting without FastStart 3 51 VoIP Networks with Interoperability Example 20 04 3 53 H 323 Gateway to Cisco Router 2 0 naaa a
126. 1 W voice port interface type page 5 34 Page 3 54 VoIP Networks with Interoperability Example 21 H 323 Gateway to OmniPCX 4400 VoIP Networks with Interoperability Example 21 This dialing scheme is used to connect an H 323 Gateway to an OmniPCX 4400 via an ether net port LIOE Link Optimizer Ethernet card and requires full compliance with H 323 Version 1 v1 however only H 323 v1 voice capability is currently supported by the OmniPCX The OmniPCX does not support Codec Fax T 38 The OmniPCX 4400 also requires installation of an LIOE voice card to provide VoIP Refer to the Alcatel OmniPCX 4400 Opera tions Manual for more information Extensions 1 818 878 2000 to 2999 Voice Daughtercard off of PBX 1 1 1 npa nxx xXxxx 1 8188782000 IP 192 168 11 2 to 8188782999 1 1 1 1 1 t aa Mgs 1 Gz 1 1 Extensions off of PBX 1 T 6035982000 E VoIP LIOE 2 IP 12 2 Port 1720 to 6035982999 Port 1720 Example 21 H 323 Gateway to OmniPCX 4400 LEGEND for Diagram Components PBX 1 Configuration OmniPCX 1 Configuration Expects to receive eleven digits on trunk D and then uses these digits to route calls to lines A Expects to receive eleven digits in H 3233 packet on ethernet WAN Z and then uses these
127. 1 30 value Specifies the time period between ring pulses to detect ringing in milliseconds from 1 to 60 000 e g 550 Syntax Note Do not use commas when entering the fxo ls between ring pulses ring detection value for example 10 000 will return a syntax error message Default The default value is 550 milliseconds Command Examples voice signaling channel 2 1 1 12 fxo Is ringing inter pulse 550 voice signaling channel 2 2 13 24 fxo Is ringing inter pulse 30000 voice signaling channel 2 3 1 30 fxo Is ringing inter pulse 60000 Remarks The voice signaling protocol command must be set to the corresponding protocol type before any commands for E amp M Wink Start Immediate Start and Delay Start Signaling and FXS FXO Loop and Ground Start commands will take effect Page 5 121 VoIP Commands voice signaling fxo ls caller id Command Usage Set Foreign Exchange Office Loop Start FXO LS to detect inbound caller ID on off before the second ring Syntax Options voice signaling channel lt s ol port startChannel endChannel gt fxo Is caller id on off Definitions slot Specifies chassis slot number where VSM is installed e g 2 port Specifies physical port number on voice daughtercard e g 1 startChannel The first number in the range of voice channels e g 1 endChannel The last number in the range of voice channels e g 30 Syntax Note Be sure to separate the start and
128. 1 30 em seize detect 5000 Remarks In order to use this command the voice signaling protocol command must be set to the corre sponding protocol type of E amp M Wink Start Immediate Start or Delay Start Signaling Page 5 83 VoIP Commands voice signaling em clear detect Command Usage Specify E amp M Signaling time to wait before declaring off hook clear detect i e time off hook before call clearing is declared Syntax Options voice signaling channel lt s ol port startChannel endChannel gt em clear detect lt value gt Definitions slot Specifies chassis slot number where VSM is installed e g 2 port Specifies physical port number on voice daughtercard e g 1 startChannel The first number in the range of voice channels e g 1 endChannel The last number in the range of voice channels e g 30 Syntax Note Be sure to separate the start and end range numbers with a hyphen e g 1 30 value Specifies the E lead clear detect delay interval in milliseconds from 5 to 5 000 e g 50 before call clearing is declared M lead needs to be on hook before call clearing can be declared Syntax Note Do not use commas when entering the E amp M clear detect value on the M lead for example 5 000 will return a syntax error message Default The default value is 400 Command Examples voice signaling channel 2 2 13 24 em clear detect 400 voice signaling channel 2 3 1 30 em clear de
129. 1 CRC MF are ignored The default frame format setting is none voice port 2 1 frame format none voice port 2 2 frame format superframe voice port 2 3 frame format extended superframe Page 5 36 VoIP Commands Remarks The voice port frame format command is used to indicate the type of DSL line implementing the circuit The circuit affects the number of bits per second that the circuit can reasonably carry as well as the interpretation of the usage and error statistics The time slot divisions which are the basis for T1 and E1 circuit connections e g multi plexed Digital Service DS 1 are determined as follows for frames superframes extended superframes and multiframes T1 Framing A T1 frame consists of 24 8 bit time slots and a 1 bit synchronization and control bit Twelve 12 T1 frames can be grouped into a superframe SF D4 or 24 T1 frames can be grouped into an extended superframe In each superframe the 6th and 12th frame may contain robbed bit A B signaling which means the least significant bit is robbed from each time in the 6th and 12th frame and used for signaling In extended superframes this robbed bit signaling A B C D occurs in the 6th 12th 18th and 24th frames E1 Framing The E1 frame consists of 32 8 bit time slots two of these slots are used for synchronization and multiframe signaling for 256 bits per frame at 2 048 megabits per second Sixteen 16 E1 frames are grouped
130. 12 voice destination tocalab local channel to_vsd2 1 13 24 Remarks This command is used to specify a local VSM based gateway VSD VSA and VSB destination at the channel level and add it to the list of destinations The endpoint name string is an H 323 endpoint destination as defined in the H 323 endpoint destination command Page 5 231 VoIP Commands voice no destination Command Usage Delete an H 323 endpoint or local channel destination with specified name Syntax Options voice no destination lt DestName gt Definitions DestName Identifies either the voice call H 323 endpoint destination or local channel destination by name e g to salem or the maximum length of 40 characters The following characters are permitted in the call destination name a z A Z 0 9 space and A_ amp I1 lt gt QO th Default None Command Example voice no destination tosalem voice no destination to_vsd1 Page 5 232 VoIP Commands view voice destination Command Usage Display an H 323 endpoint or local channel destination with specified name Syntax Options view voice destination lt DestName gt Definitions DestName Identifies either the voice call H 323 endpoint destination or local channel destination by name e g to salem or the maximum length of 40 characters The following characters are permitted in the call destination n
131. 2 HA_ amp I lt gt CQO IKI on Turns ON voice echo canceller mode for specified coding profile off Turns OFF voice echo canceller mode for specified coding profile Default The default setting is on Command Example voice coding profile salemprof1 voice echo canceller on voice coding profile calapprof2 voice echo canceller off Remarks Voice switching daughtercards perform echo removal on PCM samples using a proprietary double filter algorithm that provides stability and performance up to 128 ms echo cancella tion tail length See also ITU T Recommendation G 165 Echo Cancellers For more information on echo cancellers refer to the echo and acoustic echo cancellation commands used for Telephony Signaling Page 5 197 VoIP Commands voice coding profile voice echo canceller non linear Command Usage Set coding profile voice echo canceller non linear processor mode on off Syntax Options voice coding profile lt codingProfName gt voice echo canceller non linear on off Definitions codingProfName Identifies coding profile by name e g salemprof1 maximum length of 40 characters The following characters are permitted in the coding profile name a z A Z 0 9 space and t HA_ amp Il lt gt CQO IKI on Turns ON non linear voice echo canceller processor mode for specified coding profile off Turns OFF non linear voice echo canceller processor mode for specifi
132. 2 0 2 0000s 5 93 voice signaling emw in wink duration 000 0000 eee ee 5 94 voice signaling emw in wink digit ignore 0 0 0 0 0200 eee 5 95 voice signaling emw out wink wait max 1 aaaea aa eee 5 96 voice signaling emw out wink duration min 0 00005 5 97 voice signaling emw out wink duration max 0 0 000000005 5 98 voice signaling emi glare report 2 ee 5 99 voice signaling emi digit wait 0 eee 5 100 voice signaling emd in delay min 0 0 00 000 a 5 101 voice signaling emd in delay max naunau aaau eee 5 102 voice signaling emd in digit ignore uuaa aaa ee 5 103 voice signaling emd out integrity check 0 000000000 a 5 104 voice signaling emd out delay duration min 00005 5 105 voice signaling emd out detail duration max 0 0000000000 0 5 106 voice signaling emd out delay check 00 000 0000 eee eee 5 107 voice signaling fxs ls on hook debounce 000 000 a 5 108 voice signaling fxs ls off hook debounce 0 000 000 eee eee 5 109 voice signaling fxs ls seize detect 0 ee 5 110 voice signaling fxs ls originate clear detect 2 0 00 00 00000 5 111 voice signaling fxs ls answer clear detect 00 0000 eee eee 5 112 voice signaling fxs ls supervisory disconnect wait 000005 5 113 page ix Table of Contents page x voice signaling fxs ls supervisory disconnect duration
133. 2 1 loop back mode none voice port 2 2 loop back mode payload voice port 2 3 loop back mode line voice port 2 4 loop back mode inward Remarks This variable represents the loop back configuration of the T1 DS 1 interface and indicates what type of code is being sent across the T1 interface by the device A bad value is returned in response to a requested loop back state that the interface providing read write access does not support Page 5 48 VoIP Commands voice port signaling mode Command Usage Specify voice port channel signaling mode Syntax Options voice port lt slot port gt signaling mode none cas ccs Definitions slot port none cas ccs Default Refer to definitions above Command Examples voice port 2 1 signaling mode none voice port 2 2 signaling mode CAS voice port 2 3 signaling mode CCS Specifies slot number of voice switching daughtercard installed in switching module e g 2 Specifies physical port number on voice daughtercard e g 1 Indicates that no bits are reserved for signaling on this channel Indicates that T1 Channel Associated Signaling CAS is in use applies only to VSD T1 Indicates that Common Channel Signaling CCS is in use on channel 16 of an E1 link applies to VSD E1 VSD E1 ISDN PRD and to channel 3 VSB BRI Euro voice daughtercard Remarks A no signal mode means that no bits are reserved for signali
134. 2 2 13 24 override psu codec switching on voice signaling channel 2 2 1 30 override psu codec switching off Page 5 167 VoIP Commands voice signaling override network overlap dialing Command Usage Override call signaling for network overlap dialing on off This command should only be used under the supervision of trained personnel Syntax Options voice signaling channel lt s oi port startChannel endChannel gt no override network overlap dialing on off Definitions slot Specifies chassis slot number where VSM is installed e g 2 port Specifies physical port number on voice daughtercard e g 1 startChannel The first number in the range of voice channels e g 1 endChannel The last number in the range of voice channels e g 30 Syntax Note Be sure to separate the start and end range numbers with a hyphen e g 1 30 no Optional command syntax Syntax Note If no is used then ON and OFF cannot be specified on Turns ON network overlap dialing for specified telephony signaling channel off Turns OFF network overlap dialing for specified telephony signaling channel Default The default setting is no override network overlap dialing Command Examples voice signaling channel 2 1 1 12 no override network overlap dialing voice signaling channel 2 2 13 24 override network overlap dialing on voice signaling channel 2 3 1 30 override network overlap dialing off Remarks The
135. 2 statistics not available this release 5 273 Reset Statistics Reset telephony statistics not available this release 5 274 Reset channel statistics not available this release 5 275 Page 5 12 VoIP Commands Reset voice play out statistics not available this release 5 276 Reset DSP receive and transmit statistics not available this release 5 277 Reset error statistics not available this release 5 278 Reset modem statistics not available this release 5 279 Reset fax statistics not available this release 5 280 Reset ISDN level not available this release 5 281 Page 5 13 VoIP Commands Voice Switching Daughtercard Commands The commands listed and described below are used to configure and activate voice switch ing daughtercards and include the following daughtercard functions dialing timers gateway mode and voice ports Dialing timers determine how the DSPs on the daughtercard detect digits and the ports provide an interface from the switch to the PSTN via a PBX or key system The H 323 gate way enables or disables communications between the switch the PSTN and the PBX or key system Voice Switching Daughtercard Activate assign IP address mask to voice switching daughtercard assign IP address to voice switching daughtercard assign default gateway to voice switching daughtercard activate voice switching daughtercard activate voice switching daughtercard con
136. 23 VoIP gateways VoIP daughtercards by using sets of pre configured parameters that can be assigned to the various manageable components Various configuration elements e g profiles have a user defined name associated with it VoIP daughtercard configurations are stored in the switch Destinations which consist of remote network and local calling gateways including H 323 gatekeepers allow Network Administrators to configure a destination IP address and its specific protocol Local channel destinations are considered subdestinations Destinations which are appended to hunt methods are configured at the daughtercard level Phone groups are used to indicate what telephone numbers are available They also define digits to be stripped and forwarded Phone groups are configured at the daughtercard level Voice numbering plans use hunt methods to arrange telephone lines so that when calls come into the network they will ring in a certain order For example to use PSTN fallback all phone groups must be set up with the last group element indicating the local destination or gateway to fall back on when a call cannot be placed over the VoIP network Hunt methods in voice numbering plans are configured at the daughtercard level Hunt meth ods dictate what to do if the first line tried is busy i e hunt methods are used to track down lines in a certain order until an available line is located Phone line destinations can be grouped as desired in us
137. 28 MB 60 channel VSD daughtercards be installed for the following reasons e Although a VSD with 12 channels three std DSPs has two operational T1 ports that can provide up to 48 bidirectional channels only the first 12 simultaneous calls can be handled per DSP therefore without additional DSPs DIMMs the 13th call and all subsequent calls will be ignored completely i e no dial busy signal or comfort noise will be generated until either a channel becomes available or additional DIMMs are installed e The installation of additional DIMMs in effect provides redundancy in the event of a DSP failure Notes 4 There are no DIMMs on the VSA daughtercard per se only on the FXO or FXS grand daughtercards with a maximum of one channel each per port See Voice Switching Daughtercard Analog on page 2 19 for more details DIMMs are not field upgradeable however the flash memory on the boards is field upgradeable The flash memory must always match the image used or the daughtercard will not function properly if at all Contact Alcatel s Customer Support for details on obtaining the appropriate flash and or corresponding image upgrade Page 2 4 Introduction Digital DSP DSP Voice Port i H A DSP M DSP M M M DSP DSP 4
138. 3 53 VoIP Networks with Interoperability Example 21 3 55 H 323 Gateway to OmniPCX 4400 244 cde wks OER a 3 55 VoIP Networks with Interoperability Example 22 4 3 57 OmniPCX 4400 and E1 QSIG 2 a 3 57 VoIP Networks with Interoperability Example 23 000005 3 59 OmniPCX and Euro PRI ek gaa naoa ek eee ee ee ES 3 59 VoIP Networks with Interoperability Example 24 0000 3 61 Other PBXS WAU Tos ope cand Bere hana aoa 5 RES ORGY KOR BST PROS 3 61 VoIP Networks with Interoperability Example 25 0 0000 3 63 Other PBXs with Euro BRI 2444 5 O6 45 454 2 oy SHE t gel BELG SE RS 3 63 VoIP Networks with Interoperability Example 26 0000 3 05 Mixed European Digital and Analog Voice Daughtercards 3 65 AVNDS Master List of Features by CLI Command 0 000000000 3 67 4 Setup and Installation 0 ee 4 1 COMIPOUENIS WE VolP kecses gugana ech est A Bek AE NSO ALE ea aR 4 1 Assumptions and Recommendations 0 a ee 4 2 Configuration Restrictions 2 6 eee 4 3 General Installation Procedures ete si te naaa oth WSL hee eek a Sa ne Ne op Wha de 4 4 Instructions for Additional VoIP Installations 0 0 0 000 eee eee 4 7 Example VSM Boot File vsmboot ase 0 0 0 ee 4 8 page vii Table of Contents 5 VolP C mma ds o ci creed or ga ees nes ated Gena a Bev te HBR 5 1 Voice Switc
139. 720 1001 1024 AA T1 48 Hunt Groups WAN 48 Hunt Groups Ext Channel T1 PBX 2 N Voice Daughtercard 2 Extensions off of PBX 2 gaj 2001 Ez IP 192 168 12 2 Port 1720 Example 8 48 Individual Hunt Groups One Channel Per Group Page 3 21 VoIP Networks without PSTN Example 8 LEGEND for Diagram Components PBX 1 Configuration PBX 2 Configuration route calls to lines A Expects to receive four digits on channels 1 through 24 on trunk D and then uses these digits to 1 through 24 on trunk and then uses these digits Expects to receive four digits on channels to route calls to lines B Routes calls starting with 1 to lines A digits to route calls to trunk CE Routes calls starting with 2 to lines B Routes calls starting with 2 to channels 1 through 24 Routes calls starting with 1 to channels 1 through 24 on trunk G and then the VoIP network uses these on trunk H and then the VoIP network uses these digits to route calls to trunk D Remarks Supported VoIP features and main CLI commands used with this dialing scheme are as follows Features Supported Primary CLI Commands Used H 323
140. 911 The following extensions are also not allowed 0000 to 0999 1000 to 1999 4110 to 4119 and 9110 to 9119 Cautions 4 Companies using Alcatel s VoIP feature are responsible for programming and testing all dialing schemes to reduce the likelihood or to eliminate the possibility of toll fraud from the PSTN Page 3 37 VoIP Networks with PSTN Example 14 International PSTN Calls Overview This dialing scheme is used to handle international telephone calls Not available this release Extensions off of PBX 1 _ 0 411 911 q 2000 2999 See Diagrams Intl Calls Outbound Inbound VoIP Extensions off of PBX 2 aa Voice Daughtercard 1 IP 192 168 11 2 Port 1720 stripped digits 1XX XXX XXX WAN stripped digits 1 XXX XXX Y sa 7000 to 7999 Example 14 International PSTN Calls Overview 011 331 55 6 7000 Voice Daughtercard 2 to 7900 IP 192 168 12 2 Port 1720 LEGEND for Diagram Components not available this release PBX 1 Configuration PBX 2 Configuration Page 3 38 VoIP Networks with PSTN Example 14 Remarks Supported VoIP features and main CLI commands used with this dialing scheme are as follows and are applicable to the outbound inbound and VoIP PSTN
141. BX for outgoing calls Page 5 104 VoIP Commands voice signaling emd out delay duration min Command Usage Specify minimum E amp M delay start detection time on M lead Syntax Options voice signaling channel lt s ol port stantChannel endChannel gt emd out delay duration min imum lt value gt Definitions slot Specifies chassis slot number where VSM is installed e g 2 port Specifies physical port number on voice daughtercard e g 1 startChannel The first number in the range of voice channels e g 1 endChannel The last number in the range of voice channels e g 30 Syntax Note Be sure to separate the start and end range numbers with a hyphen e g 1 30 imum Optional command syntax Type either min or minimum in the command line value Specifies the minimum duration of the delay signal response on the M lead for detection on outgoing calls in milliseconds from 5 to 60 000 e g 100 Syntax Note Do not use commas when entering the value for the minimum E amp M delay start detection on the M lead signal for example 1 000 will return a syntax error message Default The default value is 100 milliseconds Command Examples voice signaling channel 2 1 1 12 emd out delay duration minimum 100 voice signaling channel 2 2 13 24 emd out delay duration min 30000 voice signaling channel 2 3 1 30 emd out delay duration min 60000 Remarks The voice signaling protocol command
142. CR Strip digit length 1 S9 voice phone group strip digit length page 5 244 voice phone group strip digit length page 5 244 Digital Interface type T1 W Digital Interface type FXS AA voice port interface type page 5 34 voice port interface type page 5 34 Digital Interface type FXO AB Page 3 48 voice port interface type page 5 34 VoIP Networks with PSTN Example 18 VoIP Networks with PSTN Example 18 Caller ID Static This dialing scheme demonstrates how to use static caller ID with an analog voice switching daughtercard VSA Note that the static caller ID name and number always overrides inbound FXO caller ID name and number See Chapter 2 VoIP Daughtercards for a description of the various daughtercards and Chapter 4 Setup and Installation for details on installation 1 818 878 2000 1 818 878 2001 Analog 1 818 878 2002 1 818 878 2003 Voice Daughtercard 1 not used 7 not used g R tel a s n tel U S IP 192 168 11 2 Port 1720 fax 3 n POTS PSTN lt wad fax T FXO Analog FXO 1 603 598 2003 FXS Voice not used 7 not used 8 H 1 603 598 2002 3 1 603 598 2001 1 603 598 2000 IP 192 168 12 2 Port 1720 Example 18 Caller ID Stat
143. Commands Page 1 11 H 323 VoIP Gateway Voice and Convergence Features Payload Packetization and Digital Signal Processing Payload packetization is responsible for conversion between time continuous telephony analog or digital payload at the telephony interface and Real Time Protocol RTP packets on the data network interface It supports voice compression echo cancellation Fax and DTMF Relay demodulation modulation modem data transport up to 14400 baud voice activity detection and comfort noise generation as well as packet arrival de jittering Physically the payload packetization function is implemented on the DSPs DIMMs with control and configuration on the Motorola MPC860 processor Configuration is performed through the vsmboot asc file on the switch Upon VoIP daughtercard activation the configura tion is transferred from the switch to the daughtercard See Chapter 4 Setup and Installa tion for more information The controls for voice interoperability provided by the payload packetization functions include the following e Codecs see also Coding Profiles H 323 Call Capabilities provides encoding decoding of H 323 packets e Voice Echo Cancellers reduces echo on voice conversations e Fax or Modem over IP allows fax modem calls to be transmitted via H 323 e Voice Activity and Silence Detection detects voice conversation or lack thereof to reduce H 323 bandwidth requirements
144. D is set to a gain of 3 and another to a gain of 1 the gain would be 2 The gain inserted at the transmitter comes from the voice switching daughtercard which inter prets transmit gain as H 323 packet network to PCM interface This means that the gain is applied to the PCM packet when it is transmitted by the card and after the packet has been converted from H 323 Analog voice switching daughtercards VSAs convert signals to from PCM before transmit or receive gains are applied Page 5 79 VoIP Commands voice signaling idle noise Command Usage Specify signaling power amplitude for comfort idle noise Syntax Options voice signaling channel lt s ol port startChannel endChannel gt idle noise lt value gt Definitions slot port startChannel endChannel value Default The default value is 0 Command Examples Specifies chassis slot number where VSM is installed e g 2 Specifies physical port number on voice daughtercard e g 1 The first number in the range of voice channels e g 1 The last number in the range of voice channels e g 30 Syntax Note Be sure to separate the start and end range numbers with a hyphen e g 1 30 Specifies the idle noise level comfort noise in 0 01 decibels from 7000 to 7000 e g 1000 a value of 5000 means 50 decibels A value of 0 means no comfort noise Syntax Note Do not use commas when entering the idle n
145. DIMMs 48 Channels 7 m B Ei Digital M M Voice Port DSP DSE F Digital S Voice Port Z A i g i 12 Channels ro i Standard DSPs i ro EO Sar Voice Port Switch Bus Switch Bus Digital Voice Switching Daughtercard VSD T1 E1 DSPs DIMMS Top and Bottom Views Page 2 5 Voice Switching Daughtercard Digital Voice Switching Daughtercard Digital The digital Voice Switching Daughtercard VSD is used to provide digital telephone connec tions in Alcatel s H 323 VoIP gateways There are two main types of digital voice switching daughtercards VSDs that can be used to provide VoIP North American T1 or European E1 QSIG or Euro ISDN PRI and VSBs Euro BRI ISDN E1 ETSD Euro BRI ISDN see also Voice Switching Daughtercard Euro BRI ISDN on page 2 13 Each VSD contains two ports per daughtercard and up to 24 DSO channels T1 or 60 DSO channels E1 per port A maximum of one daughtercard can be installed per OA 512 switch see VSD Front Panel on page 2 7 and up to two daughtercards can be installed in a VSX in each available slot of an Omni Switch Router All in all there are five main daughtercard DSP DIMM configurations on the VSD version of the digital cards e 12 channels 0 DIMM only standard DSPs e 24 channels 1 DIMMs e 36 channels 2 DIMMs e 48 channels 3 DIMMS e 60 channels 4 DIMMS Each VSB contains four ports per daughtercard and two ISDN BRI B channels and one D channel p
146. DN level 2 statistics for one or more voice channels Not available this release Syntax Options reset voice channel lt s ot port startChannel endChannel gt isdn level 2 stat istic s Definitions slot port channel istic Default None Command Example reset voice channel 2 1 1 12 isdn level 2 statistics reset voice channel 2 1 13 24 isdn level 2 stats Specifies chassis slot number where VSM is installed e g 2 Specifies physical port number on voice daughtercard e g 1 Specifies port channel number range in which to reset ISDN level 2 statistics e g 1 12 Optional command syntax Type either stats or statistics in the command line Syntax Notes This command only works from within the command line inter face and cannot be used from within the vsmboot asc file Page 5 281 VoIP Commands Page 5 282 Index 8 pin RJ 11 jacks 2 22 8 pin RJ 45 jacks 2 13 4400 PBX Private Branch Exchange 3 3 A acoustic echo cancellers 5 158 Adaptive Differential Pulse Code Modulation ADPCM 5 183 A Law 5 62 5 77 Alcatel Voice Network Dialing Scheme AVNDS 1 10 3 1 alias names gatekeeper 5 223 analog touchtones 1 13 analog voice port connections 2 19 analog waveforms 1 14 AVNDS Alcatel Voice Network Dialing Scheme 1 15 3 2 B background noise 1 12 1 13 balun connector 2 10 B channel 2 2 bearer channel 2 2 C call progress tone and tone detection 1 11
147. Daughtercard Front Panels Page 2 15 Voice Switching Daughtercard Euro BRI ISDN VSB Jumpers The VSB daughtercard requires jumpers for Network Terminator NT also referred to as Line Terminator LT and Terminal Equipment TE impedance and power feeds be set as follows and in the order presented e g NT LT TE jumper switch settings must be set on the VSB before any other jumpers on the board In general the jumpers are set on a per port basis Locations of the jumpers are illustrated below P31 Jumper and toggle switch settings must match nae a J29 130 Default 4 MADE IN lt 4 ca USA NT LT TE NT LT Toggle Switches Setting V O A O O eee toleft HM E n a gt VSB FAIL OO 99 o UMA UA WUA WA VSB Jumper Settings NT LT TE Impedance and Power Feeds The jumpers are factory set on the VSB daughtercard and should be changed by customers only under the circumstances as listed below for each jumper Note that in general only jumpers which can be set with shunts are identified and described Jumpers should be set in the order in which they are presented Page 2 16 Note 4 All VSB daughtercards are factory set to the defaults including but not limited to jumpers J16 and J18 J25 through J28 as well as J29 and J30 and the corre sponding NT LT TE switches This board is used only to provide Euro BRI ISDN E1 ETSD capabilities and cann
148. Definitions slot Specifies slot number of voice switching daughtercard installed in switching module e g 2 port Specifies physical port number on voice daughtercard e g 1 line build out Optional command syntax value Specifies T1 voice port line length in ranges from 0 to 200 meters e g 30 Default The default line length value is 30 Command Examples voice port 2 1 line build out line length 30 voice port 2 2 line length 30 Remarks To use this command the voice daughtercard connection type must be set to T1 via the voice port interface type command To use this command the voice daughtercard connection type must be set to short haul via the voice port line build out command Page 5 41 VoIP Commands voice port attenuation Command Usage Specify T1 voice port attenuation Syntax Options voice port lt slot port gt line build out attenuation 0 7 5 15 0 22 5 Definitions slot Specifies slot number of voice switching daughtercard installed in switching module e g 2 port Specifies physical port number on voice daughtercard e g 1 line build out Optional command syntax 0 Specifies 0 decibels The decibels value indicates attenuation i e the allowed decrease in power signal 7 5 Specifies 7 5 decibels The decibels value indicates attenuation i e the allowed decrease in power signal 15 5 Specifies 15 5 decibels The decibels v
149. END for Diagram Components Voice Daughtercard 1 Configuration Voice Daughtercard 2 Configuration Expects to receive prefix digit 9 followed by at least one digit and up to 22 digits or a 2 followed by any three digits on trunk Q Expects to receive prefix digit 9 followed by at least one digit and up to 22 digits or a 2 followed by any three digits on ports 1 2 3 or 4 Expects to receive a 1 or 2 followed by any three digits on trunk R Does not expect to receive any inseizes outbound calls from PBX 2 on ports 1 2 3 or 4 Page 3 47 VoIP Networks with PSTN Example 17 LEGEND for Diagram Components Routes calls starting with prefix digit 9 to PSTN port 2 of Voice Daughtercard 1 after stripping first digit 9 to trunk R Routes calls starting with 1 followed by any three digits to trunk Q Routes calls starting with prefix digit 9 to PSTN port 2 of Voice Daughtercard 1 via the VoIP network WAN Routes calls starting with 1 followed by any three digits to trunk QJ via the VoIP network WAN Routes calls starting with 2 followed by any three digits to ports 3 or 4 of Voice Daughtercard 2 via the Routes calls starting with 2 followed by any three digits to ports 5 or 6 of Voice Daughtercard 2 via the WAN VoIP network Remarks Supported VoIP featu
150. H 323 VoIP gateway are supported in this release Digital T1 E1 voice and fax transport over IP networks T1 and E1 telephony interface links to digital Private Branch Exchanges PBXs via digital or analog VoIP daughtercards T1 robbed bit Channel Associated Signaling CAS E1 Primary Rate Interface Euro PRD and E1 QSIG ISDN Common Channel Signaling CCS E1 Basic Rate Interface Euro BRD ISDN E1 ETSD Foreign Exchange Station FXS telephony Loop interface via analog VoIP daughtercard with FXS grand daughtercard variations includes FX Office FXO H 323 Network Call Control Gateway establishes Local Area Network LAN terminal links performs call setup and voice translation functions provides communications procedures between LANs Voice Codecs Pulse Code Modulation G 711 Internet Speech G 723 1 Standard Tele phone Quality G 729A Realtime Fax over IP Fax T 38 Non Voice Signal Monitoring Detection and Transmission Protocols e Dual Tone Multi Frequency Modem Fax Relay e Fax Transparency and Fax Relay e Modem Transparency and Modem Relay PSTN Fallback via Deadman Relay Switch e The H 323 VoIP gateway is capable of providing PSTN fallback for VoIP calls in the event of a power failure in the VoIP network by means of a Deadman relay switch on the digital VoIP daughtercards For more information on the Deadman switch see Chapter 2 VoIP Daughtercards Echo and jitter controls on digital VoIP daughtercards
151. I and BRI interfaces E1 ETSI used together as one term refers specifically to Euro PRI Page 2 2 Introduction The table below shows the basic versions of the VoIP daughtercards all of which were designed with various configurations in mind to fully support the wide range of features used in Voice over IP See also Chapter 4 Network Dialing Schemes for more configuration details Also not all configurations shown below may be currently available for purchase Voice Daughtercard Description VSD VSD 12CH Two 2 digital T1 E1 RJ 45 voice ports 12 compressed voice channels VSD 24CH Two 2 digital T1 E1 RJ 45 voice ports 24 compressed voice channels VSD 36CH Two 2 digital T1 E1 RJ 45 voice ports 36 compressed voice channels VSD 48CH Two 2 digital T1 E1 RJ 45 voice ports 48 compressed voice channels VSD 60CH Two 2 digital T1 E1 RJ 45 voice ports 60 compressed voice channels VSB VSB Four 4 digital E1 Euro BRD RJ 45 voice ports TE Terminal Equipment NT Network Terminator Point to Point or Point to Multipoint NT 8 compressed voice channels VSA FXS VSA 4FXS Four 4 analog RJ 11 voice ports VSA 8FXS Eight 8 analog RJ 11 voice ports VSA FXO VSA 2FXO Two 2 analog RJ 11 voice ports VSA 4FXO Four 4 analog RJ 11 voice ports VSA MIX VSA 4FXS Four 4 analog FXS and 2 analog FXO RJ 11 voice ports 2FXO Page 2 3 Introduction Digital Signal Processors DSP
152. Identifies the numbering plan by name e g salem plan1 maximum length of 40 charac ters The following characters are permitted in the numbering plan name a z A Z 0 9 space and A_ amp 1 lt gt CQ f associate Indicates specified numbering plan associated with destination member disassociate Indicates specified numbering plan disassociated with destination member DestName Identifies either the voice call H 323 endpoint destination or local channel destination by name e g to salem or the c maximum length of 40 characters The following characters are permitted in the call destination name a z A Z 0 9 space and A_ amp I1 lt gt QOTth Syntax Notes To use this command the hunt method must first be specified via the voice numbering plan hunt method command It is recommended that a local channel destination be used for the destination name string DestName Multiple destinations can be associated with a single numbering plan in order to create a hunt group The hunting order is deter mined by the order in which the hunt groups are associated in the vsmboot asc file Default The default setting is associate Command Example voice numbering plan salem plan1 associate destination member tocalab voice numbering plan salem plan2 disassociate destination member to_vsd1 voice numbering plan calab plan1 associate destination member tosalem voice numbering plan calab
153. In order to use this command the voice signaling protocol command must be set to the corre sponding protocol type of E amp M Wink Start Immediate Start or Delay Start Signaling Page 5 85 VoIP Commands voice signaling em clear confirm wait max Command Usage Specify Ear amp Mouth signaling time to wait for on hook after a clear Syntax Options voice signaling channel lt s ol pori stantChannel endChannel gt em clear confirm wait max imum lt value gt Definitions slot Specifies chassis slot number where VSM is installed e g 2 port Specifies physical port number on voice daughtercard e g 1 startChannel The first number in the range of voice channels e g 1 endChannel The last number in the range of voice channels e g 30 Syntax Note Be sure to separate the start and end range numbers with a hyphen e g 1 30 imum Optional command syntax Type either max or maximum in the command line value Specifies the maximum duration delay interval to wait for an on hook response on the M lead after going on hook on the E lead e g 25000 Syntax Note Do not use commas when entering the E amp M on hook after a clear detect value for example 60 000 will return a syntax error message Default The default value is 60000 Command Examples voice signaling channel 2 1 1 12 em clear confirm wait maximum 60000 voice signaling channel 2 2 13 24 em clear confirm wait max 25000 voice
154. M before transmit or receive gains are applied Page 5 78 VoIP Commands voice signaling transmit gain Command Usage Specify gain in signaling power inserted at transmitter Syntax Options voice signaling channel lt s oi port startChannel endChannel gt transmit gain lt gain_value gt Definitions slot Specifies chassis slot number where VSM is installed e g 2 port Specifies physical port number on voice daughtercard e g 1 startChannel The first number in the range of voice channels e g 1 endChannel The last number in the range of voice channels e g 30 Syntax Note Be sure to separate the start and end range numbers with a hyphen e g 1 30 gain_value Specifies the numerical gain value in decibels Values may range from 14 through 14 e g 13 2 0 4 13 etc Default The default gain value is 0 Command Examples voice signaling channel 2 1 1 12 transmit gain 0 voice signaling channel 2 2 13 24 transmit gain 14 Remarks Transmit TX and receive RX gain is normally used when a device has volume problems Gain adjusts increases or decreases the signal level Transmit and receive signal gains occur per call on each end of the call Signal gains are calculated per channel The signal gains are applied at the channel level Each channel on a voice switching daughtercard can have a different gain applied Total gain is calculated between TX RX points e g if one VS
155. Name 1 Unused 2 Unused 3 Tx 4 Rx 5 Rx 6 Tx 7 Unused 8 VSB Configured as NT RJ 45 Specifications Pin Number Standard Signal Name 1 Unused 1 8 2 Unused pa 3 Rx 000 4 Tx 5 Tx 6 Rx 7 Unused Page 2 14 Voice Switching Daughtercard Euro BRI ISDN VSB Front Panel Each port has three corresponding LED indicators with link status displays as shown in the following illustration VSBs VSDs and VSAs cannot be installed in the same slot in an OSR An MPX must also be installed in the OSR Port numbers can vary depending on the VoIP switch configuration see also VoIP Daughtercard Port Numbering Schemes on page 2 28 All VSB daughter cards have three LED displays per voice port as follows VSB FAIL On when VSB B c D On OQO fails or diagnostic test FAIL ABC D OOOO fails or when VSB FR OOOO OOO ERR On when VSB voice port link error LINK On when VSB voice port link to image download fails LINK occurs in line This can be any bearer or switch is connected Data channel type of error e g out of f frame loss of synchronization Off when signal is lost VSB voice port link disconnected E Off when VSB hard ware is functional or when VSB image download is OK VSB Voice Switching Digital Euro BRI ISDN
156. Name Identifies the voice call endpoint destination string name unique across the H 323 network e g to_vsd1 any string up to 64 bytes not including quotes The following characters are permitted in the destination string name a z A Z 0 9 space and A _ amp 1 lt gt OUI address H 323 transport address i e IP or H 323 network address e g 225 0 1 41 See voice daughter card ip address command for details on configuring H 323 network address for Alcatel VSM based gateways portAddr Optional command syntax Any H 323 RTP port address e g 1720 Syntax Notes H 323 display name string must be specified before the voice switching daughtercard is activated A non null string value is required To use this command the h 323 gatekeeper mode command for gatekeeper discovery must be set to MANUAL At least one endpoint or gateway and one H 323 transport address must be specified to make an over the network call Default None Command Example voice destination to_vsd1 h 323 endpoint 225 0 1 41 voice destination to_vsd2 h 323 endpoint 225 0 1 42 1720 Remarks This command can be used to specify the address of the gatekeeper in the currently active H 323 zone when configured for manual mode When the destination is a gatekeeper port 1719 should be specified default When port 1720 is used only the IP address needs to be specified The endpoint name string is the user s logical name for t
157. OTS video conferencing This algorithm runs at 6 3 or 5 3 kbps 20 bytes per 30ms interval and uses linear predictive coding and dictionaries which help provide smoothing The smoothing process is CPU inten sive during real time based activities G 729a This is the ITU s standard voice algorithm CS ACELP Conjugate Structure Algebraic Code Excited Linear Predictive for the encoding decoding of speech at 8 Kbps using conjugate structure algebraic code excited linear predictive method G 729 is supported by inter alia among other things American Telephone and Telegraph France Telecom and Japan s Nippon Telephone and Telegraph VON Voice on the Net Developments The VON Voice on the Net Coalition is concerned with developments in Internet Tele phony and IP Telephony around the world It is an incorporated non profit U S organization working with the government business and other groups and individuals on regulations that affect this technology and its use Alcatel s H 323 VoIP gateway was designed with the consid erations of the VON Coalition in mind Compression techniques and DSPs improve the qual ity of VON transmissions and minimize problems associated with IP packet delays Page 1 18 VoIP and VLANs VoIP and VLANs Alcatel VoIP VSD VSB VSA modules cannot not be in a Virtual LAN VLAN with non voice ports i e data ports IP phone ports etc All voice traffic must route in and out of the VoIP VLAN
158. P voice play out statistics e g 1 12 cumulative for the current call on specified channel Optional command syntax Type either stats or statistics in the command line Syntax Notes This command only works from within the command line inter face and cannot be used from within the vsmboot asc file voice channel 2 1 1 12 reset voice playout statistics voice channel 2 1 13 24 reset voice playout stats Page 5 276 VoIP Commands voice channel reset dsp stats Command Usage Reset DSP voice play out statistics for one or more voice channels Not available this release Syntax Options voice channel lt s ot port startChannel endChannel gt reset dsp stat istic s Definitions slot Specifies chassis slot number where VSM is installed e g 2 port Specifies physical port number on voice daughtercard e g 1 channel Specifies port channel number range in which to reset DSP receive and transmit statistics e g 1 12 cumulative for the current call on specified channel istic Optional command syntax Type either stats or statistics in the command line Syntax Notes This command only works from within the command line inter face and cannot be used from within the vsmboot asc file Default None Command Example voice channel 2 1 1 12 reset dsp statistics voice channel 2 1 13 24 reset dsp stats Page 5 277 VoIP Commands voice channel reset error stat
159. PBX 1 Configuration Voice Daughtercard 1 Configuration Page 3 41 VoIP Networks with PSTN Example 14 International PSTN Calls VoIP Network This diagram demonstrates what happens on international calls handled between voice daughtercards Not available this release i stripped digits Voice Extensions to 878 2999 Daughtercard off of PBX 1 1 npa nxx xxxx agi 1 IP 192 168 11 2 1 603 598 2000 to 598 2999 Port 1720 1 npa nxx xxxx R 1 818 555 3001 1 800 999 9001 PSTN gt m ISDN 011 33 0 1 40 76 10 10 PSTN See Diagrams Intl Calls Overview Outbound Inbound stripped digits 1 XXX XXX Extensions ff of PBX 2 Voice a la p gt Daughtercard 7000 011 331 55 6 7000 E 1 to 7999 lt 1 a12 IP 192 168 12 2 to 7900 Port 1720 Example 14 PSTN International Calls VoIP Network LEGEND for Diagram Components not available this release PBX 1 Configuration PBX 2 Configuration Page 3 42 VoIP Networks with PSTN Example 15 VoIP Networks with PSTN Example 15 PSTN and Eleven Digit Extensions This dialing scheme demonstrates using eleven digit extensions with the PSTN although only seven digits are actually forwarded to the PB
160. PRD Y voice signaling companding page 5 77 Digital Interface type Euro BRI Z voice port interface type page 5 34 voice signaling companding page 5 77 Digital Interface type FXS AA voice port interface type page 5 34 Digital Interface type FXO AB voice port interface type page 5 34 Page 3 68 4 Setup and Installation This chapter describes the setup and installation procedures for VoIP in the switch General operations between the components are discussed in Chapter 1 VoIP Overview These instructions apply to the more basic installations of VoIP on an OmniAccess 512 or Omni Switch Router Components of VoIP VoIP requires installation of the following Alcatel and third party components Components Description VoIP Components e Voice Hardware and Software Modules for hardware details see also Chapter 2 VoIP Daughtercards Alcatel s VoIP consists of a dynamically loadable switch software module vsoa img vsx img intended to bring Voice over IP to switched networks by means of voice modules i e voice switching daughtercards installed in either the OmniAccess 512 or the Omni Switch Router At least one of the available daughtercards and associ ated switch hardware modules must be installed per switch and or other IP tele phony device to provide a VoIP gateway Digital Voice Switching Daughtercard VSD supports T1 E1 Euro PRI E1QSig Digital Voice Switching D
161. Part No 060170 10 Rev C April 2004 VoIP User Manual Release 4 5 y ALCATEL An Alcatel service agreement brings your company the assurance of 7x24 no excuses technical support You ll also receive regular software updates to maintain and maximize your Alcatel product s features and functionality and on site hardware replacement through our global network of highly qualified service delivery partners Additionally with 24 hour a day access to Alcatel s Service and Support web page you ll be able to view and update any case open or closed that you have reported to Alcatel s technical support open a new case or access helpful release notes technical bulletins and manuals For more information on Alcatel s Service Programs see our web page at www ind alcatel com call us at 1 800 995 2696 or email us at support ind alcatel com This manual documents Release 4 5 Voice over IP VoIP hardware and software The functionality described in this manual is subject to change without notice Copyright 2004 by Alcatel Internetworking Inc All rights reserved This document may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the express written permission of Alcatel Internetworking Inc Alcatel and the Alcatel logo are registered trademarks of Alcatel Xylan OmniSwitch PizzaSwitch and OmniStack are registered trademarks of Alcatel Internetworking Inc AutoTracker OmniAccess OmniCore Omni Switch Router Omni
162. Pins 2_3 Pins 4_5 yes Backplane interface Hbus P46 Pins 2 3 yes Reserved Page 2 18 Voice Switching Daughtercard Analog Voice Switching Daughtercard Analog The Analog Voice Switching VSA daughtercard is used to provide the analog voice port connections in Alcatel s H 323 VoIP gateways Each VSA card includes either an FXS Foreign Exchange Station or FXO Foreign Exchange Office grand daughtercard or one of each depending on whether FXS signaling is needed to generate calls from POTS TelSets to a VoIP daughtercard or FXO signaling is needed to generate calls to POTS TelSets from a VoIP daughtercard or both The FXS and FXO signaling protocols are used by the corresponding board types for which there are five VSA grand daughtercard configurations e FXS e FXS FXS Dual e FXO e FXO FXO Dual e FXS FXO Mixed Depending on the VSA FXS and or FXO grand daughtercards used there can be either 2 4 6 or 8 ports per daughtercard As shown below in a VSX FXS FXS dual configuration up to eight POTS TelSets can be connected and in a VSX FXO FXO configuration up to four POTS PSTN lines can be connected FXS and FXO grand daughtercards can be used together referred to as a mixed configuration on one VSA card Specifically the VSA port range for the OmniAccess 512 is 1 to 2 single FXO 1 to 4 dual FXO FXO or single FXS 1 to 6 mixed FXS FXO or 1 to 8 dual FXS FXS grand daughter cards The sam
163. RTCP port number for voice switching daughtercard gateway Cif sequential Page 5 216 VoIP Commands voice network card h 323 gatekeeper control Command Usage Set voice switching daughtercard to use gatekeeper on off Syntax Options voice network card lt slot card_number gt h 323 gatekeeper control on off Definitions slot Specifies the chassis slot number where VSM is installed e g 2 card_number Specifies the voice daughtercard position number e g 1 on Turns ON H 323 gatekeeper for specified voice network off Turns OFF H 323 gatekeeper for specified voice network Default The default setting is off Command Example voice network card 2 1 h 323 gatekeeper control off voice network card 2 2 h 323 gatekeeper control on Remarks Commands containing the syntax voice network card differ from commands using the syntax voice daughtercard in that voice network type commands deal specifically with network related operations of a voice switching daughtercard VoIP gateway Page 5 217 VoIP Commands voice network h 323 gatekeeper mode Command Usage Set gatekeeper mode for voice switching daughtercard gateway discovery manual auto Syntax Options voice network card lt slot card_number gt h 323 gatekeeper mode manual auto Definitions slot Specifies the chassis slot number where VSM is installed e g 2 card_number Specifies th
164. S R2 handshaking on multi frequency signaling digit Timeslot 1 15 and 16 31 are for voice channels The E1 ISDN PRI interface uses a maximum of 32 DS 0 64 Kbps channels and has a capac ity of 2 048 Mbps The interface follows A law companding and is a European CEPT carrier Two channels are D data channels Channel 16 is reserved as a control channel Channel 0 is reserved for framing Remaining channels are B bearer channels The BRI E1 Euro ISDN interface uses a maximum of 3 DS 0 64 Kbps channels and has a capacity of 2 048 Mbps The interface follows A law companding and is a European CEPT carrier Two voice channels are B B1 and B2 bearer channels supported at 64 Kbps another channel supports data at 16 Kbps Channel 0 is reserved as a control channel This interface is only supported on the BRI voice switching digital daughtercard VSB Note 4 When used separately the terms E1 and ETSI both entail European PRI and BRI interfaces E1 ETSI used together as one term refers specifically to Euro PRI Page 5 35 VoIP Commands voice port frame format Command Usage Specifies the frame format of the voice port Syntax Options voice port lt slot port gt frame format none superframe extended superframe e1 e1 crc e1 mf Definitions slot port none superframe extended superframe e1 e1 crc Default Command Examples Specifies slot number of voice switching
165. SDN PRI or BRI Euro Not available this release Syntax Options voice channel lt s ot port channel gt isdn d channel Definitions slot Specifies slot number of voice switching daughtercard installed in switching module e g 2 port Specifies physical port number on voice daughtercard e g 1 channel Specifies the control D channel number i e 16 for E1 ISDN PRI and 0 for BRI Euro Syntax Notes The port connection type must also be set via the voice port interface type command to indicate the number of channels available on the port e g 3 channels BRI Euro 32 channels E1 PRI ISDN Only 0 and 16 are allowed for data channel numbers control channel 16 is reserved for signaling on E1 ISDN PRI and 0 is reserved for the BRI Euro control channel For E1 ISDN PRI channel 0 is used for framing there is no framing on BRI Euro Data and corresponding bearer channels must apply to the same voice switching daughtercard Default For E1 ISDN PRI the default channel value is 16 For BRI Euro the default channel value is 0 Command Example voice channel 2 1 16 isdn d channel voice channel 2 2 16 isdn d channel voice channel 2 3 16 isdn d channel voice channel 2 4 16 isdn d channel voice channel 2 1 0 isdn d channel voice channel 2 2 0 isdn d channel voice channel 2 3 0 isdn d channel voice channel 2 4 0 isdn d channel Remarks The voice channel isdn d channel command is used to configure
166. SP tone detection 5 196 DTMF Dual Tone Multi Frequency 1 11 5 72 Page I 1 Index dynamic reconfiguration voice numbering plan activate command 4 5 E E amp M Ear amp Mouth 1 13 E amp M signaling Common Wink Start Immediate Start and Delay Start 1 11 El 5 35 E1 QSIG 2 2 E1 ETSI 2 2 E1 ISDN PRI 2 2 E1 QSIG 3 4 3 57 Ear amp Mouth E amp M 1 13 5 62 encoding 1 12 endpoints 1 7 error conditions 4 7 esx img 4 1 Euro BRI 3 4 Euro BRI ISDN 1 ETSD 2 2 Euro PRI 3 4 3 59 extensions 3 3 5 239 5 240 mixed 3 23 overlapping 3 27 F facsimile T 38 5 172 5 211 fax modem switchover 5 193 fax or modem over IP 1 12 3 4 fax T 38 3 55 FCC Certifications 2 6 2 19 flash memory 2 4 Foreign Exchange Office FXO 2 2 3 47 5 62 Foreign Exchange Office FXO signaling Loop Start and Ground Start 1 11 Foreign Exchange Station FXS 2 2 3 47 3 65 5 62 Foreign Exchange Station FXS signaling Loop Start and Ground Start 1 11 FTP File Transfer Protocol 4 1 FXO Foreign Exchange Office 2 2 FXS Foreign Exchange Station 2 2 FXS and FXO grand daughtercards 2 19 FXS and FXO signaling 2 19 Page I 2 G gatekeeper 1 8 5 223 destination 5 230 H 323 alias telephone numbers 3 29 RADVision 1 8 Registration Admission and Status RAS protocol 1 15 standard port assignments 5 227 gatekeeper control 5 216 gatekeeper discovery 5 216 gateway devices 1 7 H H 225 Q 931 protocol 1 15 H 245 and H 225 packet
167. Specify FXS loop start time to wait after supervisory disconnect before declaring on hook 5 113 Specify FXS loop start duration of supervisory disconnect 5 114 Set FXS loop start to generate outbound caller ID on off 5 115 Signaling Attributes Foreign Exchange Office FXO Loop Start Signaling Specify FXO loop start incoming ring signal debounce interval 5 116 Set FXO loop start supervisory disconnect detection enable disable 5 117 Specify FXO loop start duration of supervisory disconnect detection 5 118 Specify FXO loop start time before originating calls while receiving calls 5 119 Specify FXO loop start time between ring cycles to detect ringing 5 120 Specify FXO loop start time between ring pulses to detect ringing 5 121 Set FXO loop start to detect inbound caller ID on off 5 122 Specify FXO loop start number of rings allowed before answering 5 123 Specify FXO loop start debounce for loop current detector 5 124 Specify FXO loop start debounce for battery reversal detector 5 125 VoIP Commands Signaling Attributes Foreign Exchange Station FXS Ground Start Signaling Specify FXS ground start time to wait before declaring off hook 5 126 Specify FXS ground start debounce interval for on hook transition 5 127 Specify minimum FXS ground start time to wait before declaring on hook by originator 5 128 Specify minimum FXS gr
168. Specify Foreign Exchange Station Loop Start FXS LS duration of supervisory disconnect Syntax Options voice signaling channel lt s ol pori starntChannel endChannel gt fxs Is supervisory disconnect duration lt value gt Definitions slot Specifies chassis slot number where VSM is installed e g 2 port Specifies physical port number on voice daughtercard e g 1 startChannel The first number in the range of voice channels e g 1 endChannel The last number in the range of voice channels e g 30 Syntax Note Be sure to separate the start and end range numbers with a hyphen e g 1 30 value Specifies the fxs ls supervisory disconnect CPC signal duration value in milliseconds from 1 to 60 000 e g 850 generated before on hook condition declared Syntax Note Do not use commas when entering the fxs ls supervisory discon nect wait value for example 10 000 will return a syntax error message Default The default value is 850 milliseconds Command Examples voice signaling channel 2 1 1 12 fxs Is supervisory disconnect duration 850 voice signaling channel 2 2 13 24 fxs Is supervisory disconnect duration 30000 voice signaling channel 2 3 1 30 fxs Is supervisory disconnect duration 60000 Remarks The voice signaling protocol command must be set to the corresponding protocol type before any commands for E amp M Wink Start Immediate Start and Delay Start Signaling and FXS FXO Loop and Ground Start
169. TX RX pinout wiring the Cross Over Ethernet cable cannot be used with VoIP switches If the Cross Over Ethernet cable is used the LINK LED will not display Note For E1 configurations it is recommended that a balun connector always be used to connect a voice device e g PBX that uses an ITU G 703 interface coaxial cables BNC connectors to a VSD or any RJ 45 E1 port The balun converts the impedance of 120 Ohms on the RJ 45 port to 75 Ohms G 723 The balun connector is not required when both ends have RJ 45 connections Contact Alcatel s customer support for more details on balun connectors Page 2 10 Voice Switching Daughtercard Digital VSD Pinouts The following illustration shows the pinouts for the digital voice switching daughtercard VSD 8 pin RJ 45 jacks used to connect the voice ports on the card to voice devices in the VoIP network that support digital connections e g PBX and Key Set Cross Over Toggle Switch Cross Over Toggle Switch Note 4 The pinouts as shown indicate when the Cross Over toggle switch is ON and OFF VSD RJ 45 Specifications Pin Number Standard Signal Name Receive Data Receive Data Transmit Data Transmit Data VSD RJ 45 Specifications Pin Number Standard Signal Name 1 Transmit Data 2 Transmit Data 3 4 Receive Data Receive Da
170. Valid Port Configuration Numbers OSR 2 A D S3 1 position A D S3 2 position Note Port numbers in 3 1 must be configured as 1 2 3 and 4 A 1 B 2 C 3 D 4 In 3 2 port numbers must be config ured as 5 6 7 and 8 A 5 B 6 C 7 D 8 OSR gt 1 1 4 FXS 83 1 OSR 2 1 4 FXS S3 D 5 8 S3 2 OSR 3 1 12 FXS FXS FXS OSR 4 1 16 FXS FXS FXS FXS OSR 1 1 2 FXO S3 1 OSR 2 1 2 FXO 3 4 FXO S3 1 OSR 7 3 1 2 FXO 3 4 FXO S3 1 5 6 S3 2 OSR F 4 1 8 FXO FXO FXO FXO OSR 1 1 1 4 FXS 5 6 FXO OSR 7 1 2 1 4 FXS 5 6 FXO 7 8 FXO OSR 1 3 1 4 FXS 5 6 FXO 7 8 FXO 9 10 FXO OSR e z 2 1 1 4 FXS 5 8 FXS 9 10 FXO OSR 2 2 1 4 5 6 FXS FXO 7 10 11 12 FXS FXO e FXS FXS 9 12 FXO FXO OSR S 3 1 1 4 FXS 5 6 FXO 7 14 FXS er FXS FXS FXS 13 14 FXO Page 2 29 VoIP Daughtercard Port Numbering Schemes Page 2 30 3 Network Dialing Schemes Introduction This chapter contains information on selecting and configuring Alcatel VoIP Network Dialing Schemes AVNDS which are used to translate dialed digits into IP addresses on the switch At least one dialing scheme must be configured to support a Voice over IP network The dialing scheme examples discussed in this chapter are daughtercard centric and typi cally consist of two PBXs with corresponding voice switching daughterc
171. Vista PizzaPort Policy View RouterView SwitchManager SwitchStart VoiceView WANView WebView X Cell X Vision and the Xylan logo are trademarks of Alcatel Internetworking Inc All In One is a service mark of Alcatel Internetworking Inc All other brand and product names are trademarks of their respective companies y oy ee 26801 West Agoura Road Calabasas CA 91301 818 880 3500 FAX 818 880 3505 info ind alcatel com US Customer Support 800 995 2696 International Customer Support 818 878 4507 Internet http eservice ind alcatel com Cautions FCC Compliance This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions in this guide may cause interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense The user is cautioned that changes and modifications made to the equipment without approval of the manufacturer could void the user s authority to operate this equipment It is suggested that
172. Xs Any number used as a site prefix cannot be used for the first digit of any valid extension istripped digits Voice Extensions l off of PBX 1 E to 878 2999 1 818 878 2000 I Daughtercard 1 8782000 5 to 8782999 Extensions off of PBX 2 ere Daughtercard IP 192 168 11 2 Port 1720 fal 5982000 1 603 598 2 Be ic anzoga 1 603 598 2000 to 598 2999 B IP 192 168 12 2 L Port 1720 Example 15 PSTN and Eleven Digit Extensions LEGEND for Diagram Components PBX 1 Configuration PBX 2 Configuration Expects to receive seven on trunk J and then uses these digits to route calls to lines A Expects to receive seven digits on trunk L and then uses these digits to route calls to lines B Routes calls starting with 878 2xxx to lines A Routes calls starting with 1 598 2xxx to lines B Routes calls starting with 1 603 598 2xxx to trunk J and then the VoIP network uses these digits to route calls to trunk L Routes calls starting with 1 818 878 2xxx to trunk L and then the VoIP network uses these digits to route calls to trunk Q Page 3 43 VoIP Networks with PSTN Example 15 Remarks Supported VoIP features and main CLI commands used with this dialing scheme are as fol
173. a analog trunks all digits are automatically stripped on incoming FXS calls Installation of an analog voice switching daughtercard VSA with FXS module is also required in addition to the standard VSD See Chapter 2 VoIP Daughtercards for a description of the various daughtercards and Chapter 4 Setup and Installation for details on installation Extensions off of PBX 1 Extensions off of PBX 2 8200 ext 901 Voice Daughtercard 1 IP 192 168 11 2 Port 1720 ext 902 ext 903 Analog ext 904 ext 905 Voice Daughtercard 2 ext 906 ext 907 ext 908 5 6 7 8 IP 192 168 12 2 __ Port 1720 Example 26 Mixed European Digital and Analog Voice Daughtercards LEGEND for Diagram Components PBX 1 Configuration PBX 2 Configuration lines A Expects to receive four digits starting with 81 on trunk J and then uses these digits to route calls to Expects to receive four digits starting with 82 on trunk K and then uses these digits to route calls to lines B Page 3 65 VoIP Networks with Interoperability Example 26 LEGEND for Diagram Components Routes four digits calls starting with 82 to trunk Q and then the VoIP network uses these digits to
174. a z A Z 0 9 space and Ss 2 HA_ amp I lt gt CO IKI Default None Command Example voice no coding profile salemprof1 voice no coding profile calabprof2 voice no coding profile cp1 voice no coding profile cp2 voice no coding profile cp3 voice no coding profile cp4 voice no coding profile cp5 Page 5 175 VoIP Commands view voice coding profile Command Usage Display coding profile for voice channels Syntax Options view voice coding profile codingProfName Definitions codingProfName Identifies coding profile by name e g salemprof1 maximum length of 40 characters The following characters are permitted in the coding profile name a z A Z 0 9 space and Ss 2 HA_ amp I lt gt CO IK Default None Command Example view voice coding profile salemprof1 view voice coding profile calabprof2 view voice coding profile view voice coding profile cp5 Screen Output To view the default voice coding profiles type view voice coding profile and then press lt Enter gt A screen similar to the following displays shown on next page To view a coding profile by another name type view coding profile and a valid coding profile name e g view voice coding profile calabprof2 and then press lt Enter gt For details on editing the contents of a voice coding profile default or otherwise see Chap ter 5 Setup and Installation
175. ace and NA_ amp 1 lt gt C Wot available this release Syntax Notes If the voice network card h 323 gatekeeper control command is ON when the voice numbering plan activate command is issued the voice switching daughtercard automatically generates an additional alias name Not available this release This command must be used directly from the CLI prompt rather than from within the vsmboot asc file In the vsmboot asc file the voice daughter card activate command should be used instead Default None Command Example voice numbering plan all activate voice numbering plan salem plan1 activate voice numbering plan calab plan2 activate Remarks Numbering plans do not take effect until this command is issued or the voice daughtercard is activated and use of this command will not affect calls that are already in place Once a numbering plan is activated all new connections are temporarily halted until this command is completed It can take up to approximately 10 seconds for a numbering plan to be activated As a result it is recommended that this command be issued only when it will have minimum impact on callers It is also more efficient to activate all the numbering plans at once rather than individually Once the VoIP gateway has been configured completely using the vsmboot asc file this command can be issued later to update or dynamically reconfigure the VoIP gateway This means cert
176. ain configuration updates can be made to the VoIP gateway without rebooting the switch as follows e Add VoIP gateway to VoIP network e Add telephone number to VoIP gateway e Delete telephone destination number or destination Page 5 253 VoIP Commands The dynamic reconfiguration feature works only on the VoIP commands specifically listed or grouped here It should be noted that updates made to the configuration using this command are only temporary In order to make the configuration changes permanent it will subsequently be necessary to download the changes to the vsmboot asc file and then reissue the voice number voice daughter card first digit wait duration voice daughter card inter digit wait duration voice daughter card dial time duration voice daughter card termination digit voice network card h 323 gatekeeper associate phone group all voice destination commands all voice phone group commands all voice numbering plan commands ing plan activate command Page 5 254 VoIP Commands voice numbering plan hunt method Command Usage Specify numbering plan method of outgoing hunting destination group Syntax Options voice numbering plan lt NumberingPlanName gt hunt method round robin top down Definitions NumberingPlanName Identifies the numbering plan by name e g salem plan1 maximum length of 40 charac ters The following characters are
177. aling scheme examples 12 and 17 For more details see also Chapter 4 Setup and Installation and Chapter 5 VoIP Commands Page 3 2 Introduction How to Select a Network Dialing Scheme AVNDS The tables below contain a list of the dialing scheme examples use the decision criteria in the far right column of each table to determine the most appropriate dialing scheme to follow when configuring the network for VoIP in the switch The dialing scheme examples of which there are 26 are discussed in this chapter in numerical order but are categorized into three distinct types e VoIP Networks without PSTN Dialing Schemes 1 12 Dialing scheme examples in this group do not connect to the PSTN It is assumed that the PBX handles the routing of the call to the VoIP network The first two examples are considered basic dialing schemes while the remaining examples in this group demon strate more complex VoIP dialing scheme concepts such as how to use hunt groups to multiply and split T1 lines strip digits or an H 323 gatekeeper e VoIP Networks with PSTN Dialing Schemes 13 18 Dialing scheme examples in this group connect the voice daughtercards to the North American PSTN and cover the use of strip digits fax over IP and caller ID forwarding and static International ISDN PSTN and Caller ID Forwarding not available this release e VoIP Networks with Interoperability Dialing Schemes 19 26 Dialing scheme examples
178. aling scheme that has been customized to the enterprise See Chapter 3 Network Dial ing Schemes for guidelines in using and developing an AVNDS dialing scheme e All related configuration requirements for H 323 Gatekeeper OmniPCX or other third party PBX or key system have been met For test purposes channel banks may be substituted for PBXs Refer to the vendor supplied product manuals for more information e Whenever any subsequent changes are made to the VoIP configuration after installation is complete the impact of those changes on other connected devices should first be consid ered and properly coordinated e g if PBX is connected to VoIP switch updates to VoIP should be coordinated with PBX administrator Page 4 2 Setup and Installation Configuration Restrictions A maximum of two VSMs Voice Switching Modules i e VSA VSB VSD are supported in a chassis These VSMs may be placed in the same VLAN or different VLANs however no other ports may be assigned to these VLAN s As a result all VSM traffic must be routed in order to reach VLANs on remote devices and non VSM ports and or devices may not be added to the VSM VLANs VSM VLANs must have spanning tree disabled and must not send routing updates RIP OSPF or BGP into the VLAN The VSM uses the default gateway defined in the vsmboot asc text configuration file to route traffic to remote destinations The subnet mask on the default gateway must match the sub
179. all supported switch features Gncluding VoIP will be saved to the dump file Jfeature type Specifies that only a particular feature will be saved to the dump file e g voice vlan name Specifies a user defined name for the resulting dump file 18 characters maximum e g snapshot1 vsmboot asc Default None Command Examples dump all dump voice dump all file snapshot 1 dump voice file vsmboot asc Remarks The dump command automatically creates the text file in the flash directory of the switch To view the contents of the generated text file you can use the view file command For more information refer to the view file command description in the Command Line Reference Guide Aside from basic system parameters e g system name the dump command captures only non default switch parameters for the specified switch features For example the default settings for VoIP will not be included in a dump file The text file can be edited using a standard text editor Screen Output To view all voice daughtercard parameters type dump voice file followed by valid vsm boot file name e g dump voice file vsmboot asc and then press lt Enter gt Page 5 20 VoIP Commands A screen similar to the following displays kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk kxk Snap All kkk kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk voice echo on voice daughtercard 4 1 ip mask 255 255 255 0 voice daughtercard 4 1
180. alls Local Telephone Number fe a Remote Telephone Number VPN N St nia ep message Call setup completed returned 3 I Source VoIP H 323 Gateway VoIP H 323 Gateway Destination IP Address F i F IP Address Cpa PBX 2 Phone Rings IP call VoIP Call Scenario Step 3 Call Setup Completed Local Telephone Number Remote Telephone Number Pa ae VPN i ay we Step message Call answered returned Source VoIP H 323 Gateway VoIP H 323 Gateway Destination IP Address tien as Sa IP Address PBX 2 IP call VoIP Call Scenario Step 4 Remote Call Answered as VoIP Call Page 1 6 Elements of a Converged Network Elements of a Converged Network Alcatel s H 323 VoIP gateway is based on a complex dual technology infrastructure taken from what have been in the past two fairly distinct industries namely Telecommunications a k a Telephony and Data Communications It converges voice and data into enterprise Internet Service Providers SPs and carrier networks to provide various levels of VoIP services using intelligent switches in order to generate long term cost reductions for tele phone services between sites The standard or key elements of a converged H 323 VoIP network
181. alue indicates attenuation i e the allowed decrease in power signal 22 5 Specifies 22 5 decibels The decibels value indicates attenuation i e the allowed decrease in power signal Default The default attenuation setting is 0 decibels Command Examples voice port 2 1 line build out attenuation 0 voice port 2 2 line build out attenuation 7 5 voice port 2 3 line build out attenuation 15 0 voice port 2 4 line build out attenuation 22 5 voice port 3 1 attenuation 0 voice port 3 2 attenuation 7 5 voice port 3 3 attenuation 15 0 voice port 3 4 attenuation 22 5 Remarks To use this command the voice daughtercard connection type must be set to T1 via the voice port interface type command To use this command the line build out must be set to long haul via the voice port line build out command Page 5 42 VoIP Commands voice port cable type Command Usage Specify E1 E1 ISDN PRI or BRI Euro voice port cable type Syntax Options voice port lt s ot port gt line build out cable type 75 120 Definitions slot Specifies slot number of voice switching daughtercard installed in switching module e g 2 port Specifies physical port number on voice daughtercard e g 1 line build out Optional command syntax 75 Specifies 75 Ohms for type of cable connected to port 120 Specifies 120 Ohms for type of cable connected to port Default The default cable typ
182. ame a z A Z 0 9 space and A_ amp I1 lt gt QO th Default None Command Example view voice destination tosalem view voice destination tocalab Screen Output To view parameters for an H 323 voice endpoint destination type view voice destination and a valid destination name e g view voice destination to VSD_1 and then press lt Enter gt Page 5 233 VoIP Commands A screen similar to the following displays Page 5 234 kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Viewing Destination kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk voice destination VSD_1 h 323 address 195 167 10 33 1720 voice destination VSD_2 h 323 address 195 167 10 34 1720 voice destination to VSD_1 port 1 local channel VSD_1 1 1 24 delice destination to VSD_2 port 1 local channel VSD_1 1 1 24 voice phone group Ext of PBX__1 voice phone group Ext of PBX__2 Joice phone group Ext of PBX__1 type local extensions vice phone group Ext of PBX__2 type local extensions voice phone group Ext of PBX__1 site prefix off v ice phone group Ext of PBX__2 site prefix off Voice phone group Ext of PBX__1 format xxxx voice phone group Ext of PBX_2 format xxxx voice phone group Ext of PBX__1 strip digit length 0 vice phone group Ext of PBX__2 strip digit length 0 VoIP Commands voice phone group Command Usage Create phone group with specified
183. ample 8 000 will return a syntax error message Default The default value is 8000 milliseconds Command Examples voice signaling channel 2 1 1 12 emw out wink wait maximum 8000 voice signaling channel 2 1 13 24 emw out wink wait max 30000 Remarks The voice signaling protocol command must be set to the corresponding protocol type before any commands for E amp M Wink Start Immediate Start and Delay Start Signaling and FXS FXO Loop and Ground Start commands will take effect Page 5 96 VoIP Commands voice signaling emw out wink duration min Command Usage Specify minimum E amp M wink duration Syntax Options voice signaling channel lt s ol port startChannel endChannel gt emw out wink duration min imum lt value gt Definitions slot Specifies chassis slot number where VSM is installed e g 2 port Specifies physical port number on voice daughtercard e g 1 startChannel The first number in the range of voice channels e g 1 endChannel The last number in the range of voice channels e g 30 Syntax Note Be sure to separate the start and end range numbers with a hyphen e g 1 30 imum Optional command syntax Type either min or minimum in the command line value Specifies the minimum duration of the wink response to the M lead for detection by the M lead in milliseconds from 5 to 60 000 e g 100 Syntax Note Do not use commas when entering the value for
184. ancy 4 voice coding profile calabprof2 fax t 38 low speed redundancy 5 Page 5 209 VoIP Commands voice coding profile fax t 38 high speed redundancy Command Usage Specify coding T 38 high speed packet redundancy Syntax Options voice coding profile lt codingProfName gt fax t 38 high speed redundancy 0 1 2 Definitions codingProfName 0 1 2 Default The default value is 2 Command Example Identifies coding profile by name e g salemprof1 maximum length of 40 characters The following characters are permitted in the coding profile name a z A Z 0 9 space and Ss 2 HA_ amp I lt gt CQO IK Specifies packet level redundancy for high speed data transmission i e T 4 image data for specified fax coding profile voice coding profile salemprof1 fax t 38 high speed redundancy 1 voice coding profile calabprof2 fax t 38 high speed redundancy 2 Page 5 210 VoIP Commands voice coding profile fax t 38 training check field method Command Usage Specify coding profile T 38 data handling method local over the network Syntax Options voice coding profile lt codingProfName gt fax t 38 training check field method local network Definitions codingProfName Identifies coding profile by name e g salemprof1 maximum length of 40 characters The following characters are permitted in the coding profile
185. and response scheme The CLI interface presents a single prompt character at the beginning of each command line however this does not apply to the vsmboot asc file in which there is no response For details on the vsmboot asc file and other similar type files see Chapter 4 Setup and Installation which contains an example of a partial VoIP boot file Note 4 Do not use any CLI view or reset commands from within the aforementioned VSM boot files at any time The CLI text based commands used in VoIP are intended for use by Network Administrators and technical staff to configure Alcatel switches for VoIP Commands are not case sensitive unless otherwise stated however if a name or string is used in a command it will be case sensitive Commands which may apply to either E1 E1 ISDN PRI or BRI Euro are in general collectively referenced in command names under E1 Typically command tasks which begin with specify have more than two parameters from which to choose whereas command tasks beginning with set are generally an either or type command e g on or off When entering certain values such as slot port and channel numbers in the command syntax refer to the configuration table on the following page for valid entries VoIP Parameters Coding Profiles and Other Settings VoIP configuration parameters include system wide configuration as well as per channel per port and per daughtercard configuration System wide conf
186. andling method local over the network 5 211 Coding Profiles Silence Detection Specify voice fax coding profile silence detection time 5 212 Specify voice fax coding profile silence signal level 5 213 Coding Profiles G 711 Specify G 711 A law Mu Law modem coding resampling 5 214 Coding Profiles Caller ID Set caller ID for specified coding profile on off Command must be set to apply other caller ID settings 5 215 Page 5 10 VoIP Commands VOICE NETWORK 5 216 Voice Network H 323 Gatekeeper Discove Set gatekeeper control on off 5 217 Set gatekeeper mode for auto discovery manual off not available this release 5 218 Specify gatekeeper IP address for gateway discovery manual mode only 5 219 Voice Network H 323 Gateway Configuration Set calls allowed or disallowed without gatekeeper gateway endpoint not registered true false 5 220 Specify number of registration attempts allowed before gateway endpoint registration failure 5 221 Specify gateway endpoint registration type if gatekeeper used 5 222 Associate or disassociate phone groups with gatekeeper Gf gatekeeper used 5 223 Voice Network H 323 Gateway Operations Specify H 323 display name for gateway 5 224 Set RTP RTCP port mode for gateway dynamic sequential 5 225 Specify starting RTP RTCP port number for gateway if sequential 5 226 NETWORK DIALING
187. ands voice signaling fxo gs ringing inter cycle Command Usage Specify Foreign Exchange Office Ground Start FXS GS time between consecutive ring cycles Syntax Options voice signaling channel lt s ol pori stantChannel endChannel gt fxo gs ringing inter cycle lt value gt Definitions slot Specifies chassis slot number where VSM is installed e g 2 port Specifies physical port number on voice daughtercard e g 1 startChannel The first number in the range of voice channels e g 1 endChannel The last number in the range of voice channels e g 30 Syntax Note Be sure to separate the start and end range numbers with a hyphen e g 1 30 value Specifies the time between fxs gs start time between consecutive ring cycles in millisec onds from 1 to 1 000 e g 5000 to detect ringing Syntax Note Do not use commas when entering the fxs gs start time between consecutive ring cycles to detect ringing for example 5 000 will return a syntax error message Default The default value is 5000 milliseconds Command Examples voice signaling channel 2 1 1 12 fxo gs ringing inter cycle 5000 voice signaling channel 2 2 13 24 fxo gs ringing inter cycle 30000 voice signaling channel 2 3 1 30 fxo gs ringing inter cycle 60000 Remarks The voice signaling protocol command must be set to the corresponding protocol type before any commands for E amp M Wink Start Immediate Start and Delay S
188. annel lt s ol port stantChannel endChannel gt no answer wait limit lt value gt Definitions slot Specifies chassis slot number where VSM is installed e g 2 port Specifies physical port number on voice daughtercard e g 1 startChannel The first number in the range of voice channels e g 1 endChannel The last number in the range of voice channels e g 30 Syntax Note Be sure to separate the start and end range numbers with a hyphen e g 1 30 no Specifies no answer wait limit i e infinite value Specifies time to wait before disconnecting a call when there is no answer at the destina tion in seconds from 0 ms to 65 534 Syntax Notes Do not use commas when entering the no answer wait limit for example 65 534 will return a syntax error message Do not use no if entering a value A no answer wait limit means wait forever for the call to be answered A no answer wait limit 100 r any other number of seconds means wait forever for calls to be answered Default The default setting is no answer wait limit Command Examples voice signaling channel 2 1 1 12 no answer wait limit voice signaling channel 2 2 13 24 answer wait limit 0 voice signaling channel 2 3 1 20 no answer wait limit 100 Page 5 74 VoIP Commands voice signaling hang up wait limit Command Usage Specify time to wait to force caller to disconnect channel timing The call is automatically termin
189. ar down fax call 5 76 Signaling Attributes Signal Power Define companding type Mu law A law 5 77 Specify gain inserted at receiver 5 78 Specify gain inserted at transmitter 5 79 Specify amplitude of comfort white noise 5 80 Signaling Attributes E amp M Common Signaling Digital only Specify E amp M signaling time for transition to on hook debounce 5 81 Specify E amp M signaling time for transition to off hook debounce 5 82 Specify E amp M signaling time to wait before declaring on hook seize detect 5 83 Specify E amp M signaling time to wait before declaring off hook clear detect 5 84 Specify E amp M signaling time to wait before confirming on hook 5 85 Specify E amp M signaling time to wait for on hook after a clear 5 86 Specify E amp M signaling time to wait between termination and origination 5 87 Specify E amp M signaling time to wait between termination and receiving 5 88 Set E amp M signaling dial tone generation on incoming calls on off 5 89 Specify minimum E amp M signaling connection time 5 90 Specify time to wait after E amp M signaling hang up before disabling 5 91 Signaling Attributes E amp M Wink Start Signaling Digital only Specify minimum E amp M wink delay on incoming calls 5 92 Specify maximum E amp M wink delay on incoming calls 5 93 Specify duration of E amp M wink on incoming calls 5 94 Specify time to ignore tones digits after E amp M wink 5 95 Page 5 6 VoIP Commands
190. arate the start and end range numbers with a hyphen e g 1 30 value Specifies time period in milliseconds from 0 to 60 000 e g 5000 wherein if glare condi tion is detected the line stays off hook and generates a congestion tone Syntax Note Do not use commas when entering the E amp M immediate start time value in which a glare condition is reported and a conges tion tone is generated while off hook for example 5 000 will return a syntax error message Default The default value is 5000 milliseconds Command Examples voice signaling channel 2 1 1 12 emi glare report 5000 voice signaling channel 2 2 13 24 emi glare report 30000 voice signaling channel 2 3 1 30 emi glare report 60000 Remarks The voice signaling protocol command must be set to the corresponding protocol type before any commands for E amp M Wink Start Immediate Start and Delay Start Signaling and FXS FXO Loop and Ground Start commands will take effect Page 5 99 VoIP Commands voice signaling emi digit wait Command Usage Specify E amp M immediate start time to wait before beginning digit collection Syntax Options voice signaling channel lt s ol pori stantChannel endChannel gt emi digit wait lt value gt Definitions slot port startChannel endChannel value Default Command Examples voice signaling channel 2 1 1 12 emi digit wait 200 voice signaling channel 2 2 13 24 emi digit wait 30
191. ard insert DIMMs side up into VSX CHSX H mother board in left most position connector J17 and connector J15 for a second card Once voice daughtercard s seated locate VSX into empty slot 2 9 MPX must be installed in slot 1 For OSR with analog daughtercard insert FXO FXS module side up into VSX CHSX H motherboard in left most position connector J17 and connector J15 for a second card Once voice daughtercard s seated locate VSX into empty slot 2 9 MPX must be installed in slot 1 Connect port on voice daughtercard to PBX or other device using straight through or cross over cable straight through recommended For digital voice daughtercard only if communication link error occurs between switch and PBX or Key Set turn OFF switch remove daughtercard and then flip blue T1 cross over toggle switch on the top side of the board to swap the T1 transmit and receive connections for the designated port Setup and Installation 10 Connect VoIP switch to external components e g OmniPCX 4400 and then set these devices so that no calls can be processed until setup and installation is complete For analog daughtercard with FXO FXS module only confirm the analog VSA daugh tercard North American or European version being installed is the correct board for the location in which it will be used and that the ring cadence is appropriately set for that location Gf necessary contact Customer Support for furthe
192. ards each connected by one incoming only and one outgoing only trunk In most cases the PBX is assumed to be trunked to the North American PSTN Public Switched Telephone Network however some examples have voice daughtercards connected to the PSTN It should be presumed also that all calls going to the PSTN are directed by Telco Central Offices The WAN links between the switches or some other device are via the WSM or WSX modules which provide the ports e g T1 E1 for data communications The voice daughtercards VSD VSB and VSA provide the telephony ports e g T1 E1 Euro ISDN BRI FXO and FXS for voice communications Except where specified otherwise it should be assumed that the VoIP daughtercards used in the examples are VSDs Variations to the dialing scheme configurations entail other likely scenarios in a VoIP network including the use of hunt groups site prefixes strip digits fax over IP and caller ID Dialing schemes for special configurations such as using VoIP in the switch with the OmniPCX 4400 are provided as well All dialing schemes can be used in OmniAccess 512 and Omni Switch Router configurations To simplify the configuration process a VSM Voice Switching Module partial text based ASCII configuration boot file vsmboot asc has been created for each dialing scheme Each partial boot file contains the specific CLI commands needed to implement a selected dialing scheme and should be merged with the complete mast
193. are described below and shown in the illustration Elements of Converged Voice Data Packet Switched VoIP Network and Circuit Switched PSTN on page 1 9 This illustration is intended to provide a sample visual representation of all the various devices that may be used in a VoIP network and how they may interconnected VoIP network interoperability is based on ITU H 323 network call control standards and multiple vocoder support See also abbreviated International Telecommunica tion Union ITU Standards on page 1 17 By means of either digital or analog VoIP daughtercards installed in Alcatel switches the basic elements required for providing enterprise H 323 VoIP gateways in packet switched IP networks are readily accommodated including the client the gateway and the gatekeeper as described VoIP H 323 Client The Client is the device initiating and or receiving the call This can be a standard telephone handset or some other H 323 VoIP capable device in an IP network VoIP H 323 Gateway Alcatel s H 323 VoIP Gateway is the device used to make the transition from the packetized voice network to a circuit switched network e g PSTN and back Functionally the enter prise VoIP gateway is comprised of voice to IP network converter components e g DSPs on the voice switching daughtercards In VoIP the process for call placement is the same as in a service provider system except that the gateway is accessed from Customer Premise Equip me
194. ase Channels 11 12 13 14 15 and 16 Note 4 In the current release you will not receive an error message if you enter an invalid slot number port number or channel number for view commands Page 5 3 VoIP Commands Command Tasks VOICE SWITCHING DAUGHTERCARD 5 14 Voice Switching Daughtercard Activate Assign IP address mask to voice switching daughtercard 5 16 Assign IP address to voice switching daughtercard 5 17 Assign IP default gateway to voice switching daughtercard 5 18 Activate voice switching daughtercard configuration 5 19 Save current text based configuration to flash global Save All dump command 5 20 Voice Switching Daughtercard H 323 Gateway Configuration and Runtime Parameters Set outgoing Fast Start mode for gateway on off 5 23 Set incoming Fast Start mode for gateway on off 5 24 Set automatic answer for gateway on off 5 25 Voice Switching Daughtercard Dialing Timers Specify maximum time for dialing timers to wait between off hook first dialed tone digit to be detected 5 26 Specify maximum time for dialing timers to wait between tones digits being dialed 5 27 Specify maximum time for dialing timers to wait for all tones digits to be dialed 5 28 Specify digit used by dialing timers to terminate dial process optional 5 29 Voice Switching Daughtercard Analo Set VSA cadence coefficient 5 30 Set VSA ring ID 5 31 Voice
195. assis slot number where VSM is installed e g 2 port Specifies physical port number on voice daughtercard e g 1 startChannel The first number in the range of voice channels e g 1 endChannel The last number in the range of voice channels e g 30 Syntax Note Be sure to separate the start and end range numbers with a hyphen e g 1 30 value Specifies the signal frequency threshold level for tone detection in dBm decibels below 1 milliwatt output signal power referenced to 1 milliwatt input signal power from 50 to 15 e g 40 Default The default value is 40 dBm Command Examples voice signaling channel 2 1 1 12 single frequency tone detection threshold level 40 voice signaling channel 2 2 13 24 single frequency tone detection threshold level 50 Page 5 155 VoIP Commands voice signaling single frequency tone detection threshold time Command Usage Set signal strength threshold duration for single frequency tone detection Syntax Options voice signaling channel lt s ol port stantChannel endChannel gt single frequency tone detection threshold time lt value gt slot Specifies chassis slot number where VSM is installed e g 2 port Specifies physical port number on voice daughtercard e g 1 startChannel The first number in the range of voice channels e g 1 endChannel The last number in the range of voice channels e g 30 Syntax Note Be sure
196. at 31xx voice phone group calab_engr3 format 41xx Remarks This command calculates the number of digits allowed and describes the flexible portion of a dialing number to collect Page 5 243 VoIP Commands voice phone group strip digit length Command Usage Specify number of outbound collected digits to strip in phone group before forwarding call optional Syntax Options voice phone group lt PhoneGroupName gt strip digit length lt num gt Definitions PhoneGroupName Identifies the phone group by name e g salem_engr1 maximum length of 40 charac ters The following characters are permitted in the phone group name a z A Z 0 9 space and A_ amp I1 lt gt QOTI t num Identifies the phone group strip digit length string e g 2 maximum string length is 24 minimum is 0 Default The default num value is 0 Command Example voice phone group salem_engr1 strip digit 0 voice phone group salem_engr2 strip digit 1 voice phone group salem_engr3 strip digit 2 Page 5 244 VoIP Commands voice phone group forwarding prefix Command Usage Set voice phone group to allow string of digits prefix to be forwarded prior to fowarding call to endpoint destination on off Syntax Options voice phone group lt PhoneGroupName gt forwarding prefix on off Definitions PhoneGroupName on off Default Identifies
197. ated if the call originator does not hang up within the allotted time period after the destination has hung up Syntax Options voice signaling channel lt s ol pori startChannel endChannel gt no hang up wait limit lt value gt Definitions slot Specifies chassis slot number where VSM is installed e g 2 port Specifies physical port number on voice daughtercard e g 1 startChannel The first number in the range of voice channels e g 1 endChannel The last number in the range of voice channels e g 30 Syntax Note Be sure to separate the start and end range numbers with a hyphen e g 1 30 no Specifies no hang up wait limit G e infinite value Specifies time to wait to before disconnecting a call once the call originator has hung up the phone in seconds from 0 ms to 65 534 Syntax Notes Do not use commas when entering the no hang up wait limit for example 65 534 will return a syntax error message Do not use no if entering a value A no hang up wait limit means the call remains connected until the call originator hangs up the phone A no hang up wait limit 100 or any other number of seconds is considered an invalid setting Default The default setting is no hang up wait limit Command Examples voice signaling channel 2 1 1 12 no hang up wait limit voice signaling channel 2 2 13 24 hang up wait limit 0 Page 5 75 VoIP Commands voice signaling fax holdover
198. ating with 3rd Party PBX via Euro BRI E1 ETSD Other PBXs European VSD VSA Mixed Interoperating with European Digital and Analog Voice Daughtercards All dialing schemes in this chapter can be modified to be used with the VSD VSB and VSA voice switching daughtercards with the following exceptions e Dialing schemes No 7 and 8 Fractional T1 Hunt Groups apply only to VSD and VSB daughtercards Fractional type hunt groups do not apply to VSAs because analog channels can only be combined not multiplied or split e Dialing schemes No 17 Mixed Digital and Analog and No 18 Static Caller ID apply to North American configurations using VSA daughtercards Dialing scheme No 26 Mixed Digital and Analog applies to a European VSA configuration e Dialing scheme No 25 applies only to VSB daughtercards European only e Except for when local channel destinations are used all AVNDS commands function with the H 323 endpoints e g OmniPCX Cisco Routers Microsoft NetMeeting Page 3 4 Introduction Network Dialing Scheme VoIP Features The table below lists dialing plans that use particular VoIP features See also AVNDS Master List of Features by CLI Command on page 3 67 Descriptions of the dialing schemes in this chapter are intended to serve as guidelines in the development of enterprise specific network VoIP dialing schemes
199. ation instead of the H 323 protocol to process analog calls and require two DSP channels to make the calls FXO module Analog Voice Ports 2 DSP FXO module Analog 3 Voice Ports 4 DSP Top View Switch Bus Analog Voice Switching Daughtercard VSA FX0 FX0 Top View DSP FXS module Analog 2 Voice Ports 3 4 FXO module Analog 5 Voice Ports 6 a Top View Switch Bus Analog Voice Switching Daughtercard VSA FXS FX0 Mixed Top View Page 2 20 Voice Switching Daughtercard Analog VSA Front Panel Each channel port has one corresponding LED indicator with link status displays as shown in the following illustration Port numbers can vary depending on the VoIP switch configura tion see also VoIP Daughtercard Port Numbering Schemes on page 2 28 4 Ports Single FXS module All VSA boards have one link LED per VSA 4FXS voice port 1 2 3 4 O O YS VY nv Nake foe TOOR oem LEDs display as fol Inactive lows Green On VSA port Z link to switch is con nected 8 Ports Dual FXS module Green Off VSA port link is disconnected VSA 8FXS Green Blinking FXS FXS Phone connected to 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 VSA port ringing No O O O OQO O O O O Blin
200. aughtercard VSB supports Euro ISDN BRI Analog Voice Switching Daughtercard VSA supports Analog Fax with FXS or FXO modules Jor n VoIP on the OmniAccess 512 the following software modules must be installed oa5 img vsoa img oa5_text_cfg img oadSdrv img for WAN connectivity like wsx img tie1drv img for WAN connectivity uplink ports qos img recommended but not required To run VoIP on the OSR the following software modules must be installed mpx img vsx img text_cfg img wsx img for WAN connectivity tie1drv img for WAN connectivity T1 E1 uplink ports qos img recommended but not required esx img Gif Ethernet or Gigabit Ethernet modules are installed eAVNDS Alcatel VoIP Network Dialing Scheme VoIP requires installation of a master configuration boot file vsmboot asc which contains pre configured operational settings for the entire VoIP network This file must be merged with one or more available dialing schemes i e vsmboot asc 01 24 files See Chapter 3 Network Dialing Schemes for details Files may be copied and merged using a standard text editor Command Line Interface CLI Configuration Tool VoIP includes a CLI text based configuration tool which must be accessed via the AVNDS master vsmboot asc file Compatible with PC or UNIX workstation running either TELNET or FTP File Transfer Protocol Page 4 1 Setup and Installation Components Desc
201. ax Notes This command only works from within the command line inter face and cannot be used from within the vsmboot asc file Default None Command Example view voice channel 2 1 25 isdn level 2 statistics view voice channel 2 1 25 isdn level 2 stats view voice channel 2 2 30 isdn level 2 statistics view voice channel 2 2 30 isdn level 2 stats Page 5 273 VoIP Commands voice channel reset telephony level stats Command Usage Reset cumulative telephony statistics for one or more voice channels Not available this release Syntax Options voice channel lt s ol port startChannel endChannel gt reset telephony level stat istic s Definitions slot port channel istic Default None Command Example Specifies chassis slot number where VSM is installed e g 2 Specifies physical port number on voice daughtercard e g 1 Specifies port channel number range in which to reset telephony statistics e g 1 12 Optional command syntax Type either stats or statistics in the command line Syntax Notes This command only works from within the command line inter face and cannot be used from within the vsmboot asc file voice channel 2 1 1 12 reset telephony level statistics voice channel 2 2 13 24 reset telephony level stats Page 5 274 VoIP Commands voice channel reset telephony channel stats Command Usage Reset channel statistics for one or mo
202. before any commands for E amp M Wink Start Immediate Start and Delay Start Signaling and FXS FXO Loop and Ground Start commands will take effect Page 5 103 VoIP Commands voice signaling emd out integrity check Command Usage Specify E amp M delay start signal detection Syntax Options voice signaling channel lt s ol port startChannel endChannel gt emd out integrity check on off Definitions slot Specifies chassis slot number where VSM is installed e g 2 port Specifies physical port number on voice daughtercard e g 1 startChannel The first number in the range of voice channels e g 1 endChannel The last number in the range of voice channels e g 30 Syntax Note Be sure to separate the start and end range numbers with a hyphen e g 1 30 on Turns ON E amp M delay integrity check on outgoing calls off Turns OFF E amp M delay integrity check on outgoing calls Default The default setting is off Command Examples voice signaling channel 2 1 1 12 emd out integrity check off voice signaling channel 2 2 13 24 emd out integrity check on Remarks The voice signaling protocol command must be set to the corresponding protocol type before any commands for E amp M Wink Start Immediate Start and Delay Start Signaling and FXS FXO Loop and Ground Start commands will take effect When the Integrity Check mode is ON the delay signal response is required from the P
203. ber higher than the RTP port number e g the starting RTP port number is 30001 with a base of 30000 and the starting RTCP port number is 30002 e On the first incoming H 323 call setup message the starting RTP port number would be 30003 and the starting RTCP port number would be 30004 e On the next incoming H 323 call setup message the starting RTP port number would be 30004 and the starting RTCP port number would be 30005 e On the subsequent incoming H 323 call setup message the starting RTP port number would be 30006 and the starting RTCP port number would be 30007 and so on Standard port assignments are as follows Gatekeeper User Datagram Protocol UDP Discovery Multicast Address 224 0 1 41 Gatekeeper UDP Discovery Port automatic discovery 1718 Gatekeeper UDP Registration and Status Port manual discovery 1719 Endpoint Transmission Control Protocol TCP Call Signaling Port 1720 Page 5 227 VoIP Commands Network Dialing Scheme The commands listed and described below are used to configure a Network Dialing Scheme and related components as follows destinations phone groups and phone group parame ters and numbering plans including numbering plan hunt methods and descriptions Destinations H 323 endpoint destination name local channel destination delete destination view destination Phone Groups create or delete voice phone group view voice phone group Inbound Outbound Digit Processing
204. c s Definitions slot Specifies chassis slot number where VSM is installed e g 2 port Specifies physical port number on voice daughtercard e g 1 channel Specifies port channel number in which to view DSP receive and transmit statistics e g 25 cumulative for the current call on specified channel istic Optional command syntax Type either stats or statistics in the command line Syntax Notes This command only works from within the command line inter face and cannot be used from within the vsmboot asc file Default None Command Example view voice channel 2 1 25 dsp statistics view voice channel 2 1 25 dsp stats view voice channel 2 2 30 dsp statistics view voice channel 2 2 30 dsp stats Page 5 269 VoIP Commands view voice channel error stats Command Usage Display cumulative error statistics Not available this release Syntax Options view voice channel lt s oi port startChannel endChannel gt error stat istic s Definitions slot port channel istic Default None Command Example Specifies chassis slot number where VSM is installed e g 2 Specifies physical port number on voice daughtercard e g 1 Specifies port channel number in which to view error statistics e g 25 cumulative for the current call on specified channel Optional command syntax Type either stats or statistics in the command line Syntax Notes T
205. call moves to call progress when dialing is completed and net connect occurs whether or not all digits have been collected Page 5 168 VoIP Commands voice signaling override information element transport Command Usage Override call signaling for information element IE transport on off This command should only be used under the supervision of trained personnel Syntax Options voice signaling channel lt s ol port startChannel endChannel gt no override information element transport on off Definitions slot Specifies chassis slot number where VSM is installed e g 2 port Specifies physical port number on voice daughtercard e g 1 startChannel The first number in the range of voice channels e g 1 endChannel The last number in the range of voice channels e g 30 Syntax Note Be sure to separate the start and end range numbers with a hyphen e g 1 30 no Optional command syntax Syntax Note If no is used then ON and OFF cannot be specified on Turns ON information element transport for specified telephony signaling channel off Turns OFF information element transport for specified telephony signaling channel Syntax Notes If this command is set to ON then call signaling for QSIG infor mation must be set to OFF via the override call signaling for qsig ie transport command Default The default setting is no override information element transport Command Examples voice si
206. canceller tail length 0 5 201 voice coding profile echo canceller refresh configuration 5 202 voice coding profile echo canceller refresh state 0 0 5 203 voice coding profile fax rate 2 ee 5 204 voice coding profile fax transmit level lt dige patentee eee eee ee 5 205 voice coding profile fax carrier detect threshold 0 5 206 voice coding profile fax timeout naana anaa ee 5 207 voice coding profile fax t 38 high speed packet rate 5 208 voice coding profile fax t 38 low speed redundancy 5 209 page xi Table of Contents page xii voice coding profile fax t 38 high speed redundancy 5 210 voice coding profile fax t 38 training check field method 5 211 voice coding profile silence detect time 0 00 00 eee eee 5 212 voice coding profile silence detect level 0 0 00 0 00 00000000 5 213 voice coding profile g 711 modem resampling mode 5 214 voice coding profile callerid 2 0 0 ee 5 215 Voce NER Orbe 2 ht SG eI Ae Efe A fe Sh et Sk A kd 5 216 voice network card h 323 gatekeeper control 00020000005 5 217 voice network h 323 gatekeeper mode 0 0000 cee ee 5 218 voice network h 323 gatekeeper address 0 000 0000 cee ee 5 219 voice network h 323 allow calls without gatekeeper 5 220 voice network h 323 a
207. card_number gt h 323 endpoint registration type gateway terminal Definitions slot Specifies the chassis slot number where VSM is installed e g 2 card_number Specifies the voice daughtercard position number e g 1 gateway Enables gateway endpoint registration terminal Enables v registration Syntax Note The only time this command should be set to terminal is when an analog voice switching daughtercard is in use and only one phone number and one analog port are in service Default The default setting is gateway Command Example voice network card 2 1 h 323 endpoint registration type gateway voice network card 2 2 h 323 endpoint registration type terminal Remarks This command is used to set the H 225 0 endpoint registration type of the voice switching daughtercard This should not be confused with the H 245 terminal type although the two parameters should be programmed consistently This parameter specifies how the endpoint will register itself with the gatekeeper and has nothing to do with master slave determina tion See the RADVision H 323 Gatekeeper User Manual for more information Page 5 222 VoIP Commands voice network h 323 gatekeeper associate Command Usage This command is used to associate or disassociate one or more phone groups with a daugh tercard gatekeeper thereby enabling the daughtercard to generate the legal H 323 alias names that are sent to the gatekeeper
208. cate the number of channels availalble on the port e g 3 channels BRI Euro 32 channels E1 PRI ISDN Only 0 and 16 are allowed for data channel numbers control channel 16 is reserved for signaling on E1 ISDN PRI and 0 is reserved for the BRI Euro control channel For E1 ISDN PRI channel 0 is used for framing there is no framing on BRI Euro Bearer channels and corresponding Data channels must apply to to the same voice switching daughtercard Default For E1 ISDN PRI the default channel values are 1 15 17 31 For BRI Euro the default channel values are is 1 2 Command Example voice channel 2 1 1 isdn b channel voice channel 2 2 2 isdn b channel voice channel 3 1 1 isdn b channel voice channel 3 2 15 isdn b channel voice channel 3 3 17 isdn b channel voice channel 3 4 31 isdn b channel Remarks The voice port isdn connection switch type command is used to configure the type of switch connection for the ISDN ports at the voice daughtercard level Specification of the ISDN protocol is optional if not using E1 ISDN PRI or BRI Euro Use the table and illustration above to determine valid bearer data channel slot and port values applies to OS R with two voice switching daughtercards Page 5 57 VoIP Commands Channel Properties The commands listed and described below are used to configure the channel properties for individual voice channels as follows voice channel mode PLAR Private Line Automatic Ring down o
209. ce Command Usage Specify Foreign Exchange Office Loop Start FXO LS incoming ring signal debounce interval Syntax Options voice signaling channel lt s ol port stantChannel endChannel gt fxo Is ringing debounce lt value gt Definitions slot Specifies chassis slot number where VSM is installed e g 2 port Specifies physical port number on voice daughtercard e g 1 startChannel The first number in the range of voice channels e g 1 endChannel The last number in the range of voice channels e g 30 Syntax Note Be sure to separate the start and end range numbers with a hyphen e g 1 30 value Specifies the fxo ls incoming ring signal debounce delay interval in milliseconds from 1 to 1 000 e g 50 Syntax Note Do not use commas when entering the fxo ls incoming ring signal debounce value for example 1 000 will return a syntax error message Default The default value is 50 milliseconds Command Examples voice signaling channel 2 1 1 12 fxo Is ringing debounce 50 voice signaling channel 2 2 13 24 fxo Is ringing debounce 500 voice signaling channel 2 3 1 30 fxo Is ringing debounce 1000 Remarks The voice signaling protocol command must be set to the corresponding protocol type before any commands for E amp M Wink Start Immediate Start and Delay Start Signaling and FXS FXO Loop and Ground Start commands will take effect A minimum debounce value of 500 must be set fo
210. ce and Ss HA_ amp I lt gt OL Default None Command Example view voice phone group salem_engr1 view voice phone group calab_engr1 Screen Output To view parameters for a voice phone group type view voice phone group and a valid phone group name e g view voice phone group PBX_1 and then press lt Enter gt A screen similar to the following displays kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Viewing Phone Groups kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk voice phone group Ext of PBX_1 voice phone group Ext of PBX_1 type local extensions voice phone group Ext of PBX_1 site prefix off voice phone group Ext of PBX_1 format xxxx voice phone group Ext of PBX_1 strip digit length 0 Page 5 237 VoIP Commands voice phone group site prefix Command Usage Set unique phone group site prefix for routing VoIP calls on off Syntax Options voice phone group lt PhoneGroupName gt site prefix on off Definitions PhoneGroupName Identifies the phone group by name e g salem_engr1 maximum length of characters 60 The following characters are permitted in the phone group name a z A Z 0 9 space and A_ amp 1 lt gt QOTIT on Turns ON site prefix for specified voice phone group off Turns OFF site prefix for specified voice phone group Default The default setting is off Command Example voice phone group sale
211. channels e g 30 Syntax Note Be sure to separate the start and end range numbers with a hyphen e g 1 30 value Specifies the time to wait before off hook condition is declared in milliseconds from 1 to 5 000 e g 150 Syntax Note Do not use commas when entering the fxs Is time to wait value before declaring off hook condition for example 1 000 will return a syntax error message Default The default value is 150 milliseconds Command Examples voice signaling channel 2 1 1 12 fxs Is seize detect 150 voice signaling channel 2 2 13 24 fxs Is seize detect 2500 voice signaling channel 2 3 1 30 fxs Is seize detect 5000 Remarks The voice signaling protocol command must be set to the corresponding protocol type before any commands for E amp M Wink Start Immediate Start and Delay Start Signaling and FXS FXO Loop and Ground Start commands will take effect Page 5 110 VoIP Commands voice signaling fxs ls originate clear detect Command Usage Specify Foreign Exchange Station Loop Start FXS LS minimum time to wait before declaring on hook by originator calling party Syntax Options voice signaling channel lt s ol pori starntChannel endChannel gt fxs Is originate clear detect lt value gt Definitions slot Specifies chassis slot number where VSM is installed e g 2 port Specifies physical port number on voice daughtercard e g 1 startChannel The first number in
212. cification many not be met as no attempt is made to assure proper numbering upon assignment Syntax Notes Do not use commas when entering the starting value for RTP RTCP ports for example 30 000 will return a syntax error message To use this command the starting RTP RTCP port mode for the gateway must be set to sequential via the RTP port mode command If the starting RTP RTCP port mode for the gateway is set to dynamic then this value is ignored Default The default value is 30000 Command Example voice network card 2 1 h 323 rtp port base 30000 voice network card 2 2 h 323 rtp port base 65535 Remarks This command is used to specify the starting port number assigned to RTP RTCP ports when H 323 calls are made an RTP or RTCP port is opened for each call The RTP port number should be an even number and the RTCP port number should be one number greater than the RTP port value In order to accomplish this sort of controlled allocation the port numbers are assigned start ing at the RTP port base value Call Control Block CCB 0 will use ports numbered RTP port base and RTP port base 1 CCB 1 will use the next two successive ports etc When the call is terminated the CCB number will eventually be reused Page 5 226 VoIP Commands For each new H 323 call the CCB number is incremented The first call would be CCB 0 the second would be CCB 1 and so on as shown below where the RTCP port number is set one num
213. coding profile Turns OFF secondary level of control over call progress tone detection for specified coding profile Syntax Notes If the call progress detection control for a channel is set to rela tive via the call progress tone detection command then this parameter determines whether or not detection is enabled The default setting is off Page 5 194 VoIP Commands voice coding profile voice dtmf relay Command Usage Set voice coding profile for V 18 Annex A call progress tone detection on off Syntax Options voice coding profile lt codingProf Name gt voice dtmf relay on off Definitions codingProfName Identifies coding profile by name e g salemprof1 maximum length of 40 characters The following characters are permitted in the coding profile name a z A Z 0 9 space and Ss 2 HA_ amp I lt gt CQO It on Turns ON V 18 Annex A call progress tone detection for specified coding profile off Turns OFF V 18 Annex A call progress tone detection for specified coding profile Default The default setting is off Command Example voice coding profile salemprof1 voice dtmf relay off voice coding profile calabprof2 voice dtmf relay on Remarks V 18 Annex A is a 1400 hz tone used for channel configuration that is detected for 100 ms For more information on V 18 Annex A refer to the V 18 Annex A threshold commands Page 5 195 VoIP Command
214. conferencing the H 320 H 323 standard Page 1 17 VoIP Standards for Development A Law and Mu Law are processes needed to compand digital signals A Law is used in most countries except for the U S Canada and Japan where Mu Law is more common Compand ing is the process of compressing the amplitude range of a single signal and then expanding them at the receiving end back to their original form Although it is impossible to exactly reproduce an analog signal digitally companding greatly improves the accuracy of this process PCM uses two different companding processes For this reason PCM A Law is used for international networks A Law The PCM coding and companding standard used in Europe and in areas outside of North America A Law encoding samples audio waveforms used in the 2 048 Mbps 30 chan nel PCM system E carrier Mu Law E Law The PCM voice coding and companding standard used in Japan and North America A PCM encoding algorithm where analog voice signals are sampled 8 000 times per second with each sample represented by an eight bit value and a raw 64 Kbps transmission rate All sample bits are inverted before transmission Note A Law and Mu Law are incompatible For example a signal sent with A law cannot be received by a system using Mu Law G 723 1 This is the ITU T algorithm recommendation used for compressed digital audio over Plain Old Telephone Service POTS lines It is the voice part of H 324 P
215. cted tones are ignored Page 5 164 VoIP Commands voice signaling override ring back Command Usage Override call signaling for ring back on off This command should only be used under the supervision of trained personnel Syntax Options voice signaling channel lt s ol port stantChannel endChannel gt no override ring back on off Definitions slot Specifies chassis slot number where VSM is installed e g 2 port Specifies physical port number on voice daughtercard e g 1 startChannel The first number in the range of voice channels e g 1 endChannel The last number in the range of voice channels e g 30 Syntax Note Be sure to separate the start and end range numbers with a hyphen e g 1 30 no Optional command syntax Syntax Note If no is used then ON and OFF cannot be specified on Turns ON ring back for specified telephony signaling channel off Turns OFF ring back for specified telephony signaling channel Syntax Note To use this command call signaling must be turned OFF via the voice signaling override full call progress tones command Default The default setting is no override ring back Command Examples voice signaling channel 2 1 1 12 no override ring back voice signaling channel 2 2 13 24 override ring back on voice signaling channel 2 3 1 30 override ring back off Remarks Ring back is the only call progress indication supported in the signaling band
216. d Examples voice signaling channel 2 1 1 12 fxo gs battery reversal debounce 20 voice signaling channel 2 2 13 24 fxo gs battery reversal debounce 500 voice signaling channel 2 3 1 30 fxo gs battery reversal debounce 1000 Remarks The voice signaling protocol command must be set to the corresponding protocol type before any commands for E amp M Wink Start Immediate Start and Delay Start Signaling and FXS FXO Loop and Ground Start commands will take effect Page 5 146 VoIP Commands voice signaling caller id name Command Usage Set outbound caller ID name private unavailable to transmit Syntax Options voice signaling channel lt s ot port startChannel endChannel gt caller id name callerIdName private unavailable Definitions slot Specifies chassis slot number where VSM is installed e g 2 port Specifies physical port number on voice daughtercard e g 1 startChannel The first number in the range of voice channels e g 1 endChannel The last number in the range of voice channels e g 30 Syntax Note Be sure to separate the start and end range numbers with a hyphen e g 1 30 callerldName Identifies the caller by name e g gleneck_daniel maximum length of 15 characters The following characters are permitted in the caller ID name a z A Z _ and no spaces are allowed Name must be surrounded by quotes private Sets outbound originating call
217. d dialing timers to terminate dial process Syntax Options voice daughter card lt s ot card_number gt no termination digit lt character gt Definitions slot Specifies slot number of switching module installed in chassis e g 2 card_number Specifies voice daughtercard position number e g 1 no Restores the digit to the default value value Specifies one of 16 characters 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 or no termination digit no com mas allowed that can be used by dialing timers to terminate dial process e g Dial termination digit cannot be part of valid phone number Syntax Note If a termination digit is used to terminate the dial process only one digit or single character can be used for the value Do not use no if entering a value Default The default character value is Command Examples voice daughter card 2 1 no termination digit voice daughter card 2 2 termination digit 0 voice daughter card 2 3 termination digit Remarks The voice daughter card termination digit command is used to determine when the dial process is complete All other digits are ignored after the termination digit The numbering plan in use attempts a match before the terminating digit is received All digits dialed until the termina tion digit is received are considered valid and the termination digit is discarded Use of the termination digit is optional This command effects the behavior of all phone gr
218. dChannel gt emd in delay min imum lt value gt Definitions slot Specifies chassis slot number where VSM is installed e g 2 port Specifies physical port number on voice daughtercard e g 1 startChannel The first number in the range of voice channels e g 1 endChannel The last number in the range of voice channels e g 30 Syntax Note Be sure to separate the start and end range numbers with a hyphen e g 1 30 imum Optional command syntax Type either min or minimum in the command line value Specifies the minimum duration of the delay signal response to the seize detect of incom ing calls on the M lead in milliseconds from 0 to 60 000 e g 200 Syntax Note Do not use commas when entering the minimum value for E amp M delay start response to off hook dial tone state for example 5 000 will return a syntax error message Default The default value is 200 milliseconds Command Examples voice signaling channel 2 1 15 emd in delay minimum 200 voice signaling channel 2 2 13 24 emd in delay min 30000 voice signaling channel 2 3 1 30 emd in delay min 60000 Remarks The voice signaling protocol command must be set to the corresponding protocol type before any commands for E amp M Wink Start Immediate Start and Delay Start Signaling and FXS FXO Loop and Ground Start commands will take effect Page 5 101 VoIP Commands voice signaling emd in delay max Command Usage Sp
219. decode voice audio data into IP packets Any sound that is not a fax modem data or signaling tone frequency including music is considered voice The data or PCM stream coming into the voice channel is referred to as the voice packet interval VPD time of the packets coming into the voice channel The encoder samples the voice traffic every 10 milliseconds i e it determines how many milliseconds of a sample to take e g 10 100 ms The codec puts the voice data into packet data form using this formula 10 ms of data is converted into one data packet The size of the converted packet is the voice information field VFD size and what is ultimately sent over the IP network The greater the VPI time the larger the VIF packet and the quantity of data transmitted onto the network however when the VPI time is shorter more VIF packets are sent In other words the larger the VIF packets the better the quality but the greater the traffic and use of bandwidth Page 5 185 VoIP Commands voice coding profile voice network delay buffer mode Command Usage Set coding profile buffer mode adaptive static Syntax Options voice coding profile lt codingProfName gt voice network delay buffer mode adaptive static Definitions codingProfName Identifies coding profile by name e g salemprof1 maximum length of 40 characters The following characters are permitted in the coding profile name a z A Z
220. digits to route calls to lines B Routes calls starting with 1 818 878 2xxx to lines A Routes calls starting with 1 603 598 2xxx to lines B Routes calls starting with 1 603 598 to trunk G and then the VoIP network uses these digits to route calls to ethernet WAN Z Routes calls starting with 1 818 878 to voice daugh tercard 1 via ethernet WAN Z and then the VoIP net work uses these digits to route calls to trunk D Page 3 55 VoIP Networks with Interoperability Example 21 Remarks Supported VoIP features and main CLI commands used with this dialing scheme are as follows To connect to the LIOE card on the OmniPCX 4400 the voice coding profile must be set to cp5 the VIF voice information field set to 192 and the VPI voice packet interval set to 30 ms See Chapter 5 VoIP Commands for more details on these settings Features Supported Primary CLI Commands Used H 323 gateway to voice daughtercard A voice destination local channel page 5 231 H 323 gateway to H 323 device C voice destination h 323 endpoint page 5 230 Local channel two hunt groups 24 channels per group T1 F Site prefix no site prefix 1 voice numbering plan hunt method page 5 255 voice numbering plan destination member page 5 257 voice numbering plan phone group member page 5 258 voice phone group site prefix page 5 238
221. ding 5 44 Line Terminator LT 2 16 Link Optimizer Ethernet LIOE 3 4 LIOE card 3 4 Lucent Definity G3 3 61 M Management Information Base MIB 1 15 Microsoft NetMeeting 3 4 3 51 Motorola MPC860 processor 1 13 MPX 2 6 4 6 mpx img 4 1 Mu Law 5 62 5 77 N NANP North American Numbering Plan 3 3 3 31 Network Terminator NT 2 16 North American PSTN Public Switched Telephone Network 3 1 Numbering Plans 1 15 3 2 5 228 5 253 0 oa5 img 4 1 oa5_text_cfg img 4 1 oa5drv img 4 1 Omni Switch Router 2 6 OmniAccess 512 2 6 OmniPCX 4400 3 3 3 55 out of band signaling 1 13 5 39 P packetized voice 1 12 patent pending Alcatel Voice Network Dialing Scheme AVNDS 1 8 payload packetization and digital signal processing 1 10 PBX Private Branch Exchange 3 3 3 63 PCM Pulse Code Modulation 1 13 2 6 2 20 5 79 PCM based voice packets 1 11 phone directory database 1 7 Phone Groups 1 15 3 2 5 223 5 228 type 3 5 phone number to IP address mappings 1 7 pinouts 2 11 Plain Old Telephone Service POTS 1 13 3 47 PLAR Private Line Automatic Ringdown 5 58 port numbers 2 21 2 28 POTS Plain Old Telephone Service 1 13 1 18 2 2 POTS TelSets 2 19 power failure 2 8 Private Branch Exchange PBX 3 4 Private Line Automatic Ringdown PLAR 5 58 PSTN Public Switched Telephone Network jz 9 1 PSTN fallback 2 8 3 45 Page I 3 Index Public Switched Telephone Network PSTN 1 1
222. dule e g 2 port Specifies physical port number on voice daughtercard e g 1 net Sets the ISDN connection protocol to network mode for PRI E1 European Telecommuni cations Standards Institute ETSD standard protocol For VSB only net configures the port as NT Network Terminator LT Line Terminator user Sets the ISDN connection protocol to user mode for PRI E1 ETSI standard protocol For VSB only user configures the port as TE Terminal Endpoint qmaster Sets the QSIG ISDN connection protocol to QSIG standard protocol for PRI E1 QSIG master ETSI std protocol qslave Sets the ISDN connection protocol to QSIG standard protocol for PRI E1 QSIG slave ETSI std protocol Default The default setting is qmaster Command Examples voice port 2 1 isdn protocol qmaster voice port 2 2 isdn protocol net voice port 2 3 isdn protocol user voice port 2 4 isdn protocol qslave Remarks The voice port isdn protocol command is used to configure the channel protocol mode for the ISDN ports at the voice daughtercard level Specification of the protocol is optional To use this command the voice daughtercard digital connection port type must be set to BRI Euro or El or E1 ISDN PRI via the voice port interface type command When this command is used the J29 and J30 jumpers on the VSB daughtercard must be set accordingly for NT LT TE or damage to either the VSB and or any connected device may occur See also Chapter 2
223. e Syntax Options view voice channel lt s ol port startChannel endChannel gt fax stat istic s Definitions slot Specifies chassis slot number where VSM is installed e g 2 port Specifies physical port number on voice daughtercard e g 1 channel Specifies port channel number range in which to view facsimile statistics e g 1 12 cumulative for the current call on specified channel istic Optional command syntax Type either stats or statistics in the command line Syntax Notes This command only works from within the command line inter face and cannot be used from within the vsmboot asc file Default None Command Example view voice channel 2 1 25 fax statistics view voice channel 2 1 25 fax stats view voice channel 2 2 30 fax statistics view voice channel 2 2 30 fax stats Page 5 272 VoIP Commands view voice channel isdn level 2 stats Command Usage Display cumulative ISDN level 2 statistics Not available this release Syntax Options view voice channel lt s ol port startChannel endChannel gt isdn level 2 stat istic s Definitions slot Specifies chassis slot number where VSM is installed e g 2 port Specifies physical port number on voice daughtercard e g 1 channel Specifies port channel number in which to view ISDN level 2 statistics e g 25 istic Optional command syntax Type either stats or statistics in the command line Synt
224. e ter can be ON or OFF If the coding type is set to fax T 38 this command should be set to OFF because no switchover is required Default The default setting is off Command Example voice coding profile cp1 switchover on voice coding profile cp2 switchover on voice coding profile cp3 switchover off voice coding profile cp4 switchover on voice coding profile cp5 switchover on Remarks DSP tone detection on the voice channel must be ON in the specified coding profile if fax modem switchover is desired as switchover relies on tone detection Switchover can be either ON or OFF for a fax only coding profile Page 5 193 VoIP Commands voice coding profile call progress tone detection Command Usage Set coding profile call progress tone detection on off Syntax Options voice coding profile lt codingProfName gt call progress tone detection on off Definitions codingProfName on off Default Command Example voice coding profile salemprof1 call progress tone detection off voice coding profile calabprof2 call progress tone detection on Identifies coding profile by name e g salemprof1 maximum length of 40 characters The following characters are permitted in the coding profile name a z A Z 0 9 space and Sss HA_ amp Il lt gt CO It Turns ON secondary level of control over call progress tone detection for specified
225. e VoIP network uses these digits to route calls to trunk CE trunk D Page 3 7 VoIP Networks without PSTN Example 1 Remarks Supported VoIP features and main CLI commands used with this dialing scheme are as follows Features Supported H 323 gateway to voice daughtercard A Primary CLI Commands Used voice destination local channel page 5 231 Local channel two hunt groups 24 channels per group T1 F voice numbering plan hunt method page 5 255 voice numbering plan destination member page 5 257 voice numbering plan phone group member page 5 258 Site prefix no site prefix GD voice phone group site prefix page 5 238 Voice phone group type four digit local extensions L voice phone group type page 5 240 voice phone group format page 5 243 voice phone group add numbers page 5 247 Strip digit length no strip digits CR voice phone group strip digit length page 5 244 Digital Interface type T1 W voice port interface type page 5 34 Page 3 8 VoIP Networks without PSTN Example 2 Trunk Groups and Three Voice Daughtercards VoIP Networks without PSTN Example 2 This dialing scheme is used to set up additional sites on an existing VoIP network Individual calls are routed to more than one possible destination e g from Trunk G to Trunk E or Trunk F depending on the number dialed All telephone numbers in th
226. e applies to the OSR except the range can be from 1 to 16 based upon the grand daughtercards installed OSR full capacity installations not available this release An MPX must also be installed in the OSR In general VSAs VSDs and VSBs are not be mixed in the same VSX card in the same slot of an OSR however there are exceptions See also the VSX Switching Module on page 2 25 and the VoIP Daughtercard Port Numbering Schemes on page 2 28 All VSA daughtercards require 32 MB Flash memory and for OSR configurations 64 MB DRAM memory on the MPX For power requirements see VSX Switching Module on page 2 25 The following certifications for the VSA daughtercards have been obtained to date FCC Class A for OA 512 and OSR VSA FXO Top View 1 FXS module Analog 2 Voice Ports 3 DSP 4 Switch Bus 5 FXS module Analog 6 DSP Voice Ports 7 8 Analog Voice Switching Daughtercard VSA FXS FXS Dual Top View Page 2 19 Voice Switching Daughtercard Analog Notes 4 Analog voice switching daughtercards VSAs cannot be used without either installing an FXS or FXO grand daughtercard or module FXO grand daughtercards cannot be installed as ports 1 and 2 when used with an FXS grand daughtercard FXS and FXO grand daughtercards are not field upgradeable Calls between channels on the same VSA card use PCM Pulse Code Modul
227. e card can be reinstalled and the ports on the voice daughtercard reconnected to the PBX or other voice device using either a Straight Through or Cross Over cable Straight Through recommended Notes An amber cellophane tape may need to be peeled off the top of the Cross Over toggle switch before the toggle switch can be flipped When the tape is present it indicates the toggle switch is set to factory default The physical port always has 8 pins but changes func tionally depending on the cable in use For more infor mation on the RJ 45 jacks see VSD RJ 45 Specifications on page 2 11 Straight Through P Default Top View Digital Setting DSP DSP Voice Port to Left D gt W le pse J psP i 1 1 M M DSP DSP Cross Over aE Switches 11 DSP DSP i i D D B DSP a DSP Digital j Voice Port 2L psr Switch Bus Cross Over Switches Swapping Port Transmit Receive Connections Page 2 9 Voice Switching Daughtercard Digital Cabling Of the common cable types compatible with RJ 45 jacks that can be used with VoIP switches the Straight Through Ethernet and Straight Through T1 Voice are both acceptable as well as the Cross Over T1 cable however due to the
228. e daughtercard e g 1 startChannel The first number in the range of voice channels e g 1 endChannel The last number in the range of voice channels e g 30 Syntax Note Be sure to separate the start and end range numbers with a hyphen e g 1 30 value Specifies the debounce delay interval for loop open detection for existing connection in milliseconds from 1 to 60 000 e g 150 Syntax Note Do not use commas when entering the fxs gs debounce interval value for loop open detection for example 1 000 will return a syntax error message Default The default value is 150 milliseconds Command Examples voice signaling channel 2 1 1 12 fxo gs connection loop open debounce 150 voice signaling channel 2 2 13 24 fxo gs connection loop open debounce 30000 voice signaling channel 2 3 1 30 fxo gs connection loop open debounce 60000 Remarks The voice signaling protocol command must be set to the corresponding protocol type before any commands for E amp M Wink Start Immediate Start and Delay Start Signaling and FXS FXO Loop and Ground Start commands will take effect Page 5 137 VoIP Commands voice signaling fxo gs max tip ground wait Command Usage Specify Foreign Exchange Office Ground Start FXS GS maximum time between ring ground and tip ground Syntax Options voice signaling channel lt s ol port stantChannel endChannel gt fxo gs max imum tip ground wait lt value gt De
229. e eleven digits on trunk D and Expects to receive eleven digits in H 323 packets on then uses these digits to route calls to lines A ethernet WAN Z Routes calls starting with 2 or 1 818 878 2xxx to Routes calls starting with 1 818 878 2xxx to voice lines A daughtercard 1 via ethernet WAN Z using the VoIP gateway s IP address Routes calls starting with 1 818 878 3000 to trunk G and then the VoIP network uses these digits to route calls to Microsoft NetMeeting via ethernet WAN Z Page 3 51 VoIP Networks with Interoperability Example 19 Remarks Supported VoIP features and main CLI commands used with this dialing scheme are as follows Features Supported H 323 gateway to voice daughtercard A Primary CLI Commands Used voice destination local channel page 5 231 H 323 gateway to H 323 device C Local channel two hunt groups 24 channels per group T1 F voice destination h 323 endpoint page 5 230 voice numbering plan hunt method page 5 255 voice numbering plan destination member page 5 257 voice numbering plan phone group member page 5 258 Site prefix no site prefix voice phone group site prefix page 5 238 Site prefix single or multiple digits Q voice phone group site prefix page 5 238 voice phone group site prefix digits page 5 239 Voice phone group type eleven digit local extensions M voice p
230. e group dialing type numbering scheme as either intra VoIP network extensions or PSTN telephone numbers Syntax Options voice phone group lt PhoneGroupName gt type local extensions nanp extensions international extensions nanp pstn international pstn Definitions PhoneGroupName local extensions nanp extensions nanp pstn international pstn Default Command Example Identifies the phone group by name e g salem_engr1 maximum length of characters 60 The following characters are permitted in the phone group name a z A Z 0 9 space and Ss 2 HA_ amp I lt gt CO IKI Indicates use of intra VoIP network PBX extensions e g xxxx between 1 and 11 dig its Ja Indicates use of North American Numbering Plan NANP intra VoIP network PBX exten sions e g X XXX XXX XXXX consists of single digit long distance designator three digit area code three digit CO exchange prefix and unique four digit code for the telephone subscriber Any combination of three digits may now be used for the area code NANP is the numbering scheme used to assign area codes and also to establish rules for call routing in Canada and the United States international extensions Indicates use of international intra VoIP network PBX extensions e g XX XXX XXX XXxx consists of between 10 and 26 digits includes field separators i e hyphens with out field separators maximum extension lengt
231. e setting is 120 Ohms Command Examples voice port 2 1 line build out cable type 120 voice port 2 2 line build out cable type 75 voice port 2 1 cable type 120 voice port 2 2 cable type 75 Remarks To use this command the voice daughtercard connection type must be set to E1 E1 ISDN PRI or BRI Euro via the voice port interface type command Page 5 43 VoIP Commands voice port line coding Command Usage Specify line coding of voice port Syntax Options voice port lt s ot port gt line build out line coding ami b8zs hdb3 Definitions slot Specifies slot number of voice switching daughtercard installed in switching module e g 2 port Specifies physical port number on voice daughtercard e g 1 line build out Optional command syntax ami Specifies Alternative Mark Inversion line coding for the voice port b8zs Specifies Bipolar 8 Zero substitution line coding for the voice port hdb3 Specifies High density Bipolar with 3 zero substitution line coding for the voice port The default line coding type is b8zs for T1 or AMI for E1 Command Examples voice port 2 1 line build out line coding ami voice port 2 2 line build out line coding b8zs voice port 2 3 line build out line coding hdb3 voice port 2 4 line coding ami voice port 3 1 line coding b8zs voice port 3 2 line coding hdb3 Remarks AMI line coding is supported when the voice daughtercard connection port
232. e start range value is used If no number is entered for the starting range all zeroes will be used based upon the specified format string Default None Command Example voice phone group salem_engr1 add numbers 4600 thru 4800 voice phone group salem_engr1 add numbers 4600 voice phone group calab_engr1 add numbers 2500 thru 2750 voice phone group calab_engr1 add numbers 2500 Remarks If the phone group dialing type is NANP extensions or International extensions then the first digit of the site prefix digits cannot be the same as the first digits as specified via the phone group numbers to include in range of digits command Page 5 247 VoIP Commands voice phone group delete numbers Command Usage Specify phone group numbers to remove from range of digits for phone format string Wot available this release Syntax Options voice phone group lt PhoneGroupName gt delete numbers lt StartRange gt thru EndRange Definitions PhoneGroupName Startkange thru EndRange Default None Command Example Identifies the phone group by name e g salem_engr1 maximum length of 40 charac ters The following characters are permitted in the phone group name a z A Z 0 9 space and A_ amp 1 lt gt QOT I Ct Specifies starting digits to delete from designated phone group as per format specified in voice phone group format string command e g four dig
233. e top down hunt method to determine where new calls will be routed Voice Extensions off of PBX 1 1000 to 1999 Euro PRI Daughtercard 1 1000 1999 PBX 2 Extensions Euro PRI Hunt Group K IP 192 168 11 2 Port 1720 Hunt Group off of PBX 2 aa g9 2000 2000 to 2999 a a Daughtercard 2 200 IP 192 168 12 2 Port 1720 Example 4 One Hunt Group 60 Channels Across Two E1s LEGEND for Diagram Components PBX 1 Configuration PBX 2 Configuration Expects to receive four digits on trunks Q or CK and then uses these digits to route calls to lines A Expects to receive four digits on trunks L or M then uses these digits to route calls to lines B Routes calls starting with 1 to lines A Routes calls starting with 2 to lines B Routes calls starting with 2 to trunks Q or CK and then the VoIP network uses these digits to route calls to trunks L or M according to the hunt method used Routes calls starting with 1 to trunks L or M and then the VoIP network uses these digits to route calls to trunks J or CK according to the hunt method used Page 3 13 VoIP Networks without PSTN Example 4 Remarks Supported VoIP features and main CLI com
234. e turned ON via the voice signaling fxo Is supervisory disconnect detection command Default The default value is 600 milliseconds Command Examples voice signaling channel 2 1 1 12 fxo Is supervisory disconnect 600 voice signaling channel 2 3 1 30 fxo Is supervisory disconnect 60000 The voice signaling protocol command must be set to the corresponding protocol type before any commands for E amp M Wink Start Immediate Start and Delay Start Signaling and FXS FXO Loop and Ground Start commands will take effect Page 5 118 VoIP Commands voice signaling fxo ls guard out Command Usage Specify Foreign Exchange Office FXO Loop Start allowed time period after a call when a channel cannot originate but may receive a call Syntax Options voice signaling channel lt s ol port stantChannel endChannel gt fxo Is guard out lt value gt Definitions slot Specifies chassis slot number where VSM is installed e g 2 port Specifies physical port number on voice daughtercard e g 1 startChannel The first number in the range of voice channels e g 1 endChannel The last number in the range of voice channels e g 30 Syntax Note Be sure to separate the start and end range numbers with a hyphen e g 1 30 value Specifies the fxs ls guard out allowed time period in milliseconds from 1 to 60 000 e g 2000 after a call when a channel cannot originate but may receive a call Syntax Notes
235. e voice daughtercard position number e g 1 manual Turns ON H 323 gatekeeper manual discovery mode for specified voice network auto Turns ON H 323 gatekeeper autodiscovery mode for specified voice network Syntax Note To use this command the voice network card h 323 gatekeeper control command must be turned ON Default The default setting is manual Command Example voice network card 2 1 h 323 gatekeeper mode manual voice network card 2 2 h 323 gatekeeper mode auto Remarks This command is used to control gatekeeper operations in conjunction with the voice network card h 323 gatekeeper control command Internally the setting affects two different variables in the switch configuration These include the gatekeeper configuration field which controls the enable disable operation of the gatekeeper and the auto discovery gatekeeper configuration field when enabled which determines automatic or manual discovery Page 5 218 VoIP Commands voice network h 323 gatekeeper address Command Usage Specify gatekeeper IP address for voice switching daughtercard gateway discovery manual mode only Syntax Options voice network card lt s oi card_number gt h 323 gatekeeper address lt ip_address gt Definitions slot Specifies the chassis slot number where VSM is installed e g 2 card_number Specifies the voice daughtercard position number e g 1 ip_address Specifies IP address of
236. ecified telephony signaling channel Syntax Note To use this command the acoustic echo canceller must be enabled via the voice signaling acoustic echo canceller non linear processor command Default The default setting is off Command Example voice signaling channel 2 1 1 12 acoustic echo canceller non linear processor off voice signaling channel 2 2 13 24 acoustic echo canceller non linear processor on Remarks Acoustic echo cancellers handle signal transmission echoes on calls originating from or being sent to IP telephones by isolating and filtering the signals Acoustic echo cancellers function as comfort noise generators Page 5 159 VoIP Commands voice signaling acoustic echo canceller output Command Usage Set acoustic echo canceller processor output handset hands free Syntax Options voice signaling channel lt s ol porl startChannel endChannel gt acoustic echo canceller output handset hands free Definitions slot Specifies chassis slot number where VSM is installed e g 2 port Specifies physical port number on voice daughtercard e g 1 startChannel The first number in the range of voice channels e g 1 endChannel The last number in the range of voice channels e g 30 Syntax Note Be sure to separate the start and end range numbers with a hyphen e g 1 30 handset Set acoustic echo canceller output to handset for specified telephony signaling channel
237. ecifies chassis slot number where VSM is installed e g 2 port Specifies physical port number on voice daughtercard e g 1 startChannel The first number in the range of voice channels e g 1 endChannel The last number in the range of voice channels e g 30 Syntax Note Be sure to separate the start and end range numbers with a hyphen e g 1 30 no Specifies no call time length i e infinite value Specifies maximum call time length in seconds from 0 ms to 65 534 Syntax Notes Do not use commas when entering the maximum call duration limit for example 65 534 will return a syntax error message Do not use no if entering a value A no call duration limit means the call can go on forever A no call duration limit 100 or any other number of seconds means the call can go on forever Default The default setting is no call duration limit Command Examples voice signaling channel 2 1 1 12 no call duration limit voice signaling channel 2 2 13 24 call duration limit 0 voice signaling channel 2 3 1 30 no call duration limit 100 voice signaling channel 2 4 1 30 call duration limit 65534 Page 5 73 VoIP Commands voice signaling answer wait limit Command Usage Specify time to wait for call to be answered channel timing The call is automatically termi nated if the call destination does not answer within the allotted time period for answering Syntax Options voice signaling ch
238. ecifies the voice daughtercard position number e g 1 matic Optional command syntax Type either auto or automatic in the command line on Turns ON automatic answer for incoming calls on gateway off Turns OFF automatic answer for incoming calls on gateway Default The default setting is off Command Examples voice daughter card 2 1 h 323 automatic answer off voice daughter card 2 2 h 323 auto answer on Remarks This command is used to select H 323 automatic call answering mode on the incoming side of the link if turned ON the call is connected automatically for instant voice Page 5 25 VoIP Commands voice daughter card first digit wait duration Command Usage Specify maximum time for voice daughtercard dialing timers to wait between off hook state and first dialed tone digit to be detected Syntax Options voice daughter card lt s ot card_number gt first digit wait duration lt timer_value gt Definitions slot Specifies slot number of switching module installed in chassis e g 2 card_number timer_value Specifies the voice daughtercard position number e g 1 Specifies maximum time for dialing timers to wait between off hook first digit dialed to be detected in milliseconds from 1 to 4 294 967 295 ms e g 10000 1 ms 1 1000th of a second 1 000 ms 1 second 10 000 ms 10 seconds etc Refer to conversion table below to quickly determine the prop
239. ecify maximum E amp M delay start response to off hook dial tone state Syntax Options voice signaling channel lt s ol porl startChannel endChannel gt emd in delay max imum lt value gt Definitions slot port startChannel endChannel imum value Default Remarks Command Examples voice signaling channel 2 1 1 12 emw in delay maximum 2500 voice signaling channel 2 2 13 24 emw in delay max 30000 voice signaling channel 2 3 1 30 emw in delay max 60000 Specifies chassis slot number where VSM is installed e g 2 Specifies physical port number on voice daughtercard e g 1 The first number in the range of voice channels e g 1 The last number in the range of voice channels e g 30 Syntax Note Be sure to separate the start and end range numbers with a hyphen e g 1 30 Optional command syntax Type either max or maximum in the command line Specifies the maximum duration of the delay signal response to the seize detect of incom ing calls on the M lead in milliseconds from 5 to 60 000 e g 2500 Syntax Note Do not use commas when entering the maximum value for E amp M delay start response to off hook dial tone state for example 5 000 will return a syntax error message The default value is 2500 milliseconds The voice signaling protocol command must be set to the corresponding protocol type before any commands for E amp M Wink Start Immediate Start and De
240. ed bandwidth requirements Real Time Protocol Encapsulation Analog Digital Voice Data Encoding and Call Compression Compression The appropriate vocoder used for VoIP calls is then negotiated by the H 323 VoIP gateway prior to call placement As an added bonus but with some variations in protocols the same DSP technology that is used for voice compression also works with fax modems For that reason it can be assumed that references to voice signal packets inherently include fax packets The codecs and vocoders used in enterprise VoIP adhere to the ITU recommendations that fall under the H 323 IP network call control umbrella of interoperability standards for multi media communications over packet switched local area networks part of the Series H Recom mendations for Audiovisual and Multimedia Systems The ITU s H 323 suite of specifications includes the H 245 in band call control specifications For the signaling vocoders G 711 PCM G 723 1 Internet Speech G 729 G 729a Standard Telephone Speech the algorithms in the Series G Recommendations for Transmission Systems and Media Digital Systems and Networks are used Page 1 14 H 323 VoIP Gateway Voice and Convergence Features H 323 Call Control and Network Interoperability Convergence Features The ability to accommodate voice also fax and modem traffic compressed into data form via payload packetization for transport across data
241. ed coding profile Syntax Notes To use this command the voice echo canceller mode must be enabled via the coding profile voice echo canceller command Default The default setting is on Command Example voice coding profile salemprof1 voice echo canceller non linear on voice coding profile calabprof2 voice echo canceller non linear off Page 5 198 VoIP Commands voice coding profile voice echo canceller comfort noise mode Command Usage Specify coding profile voice echo canceller comfort noise mode Syntax Options voice coding profile lt codingProfName gt voice echo canceller comfort noise mode static adaptive Definitions codingProfName Identifies coding profile by name e g salemprof1 maximum length of 40 characters The following characters are permitted in the coding profile name a z A Z 0 9 space and F Ss 2 HA_ amp I lt gt OI static Turns ON the fixed voice comfort noise level adaptive Turns OFF the fixed voice comfort noise level at runtime for the duration of the call if it is determined that the phone is digital optional selection Syntax Notes To use this command the voice echo canceller mode must be enabled via the coding profile voice echo canceller command Default The default setting is static Command Example voice coding profile salemprof1 voice echo canceller comfort noise mode static voice coding profile calabprof2 vo
242. ed packet redundancy coding profile T 38 data handling method Cocal over the network Silence Detection coding profile voice fax silence detection time coding profile voice fax silence signal level G 711 A law Mu law G 711 coding profile modem coding resampling Caller ID caller ID coding profile on off Command must set to apply all other caller ID settings Page 5 173 VoIP Commands voice coding profile Command Usage Create coding profile with specified name Syntax Options voice coding profile lt codingProfName gt Definitions codingProfName Identifies coding profile by name e g salemprof1 maximum length of 40 characters The following characters are permitted in the coding profile name a z A Z 0 9 space and Ss 2 HA_ amp I lt gt CQO IKI Syntax Notes See Remarks below and details of default coding This command should only be used under the supervision of trained personnel Defaults For g 729ab the default profile name is cp1 For g 711 Mu Law the default profile name is cp2 For fax t 38 the default profile name is cp3 For g 711 A Law the default profile name is cp4 For g 723 1 63 the default profile name is cp5 Command Example voice coding profile salemprof1 voice coding profile calabprof2 voice coding profile cp1 voice coding profile cp2 voice coding profile cp3 voice coding profile cp4 voice coding profile cp5 Remarks
243. eee 5 271 view voice channel fax stats 2 0 eee 5 272 view voice channel isdn level 2 stats 2 2 0000000000 a 5 273 voice channel reset telephony level stats 0000 00 00 eee 5 274 voice channel reset telephony channel stats 0 0 00000 5 275 voice channel reset voice playout stats 2 0 a 5 276 voice channel reset dsp stats 2 0 ee 5 277 voice channel reset error stats 20 eee 5 278 voice channel reset modem stats n o auauna ee 5 279 voice channel reset fax st ta ss u ae ops Geek eee ea ee eek wile Aig aed 5 280 reset voice channel isdn level 2 stats nauau aaa aaa ee 5 281 INO caeai bike bth bv Os We GO BY ede wle Pee vod Gad a e ET I 1 page xiii Table of Contents page xiv 1 VoIP Overview Introduction This chapter describes Alcatel s H 323 Voice over IP VoIP gateway and how telephone or fax calls can be programmed to automatically go through either an enterprise s Virtual Private Network VPN via the gateway and or the Public Switched Telephone Network PSTN a circuit switched public telephone network that consists of all the interconnected calling networks in the world Alcatel s H 323 VoIP gateway provides transparent seamless delivery and connection of local and long distance inbound and outbound telephone calls initiated through standard PSTN North American T1 European E1 and Euro ISDN Integrated Services Digital Network digital telephone transmission line
244. efore any commands for E amp M Wink Start Immediate Start and Delay Start Signaling and FXS FXO Loop and Ground Start commands will take effect Page 5 143 VoIP Commands voice signaling fxo gs answer after Command Usage Specify Foreign Exchange Office FXO Ground Start GS number of rings allowed before answering Syntax Options voice signaling channel lt s ol port stantChannel endChannel gt fxo gs answer after lt value gt Definitions slot Specifies chassis slot number where VSM is installed e g 2 port Specifies physical port number on voice daughtercard e g 1 startChannel The first number in the range of voice channels e g 1 endChannel The last number in the range of voice channels e g 30 Syntax Note Be sure to separate the start and end range numbers with a hyphen e g 1 30 value Specifies the number of rings permitted to elapse before answering incoming calls per ring from 1 to 65 535 e g 2 rings Syntax Note Do not use commas when entering the fxs gs call answer after rings value for example 10 000 will return a syntax error message If caller ID is ON then the number of rings should be greater than or equal to 2 rings Default The default value is 50 rings Command Examples voice signaling channel 2 1 1 12 fxo gs answer after 50 voice signaling channel 2 2 13 24 fxo gs answer after 5 voice signaling channel 2 3 1 30 fxo gs answer after 1000
245. eginning of that chapter Setup and Installation Depending on the dialing scheme selected some command entries may need to be added altogether such as those required for coding profiles Other than the minimum configura tion entries there are no visual representations of the default settings in any vsmboot asc file unless they are specifically entered in the file All configuration changes must be saved to this modified vsmboot asc file or they will not take effect Changes should be made in accordance with the CLI reference instructions in Chapter 5 VoIP Commands Optional settings should only be changed if the default settings do not apply Any modifications made through the CLI directly will be lost on reboot as settings contained in the vsmboot asc file override all other settings Note 4 Once the card has been configured and is operational it can be reconfigured later without rebooting the switch using the dynamic reconfiguration feature via the voice numbering plan activate command See Chap ter 5 VoIP Commands The entries below are not necessarily listed in the order they appear in the master vsmboot asc file to reduce boot time for large files lines which are commented out may be removed Depending on the number of CLI commands in the modified vsmboot asc file it may take from three to 15 minutes to load depending on the complexity of the configuration Switch Settings Required e IP address un
246. elephone extensions are set via the phone group numbers to include in range of digits command and automatically regis tered with the gatekeeper as an alias e Format string must have between one and seven numbering scheme place holders or designators xxxxxxx 0 through 9 are allowed in any combination as long as at least one x is used e g 1x 2xx 1xxxxxx 2xxxxxx etc A dialed digit cannot follow an x Neither the and symbols nor letters A through E are allowed Format string can only contain dialed digits no field separa tors e Local extensions cannot be used in conjunction with any other dialing types NANP Extensions intended for daughtercard to daughtercard calls e If NANP extensions used digital voice switching daughtercard recognizes variable number of dialed digits i e between seven and 11 digits 11 digits when long distance designator included e If H 323 gatekeeper control is set to ON via the voice network card h 323 gate keeper control command then the telephone extensions are set via the phone group numbers to include in range of digits command and automatically regis tered with the gatekeeper as an alias e If long distance designator used it can only contain one digit which must be the number 1 followed by field separator Field separators not available this release e Three digit central office CO code field separator and unique four digit subscriber number are required e Format
247. elephony level statistics view voice channel 2 1 25 telephony level stats view voice channel 2 2 30 telephony level statistics view voice channel 2 2 30 telephony level stats Remarks Displays the current receive levels mean receive levels transmit levels and the mean trans mit levels at the PCM interface of the DSP for the specified channel received from or trans mitted to the telephony interface Current levels are given in 0 1 dBm0 units Mean values are in 0 1 linear PCM units Page 5 266 VoIP Commands view voice channel telephony channel stats Command Usage Display cumulative channel statistics Not available this release Syntax Options view voice channel lt s ol port startChannel endChannel gt telephony channel stat istic s Definitions slot Specifies chassis slot number where VSM is installed e g 2 port Specifies physical port number on voice daughtercard e g 1 channel Specifies port channel number range in which to view channel statistics e g 25 cumula tive since channel was placed in service istic Optional command syntax Type either stats or statistics in the command line Syntax Notes This command only works from within the command line inter face and cannot be used from within the vsmboot asc file Default None Command Example view voice channel 2 1 25 telephony level statistics view voice channel 2 1 25 telephony level stats view
248. eparators Field separators hyphens in sequence indicate empty field two hyphens are not allowed in sequence as part of a valid format string A dialed digit cannot follow an x At least one x is required e Format is optional if not specified the phone group numbers to include in range of digits command is not allowed NANP PSTN intended for daughtercard to PSTN calls e If NANP PSTN telephone numbers used then voice switching daughtercard recognizes variable number of dialed digits i e between seven and 11 digits 11 digits when long distance designator included e If H 323 gatekeeper control is set to ON via the voice network card h 323 gate keeper control command then the telephone numbers are not registered with the gatekeeper as an alias e Format string must contain dialed digits and limited use of field separators Field separators two hyphens in sequence indicate empty field two field separators are not allowed in sequence as part of a valid format string A dialed digit cannot follow an x At least one x is required e Format is optional if not specified the phone group numbers to include in range of digits command is not allowed PSTN International intended for daughtercard to PSTN calls e If PSTN international telephone numbers used then voice switching daugh tercard recognizes variable number of dialed digits i e between 10 and 26 digits 26 digits when long distance designator s
249. er ID name that transmits to private may be abbreviated to p unavailable Sets outbound originating caller ID name that transmits to unavailable may be abbrevi ate to o Syntax Note The voice coding profile caller id command must be enabled to use this command Default The default setting is private Command Examples voice signaling channel 2 1 1 12 caller id name vernell_b voice signaling channel 2 1 1 12 caller id name private voice signaling channel 2 2 13 24 caller id name unavailable voice signaling channel 4 2 1 1 caller id name p voice signaling channel 4 3 1 1 caller id name o Remarks Caller ID time is automatically determined read from the system time on the switch If the caller ID name or number is changed the voice switching daughtercard is initialized with the time automatically Page 5 147 VoIP Commands voice signaling caller id number Command Usage Set outbound caller ID number published non published number to transmit Syntax Options voice signaling channel lt s o port startChannel endChannel gt caller id number callerIdNumber private unavailable Definitions slot Specifies chassis slot number where VSM is installed e g 2 port Specifies physical port number on voice daughtercard e g 1 startChannel The first number in the range of voice channels e g 1 endChannel The last number in the range of voice
250. er boot file vsmboot_master asc modified accordingly and then installed on the switch Refer to Chapter 4 Setup and Installa tion for further details and an example boot file configuration For specific details on the VoIP text based command line interface CLI commands relative to the boot files and dialing schemes see Chapter 5 VoIP Commands Caution Companies using Alcatel s VoIP feature are responsible for programming and testing all dialing schemes to reduce the likelihood or to eliminate the possibility of toll fraud from the PSTN and Emergency 911 process ing Page 3 1 Introduction The AVNDS consist of the following CLI command groups e H 323 endpoint destinations these commands describe the IP address of every H 323 device in the H 323 VoIP network e H 323 local channel destinations these commands describe every available channel on a voice daughtercard port in which to send calls e Phone Group these commands describe every phone fax number allowed on the H 323 VoIP network e Numbering Plan these commands relate phone groups to destinations H 323 endpoint and local channel destinations The AVNDS must include all CLI commands approx 20 commands concerning voice desti nations phone groups and numbering plans to render a dialing scheme operational however some AVNDS will include other non AVNDS commands in the matching vsmboot asc files as is the case with di
251. er defined groups such as by divisions or departments location or some other meaningful grouping For information on setting up and using the AVNDS Alcatel VoIP Network Dialing Schemes see Chapter 3 Network Dialing Schemes Chapter 4 Setup and Installation and Chapter 5 VoIP Commands Switch Backplane Interface The switch backplane interface is responsible for the payload packet transport and VoIP daughtercard management message transport between the VoIP daughtercard and the host switch Physically the interface consists of a 100 pin connector between the VoIP daughter card and the motherboard All functions of the H 323 VoIP gateway are implemented on the MPC860 controllers on the daughtercards the VSX OSR configurations only and the switch Page 1 16 VoIP Standards for Development VoIP Standards for Development Alcatel s H 323 VoIP gateway is designed to function in accordance with the following IP Telephony and Internetworking standards currently available as briefly summarized below International Telecommunication Union ITU Standards ITU T technical operational and tariff recommendations are used for standardizing telecom munications on a worldwide basis ITU H 323 IP network call control standards apply to VoIP These standards define the major components namely Telephone Terminal Equip ment Gateways Gatekeepers and Multipoint Control Units MCUs for H 323 based commu nications
252. er port A maximum of one daughtercard can be installed per OA 512 switch see VSB Front Panel on page 2 15 and up to two daughtercards can be installed in a VSX in each slot of an Omni Switch Router The VSB supports eight channels via two standard DSPs with four channels each but does not support any add on DIMM modules The OmniAccess 512 chassis provides one empty expansion slot labeled as 4 reserved for use with features such as Voice Over IP VoIP it does not accept the VSX switching module used in Omni Switch Routers VSDs VSBs and VSAs cannot be installed in the same slot in an OSR and an MPX card is required in the OSR See VSX Switching Module on page 2 25 for more information Port numbers can vary depending on the VoIP switch configuration see also VoIP Daughtercard Port Numbering Schemes on page 2 28 All VSD ports are digital 8 pin RJ 45 voice ports containing from one to 60 channels per port depending on whether the voice port interface type is T1 or E1 All VSD and VSB daughtercards require 32 MB Flash memory and for OSR configurations 64 MB DRAM memory on the MPX For power requirements see VSX Switching Module on page 2 25 The following FCC Class B certifications for the VSD daughtercards have been obtained to date OA 512 VSD 36T1 36E1 48T1 48E1 and 60E1 Notes 4 The number of simultaneous calls per card is depen dent upon the number of available DSP channels Two channels are used per call e g w
253. er setting Do not use commas when entering a dialing timer value Syntax Note for example 10 000 10 seconds will return a syntax error message Default The default timer_value is 10000 Command Examples voice daughter card 2 1 first digit wait duration 10000 voice daughter card 2 2 first digit wait duration 60000 Remarks When this timer expires a no digits received error condition occurs and the numbering plan dial attempt fails Use this table to quickly determine duration values for dialing timers Voice Switching Daughtercard Digit Durations ms Conversion Table 10 000 ms 15 000 ms 20 000 ms 30 000 ms 10 seconds 15 seconds 20 seconds 30 seconds 60 000 ms 600 000 ms 900 000 ms 1 200 000 ms 60 sec 1 min 10 min 15 min 20 min 1 800 000 ms 3 600 000 ms 21 600 000 ms 36 000 000 ms 30 min 60 min 1 hour 6 hours 10 hours 14 days 2 weeks 2 592 000 000 ms 30 days 1 month 21 days 3 weeks 2 678 400 000 ms 31 days 28 days 4 weeks 4 233 600 000 ms 49 days 43 200 000 ms 86 400 000 ms 604 800 000 ms 864 000 000 ms 12 hours 24 hours 1 day 7 days 1 week 10 days 1 209 600 000 ms 1 814 400 000 ms 2 419 200 000 ms 2 505 600 000 ms 29 days 4 294 967 295 ms 49 days 17 hours 2 min 47 sec and 295 ms Page 5 26 VoIP Commands voice daughter card inter digit wait duratio
254. ere VSM is installed e g 2 card_number Specifies the voice daughtercard position number e g 1 Syntax Note The OA 512 value is always 1 and the OS R values are always 1 to 2 ip_address Identifies the voice switching daughtercard by IP address e g 127 0 0 0 Default None Command Examples voice daughter card 2 1 ip address 127 0 0 0 voice daughter card 2 2 ip address 127 0 0 0 Remarks This command is required and must be included in the master vsmboot ase file as per Chap ter 5 Setup and Installation Page 5 17 VoIP Commands voice daughter card ip default gateway Command Usage Specify the IP address of the default gateway for the voice switching daughtercard Syntax Options voice daughter card lt s o card_number gt ip default gateway lt ip_address gt Definitions slot Specifies the chassis slot number where VSM is installed e g 2 card_number Specifies the voice daughtercard position number e g 1 Syntax Note The OA 512 value is always 1 and the OS R values are always 1 to 2 ip_address Identifies the IP address of the default gateway e g 127 0 0 1 Default None Command Examples voice daughter card 2 1 ip default gateway 127 0 0 1 voice daughter card 2 2 ip default gateway 127 0 0 1 Remarks The IP address of the default gateway must be the same as the IP broadcast address used in the routing group for the VoIP gateway
255. es Page 5 39 VoIP Commands voice port line build out Command Usage Set voice port line haul short haul long haul Syntax Options voice port lt slot port gt line build out short haul long haul Definitions slot Specifies slot number of voice switching daughtercard installed in switching module e g 2 port Specifies physical port number on voice daughtercard e g 1 short Specifies short haul line build out haul Optional command syntax Type either short or short haul in the command line long Specifies long haul line build out haul Optional command syntax Type either long or long haul in the command line The default setting is short haul Command Examples voice port 2 1 line build out short haul voice port 2 2 line build out long haul voice port 2 3 line build out short voice port 2 4 line build out long Remarks Indicates line build out of this port Only T1 E1 ports with Line Interface Unit LIU equipped can support Long Haul LH otherwise only Short Haul SH is supported To use this command the voice daughtercard connection port type must be set to T1 El or EI ISDN PRI or BRI Euro via the voice port interface type command Page 5 40 VoIP Commands voice port line length Command Usage Specify T1 voice port line length Syntax Options voice port lt slot port gt line build out line length lt value gt
256. etect voice activity and handle echo cancellation the filtering of unwanted transmission signals as specified in ITU algorithm standards G 160 and G 126 comfort level background white noise can also be generated on either the transmit ting or receiving end Since digital signal processing affects nearly every operation in VoIP numerous DSPs are incorporated adjacent to the supporting MPC860 CPU signaling controller in the voice switch ing daughtercards normally used with voice switching modules comprising the core of Alcatel s enterprise VoIP on the call processing end The DSPs and the Motorola MPC860 controlling processor work in unison to support the various protocols and interfaces that implement the enterprise VoIP telephony functions contained in software on the voice switch ing daughtercards In a nutshell the DSPs are the voice processors and the MPC860 control ler is the data communications processor on the daughtercards Altogether the above components provide T1 E1 and ISDN voice and data synthesis processing with scalable versions of each bringing enterprises any to any switching functionality that now with enter prise VoIP includes least cost call routing for VoIP Virtual Private Networks VPNs Signal Recognition Initially digital signal processing involves DSP detection of an array of voice signaling types using Channel Associated Signaling CAS repetitive circuit state signaling protocols for T1 and E1 lines
257. eway to voice daughtercard A voice destination local channel page 5 231 Local channel two hunt groups 24 channels per group T1 F voice numbering plan hunt method page 5 255 voice numbering plan destination member page 5 257 voice numbering plan phone group member page 5 258 Site prefix single or multiple digits Q voice phone group site prefix page 5 238 voice phone group site prefix digits page 5 239 Voice phone group type NANP exten sions N voice phone group type page 5 240 voice phone group format page 5 243 voice phone group add numbers page 5 247 Voice phone group type PSTN NANP P Strip digit length 7 V voice phone group type page 5 240 voice phone group format page 5 243 voice phone group add numbers page 5 247 voice phone group strip digit length page 5 244 Digital Interface type T1 W voice port interface type page 5 34 Page 3 33 VoIP Networks with PSTN Example 13 North American PSTN Calls Outbound This diagram demonstrates how outbound North American PSTN calls are sent to the PSTN 1 603 598 2000 to 598 2999 Voice 0 Daughtercard 411 911 al 1 1 npa nxx xxxx Extensions off of PBX 1 IP 192 168 11 2 Port 1720 1 818 878 See Diagrams No Amer Calls Overview Inbound DID VoIP Network
258. f Remarks In voice mode this command enables switching from one in band codec to another by detecting changes in the payload packet type Page 5 166 VoIP Commands voice signaling override psu codec switching Command Usage Override call signaling for packet switch unit PSU codec switching on off This command should only be used under the supervision of trained personnel Syntax Options voice signaling channel lt s ol port stantChannel endChannel gt no override psu codec switching on off Definitions slot Specifies chassis slot number where VSM is installed e g 2 port Specifies physical port number on voice daughtercard e g 1 startChannel The first number in the range of voice channels e g 1 endChannel The last number in the range of voice channels e g 30 Syntax Note Be sure to separate the start and end range numbers with a hyphen e g 1 30 no Optional command syntax Syntax Note If no is used then ON and OFF cannot be specified on Turns ON PSU codec switching after net connect and before tele connect state for speci fied telephony signaling channel off Turns OFF PSU codec switching after net connect and before tele connect state for spec ified telephony signaling channel Default The default setting is no override psu codec switching Command Examples voice signaling channel 2 1 1 12 no override psu codec switching voice signaling channel
259. f this command is adaptive in the switch the threshold value is automatically 32767 dBm If this command is relative in the switch the voice activity detec tion has no bearing on the hardware or VoIP Default The default setting is adaptive Command Example voice coding profile salemprof1 voice activity detection threshold mode adaptive voice coding profile calabprof2 voice activity detection threshold mode relative Remarks This command is used to set the audio threshold level in dBm for the voice activity detec tor VAD for a coding profile to be adaptive or relative to a reference level of 30 dBm Page 5 190 VoIP Commands voice coding profile voice activity detection threshold level Command Usage Specify coding profile VAD audio threshold level adaptive relative adaptive if threshold mode enabled Syntax Options voice coding profile lt codingProfName gt voice activity detection threshold level lt hreshold_level gt Definitions codingProfName Identifies coding profile by name e g salemprof1 maximum length of 40 characters The following characters are permitted in the coding profile name a z A Z 0 9 space and i HA_ amp I lt gt CQO It threshold_value Specifies voice activity detection threshold level for specified coding profile in dBm decibels below 1 milliwatt output signal power referenced to 1 milliwatt input signal power Values may range from
260. f voice channels e g 1 endChannel The last number in the range of voice channels e g 30 Syntax Note Be sure to separate the start and end range numbers with a hyphen e g 1 30 in service Puts channel in service as soon as possible after configuration out of service Keeps channel out of service and unused Channel does not accept hunting or in out seizes Default The default setting is in service Command Examples voice channel 2 1 1 12 state in service voice channel 2 2 13 24 state out of service Remarks If the configuration of this channel is incomplete the command is ignored the channel is NOT placed into service and error conditions result Page 5 61 VoIP Commands Telephony Signaling Attributes The commands listed and described below are used to configure Telephony Signaling attributes including general signaling Ear amp Mouth E amp M Foreign Exchange Station FXS and Foreign Exchange Office FXO signaling attributes This entails call signaling capabili ties outbound caller ID call progress tones echo and acoustic echo cancellers and over rides for call signaling Telephony Signaling Channel View Telephony Signaling Protocol Signaling Attributes Dial Out Signaling Tones time to wait before first tone is sent duration for a single tone duration to pause between tones out dialing port type Channel Timing maximum call time length time to wait for call to be answered t
261. figuration save current text based configuration to flash global Save All dump command H 323 Gateway Configuration and Runtime Parameters outgoing Fast Start mode for gateway on off incoming Fast Start mode for gateway on off automatic answer for gateway on off Dialing Timers first digit wait duration inter digit wait duration dial time wait duration termination digit optional Analog cadence coefficient North America Europe ring ID Euro BRI ISDN clock source external free running external clock port Page 5 14 VoIP Commands Digital Port Configuration Port Connection Type voice port digital connection interface type T1 E1 E1 ISDN PRI BRI Euro Telephony Interface voice port frame format voice port circuit identifier optional E1 voice port NFAS enable disable Line Build Out voice port line haul short haul long haul T1 voice port line length T1 voice port attenuation E1 voice port cable type Line Coding voice port line coding Facilities Data Link T1 voice port facilities data link protocol T1 voice port facilities data link port role network user Transmit Clock Source voice port transmit clock source Loop Back Mode T1 voice port loop back configuration Signaling Mode voice port channel signaling mode Trap Generation E1 voice port trap generation enable disable ISDN E1 ISDN port connection protocol net user qmaster qslave E1 ISDN connec
262. finitions slot Specifies chassis slot number where VSM is installed e g 2 port Specifies physical port number on voice daughtercard e g 1 startChannel The first number in the range of voice channels e g 1 endChannel The last number in the range of voice channels e g 30 Syntax Note Be sure to separate the start and end range numbers with a hyphen e g 1 30 imum Optional command syntax Type either max or maximum in the command line value Specifies the maximum time the line waits after ring ground asserted for tip ground received in milliseconds from 1 to 60 000 e g 150 Syntax Note Do not use commas when entering the maximum fxs gs value for time between ring ground and tip ground for example 1 000 will return a syntax error message Default The default value is 30 milliseconds Command Examples voice signaling channel 2 1 1 12 fxo gs maximum tip ground wait 30 voice signaling channel 2 2 13 24 fxo gs max tip ground wait 30000 voice signaling channel 2 3 1 24 fxo gs max tip ground wait 60000 Remarks The voice signaling protocol command must be set to the corresponding protocol type before any commands for E amp M Wink Start Immediate Start and Delay Start Signaling and FXS FXO Loop and Ground Start commands will take effect Page 5 138 VoIP Commands voice signaling fxo gs tip ground debounce Command Usage Specify Foreign Exchange Office Ground Start FXS GS
263. ft NetMeeting Convergence Settings Optional e voice signaling channels e g E amp M FXO and FXS signaling protocols required if not using E amp M Immediate Start protocol Required only in Europe FXS ring cadence coefficient and ring cadence ID e voice switching daughtercards e g dialing timers e coding profiles codec type e g voice fax required only if connecting to other type of H 323 device including OmniPCX 4400 with LIOE Link Opti mizer Ethernet voice card Cisco Router and Microsoft NetMeeting e Voice VoIP network required only if using H 323 gatekeeper software Configure the jumpers on the voice daughtercard being installed as required and detailed in Chapter 2 VoIP Daughtercards Proceed to Step 8 only after the jumpers Cif neces sary have been properly configured in the order in which they are presented in Chapter 2 VoIP Daughtercards Damage to voice daughtercards may result if jumpers are not properly configured Turn OFF power to switch then insert and seat daughtercard configured as per Step 7 above do not proceed with Step 8 unless jumpers on the card are properly configured Refer to Chapter 2 VoIP Daughtercards for configuration details For OA 512 with digital daughtercard insert DIMMs side up into empty expansion slot 4 For OA 512 with analog daughtercard insert FXO FXS module side up into empty expansion slot 4 For OSR with digital daughterc
264. g channel 2 2 13 24 emw in wink duration 30000 voice signaling channel 2 3 1 30 emw in wink duration 60000 Remarks The voice signaling protocol command must be set to the corresponding protocol type before any commands for E amp M Wink Start Immediate Start and Delay Start Signaling and FXS FXO Loop and Ground Start commands will take effect Page 5 94 VoIP Commands voice signaling emw in wink digit ignore Command Usage Specify time to ignore tone digits after Ear amp Mouth wink Syntax Options voice signaling channel lt s ol port startChannel endChannel gt emw in wink digit ignore lt value gt Definitions slot Specifies chassis slot number where VSM is installed e g 2 port Specifies physical port number on voice daughtercard e g 1 startChannel The first number in the range of voice channels e g 1 endChannel The last number in the range of voice channels e g 30 Syntax Note Be sure to separate the start and end range numbers with a hyphen e g 1 30 value Specifies the period of time in milliseconds from 5 to 1 000 e g 30 after the wink to ignore tones digits for incoming calls Syntax Note Do not use commas when entering the value for E amp M time to ignore digits for incoming after wink for example 1 000 will return a syntax error message Default The default value is 30 milliseconds Command Examples voice signaling channel 2 1 1
265. g module e g 2 port Specifies physical port number on voice daughtercard e g 1 network Indicates facilities data link port is controlled by the network i e the VSD user Indicates facilities data link port is controlled by the user e g the telephone company Syntax Note If the port role is network and the fdlMode is set to AT amp T 54016 via the voice port facilities data link protocol command then this port periodically sends AT amp T performance requests to customer interface Default The default setting is user Command Examples voice port 2 1 facilities data link port role user voice port 2 2 facilities data link port role network Remarks To use this command the voice daughtercard connection interface type must be set to T1 via the voice port interface type command Page 5 46 VoIP Commands voice port transmit clock source Command Usage Specify voice port transmit clock source Syntax Options voice port lt slot port gt transmit clock source loop timing local timing Definitions slot Specifies slot number of voice switching daughtercard installed in switching module e g 2 port Specifies physical port number on voice daughtercard e g 1 loop timing Indicates that the recovered receive clock is being used as the transmit clock local timing Indicates that a local clock source is being used as the transmit clock Default The default setting is
266. g plan to PBX_1 voice numbering plan to PBX_2 v ite numbering plan to PBX_1 hunt method round robin voice numbering plan to PBX_1 hunt method round robin voice numbering plan to PBX_1 associate destination member to VSD_1 voice numbering plan to PBX_2 associate destination member to VSD_2 vice numbering plan to PBX_1 associate phone group member Ext of PBX_1 voice numbering plan to PBX_2 associate phone group member Ext of PBX_2 voice numbering plan to PBX_1 description trunk to route calls from VSD1 to PBX1 voice numbering plan to PBX_2 description trunk to route calls from VSD2 to PBX2 v ic numbering plan to PBX_1 voice daughter card 4 1 activate VoIP Commands voice daughter card h 323 out fast start Command Usage Set outgoing H 323 Fast Start mode for gateway on off Syntax Options voice daughter card lt s oi card_number gt h 323 out going fast start on off Definitions slot Specifies the chassis slot number where VSM is installed e g 2 card_number Specifies the voice daughtercard position number e g 1 going Optional command syntax Type either out or outgoing in the command line on Turns ON H 323 outgoing fast start for specified voice network off Turns OFF H 323 outgoing fast start for specified voice network Default The default setting is on Command Examples voice daughter card 2 1 h 323 outgoing fast start off
267. ge of voice channels e g 1 endChannel The last number in the range of voice channels e g 30 Syntax Note Be sure to separate the start and end range numbers with a hyphen e g 1 30 plar phone number Telephone number configured to dialing plan e g 8188803500 Syntax Notes If no number is entered for the PLAR dial in phone number operation will be as normal This command must be issued before activating the voice daughtercard Default None Command Examples voice channel 2 2 1 12 dial in private automatic line ringdown 8188803500 voice channel 2 3 13 24 dial in private automatic line ringdown 8188803501 Remarks To use this command the channel type mode must be set to PLAR Private Line Automatic Ringdown via the voice channel mode command This command is normally used for calls placed from courtesy phones Page 5 60 VoIP Commands voice channel state Command Usage Set voice channel initialization Gin service out of service Signifies the initial state admin status of the channel or attempt to modify the state of the channel Syntax Options voice channel lt s ol port startChannel endChannel gt state in service out of service Definitions slot Specifies slot number of voice daughtercard installed in switching module e g 2 port Specifies physical port number on voice daughtercard e g 1 startChannel The first number in the range o
268. ghtercard e g 1 Specifies port channel number range in which to reset modem statistics e g 1 12 cumu lative for the current call on specified channel Optional command syntax Type either stats or statistics in the command line Syntax Notes This command only works from within the command line inter face and cannot be used from within the vsmboot asc file Page 5 279 VoIP Commands voice channel reset fax stats Command Usage Reset facsimile statistics for one or more voice channels Not available this release Syntax Options voice channel lt s o port startChannel endChannel gt reset fax stat istic s Definitions slot port channel istic Default None Command Example Specifies chassis slot number where VSM is installed e g 2 Specifies physical port number on voice daughtercard e g 1 Specifies port channel number range in which to reset facsimile statistics e g 1 12 cumulative for the current call on specified channel Optional command syntax Type either stats or statistics in the command line Syntax Notes This command only works from within the command line inter face and cannot be used from within the vsmboot asc file voice channel 2 1 1 12 reset fax statistics voice channel 2 1 13 24 reset fax stats Page 5 280 VoIP Commands reset voice channel isdn level 2 stats Command Usage Reset IS
269. ghtercards to an external H 323 NT100 RADVision or other third party gatekeeper software application installed on a server or workstation The phone groups for the individual daughtercard must be associated with the card in order for it to generate the H 323 alias telephone numbers for the gatekeepers Configure the AVNDS for the voice daughtercards so that the H 323 destination is the gate keeper instead of Trunks D or E Most third party gatekeepers should be compatible with the Alcatel s H 323 gateway providing the gatekeepers are also H 323 compliant Extensions off of PBX 1 lt _ lt gt 1000 1999 Extensions 1000 to 1999 Voice Daughtercard 1 IP 192 168 11 2 Port 1720 _ Gatekeeper Zone 0 H 323 Alias 1000 1001 a ETT 1999 2000 2001 at ce ie 2999 Destination IP Address 192 168 11 2 VSD 1 192 168 11 2 VSD 1 192 168 11 2 VSD 1 192 168 12 2 VSD 1 192 168 12 2 VSD 2 192 168 12 2 VSD 2 192 168 12 2 VSD 2 192 168 12 2 VSD 2 IP 13 2 Port 1719 E Voice off of PBX 2 2000 to 2999 T1 Daughtercard T1 gt 2 2000 2999 H IP 192 168 12 2 Port 1720 Example 12 H 323 Gatekeeper LEGEND for Diagram Components PBX 1 Configuration PBX
270. gits to route calls to lines A Expects to receive one to 23 digits on trunk and then uses these digits to route calls to lines B Routes calls starting with 1 818 878 2xxx to lines A Routes calls starting with 011 33 0 1 556 7xxx to lines B Routes calls starting with 001 33 0 1 55 6 to trunk G and then the VoIP network uses these digits to route calls to trunk CE Routes calls starting with 1 818 878 to trunk CH and then the VoIP network uses these digits to route calls to trunk D Page 3 57 VoIP Networks with Interoperability Example 22 Remarks Supported VoIP features and main CLI commands used with this dialing scheme are as follows Features Supported H 323 gateway to voice daughtercard A Primary CLI Commands Used voice destination local channel page 5 231 Local channel two hunt groups 24 channels per group T1 F voice numbering plan hunt method page 5 255 voice numbering plan destination member page 5 257 voice numbering plan phone group member page 5 258 Site prefix no site prefix D voice phone group site prefix page 5 238 Voice phone group type eleven digit local extensions M voice phone group type page 5 240 voice phone group format page 5 243 voice phone group add numbers page 5 247 Voice phone group type INTL extension O voice phone group type page 5 240 voice
271. gnaling channel 2 1 1 12 no override information element transport voice signaling channel 2 2 13 24 override information element transport on voice signaling channel 2 3 1 30 override information element transport off Remarks This command controls transport of general user to user Information Element IE packets containing data fields of information Page 5 169 VoIP Commands voice signaling override qsig information element transport Command Usage Override call signaling for QSIG information element QE transport on off This command should only be used under the supervision of trained personnel Syntax Options voice signaling channel lt s ol port startChannel endChannel gt no override qsig information element transport on off Definitions slot Specifies chassis slot number where VSM is installed e g 2 port Specifies physical port number on voice daughtercard e g 1 startChannel The first number in the range of voice channels e g 1 endChannel The last number in the range of voice channels e g 30 Syntax Note Be sure to separate the start and end range numbers with a hyphen e g 1 30 no Optional command syntax Syntax Note If no is used then ON and OFF cannot be specified on Turns ON QSIG information element transport for specified telephony signaling channel off Turns OFF QSIG information element transport for specified telephony signaling channel Synta
272. guaranteed QoS LANs provide conver sational services for audio video data and control information in H 323 equipment The series relates to gatekeeper devices used in VoIP to provide services across LANs Gatekeep ers are centralized network devices performing IP address translations and bandwidth management Alcatel s H 323 VoIP gateway uses AVNDS to work with and in lieu of gate keepers Note Standard includes codec support for call synchronization Series H 245 Series H Audiovisual and Multimedia Systems Infrastructure of audiovisual services Communications procedures Control protocol from multimedia communication H 245 this standard specifies syntax and semantics of terminal information messages particu larly receiving and transmitting capabilities mode preferences from the receiver including logical channel signaling Control and Indication messages Signaling acknowledgements are specified to ensure reliable audiovisual and data communications The series relates to Multi point Control Units used in VoIP to provide signaling and coding for call synchronization Codec Support G 711 G 723 1 G 729a G 711 PCM Encoding This is the ITU recommendation for an algorithm designed to transmit and receive A Law and Mu Law PCM voice at digital bit rates of 48 56 and 64 Kbps It applies to digital telephone sets on digital PBS cellular and ISDN channels Support for this algorithm is required for ITU T compliant video
273. h Configura tion options included one VXS module with two VoIP daughtercards or two VXS modules and one VoIP daughtercard per VSX Also not all configurations shown below may be currently available for purchase See also VSD Front Panel on page 2 7 VSB Front Panel on page 2 15 VSA Front Panel on page 2 21 these drawings illustrate how VoIP daughtercard ports are numbered For informa tion on configuring the ports using CLI commands see Chapter 5 VoIP Commands Switch VSD VSB FXS FXO Valid Port Configuration Numbers OA 512 1 A B Note Port numbers must be configured as 1 and 2 A 1 and B 2 OA 512 1 A B C D Note Port numbers must be configured as 1 2 3 and 4 A 1 B 2 C 3 D 4 OA 512 z 1 1 2 3 4 FXS OA 512 2 1 4 FXS 5 8 FXS OA 512 1 1 2 FXO OA 512 2 1 2 FXO 3 4 FXO OA 512 h 1 1 1 4 FXS 5 6 FXO OSR 1 A B Note Port numbers must be configured as 1 and 2 A 1 and B 2 OSR 2 2 A B S3 1 position A B S3 2 position Note Port numbers in S3 1 must be configured as 1 and 2 A 1 B 2 In 3 2 port numbers must be configured as 3 and 4 A 3 B 4 OSR 1 A B C D Note Port numbers must be configured as 1 2 3 and 4 A 1 B 2 C 3 D 4 Page 2 28 VoIP Daughtercard Port Numbering Schemes Switch VSD VSB FXS FXO
274. h PSTN Example 14 International PSTN Calls Outbound This dialing scheme is used to handle outbound international telephone calls Not available this release Voice Daughtercard 1 1 818 878 2000 IP 192 168 11 2 _ to 878 2999 Port 1720 1 1 npa nxx xxxx Extensions off of PBX 1 2000 2999 1 818 878 1 800 555 9001 ey 011 33 0 1 40 76 10 10 WAN g See Diagrams Intl Calls Overview Inbound VoIP Example 14 International PSTN Calls Outbound LEGEND for Diagram Components not available this release PBX 1 Configuration Voice Daughtercard 1 Configuration Page 3 40 VoIP Networks with PSTN Example 14 International PSTN Calls Inbound This dialing scheme is used to handle inbound international telephone calls Not available this release Voice Daughtercard 1 Extensions off of PBX 1 eal 2000 2999 IP 192 168 11 2 2000 2999 B port 1720 1 818 878 1 800 555 9001 011 33 0 1 40 76 10 10 g See Diagrams Intl Calls Overview Outbound VoIP Example 14 International PSTN Calls Inbound LEGEND for Diagram Components not available this release
275. h is 15 digits 1 3 digit country code CC national destination code NDC and subscriber number SN Field separators not avail able this release Indicates use of North American Numbering Plan via the Public Switching Telephone Net work consists of local and long distance domestic telephone numbers e g 1 XXX XXX XXXX Indicates use of international long distance telephone numbers via the PSTN e g 01 XXX XXX XXXX Syntax Notes Restrictions on numbering schemes from various telephone companies are beyond the scope of this document More detailed syntax related rules specific to using local NANP international extensions and NANP PSTN and International PSTN dialing types are detailed below The default setting is local extensions voice phone group salem_engr1 type local extensions voice phone group salem_engr2 type nanp extensions voice phone group salem_engr3 type international extensions voice phone group calab_engr1 type nanp pstn voice phone group caleb_engr2 type international pstn Page 5 240 VoIP Commands Syntax Notes Local Extensions intended for daughtercard to daughtercard calls e If local extensions used then voice switching daughtercard recognizes fixed number of dialed extension digits i e 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 or 11 No site prefix required e If H 323 gatekeeper control is set to ON via the voice network card h 323 gate keeper control command then the t
276. hannel endChannel gt reset all stat istic s Definitions slot port channel istic Default None Command Example voice channel 2 1 1 12 reset all statistics voice channel 2 1 13 24 reset all stats Specifies chassis slot number where VSM is installed e g 2 Specifies physical port number on voice daughtercard e g 1 Specifies port channel number range in which to reset all telephony statistics e g 1 12 Optional command syntax Type either stats or statistics in the command line Syntax Notes This command only works from within the command line inter face and cannot be used from within the vsmboot asc file Page 5 265 VoIP Commands view voice channel telephony level stats Command Usage Display cumulative telephony statistics Not available this release Syntax Options view voice channel lt s ol porl channel gt telephony level stat istic s Definitions slot Specifies chassis slot number where VSM is installed e g 2 port Specifies physical port number on voice daughtercard e g 1 channel Specifies port channel number in which to view telephony statistics e g 25 istic Optional command syntax Type either stats or statistics in the command line Syntax Notes This command only works from within the command line inter face and cannot be used from within the vsmboot asc file Default None Command Example view voice channel 2 1 25 t
277. he remote calling party and is auto matically used to create the card level destinations e g tosalem The endpoint name string is sometimes referred to as an alias name Page 5 230 VoIP Commands voice destination local channel Command Usage Create a local channel destination with specified name Syntax Options voice destination lt channelDestName gt local channel lt endpointDestName port startChannel endChannel gt Definitions channelDestName Identifies the voice call endpoint destination by name e g tosalem maximum length of 40 characters The following characters are permitted in the call destination name a z A Z 0 9 space and A_ amp 1 lt gt QO endpointDestName Identifies the voice call endpoint destination string name unique across the H 323 network e g to_vsd1 any string up to 64 bytes not including quotes The following characters are permitted in the destination string name a z A Z 0 9 space and A amp I1 lt gt QOT It port Specifies physical port number on voice daughtercard e g 1 startChannel The first number in the range of voice channels e g 1 endChannel The last number in the range of voice channels e g 30 Syntax Note Be sure to separate the start and end range numbers with a hyphen e g 1 30 Default None Command Example voice destination tosalem local channel to_vsd1 1 1
278. he voice activity detection must be disabled via the voice coding profile voice activity detector command The default setting is off Page 5 214 VoIP Commands voice coding profile caller id Command Usage Set caller ID for specified coding profile on off this command must be set to apply all other caller ID settings as listed Telephony Signaling FXS LS to generate outbound caller ID on off FXS LS to detect inbound caller ID on off FXO GS to generate outbound caller ID on off FXO GS to detect inbound caller ID on off Outbound Caller ID Outbound caller ID name private unavailable to transmit Outbound caller ID number published unpublished to transmit Syntax Options voice coding profile lt codingProfName gt caller id on off Definitions codingProfName Identifies the coding profile by name e g cprofeallid1 Consists of at least one ASCII character with quotes on each end of the name maximum length of 40 characters The fol lowing characters are permitted in the coding profile name a z A Z 0 9 space and 32 A_ amp 1 lt gt QOTI 6 on Turns ON caller ID for specified coding profile off Turns OFF caller ID for specified coding profile Default The default setting is on Command Examples voice coding profile cprofcallid1 caller id off voice coding profile cprofcallid2 caller id on voice coding profile cprofcal
279. heme AVNDS 0 0 0 00 0 00000005 3 3 Network Dialing Scheme VoIP Features 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 0c 3 5 VoIP Networks without PSTN Example 1 0 0 0 0 0 20 eee eee 3 7 Four Digit Extensions and Two Voice Daughtercards 0 3 7 VoIP Networks without PSTN Example 2 0 0 0 0 002 cee eee eee 3 9 Trunk Groups and Three Voice Daughtercards 3 4 2 4244 44NNRE NEE E RE ES 3 9 VoIP Networks without PSTN Example 3 0 000 000 eee eee 3 11 One Hunt Group 48 Channels Across Two T1s 1 0 00 000 eee eee 3 11 VoIP Networks without PSTN Example 4 0 06 6c sce a dundee enn veetues 3 13 One Hunt Group 60 Channels Across Two Els 0 00000 eee eee 3 13 VoIP Networks without PSTN Example5 0 0 0 0 eee eee 3 15 One Hunt Group 96 Channels Across Four T1ls 0 000 000 eee eee 3 15 VoIP Networks without PSTN Example 6 0 0 0 000000 3 17 One Hunt Group 144 Channels Across Six T1s 0 0 0 eee 3 17 VoIP Networks without PSTN Example 7 0 0 00 0000s 3 19 Four Hunt Groups 12 Channels Per Hunt Group 4 3 19 VoIP Networks without PSTN Example 8 0 0 000 002 3 21 48 Individual Hunt Groups One Channel Per Group 3 21 VoIP Networks without PSTN Example9 0 0 000 000 ee ee 3 23 Trunk Groups and Mixed Length Extensions 0 005 3 23 VoIP Networks without PSTN Example 10 0
280. hese jumpers no power is fed to the designated port this is the default setting for all four jumpers Caution Damage to the VSB daughtercards due to improper configuration of the power feeds is not covered by watranty For NT configurations only The use of shunts to enable the power feeds on the VSB must be used with caution as they will substantially increase the voltage applied to the board and may result in damage to the board and or other components connected to the VSB It is strongly recommended that Customer Support be contacted before installing shunts on jumpers J25 through J28 Default J25 no power on port 1 no shunts on pins 1_2 and pins 3_4 Default J26 no power on port 2 no shunts on pins 1_2 and pins 3_4 Default J27 no power on port 3 no shunts on pins 1_2 and pins 3_4 Default J28 no power on port 4 no shunts on pins 1_2 and pins 3_4 NT J25 power feed on port 1 optional shunts on pins 1_2 and pins 3_4 NT J26 power feed on port 2 optional shunts on pins 1_2 and pins 3_4 NT J27 power feed on port 3 optional shunts on pins 1_2 and pins 3_4 NT J28 power feed on port 4 optional shunts on pins 1_2 and pins 3_4 Other VSB Jumpers The following jumpers are factory set on the VSB daughtercard and should not be changed by the customer unless under the direction of Customer Support Jumper No Shunt Position Default Description P20 Pins 1_2 Pins 4_5 yes Reserved P31
281. hing Daughtercard Commands 0 0000 eee nee 5 14 voice daughter card ip mask th 8 te ar ae A eh G Sa ee Bes Ses Sens Reh ee AR 5 16 voice daughter card ip address 1 2 0 ee 5 17 voice daughter card ip default gateway 0 00 00 ee 5 18 voice daughter card activate nnana ee 5 19 VOICE ACUI a 4528 ayesha Galette tee cats tat te EA SEK hts ok EH te Es os td 5 20 voice daughter card h 323 out fast start 2 ee 5 23 voice daughter card h 323 in fast start nanana ee 5 24 voice daughter card h 323 auto answer 1 2 ee 5 25 voice daughter card first digit wait duration 0 0 00 000s 5 26 voice daughter card inter digit wait duration 0 0 0 0 00 eee 5 27 voice daughter card dial time wait duration 0 0 00 00 0 eae 5 28 voice daughter card termination digit 00 aa aaa 5 29 voice daughter card cadence coefficient 0 0 ee 5 30 voice daughter card ring id 2 eee 5 31 voice daughter card vsb clock source 0 00 0 ee 5 32 voice daughter card vsb external clock port 0 00 000 00 020s 5 33 voice port interface type 2 0 ee 5 34 voice OTE LATS TOrMat ce OA oe tA ede ae AG set ced Se pete Sa Chae apr egies nyt ORE 5 36 voice port circuit identifier 0 2 ee 5 38 voice port nfas framing ss eese d sde ee 5 39 yore port line uild t 6 54 55 ruie BAS KAO AD RS ASR Oo ee 5 40 voice POT linelensth iie4 he ete doh alps Sp doa Sth oo Sth he at SO he 4 Ae oo Be Sg 5 41 VOICE p
282. his command only works from within the command line inter face and cannot be used from within the vsmboot asc file view voice channel 2 1 25 error statistics view voice channel 2 1 25 error playout stats view voice channel 2 2 30 error playout statistics view voice channel 2 2 30 error playout stats Page 5 270 VoIP Commands view voice channel modem stats Command Usage Display cumulative modem statistics Not available this release Syntax Options view voice channel lt s ol portl startChannel endChannel gt modem stat istic s Definitions slot Specifies chassis slot number where VSM is installed e g 2 port Specifies physical port number on voice daughtercard e g 1 channel Specifies port channel number in which to view modem statistics e g 25 cumulative for the current call on specified channel istic Optional command syntax Type either stats or statistics in the command line Syntax Notes This command only works from within the command line inter face and cannot be used from within the vsmboot asc file Default None Command Example view voice channel 2 1 25 modem statistics view voice channel 2 1 25 modem stats view voice channel 2 2 30 modem statistics view voice channel 2 2 30 modem stats Page 5 271 VoIP Commands view voice channel fax stats Command Usage Display cumulative facsimile statistics Not available this releas
283. hone Groups and Hunt Methods Altogether use of these parameters enable VoIP networks to translate IP addresses from telephone numbers and allow communications between the VoIP branch offices to be configurable For more details see Alcatel VoIP Network Dialing Schemes AVNDS on page 1 15 See Chapter 5 VoIP Commands for details on using these CLI commands once the H 323 VoIP gateway is configured refer to this chapter as well if using an optional third party gate keeper server i e NT100 RADVision on a PC for example as some additional network parameters will need to be set For details on configuring the AVNDS see Chapter 3 Network Dialing Schemes and Chap ter 5 VoIP Commands For details on installing the cards and setting up VoIP H 323 Gate ways see Chapter 4 Setup and Installation Page 1 2 Introduction Alcatel s H 323 VoIP Gateway Key Features Alcatel s H 323 VoIP gateways which connect voice and data networks minimize call complexity and dependency on leased telephone lines by allowing enterprises more control over their own call processing Alcatel s H 323 VoIP gateway is used to transport digitized voice conversations over IP local area networks which are then sent over wide are networks using such protocols as Frame Relay or ATM All VoIP daughtercards are compatible with the Alcatel OmniAccess 512 and Omni Switch Router As shown below the following features of Alcatel s
284. hone group Ext of PBX_1 format xxx voice phone group Ext of PBX_1 add numbers 1000 to 1999 voice phone group Ext of PBX_1 strip digit length 0 l voice phone group Ext of PBX_2 voice phone group Ext of PBX_2 site prefix off voice phone group Ext of PBX_2 type local extension voice phone group Ext of PBX_2 format xxx voice phone group Ext of PBX_2 add numbers 2000 to 2999 voice phone group Ext of PBX_2 strip digit length 0 voice numbering plan This corresponds to the Trunk labeled T1 E on dialing scheme example 1 voice numbering plan to PBX_1 voice numbering plan to PBX_1 hunt method round robin voice numbering plan to PBX_1 associate destination member To VSD_1 port 1 voice numbering plan to PBX_1 associate phone group member Ext of PBX_1 voice numbering plan to PBX_1 description Trunk to route calls from VSD_1 to PBX1 l voice numbering plan to PBX_2 voice numbering plan to PBX_2 hunt method round robin voice numbering plan to PBX_2 associate destination member To VSD_2 port 1 voice numbering plan to PBX_2 associate phone group member Ext of PBX_2 voice numbering plan to PBX_2 description Trunk to route calls from VSD_2 to PBX2 voice daughtercard 4 1 act ivate 5 VoIP Commands The following chapter contains information on using the VoIP command line interface CLD to configure VoIP switches The c
285. hone group type page 5 240 voice phone group format page 5 243 voice phone group add numbers page 5 247 Strip digit length no strip digits CR voice phone group strip digit length page 5 244 Strip digit length 7 V voice phone group strip digit length page 5 244 Digital Interface type T1 W voice port interface type page 5 34 Page 3 52 VoIP Networks with Interoperability Example 20 H 323 Gateway to Cisco Router VoIP Networks with Interoperability Example 20 This dialing scheme is used to connect a voice daughtercard to a Cisco 3640 router running Cisco IOS 7 12 0 Voice Extensions 1000 to 1999 off of PBX 1 Daughtercard 1000 1999 1st Extension off of FXS 2nd Extension off of FXS 5551212 1 IP 192 168 11 2 Port 1720 ge 5551213 S Example 20 H 323 Gateway to Cisco Router LEGEND for Diagram Components PBX 1 Configuration Cisco 3640 Configuration Expects to receive four digits on trunk D and then uses these digits to route calls to lines A Expects to receive seven digits in H 3232 packet on ethernet WAN Z and then uses these digits to route calls to lines B or lines Routes calls starting with 1 to lines A Routes 555 1213 calls to li
286. ic LEGEND for Diagram Components Voice Daughtercard 1 Configuration Voice Daughtercard 2 Configuration Expects to receive inseize signal on trunk POTS line GR and then uses Private Line Automatic Ring down PLAR to route calls to ports 1 2 or 3 Expects to receive inseize signal on trunk POTS line U and then uses Private Line Automatic Ring down PLAR to route calls to ports 1 2 and 3 Expects to receive inseize signal on trunk POTS line S and then uses Private Line Automatic Ring down PLAR to route calls to port 4 Expects to receive inseize signal on trunk POTS line D and then uses Private Line Automatic Ring down PLAR to route calls to port 4 Routes all POTS PSTN calls to trunks CR or S Routes all POTS PSTN calls to trunks T or U Page 3 49 VoIP Networks with PSTN Example 18 Remarks Supported VoIP features and main CLI commands used with this dialing scheme are as follows Features Supported H 323 gateway to voice daughtercard A Primary CLI Commands Used voice destination local channel page 5 231 Local channel individual hunt groups 48 channels per group T1 D voice numbering plan hunt method page 5 255 voice numbering plan destination member page 5 257 voice numbering plan phone group member page 5 258 Site prefix single or multiple digits Q voice phone group site prefi
287. ice echo canceller comfort noise mode adaptive Page 5 199 VoIP Commands voice coding profile echo canceller noise level Command Usage Specify coding profile echo canceller noise level Syntax Options voice coding profile lt codingProfName gt echo canceller noise level lt value gt Definitions codingProfName value Default Command Example The default value is 40 Identifies coding profile by name e g salemprof1 maximum length of 40 characters The following characters are permitted in the coding profile name a z A Z 0 9 space and Ss 2 HA_ amp I lt gt CQO IKI Specifies voice echo canceller noise level for specified coding profile in dBm power ref erenced to 1 milliwatt input signal power from 70 to 40 e g 40 Syntax Notes To use this command the voice echo canceller mode must be enabled via the coding profile voice echo canceller command The voice echo canceller comfort noise mode must also be set to static via the coding profile voice echo canceller comfort noise mode command voice coding profile salemprof1 echo canceller noise level 40 voice coding profile calabprof2 echo canceller noise level 70 Page 5 200 VoIP Commands voice coding profile voice echo canceller tail length Command Usage Specify coding profile voice echo canceller tail delay length Syntax Options voice coding pr
288. ies physical port number on voice daughtercard e g 1 startChannel The first number in the range of voice channels e g 1 endChannel The last number in the range of voice channels e g 30 Syntax Note Be sure to separate the start and end range numbers with a hyphen e g 1 30 ringing Sets tone table for TCID to ringing for normal ringback sound silence Sets tone table for TCID to silence for silent ringback Default The default setting is ringing Command Examples voice signaling channel 2 1 1 12 tone table ringing voice signaling channel 2 2 13 24 tone table silence Page 5 149 VoIP Commands voice signaling call progress tone Command Usage Set call signaling for detection of call progress tones on off relative Syntax Options Definitions slot port startChannel endChannel on off relative Default Command Examples voice signaling channel 2 1 1 12 call progress tone off voice signaling channel 2 2 13 24 call progress tone on voice signaling channel lt s ol port startChannel endChannel gt call progress tone on off relative Specifies chassis slot number where VSM is installed e g 2 Specifies physical port number on voice daughtercard e g 1 The first number in the range of voice channels e g 1 The last number in the range of voice channels e g 30 Syntax Note Be sure to separate the start and end range
289. ies the acoustic echo canceller handset speaker gain in milliseconds from 0 to 31 e g 10 Syntax Note To use this command the acoustic echo canceller must be enabled via the voice signaling acoustic echo canceller non linear processor command and the acoustic echo canceller output command must be set to handset Default The default value is 10 milliseconds Command Example voice signaling channel 2 1 1 12 acoustic echo canceller handset speaker gain 10 voice signaling channel 2 2 13 24 acoustic echo canceller handset speaker gain 31 Remarks Acoustic echo cancellers handle signal transmission echoes on calls originating from or being sent to IP telephones by isolating and filtering the signals Acoustic echo cancellers function as comfort noise generators Page 5 161 VoIP Commands voice signaling acoustic echo canceller hands free speaker gain Command Usage Set acoustic echo canceller hands free speaker gain Syntax Options voice signaling channel lt s ol port startChannel endChannel gt acoustic echo canceller hands free speaker gain lt value gt Definitions slot port startChannel endChannel value Default Command Example voice signaling channel 2 1 1 12 acoustic echo canceller hands free speaker gain 10 voice signaling channel 2 2 13 24 acoustic echo canceller hands free speaker gain 31 Specifies chassis slot number where VSM is installed e g 2 Specifie
290. ies the debounce delay interval transition to off hook dial tone state in millisec onds from 1 to 1 000 e g 20 Syntax Note Do not use commas when entering the fxs Is off hook debounce transition value for example 1 000 will return a syntax error message Default The default value is 20 milliseconds Command Examples voice signaling channel 2 1 1 12 fxs Is off hook debounce 20 voice signaling channel 2 2 13 24 fxs Is off hook debounce 500 voice signaling channel 2 3 1 30 fxs Is off hook debounce 1000 Remarks The voice signaling protocol command must be set to the corresponding protocol type before any commands for E amp M Wink Start Immediate Start and Delay Start Signaling and FXS FXO Loop and Ground Start commands will take effect A minimum debounce value of 250 must be set for analog voice switching VSA daughter cards Page 5 109 VoIP Commands voice signaling fxs ls seize detect Command Usage Specify Foreign Exchange Station Loop Start FXS LS time to wait before declaring off hook Syntax Options voice signaling channel lt s ol port startChannel endChannel gt fxs Is seize detect lt value gt Definitions slot Specifies chassis slot number where VSM is installed e g 2 port Specifies physical port number on voice daughtercard e g 1 startChannel The first number in the range of voice channels e g 1 endChannel The last number in the range of voice
291. ies the numbering plan by name e g salem plan1 maximum length of 40 charac ters The following characters are permitted in the numbering plan name a z A Z 0 9 space and A_ amp 1 lt gt CQ 1 string Text string that describes the specified voice numbering plan e g phone group a_eng maximum length of characters 40 The following characters are permitted in the numbering plan description string a z A Z 0 9 space and A_ amp I lt gt QOT I Default None Command Example voice numbering plan salem plan1 description phone group a_eng voice numbering plan salem plan2 description phone group b_eng voice numbering plan calab plan1 description phone group a_eng voice numbering plan calab plan2 description phone group b_eng Remarks This command is used to store a description of this phone group for convenience Because the command is optional it has no effect on the switch It can also be used to hold the circuit identifier see the voice port circuit identifier command Page 5 256 VoIP Commands voice numbering plan destination member Command Usage Associate or disassociate destinations or hunting targets with numbering plans by name Syntax Options voice numbering plan lt NumberingPlanName gt associate disassociate destination member lt DestName gt Definitions NumberingPlanName_
292. if threshold mode relative 5 191 Coding Profiles Tone Detection Set coding profile voice DTMF relay on off 5 192 Set coding profile fax modem switchover enable disable 5 193 Set coding profile call progress tone detection on off 5 194 Set coding profile V 18 Annex A call progress tone detection on off 5 195 Set coding profile single frequency tone detection on off 5 196 Coding Profiles Echo Canceller Set coding profile voice echo canceller on off 5 197 Set coding profile voice echo canceller non linear processor mode on off 5 198 Set coding profile voice echo canceller comfort noise mode static adaptive 5 199 Set coding profile echo canceller noise level dBm 5 200 Specify coding profile voice echo canceller tail delay length 5 201 Set coding profile echo canceller refresh configuration freeze update 5 202 Set coding profile echo canceller coefficient refresh state on off 5 203 Coding Profiles Facsimile Modem Specify coding profile maximum allowed fax modem data rate 5 204 Specify coding profile fax modem transmit level gain 5 205 Specify coding profile fax modem carrier detect threshold 5 206 Specify coding profile inactivity detection time to automatically tear down fax 5 207 Coding Profiles Facsimile T 38 Mode Specify coding profile T 38 high speed fax rate 5 208 Specify coding profile T 38 low speed packet redundancy 5 209 Specify coding profile T 38 high speed packet redundancy 5 210 Set coding profile T 38 data h
293. ify duration to pause between tones digits dialed out Syntax Options voice signaling channel lt s ol pori stantChannel endChannel gt out tone interdigit duration lt value gt Definitions slot Specifies slot number of voice daughtercard installed in switching module e g 2 port Specifies physical port number on voice daughtercard e g 1 startChannel The first number in the range of voice channels e g 1 endChannel The last number in the range of voice channels e g 30 Syntax Note Be sure to separate the start and end range numbers with a hyphen e g 1 30 value When tone dialing is used specifies in milliseconds from 0 ms to 2000 the duration of the interdigit gap between tones e g 200 Syntax Note Do not use commas when entering the duration of the interdigit gap between tones for example 2 000 will return a syntax error message Default The default value is 200 Command Examples voice signaling channel 2 1 1 12 out tone interdigit duration 0 voice signaling channel 2 2 13 24 out tone interdigit duration 200 voice signaling channel 2 3 31 30 out tone interdigit duration 2000 Page 5 71 VoIP Commands voice signaling out dialing type Command Usage Specify out dialing characteristics tone or pulse of the channels duration on the port Syntax Options voice signaling channel lt s ol pori stantChannel endChannel gt out dialing type tone
294. ignaling fxo gs connection loop open debounce 5 137 voice signaling fxo gs max tip ground wait 0 0 0 000 000 eee 5 138 voice signaling fxo gs tip ground debounce 0000200000 eee 5 139 voice signaling fxo gs ringing debounce 0 0 0 cee eee 5 140 voice signaling fxo gs ringing inter cycle 0 ee 5 141 voice signaling fxo gs ringing inter pulse 0 00 00 00000 eee 5 142 voice signaling fxo gs caller id detection 0 00 000 5 143 voice signaling fxo gs answer after n n auauna ee 5 144 voice signaling fxo gs loop current debounce 200020000005 5 145 voice signaling fxo gs battery reversal debounce 000 5 146 voice signaling callerid name 0 0 eee 5 147 voice signaling caller id number naana Sol bh oe th oh LIRR ane Es 5 148 voice signaling tone table prere ra ee eee 5 149 voice signaling call progress tone 2 00 0 ee 5 150 voice signaling call progress tone detection configuration 5 151 voice signaling v 18 tone detection threshold hang time 5 152 voice signaling v 18 tone detection threshold level 5 5 153 voice signaling v 18 tone detection threshold fraction 5 154 voice signaling single frequency tone detection threshold level 5 155 voice signaling single frequency tone detection threshold time 5 156 voice signaling echo canceller non linear sensitivi
295. iguration includes voice signaling interfaces coding profiles and the VoIP network interface including H 323 gateway and gatekeeper configuration Per channel configuration includes general channel and channel level telephony signaling configuration Coding profiles in particular are important parameters that define the way a device such as a VoIP H 323 gateway card acts Once a coding profile is available to a channel in the network it remains in effect until or unless it is made unavailable to the channel If any individual parameter of the profile is modified it will take effect on all entities to which it had been defined until the next time the profile is requested from the voice switching daughtercard Coding profiles are not assigned to a physical entity because the coding profile to be used is determined at runtime If coding profile parameters are changed the next time a modified coding profile is requested by the voice switching daughtercard the new information will be obtained Coding profiles are also used to associate specific entities daughtercard with channels on a voice switching daughtercard Other voice switching daughtercard parameters may also be applied in a manner similar to coding profiles such as phone groups and numbering plans Phone groups and voice numbering plans are used as containers for VoIP gateway operations to group parameters so that all related parameters can be referenced by other commands using a s
296. ime Transport Protocol RTP session parameters that must be specified for IP network communications Voice network call control parameters are configured at the VoIP daughter card level Alcatel VoIP Network Dialing Schemes AVNDS The AVNDS are responsible for the operations and configuration of the VoIP daughtercard and or voice switching module e g VSX AVNDS are implemented on the Motorola MPC860 processor and the switch AVNDS are responsible for providing the interface to configure and maintain all VoIP daugh tercards H 323 gateways on the entire VoIP network Additionally both standard packet Management Information Bases MIBs and proprietary voice packet MIBs are supported The AVNDS are used to store information contained in VSM Voice Switching Module config uration boot files vsmboot asc concerning the configuration of the VoIP network particu larly the following e Destinations H 323 endpoints H 323 local channel destinations e Phone Groups e g strip digits and extensions e Numbering Plans hunt methods and hunt groups Page 1 15 H 323 VoIP Gateway Voice and Convergence Features The AVNDS handle inbound outbound calls routing to from the VoIP network and local ports AVNDS are also used to set up calls and translate IP addresses to telephone numbers and can be used with or in lieu of H 323 VoIP gatekeepers VoIP configuration boot files and profiles simplify VoIP configuration of Alcatel s H 3
297. ime to wait to force caller to disconnect time to wait to tear down fax call Signal Power companding type Mu Law A Law gain inserted at receiver gain inserted at transmitter amplitude of comfort Gdle noise Page 5 62 VoIP Commands E amp M Common Signaling E amp M signaling time for transition to off book debounce E amp M signaling time for transition to on hook debounce E amp M signaling time to wait before declaring on hook seize detect E amp M signaling time to wait before declaring off book clear detect E amp M signaling time to wait before confirming on hook E amp M signaling time to wait for on hook after a clear E amp M signaling time to wait between termination and origination E amp M signaling time to wait between termination and receiving E amp M signaling dial tone generation on incoming calls on off minimum E amp M signaling connection time time to wait after E amp M signaling hang up before disabling E amp M Wink Start Signaling minimum E amp M wink delay on incoming calls maximum E amp M wink delay on incoming calls duration of E amp M wink on incoming calls time to ignore tones after E amp M wink time to wait for E amp M wink on outgoing calls minimum E amp M wink duration maximum E amp M wink duration E amp M Immediate Start Signaling E amp M immediate start time to remain off hook when congested E amp M immediate start time to wait before beginning digit collection E amp M Delay S
298. in lieu of a telephone number Syntax Options voice network card lt slot card_number gt h 323 gatekeeper dis associate phone group lt phoneGrpName gt Definitions slot Specifies the chassis slot number where VSM is installed e g 2 card_number Specifies the voice daughtercard position number e g 1 dis Optional command syntax Type either dis or disassociate in the command line phone group Optional command syntax phoneGrpName Specifies the phone group to which the gatekeeper is associated or disassociated Syntax Notes This command must be issued if the voice network card h 323 gatekeeper control command is ON In order for the voice daughtercard to generate alias names using this command either the voice daughter card activate command or the voice numbering plan activate command must be issued This command can only be issued from the Command Line Prompt and not from within the vsmboot asc file Default None Command Example voice network card 2 1 h 323 gatekeeper associate phone group salem_engr1 voice network card 2 2 h 323 gatekeeper associate salem_engr1 voice network card 2 1 h 323 gatekeeper disassociate phone group salem_engr1 voice network card 2 2 h 323 gatekeeper dis salem_engr1 Remarks Only E 164 alias names are generated by the gateway E 164 is an ITU ISDN SMDS Switched Multimegabit Data Service phone line numbering scheme SDMS is used in LAN to LAN metropolitan networks
299. in the range of voice channels e g 30 Syntax Note Be sure to separate the start and end range numbers with a hyphen e g 1 30 value Specifies the signal fraction threshold for V 18 tone detection in dBm0 decibels below 0 milliwatt output with no input power 1 to 32767 e g 10 Syntax Note Do not use commas when entering the V 18 tone detection threshold fraction value for example 1 000 will return a syntax error message Default The default value is 10 dBm0 Command Examples voice signaling channel 2 1 1 12 v 18 tone detection threshold fraction 10 voice signaling channel 2 2 13 24 v 18 tone detection threshold fraction 10000 voice signaling channel 2 3 1 30 v 18 tone detection threshold fraction 32767 Remarks V 18 threshold commands are used to specify minimum detectable signal values and are especially geared toward improving telecommunications for the hearing or speech impaired for example various thresholds are available to control duration hang time and strength evel or even incremental fractional signaling Page 5 154 VoIP Commands voice signaling single frequency tone detection threshold level Command Usage Set signal strength threshold level for single frequency tone detection Syntax Options voice signaling channel lt s ol port stantChannel endChannel gt single frequency tone detection threshold level lt value gt Definitions slot Specifies ch
300. in this group allow VoIP networks to work with other function ally related equipment including H 323 gateways H 323 endpoints the OmniPCX 4400 and assorted PBXs No Dialing Scheme Examples VoIP Networks without PSTN Decision Criteria 1 Four Digit Extensions and Two Voice Daughtercards Basic VoIP Network 2 Four Digit Extensions and Three Voice Daughtercards Expanded VoIP Network 3 Hunt Groups One Hunt Group 48 channels across two T1s One Hunt Group Per T1 Voice Daughtercard 4 Hunt Groups One Hunt Group 60 channels across two E1s One Hunt Group Per E1 Voice Daughtercard 5 Hunt Groups One Hunt Group 96 channels across four T1s One Hunt Group Across Two Voice Daughtercards 6 Hunt Groups One Hunt Group 144 channels across six T1s One Hunt Group Across Three Voice Daughtercards Hunt Groups Four Hunt Groups 12 channels per group Fractional 1 2 T1 Hunt Groups 8 Hunt Groups 48 Individual Hunt Groups One channel per group Fractional individual channel T1 Hunt Groups 9 Strip Digits Trunk Groups and Mixed Length Extensions nique mixed length extensions 10 Strip Digits Trunk Groups and Two Strip Digits ommon extensions nique two digit site prefix even digit local extensions to sim ate NANP dialing U C U 11 Strip Digits Trunk Groups and Eleven Digit Extensions NANP like Common extensions E u U 12 H 323 Gatekeeper nique extensions C
301. ing scheme are as follows Features Supported Primary CLI Commands Used H 323 gateway to voice daughtercard A voice destination local channel page 5 231 Local channel individual hunt groups 48 channels per group T1 D voice numbering plan hunt method page 5 255 voice numbering plan destination member page 5 257 voice numbering plan phone group member page 5 258 Site prefix no site prefix voice phone group site prefix page 5 238 Voice phone group type four digit local extensions L voice phone group type page 5 240 voice phone group format page 5 243 voice phone group add numbers page 5 247 Strip digit length no strip digits CR Digital Interface type Euro BRI Z voice phone group strip digit length page 5 244 voice port interface type page 5 34 voice port isdn protocol page 5 51 Page 3 64 VoIP Networks with Interoperability Example 26 VoIP Networks with Interoperability Example 26 Mixed European Digital and Analog Voice Daughtercards This dialing scheme is used for European countries using E1 ISDN PRI ETSD with analog and digital VoIP gateways together on the same VoIP network A Law companding on the VSA is generally used in Europe instead of the North American Mu Law companding On the VSA the Foreign Exchange Station FXS Loop Start lines are used to send calls to the VoIP network from the telephones vi
302. ingle name e g topbx The phone group or numbering plans must be created before parameters can be added to them Many other parameters available for configuring VoIP networks are typically used in conjunction with Alcatel s patent pending Alcatel VoIP Network Dialing Schemes AVNDS See Chapter 3 Network Dialing Schemes for more information Page 5 2 VoIP Commands GENERAL CONFIGURATION TABLE Parameter Value Range Slot Physical Slot Number OmniAccess 512 value is always 4 Omni Switch Router range is 2 to 3 2 to 5 or 2 to 9 depending on chassis size Card Physical eCard Number OA 512 value is always 1 O S R values are always 1 to 2 Port Physical Port Number VSD digital range is 1 to 2 or 1 to 4 VSB digital Euro ISDN BRI range is 1 to 2 OA 512 or 1 to 4 OSR VSA analog range is 1 to 2 FXO 1 to 4 FXO FXO or FXS 1 to 6 FXS and FXO or 1 to 8 FXS FXS modules applies only to OA 512 Same for O S R except range is 1 to 16 based upon module installed See Chapter 2 VoIP Daughtercards for more information on port numbering for VoIP Channel Logical e Channel Number VSD T1 range is 1 to 24 VSD E1 range is 1 to 30 VSB Euro ISDN BRD is 1 to 2 VSA analog value is always 1 StartChannel Logical e Range of Channels EndChannel Channel to Channel e g 11 16 A channel number is assigned to every chan nel in the specified range in this c
303. interface type is set to T1 E1 E1 ISDN PRI or BRI Euro via the voice port interface type command The term dsx1AMI refers to a mode wherein no zero code suppression is present is used on the link because line encoding does not solve the problem directly In this application the higher layer must provide data which meets or exceeds the requirements such as inverting High Level Data Link Control HDLC data E1 links with or without a Cyclic Redundancy Check CRC use dsx1AMI line coding B8Zs line coding is supported when the voice daughtercard connection port type is T1 The term dsx1B8ZS refers to the use of a specified pattern of normal bits and bipolar violations which are used to replace a sequence of 8 zero bits HDB3 line coding is supported when the voice daughtercard connection port type is E1 ISDN PRI E1 or BRI Euro Page 5 44 VoIP Commands voice port facilities data link protocol Command Usage Specify T1 voice port facilities data link protocol Syntax Options voice port lt s ot port gt facilities data link protocol none ansi t1 403 at amp t 54016 t1 403 at amp t Definitions slot Specifies slot number of voice switching daughtercard installed in switching module e g 2 port Specifies physical port number on voice daughtercard e g 1 none Indicates device does not use the facilities data link ansi t1 403 Indicates device uses the dsx1ANSI T1 403 facilities data link
304. ique IP subnet mask and the default gateway addresses for the voice daughtercard Notes 4 A separate routing group just for the VoIP gateway s must also be created on the switch and Spanning Tree for that group must be turned OFF see the appropriate switch manual for further details on using groups and Spanning Tree The IP mask and default gateway addresses in the vsmboot asc file must match the IP subnet mask and the IP broadcast address used in the routing group for the VoIP gateway s Alcatel VoIP VSD VSB VSA modules cannot not be in a Virtual LAN VLAN with non voice ports i e data ports IP phone ports etc All voice traffic must route in and out of the VoIP VLAN e voice port interface type e g T1 E1 required only for digital voice daugh tercard Page 4 5 Setup and Installation 7 Page 4 6 AVNDS Dialing Scheme Settings Required The following configuration data obtained from the dialing scheme selected as per Step 4 will vary depending on the dialing scheme e voice destination ports channels to which VoIP calls are routed e voice phone group telephone numbers that callers may dial e voice numbering plan associated voice phone groups and destinations e multiple PSTN connections required only for sites using Public Switched Telephone Network Except when local channels are used all AVNDS commands function with the H 323 endpoints e g OmniPCX Cisco Routers Microso
305. is example are unique across the VoIP network Extensions off of PBX 1 ana 1000 Extensions off of PBX 2 2000 Z 2999 Extensions off of PBX 3 g 3000 Z 3999 D T1 2000 2999 J 1000 1999 H T1 Daughtercard Voice 1 a G IP 192 168 11 2 Port 1720 Voice Daughtercard 2 IP 192 168 12 2 Port 1720 3000 3999 Voice Daughtercard 3 IP 192 168 13 2 Port 1720 Example 2 Trunk Groups and Three Voice Daughtercards LEGEND for Diagram Components PBX 1 Configuration PBX 2 Configuration PBX 3 Configuration Expects to receive four digits on trunk D and then uses these digits to route calls to lines A Expects to receive four digits on trunk and then uses these digits to route calls to lines B Expects to receive four digits on trunk F and then uses these digits to route calls to lines C Routes calls starting with 1 to lines A Routes calls starting with 2 to lines B Routes calls starting with 3 to lines C Routes calls starting with 2 or 3 to trunk G and then the VoIP net work uses these digits to route calls to trunks E or F respectively Routes calls starting with 1 or 3 to trunk
306. it local extension 4600 Optional command syntax Specifies ending digits to delete from designated phone group as per format specified in voice phone group format string command e g four digit local extension 4800 voice phone group salem_engr1 delete numbers 4600 thru 4800 voice phone group salem_engr1 delete numbers 4600 4800 voice phone group calab_engr1 delete numbers 2500 thru 2750 voice phone group calab_engr1 delete numbers 2500 2750 Page 5 248 VoIP Commands voice numbering plan Command Usage Create numbering plan with specified name Syntax Options voice numbering plan lt NumberingPlanName gt Definitions NumberingPlanName Identifies the numbering plan by name e g salem plan1 maximum length of 40 charac ters The following characters are permitted in the numbering plan name a z A Z 0 9 space and A_ amp 1 lt gt C 1 Syntax Notes If the voice network card h 323 gatekeeper control command is ON then the voice switching daughtercard automatically gener ates an additional alias name when the activate voice number ing plan command is issued Numbering plan names cannot be named all because all is a reserved numbering plan name Numbering plans do not take effect unless they are activated via the activate numbering plan command Default None Command Example voice numbering plan salem plan1 voice numbering
307. ith 12 channels six simultaneous calls can be connected Calls between channels on the same VSD or VSB card use PCM Pulse Code Modulation instead of the H 323 protocol to process digital calls and require two DSP channels to make the calls Page 2 6 Voice Switching Daughtercard Digital VSD Front Panel Each port has three corresponding LED indicators with link status displays as shown below All VSD daughtercards have three LED dis plays per voice port as follows FAIL On when VSD fails or diagnostic test fails or when VSD image download fails Off when VSD hard ware is functional or when VSD image download is OK Reset Button Insert pin to reset VSD Not available this release VSD A B FAIL O O ER OO LINK O O ERR On when T1 or E1 VSD voice port port link error occurs in line This can be any T1 or E1 type of error e g out of frame loss of synchronization LINK On when T1 or E1 VSD voice port link to switch is connected Off when signal is lost and T1 or E1 VSD voice port link disconnected VSD Voice Switching Digital T1 or E1 Daughtercard Front Panels Page 2 7 Voice Switching Daughtercard Digital VSD Deadman Switch The two types of digital voice switching daughtercards VSDs and VSBs contain mechanical relay switches referred to as Deadman switches The Deadman switch is a relay switch that allows two telephony ports
308. k debounce 1000 Remarks In order to use this command the voice signaling protocol command must be set to the corre sponding protocol type of EXM Wink Start Immediate Start or Delay Start Signaling Page 5 81 VoIP Commands voice signaling em off hook debounce Command Usage Specify Ear amp Mouth signaling time for transition debounce to off hook Syntax Options voice signaling channel lt s ol port startChannel endChannel gt em off hook debounce lt value gt Definitions slot Specifies chassis slot number where VSM is installed e g 2 port Specifies physical port number on voice daughtercard e g 1 startChannel The first number in the range of voice channels e g 1 endChannel The last number in the range of voice channels e g 30 Syntax Note Be sure to separate the start and end range numbers with a hyphen e g 1 30 value Specifies the E amp M debounce delay interval transition to off hook dial tone state in milli seconds from 5 to 1 000 e g 50 Syntax Note Do not use commas when entering the E amp M off hook debounce transition value for example 1 000 will return a syntax error message Default The default value is 50 Command Examples voice signaling channel 2 1 1 12 em off hook debounce 50 voice signaling channel 2 2 13 24 em off hook debounce 5 voice signaling channel 2 3 1 30 em off hook debounce 1000 Remarks In order to use this c
309. king Phone con nected to VSA port off real a P ae fae P ha hook 2 Ports Single FXO module VSA 2FX0 For the FXO submod FXO ules only two voice ports are active 2 b o i 4 Ports Dual FXO module Inactive VSA 4FX0 FXO FXO 1 2 3 4 O OO O O 8 ante a S Inactive 6 Ports Mixed FXS and FX0 module VSA FXS FXO 1 2 3 4 5 6 O O OO O O O O 8 k 2s S Inactive VSA Front Panels Page 2 21 Voice Switching Daughtercard Analog VSA Pinouts The following illustration shows the pinouts for the analog voice switching daughtercard VSA 8 pin RJ 11 jacks used to connect the voice ports on the card to voice devices in the VoIP network that support analog connections e g telephone and fax machine VSA TelSet RJ 11 Specifications Pin Number Standard Signal Name VSAs and Digital Signal Processors DSPs DIMMs and Available Channels There are no DIMMs on the VSA only DSPs on the FXS or FXO grand daughtercards with a maximum of one channel per port For more information on the DSPs see Digital Signal Processors DSPs DIMMs and Available Channels on page 2 4 for more details VSAs and the Deadman Switch Although VSA cards do not contain a Deadman switch similar PSTN fallback call protection
310. lay Start Signaling and FXS FXO Loop and Ground Start commands will take effect Page 5 102 VoIP Commands voice signaling emd in digit ignore Command Usage Specify time to ignore incoming digits after E amp M delay start Syntax Options voice signaling channel lt s ol port stantChannel endChannel gt emd in digit ignore lt value gt Definitions slot Specifies chassis slot number where VSM is installed e g 2 port Specifies physical port number on voice daughtercard e g 1 startChannel The first number in the range of voice channels e g 1 endChannel The last number in the range of voice channels e g 30 Syntax Note Be sure to separate the start and end range numbers with a hyphen e g 1 30 value Specifies the period of time after which E amp M delay signal is completed before digits on incoming calls are accepted in milliseconds from 5 to 60 000 e g 2500 Syntax Note Do not use commas when entering the value for time to ignore incoming digits after E amp M delay start for example 5 000 will return a syntax error message Default The default value is 2500 milliseconds Command Examples voice signaling channel 2 1 1 12 emd in digit ignore 2500 voice signaling channel 2 2 13 24 emd in digit ignore 30000 voice signaling channel 2 3 1 30 emd in digit ignore 60000 Remarks The voice signaling protocol command must be set to the corresponding protocol type
311. le cp1 echo canceller refresh state on voice coding profile cp1 caller id off voice coding profile cp1 switchover off SSR SR SR SER a I SC I kkk a ae Voice Coding Profile cp2 voice coding profile cp2 voice coding profile cp2 codec type g 711 mulaw voice coding profile cp2 voice packet interval 20 voice coding profile cp2 voice activity detector on voice coding profile cp2 voice network delay buffer nominal delay 80 voice coding profile cp2 voice network delay buffer max delay 160 voice coding profile cp2 voice echo canceller on voice coding profile cp2 voice echo canceller non linear on voice coding profile cp2 voice echo canceller tail 16 voice coding profile cp2 voice network delay buffer mode adaptive voice coding profile cp2 voice dtmf relay on voice coding profile cp2 fax rate 14400 voice coding profile cp2 call progress tone detection on voice coding profile cp2 v 18 tone detection off voice coding profile cp2 single frequency tone detection on voice coding profile cp2 voice activity detection threshold mode adaptive voice coding profile cp2 voice echo canceller comfort noise mode static voice coding profile cp2 voice comfort noise level 40 voice coding profile cp2 echo canceller refresh configuration refresh voice coding profile cp2 echo canceller refresh state on voice coding pr
312. le cp4 voice dtmf relay on voice coding profile cp4 fax rate 14400 voice coding profile cp4 call progress tone detection on voice coding profile cp4 v 18 tone detection off voice coding profile cp4 single frequency tone detection on voice coding profile cp4 voice activity detection threshold mode adaptive voice coding profile cp4 voice echo canceller comfort noise mode static voice coding profile cp4 voice comfort noise level 40 voice coding profile cp4 echo canceller refresh configuration refresh voice coding profile cp4 echo canceller refresh state on voice coding profile cp4 caller id off Page 5 178 VoIP Commands SSR ESR SR SER SG A SE CG I SC SR ICG So kkk Voice Coding Profile cp5 voice coding profile cp5 voice coding profile cp5 codec type g 723 1 63 voice coding profile cp5 voice packet interval 60 voice coding profile cp5 voice activity detector on voice coding profile cp5 voice network delay buffer nominal delay 120 voice coding profile cp5 voice network delay buffer max delay 240 voice coding profile cp5 voice echo canceller on voice coding profile cp5 voice echo canceller non linear on voice coding profile cp5 voice echo canceller tail 16 voice coding profile cp5 voice network delay buffer mode adaptive voice coding profile cp5 voice dtmf relay on voice coding
313. lid3 caller id off voice coding profile cprofcallid4 caller id on voice coding profile cprofcallidS caller id off voice coding profile cprofcallid6 caller id on Page 5 215 VoIP Commands Voice Network The commands listed and described below are used to assign and configure the VoIP or voice network and the following related components H 323 gateway discovery operations and configuration Talking about network portion i e H 323 of a physical voice daughtercard this is not to be confused with the voice switching daughtercard commands which deal with general daugh tercard features dialing timers gateway mode and voice ports Actually Network settings for specified voice daughtercard H 323 Gateway Discovery gatekeeper control on off gatekeeper discovery mode manual off Auto discovery not available this release gatekeeper IP address for gatekeeper discovery manual mode only H 323 Gateway Configuration calls allowed or disallowed without gatekeeper no gateway endpoint regis true false no of registration attempts allowed before gateway endpoint registration failure gateway endpoint registration type Gif gatekeeper used associate or disassociate phone groups with gatekeeper if gatekeeper used H 323 Gateway Operations H 323 display name for voice switching daughtercard gateway RTP RTCP port mode for voice switching daughtercard gateway dynamic sequential starting RTP
314. lliseconds from 0 to 32767 e g 327 Syntax Note Do not use commas when entering the echo canceller non linear sensitivity value for example 20 000 will return a syntax error message Default The default value is 327 milliseconds Command Example voice signaling channel 2 1 1 12 echo canceller non linear sensitivity 327 voice signaling channel 2 2 13 24 echo canceller non linear sensitivity 20000 voice signaling channel 2 3 1 30 echo canceller non linear sensitivity 65535 Remarks Echo cancellers handle signal transmission echoes by isolating and filtering signals Non linear sensitivity echo cancellers are used to adjust the output and input amplitudes of a signal and function as comfort noise generators Page 5 157 VoIP Commands voice signaling acoustic echo canceller mode Command Usage Set acoustic echo canceller processor mode on off Syntax Options voice signaling channel lt s ol pori startChannel endChannel gt acoustic echo canceller mode on off Definitions slot Specifies chassis slot number where VSM is installed e g 2 port Specifies physical port number on voice daughtercard e g 1 startChannel The first number in the range of voice channels e g 1 endChannel The last number in the range of voice channels e g 30 Syntax Note Be sure to separate the start and end range numbers with a hyphen e g 1 30 on Turns ON acoustic echo cancelle
315. llow calls without gatekeeper max tries 5 221 voice network h 323 endpoint registration type 2 00008 5 222 voice network h 323 gatekeeper associate 0 0 ee 5 223 voice network h 323 display name 00 000 ee 5 224 voice network h 323 rtp port mode 0 0 0 0 ce ee 5 225 voice network h 323 rtp port base uaaa RAN eR eee ane a 5 226 Network Dialing Scheme esri ech ee end eee e A Oe Soe E a Ka a A 5 228 voice destination h 323 endpoint 0 0 0 0 0 0000 ee 5 230 voice destination local channel 2 a4 sin 64 eek eh ee Bw Rope ee GENS 5 231 VOICS no destination sre ard Ese hee Cote 6 ES oad eh ed EONS RE ROR 5 232 View voice destination co se Sh He ee ea EEE ERE SE RO RTS 5 233 VOICE phone STOUPs 4 34 165 EAE PY eb PRA SOAS ERO a a a a 5 235 voice no phone group Wigs Mrs clits tel te tah fe dol Nota SEH ot SC ne cate ok a kk a 5 236 VIEW VOICE phone groupn ecien Bek ack Meee Ae OR eR ie ines Baise bale eases 5 237 voice phone group site prefix 2 0 0 eee 5 238 voice phone group site prefix digits 0 2 2 eee 5 239 VOUS phone group typ se coin hie ah eie acta de da ia a d e AEA OE 5 240 voice phone group format sasaaa aaaea ee 5 243 voice phone group strip digit length 0 0 00 a 5 244 voice phone group forwarding prefix 0 000 000 ee 5 245 voice phone group forwarding prefix digits 0 0 0 000 0 5 246 voice phone group add numbers
316. local timing Command Examples voice port 2 1 transmit clock source local timing voice port 2 2 transmit clock source loop timing Page 5 47 VoIP Commands voice port loop back mode Command Usage Specify T1 voice port loop back mode configuration Syntax Options voice port lt s ot port gt loop back mode none payload line inward Definitions slot Specifies slot number of voice switching daughtercard installed in switching module e g 2 port Specifies physical port number on voice daughtercard e g 1 none Indicates T1 interface sends looped or normal data for loopback i e not in the loopback state a device incapable of performing a loopback on the interface always returns none as its value Also known as Dsx1NoLoop payload Indicates T1 interface sends request for a payload loopback i e received signal at this interface is looped through the device typically the received signal is looped back for retransmission after it has passed through the device s framing function Also known as Dsx1PayloadLoop line Indicates T1 interface sends request for a line loopback e received signal at this inter face does not go through the device minimum penetration but is looped back out Also known as Dsx1LineLoop inward Indicates undefined T1 interface loopback request Also known as Dsx1OtherLoop Default The default setting is payload Command Examples voice port
317. lows Features Supported Primary CLI Commands Used H 323 gateway to voice daughtercard A voice destination local channel page 5 231 Local channel two hunt groups 24 channels per group T1 F voice numbering plan hunt method page 5 255 voice numbering plan destination member page 5 257 voice numbering plan phone group member page 5 258 Site prefix no site prefix I voice phone group site prefix page 5 238 Site prefix single or multiple digits Q voice phone group site prefix page 5 238 voice phone group site prefix digits page 5 239 Voice phone group type NANP exten sions N voice phone group type page 5 240 voice phone group format page 5 243 voice phone group add numbers page 5 247 Voice phone group type PSTN NANP P voice phone group type page 5 240 voice phone group format page 5 243 voice phone group add numbers page 5 247 Strip digit length 4 U voice phone group strip digit length page 5 244 Strip digit length 7 V voice phone group strip digit length page 5 244 Digital Interface type T1 W voice port interface type page 5 34 Page 3 44 VoIP Networks with PSTN Example 16 VoIP Networks with PSTN Example 16 FAX over IP Network This dialing scheme is used to create a homogeneous Fax Over IP network i e a network wherein no voice traffic per se is processed by the
318. ls e g 1 endChannel The last number in the range of voice channels e g 30 Syntax Note Be sure to separate the start and end range numbers with a hyphen e g 1 30 gain_value Specifies the numerical gain value Values may range from 14 through 14 e g 13 2 0 4 13 etc A negative gain value lowers the gain and a positive gain value increases the gain Default The default gain value is 0 Command Examples voice signaling channel 2 1 1 12 receive gain 0 voice signaling channel 2 3 1 30 receive gain 14 Remarks Transmit TX and receive RX gain is normally used when a device has volume problems Gain adjusts increases or decreases the signal level Transmit and receive signal gains occur per call on each end of the call Signal gains are calculated per channel The signal gains are applied at the channel level Each channel on a voice switching daughtercard can have a different gain applied Total gain is calculated between TX RX points e g if the receiving VSD is set to a gain of 3 and the transmitting VSD is set to a gain of 1 the gain would be 2 The gain inserted at the receiver comes from the voice switching daughtercard which inter prets receive gain as PCM interface to packet H 323 network This means that the gain is applied to the PCM packet when it is received by the card and after the packet has been converted to H 323 Analog voice switching daughtercards VSAs convert signals to from PC
319. lue is 20 milliseconds Command Examples voice signaling channel 2 1 1 12 fxs gs off hook debounce 20 voice signaling channel 2 2 13 24 fxs gs off hook debounce 500 Remarks The voice signaling protocol command must be set to the corresponding protocol type before any commands for E amp M Wink Start Immediate Start and Delay Start Signaling and FXS FXO Loop and Ground Start commands will take effect Page 5 134 VoIP Commands voice signaling fxs gs ring ground debounce Command Usage Specify Foreign Exchange Station Ground Start FXS GS debounce interval for ring ground detector Syntax Options voice signaling channel lt s ol porl starntChannel endChannel gt fxs gs ring ground debounce lt value gt Definitions slot Specifies chassis slot number where VSM is installed e g 2 port Specifies physical port number on voice daughtercard e g 1 startChannel The first number in the range of voice channels e g 1 endChannel The last number in the range of voice channels e g 30 Syntax Note Be sure to separate the start and end range numbers with a hyphen e g 1 30 value Specifies how long to use the debounce delay interval for debouncing the ring ground detector in milliseconds from 0 to 1 000 e g 20 Syntax Note Do not use commas when entering the fxs gs debounce interval value for ring ground detection for example 1 000 will return a syntax error message
320. m_engr1 site prefix off voice phone group salem_engr2 site prefix on Remarks Site prefix is similar to a trunk group Page 5 238 VoIP Commands voice phone group site prefix digits Command Usage Specify unique phone group site prefix digits for routing VoIP calls Syntax Options voice phone group lt PhoneGroupName gt site prefix digits lt string gt Definitions PhoneGroupName Identifies the phone group by name e g salem_engr1 maximum length of characters 60 The following characters are permitted in the phone group name a z A Z 0 9 space and A_ amp I1 lt gt OIL string Identifies the phone group prefix string e g 81 maximum length of 23 characters The following characters are permitted in the phone group prefix string 0 9 and at least one character must be used Syntax Notes If a terminating digit has been configured for the voice switch ing daughtercard via the voice daughter card termination digit command the specified terminating digit cannot be used as a site prefix digit To use this command the voice phone group site prefix must be turned ON To use this command the associated voice numbering plan must first be activated via the voice numbering plan activate command Default None Command Example voice phone group salem_engr1 site prefix digits voice phone group salem_engr2 site prefix digits 81
321. make a single 48 channel trunk Hunt groups are called voice numbering plans in the AVNDS Voice numbering plans relate phone groups and destinations In this example the voice daughtercards are using the top down hunt method to determine where new calls will be routed Extensions off of PBX 1 pooo rj H Voice Daughtercard 1 g 1000 1999 Extensions off of PBX 2 a IP 192 168 11 2 Port 1720 Hunt Group Hunt Group sa 2000 at 2000 to 2999 gt Daugh al aughtercard M 2 EE 2999 IP 192 168 12 2 Port 1720 Example 3 One Hunt Group 48 Channels Across Two Tis LEGEND for Diagram Components PBX 1 Configuration PBX 2 Configuration Expects to receive four digits on trunks Q or GK and then uses these digits to route calls to lines A Expects to receive four digits on trunks L or M then uses these digits to route calls to lines B Routes calls starting with 1 to lines A Routes calls starting with 2 to lines B Routes calls starting with 2 to trunks GQ or CS and then the VoIP network uses these digits to route calls to trunks L or M according to the hunt method used Routes calls starting with 1 to trunks CL or M and then the VoIP network uses these digits to route calls to trunks YQ o
322. mand At least one phone group must be associated before activating the associated numbering plan Multiple phone groups can be associated with a single number ing plan Default None Command Example voice numbering plan salem plan1 associate phone group member calab_engr1 voice numbering plan salem plan2 disassociate phone group member calab_engr2 voice numbering plan calab plan1 associate phone group member salem_engr1 voice numbering plan calab plan2 disassociate phone group member salem_engr2 Page 5 258 VoIP Commands System Wide VoIP Commands The commands listed and described below are used to display system wide VoIP command settings and statistics as follows various VSD level parameters and configured voice items including telephony telephony channel voice play out DSP receive and transmit errors modem fax and ISDN statistics View Voice Switching Daughtercard Parameters View Voice Switching Daughtercard Port Parameters View Voice Switching Daughtercard Channel Parameters View Voice Switching Daughtercard Network Parameters Statistics Collection on off View Statistics telephony statistics channel statistics voice play out statistics DSP receive and transmit statistics error statistics modem statistics fax statistics ISDN level 2 statistics Reset Statistics telephony statistics channel statistics voice play out statistics DSP receive and transmit statistics error statis
323. mand Usage Specify Foreign Exchange Office Ground Start FXS GS debounce for incoming ring signal Syntax Options voice signaling channel lt s ol port stantChannel endChannel gt fxo gs ringing debounce lt value gt Definitions slot port startChannel endChannel value Default Command Examples voice signaling channel 2 1 1 12 fxo gs ringing debounce 50 voice signaling channel 2 2 13 24 fxo gs ringing debounce 5 voice signaling channel 2 3 1 30 fxo gs ringing debounce 1000 Specifies chassis slot number where VSM is installed e g 2 Specifies physical port number on voice daughtercard e g 1 The first number in the range of voice channels e g 1 The last number in the range of voice channels e g 30 Syntax Note Be sure to separate the start and end range numbers with a hyphen e g 1 30 Specifies the debounce delay interval for incoming ring signal in milliseconds from 1 to 1 000 e g 50 Syntax Note Do not use commas when entering the fxs gs debounce interval value for incoming ring signal for example 1 000 will return a syntax error message The default value is 50 milliseconds Remarks The voice signaling protocol command must be set to the corresponding protocol type before any commands for E amp M Wink Start Immediate Start and Delay Start Signaling and FXS FXO Loop and Ground Start commands will take effect Page 5 140 VoIP Comm
324. mands used with this dialing scheme are as follows Features Supported Primary CLI Commands Used H 323 gateway to voice daughtercard A voice destination local channel page 5 231 Local channel one hunt group 60 channels across two Els CH voice numbering plan hunt method page 5 255 voice numbering plan destination member page 5 257 voice numbering plan phone group member page 5 258 Site prefix no site prefix voice phone group site prefix page 5 238 Voice phone group type four digit local extensions L Strip digit length no strip digits GR voice phone group type page 5 240 voice phone group format page 5 243 voice phone group add numbers page 5 247 voice phone group strip digit length page 5 244 Digital Interface type E1 ISDN PRI Euro PRD Y voice port interface type page 5 34 voice signaling companding page 5 77 Page 3 14 VoIP Networks without PSTN Example 5 VoIP Networks without PSTN Example 5 One Hunt Group 96 Channels Across Four Tis In this dialing scheme one hunt group spans four T1 lines using two voice switching daugh tercards spanning two T1 lines each In this example the cards are installed in a single VSX motherboard in the same Omni Switch Router to provide four T1 lines connected to a PBX Hunt groups are called voice numbering plans in the AVNDS Voice numbering plans relate phone groups and
325. me e g view voice numbering plan PBX_1 and then press lt Enter gt Page 5 251 VoIP Commands A screen similar to the following displays Page 5 252 kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Viewing Numbering Plan kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk voice numbering plan to PBX_1 Weide numbering plan to PBX_2 voice numbering plan to PBX_1 hunt method round robin v ite numbering plan to PBX_1 hunt method round robin voice numbering plan to PBX_1 associate destination member to VSD_1 voice numbering plan to PBX_2 associate destination member to VSD_2 voice numbering plan to PBX_1 associate phone group member Ext of PBX_1 voices numbering plan to PBX_2 associate phone group member Ext of PBX_2 voice numbering plan to PBX_1 description trunk to route calls from VSD1 to PBX1 voice numbering plan to PBX_2 description trunk to route calls from VSD2 to PBX2 voice numbering plan to PBX_1 VoIP Commands voice numbering plan activate Command Usage Activate all voice numbering plans at once or by specified name Syntax Options voice numbering plan all NumberingPlanName activate Definitions all Activates all numbering plans at once NumberingPlanName_ Identifies the numbering plan by name e g salem plan1 maximum length of 40 charac ters The following characters are permitted in the numbering plan name a z A Z 0 9 sp
326. minal delay buffer coding profile maximum delay buffer Voice Activity Detector VAD coding profile voice activity detector on off coding profile VAD threshold mode adaptive relative coding profile VAD audio threshold level adaptive relative adaptive if threshold mode relative Page 5 172 VoIP Commands Tone Detection coding profile voice DTMF relay on off coding profile fax modem switchover enable disable coding profile call progress tone detection on off coding profile V 18 Annex A call progress tone detection on off coding profile single frequency tone detection on off Echo Canceller coding profile voice echo canceller on off coding profile voice echo canceller non linear processor mode on off coding profile voice echo canceller comfort noise mode static mode coding profile voice echo canceller noise level dBm coding profile voice echo canceller tail delay length coding profile voice echo canceller refresh configuration state refresh freeze coding profile voice echo canceller coefficient refresh state on off Facsimile Modem coding profile maximum allowed fax modem data rate coding profile fax modem transmit level gain coding profile fax modem carrier detect threshold coding profile inactivity detection time to automatically tear down fax Facsimile Modem T 38 Mode coding profile T 38 high speed fax rate coding profile T 38 low speed packet redundancy coding profile T 38 high spe
327. multipoint Definitions slot Specifies slot number of voice switching daughtercard installed in switching module e g 2 port Specifies physical port number on voice daughtercard e g 1 point to point Sets physical connection wherein a single network termination point supports a single ter minal equipment TE device Not available this release point to multipoint Sets physical connection wherein a single network termination point supports multipoint terminal equipment TE devices Syntax Notes To use this command the port connection type must be set to bri euro via the voice port interface type command If the voice daughtercard connection port type is set to bri euro this command will automatically be generated with the default value of point to point To use this command the isdn connection protocol must be set to net via the voice port isdn protocol command Default The default setting is point to multipoint Command Examples voice port 2 1 bri line type point to multipoint voice port 2 2 bri line type point to multipoint Remarks The voice port isdn connection switch type command is used to configure the type of switch connection for the ISDN ports at the voice daughtercard level Specification of the E1 ISDN protocol is optional unless E1 ISDN PRI or BRI Euro is used Page 5 54 VoIP Commands voice channel isdn d channel Command Usage Specify control data or D channels for E1 I
328. n Command Usage Specify maximum time for voice daughtercard dialing timers to wait between tones digits being dialed Syntax Options voice daughter card lt s ot card_number gt inter digit wait duration lt timer_value gt Definitions slot Specifies slot number of switching module installed in chassis e g 2 card_number Specifies the voice daughtercard position number e g 1 timer_value Specifies maximum time for dialing timers to wait between digits being dialed in millisec onds from 1 to 4 294 967 295 ms e g 5000 100 ms 1 10 of a second 1 000 ms 1 second 10 000 ms 10 seconds 60 000 ms 1 minute 300 000 5 minutes etc Refer to conversion table see voice daughter card first digit wait duration command to quickly determine the proper setting Syntax Note Do not use commas when entering a dialing timer value for example 5 000 5 seconds will return a syntax error message Default The default timer_value is 5000 Command Examples voice daughter card 2 1 inter digit wait duration 5000 voice daughter card 2 2 inter digit wait duration 60000 Remarks When this timer expires unless a termination digit is dialed it assumes the caller is finished dialing digits The numbering plan in use then attempts a match Page 5 27 VoIP Commands voice daughter card dial time wait duration Command Usage Specify maximum time for dialing timers to
329. n voice daughtercard e g 1 Default None Command Example view voice port 2 1 view voice port 2 2 view voice port 2 3 view voice port 2 4 Screen Output To view voice daughtercard port parameters type view voice port followed by valid slot and daughtercard port numbers e g view voice port 4 1 and then press lt Enter gt A screen similar to the following displays kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Viewing Port kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk voice port 4 1 interface type T1 Page 5 261 VoIP Commands view voice channel Command Usage Display voice switching daughtercard parameters at the channel level Syntax Options view voice channel lt s ol porl channel gt Definitions slot Specifies chassis slot number where VSM is installed e g 2 port Specifies physical port number on voice daughtercard e g 1 channel Specifies port channel number in which to view voice channel parameters e g 25 Default None Command Examples view voice channel 2 1 1 view voice channel 2 1 15 view voice channel 2 1 17 view voice channel 2 1 30 view voice channel 2 1 60 view voice channel 2 2 1 view voice channel 2 2 15 view voice channel 2 2 17 view voice channel 2 2 30 Screen Output To view voice daughtercard parameters type view voice channel followed by valid slot daugh tercard port and channel number s e g view voice channel 4
330. naling channel 2 1 1 12 emd out delay duration maximum 8000 voice signaling channel 2 2 13 24 emd out delay duration max 3000 voice signaling channel 2 3 1 30 emd out delay duration max 60000 Remarks The voice signaling protocol command must be set to the corresponding protocol type before any commands for E amp M Wink Start Immediate Start and Delay Start Signaling and FXS FXO Loop and Ground Start commands will take effect Page 5 106 VoIP Commands voice signaling emd out delay check Command Usage Specify maximum time to wait for E amp M delay start detection Syntax Options voice signaling channel lt s ol pori startChannel endChannel gt emd out delay check lt value gt Definitions slot Specifies chassis slot number where VSM is installed e g 2 port Specifies physical port number on voice daughtercard e g 1 startChannel The first number in the range of voice channels e g 1 endChannel The last number in the range of voice channels e g 30 Syntax Note Be sure to separate the start and end range numbers with a hyphen e g 1 30 value Specifies the period of time after going off hook on the E lead before checking the M lead for the delay signal response in milliseconds from 5 to 60 000 e g 170 If the response is not detected in the interim the call setup process resumes immediately Syntax Note Do not use commas when entering the value for the maxim
331. name a z A Z 0 9 space and Ss 2 HA_ amp Il lt gt CO K on Turns ON voice DTMF for specified coding profile When using G 711 codec type DIMF relay must be turned ON off Turns OFF voice DTMF for specified coding profile When using G 723 1 and G 729a codecs DTMF relay must be turned OFF Syntax Notes This command is only valid with RTP Realtime Transport Proto col encapsulation Default The default setting is on Command Example voice coding profile salemprof1 voice dtmf relay on voice coding profile calabprof2 voice dtmf relay off Remarks DTMF tones are detected during voice processing and separately packetized for transmission Page 5 192 VoIP Commands voice coding profile switchover Command Usage Set coding profile fax modem switchover enable disable Syntax Options voice coding profile lt codingProfName gt switchover on off Definitions codingProfName Identifies coding profile by name e g salemprof1 maximum length of 40 characters The following characters are permitted in the coding profile name a z A Z 0 9 space and Ss 2 HA_ amp Il lt gt OL on Turns ON fax modem switchover for specified coding profile off Turns OFF fax modem switchover for specified coding profile Syntax Notes If the coding type is set to either PCM Mu Law or PCM A Law via the voice coding profile codec type command this param
332. name a z A Z 0 9 space and Ss 2 HA_ amp I lt gt CQO IKI local Specifies local method of handling data over the network for specified coding profile network Turns network method of handling data over the network for specified coding profile Default The default setting is network Command Example voice coding profile salemprof1 fax t 38 training check field method local voice coding profile calabprof2 fax t 38 training check field method network Remarks The local method method 1 requires that the training check field TCF training signal be generated and checked locally by the gateway and not be forwarded over the network With the network method method 2 TCF data is sent over the network Both methods corre spond to data management methods 1 and 2 in the T 38 UDP fax protocol specification Page 5 211 VoIP Commands voice coding profile silence detect time Command Usage Specify voice fax coding profile silence detection time Syntax Options voice coding profile lt codingProfName gt no silence detect time lt value gt Definitions codingProfName Identifies coding profile by name e g salemprof1 maximum length of 40 characters The following characters are permitted in the coding profile name a z A Z 0 9 space and t HA_ amp Il lt gt CQO IKI value Specifies voice fax coding profile silence detection time in milliseconds from 5 t
333. name to add to phone group list Syntax Options voice phone group lt PhoneGroupName gt Definitions PhoneGroupName Identifies the phone group by name e g salem_engr1 maximum length of characters 60 The following characters are permitted in phone group name a z A Z 0 9 space and Ss HA_ amp I lt gt CQO th Default None Command Example voice phone group salem_engr1 voice phone group calab_engr2 Page 5 235 VoIP Commands voice no phone group Command Usage Delete phone group with specified name from phone group list Syntax Options voice no phone group lt PhoneGroupName gt Definitions PhoneGroupName Identifies the phone group by name e g salem_engr1 maximum length of characters 60 The following characters are permitted in phone group name a z A Z 0 9 space and Ss HA_ amp I lt gt QO Ith Default None Command Example voice no phone group salem_engr1 voice no phone group calab_engr2 Page 5 236 VoIP Commands view voice phone group Command Usage Display phone group with specified name in phone group list Syntax Options view voice phone group lt PhoneGroupName gt Definitions PhoneGroupName Identifies the phone group by name e g salem_engr1 maximum length of characters 60 The following characters are permitted in phone group name a z A Z 0 9 spa
334. nce for loop current detector FXO LS debounce for battery reversal detector Foreign Exchange Station FXS Ground Start GS Signaling FXS GS time to wait before declaring off hook FXS GS debounce interval for on hook transition minimum FXS GS time to wait before declaring on hook by originator minimum FXS GS time to wait before declaring on hook by answerer FXS GS time to wait after ring ground before grounding tip maximum FXS GS time to wait for loop to close after grounding tip minimum FXS GS start time between open loop and idle state FXS GS to generate outbound caller ID FSX GS debounce interval for off hook FXS GS debounce interval for ring ground detector Page 5 64 VoIP Commands Foreign Exchange Station FXO Ground Start GS Signaling FXO GS debounce interval for loop open detection maximum FXO GS time between ring ground and tip ground FXO GS debounce interval for tip ground detector FXO GS debounce for incoming ring signal FXO GS time between consecutive ring cycles FXO GS time between consecutive ring pulses FXO GS to detect inbound caller ID on off FXO GS number of rings allowed before answering FXO GS debounce interval for loop current detector FXO GS debounce interval for battery reversal detector Outbound Caller ID outbound caller ID name private unavailable to transmit outbound caller ID number published non published to transmit Tones outbound tone table ringing silence call progress
335. ndChannel The last number in the range of voice channels e g 30 Syntax Note Be sure to separate the start and end range numbers with a hyphen e g 1 30 value Specifies the signal duration threshold for V 18 tone detection in dBm0 decibels below 0 milliwatts for output with no input power from 50 to 15 e g 50 Default The default value is 40 dBm0 Command Examples voice signaling channel 2 1 1 12 v 18 tone detection threshold level 40 voice signaling channel 2 2 13 24 v 18 tone detection threshold level 50 Remarks V 18 threshold commands are used to specify minimum detectable signal values and are especially geared toward improving telecommunications for the hearing or speech impaired for example various thresholds are available to control duration hang time and strength evel or even incremental fractional signaling Page 5 153 VoIP Commands voice signaling v 18 tone detection threshold fraction Command Usage Set V 18 Annex A signal strength threshold fraction for tone detection Syntax Options voice signaling channel lt s ol port stantChannel endChannel gt v 18 tone detection threshold fraction lt value gt Definitions slot Specifies chassis slot number where VSM is installed e g 2 port Specifies physical port number on voice daughtercard e g 1 startChannel The first number in the range of voice channels e g 1 endChannel The last number
336. nds in Chapter 5 VoIP Commands VSB The other type of digital voice switching daughtercard is normally referred to as a VSB since it provides Euro BRI ISDN E1 ETSD protocol or interface port connections for VoIP networks in Europe It differs mainly in that it has four ports each with two B bearer channels and one D data channel B channels carry voice and data content whereas D channels are dedicated to carry control signals or call processing data for the B channels Each B channel contains one DSO voice channel The VSB card does not support the following protocols T1 ISDN PRI or T1 QSIG T1 or E1 QSIG E1 PRI or T1 BRI See Voice Switching Daughtercard Euro BRI ISDN on page 2 13 for more details VSA The analog voice switching daughtercard VSA can contain an even number of analog ports from two to 16 depending on whether the card provides Foreign Exchange Station FXS e g telephone set TelSet or Foreign Exchange Office FXO e g Central Office CO port interface connections in an OmniAccess 512 or Omni Switch Router Each analog FXS port allows the connection of one off the shelf TelSet or some other voice device e g analog fax machine analog phone answering machine whereas each analog FXO port allows the connection of an FXO cable to a wall outlet or CO See Voice Switching Daughtercard Analog on page 2 19 for details Note 4 When used separately the terms E1 and ETSI both entail European PR
337. nel 2 1 1 12 out wait 0 voice signaling channel 2 2 13 24 out wait 400 voice signaling channel 2 3 1 30 out wait 20000 Page 5 69 VoIP Commands voice signaling out tone digit duration Command Usage Specify duration for each single tone digit dialed out Syntax Options voice signaling channel lt s ol port startChannel endChannel gt out tone digit duration lt value gt Definitions slot port startChannel endChannel value Default Command Examples voice signaling channel 2 1 1 12 out tone digit duration 0 voice signaling channel 2 2 13 24 out tone digit duration 200 voice signaling channel 2 3 1 30 out tone digit duration 2000 Specifies slot number of voice daughtercard installed in switching module e g 2 Specifies physical port number on voice daughtercard e g 1 The first number in the range of voice channels e g 1 The last number in the range of voice channels e g 30 Syntax Note Be sure to separate the start and end range numbers with a hyphen e g 1 30 When tone dialing is used specifies in milliseconds from 0 ms to 2000 the duration of each tone e g 2000 Syntax Note Do not use commas when entering the duration of a tone for example 2 000 will return a syntax error message The default value is 200 Page 5 70 VoIP Commands voice signaling out tone interdigit duration Command Usage Spec
338. nes B and all 555 1212 calls to lines CE Routes calls starting with 555 121x to trunk G and then the VoIP network uses these digits to route calls to the Cisco 3640 router via ethernet WAN Z Routes calls starting with 1 to voice daughtercard 1 and then the VoIP network uses these digits to route calls to trunk D Page 3 53 VoIP Networks with Interoperability Example 20 Remarks Supported VoIP features and main CLI commands used with this dialing scheme are as follows Features Supported H 323 gateway to voice daughtercard A Primary CLI Commands Used voice destination local channel page 5 231 H 323 gateway to H 323 device C Local channel two hunt groups 24 channels per group T1 F voice destination h 323 endpoint page 5 230 voice numbering plan hunt method page 5 255 voice numbering plan destination member page 5 257 voice numbering plan phone group member page 5 258 Site prefix no site prefix voice phone group site prefix page 5 238 Voice phone group type four digit local extensions L voice phone group type page 5 240 voice phone group format page 5 243 voice phone group add numbers page 5 247 Strip digit length no strip digits CR voice phone group strip digit length page 5 244 Strip digit length 4 U voice phone group strip digit length page 5 244 Digital Interface type T
339. net mask defined for the VSM in the vsmboot asc file The VSM MAC address should be statically added to the VSM port to avoid 5 to 6 seconds of silence at the start of a call when not used with a gatekeeper Optionally the VSM port can be set to optimized mode and only the first call placed will have the period of silence Page 4 3 Setup and Installation General Installation Procedures The Om se instructions apply to all voice daughtercards being installed in either the niAccess 512 and Omni Switch Router unless otherwise specified but are geared toward setting up an OA 512 voice network using a T1 VSD card as an example configuration At leas t two communicating devices e g two VoIP switches or a VoIP switch and an OmniPCX 4400 must be configured to provide VoIP Components required to implement VoIP in the switch as described above must be set up and configured as follows 1 2 Page 4 4 Start HyperTerminal or some other terminal emulation program on a workstation connected to the switch via the console port Apply power to switch and watch for switch IP address to be displayed on HyperTermi nal When a message similar to the following appears write down the displayed IP address as it will be required for downloading switch files in the next step Configuring default VLAN hostname no name at addr 127 0 0 0 Using TELNET or FTP download all required VoIP files to the switch flash as per the com
340. network This would be similar to current dialing plans requiring callers to dial 9 before an office call can be placed 9 is the prefix most often used by PBXs to access the PSTN VoIP calls initiated from standard telephone handsets after a preset number of digits are dialed for example can be immediately transmitted using IP data networks whereby digital or analog signals meant to set up connections for carrying information are intercepted by Alcatel s H 323 VoIP gateways in the network These gateways translate the phone numbers into IP addresses convert the information to digital packet form and then deliver the calls over the network and the PSTN as shown below A VoIP Call Scenario Once a VoIP network is set up a typical VoIP call scenario might go something like this Local Telephone Number Remote Telephone Number l P VPN gt St ee e Call setup begins l l Source VoIP H 323 Gateway VoIP H 323 Gateway AO Destination IP Address S SS Je tooo L IP Address l PBX 2 Dial Tone Dial Destination Number l VoIP Call Scenario Step 1 Call Setup Page 1 4 VoIP Telephone Calls Local Telephone Number Pe ian Remote Telephone Number VPN St iad call e Session setup with remote gateway I I Dialed digits translated to
341. networks is achieved through the use of H 323 call controls and Alcatel VoIP Network Dialing Schemes AVNDS as described H 323 Network Call Control H 323 network call controls are responsible for the procedures and protocols necessary to establish tear down VoIP calls across the IP network The VoIP gateway implements the H 323 network call control standards which include the following e The H 225 Q 931 protocol that performs call establishment and tear down by estab lishing a reliable call signaling channel e The H 245 protocol that establishes a reliable H 245 in band channel for communica tions between all endpoints or terminals i e gateways for capability exchange and other messages e The registration admission and status RAS protocol that creates a RAS channel to carry RAS messages between an endpoint and a gatekeeper e The H 323 IP network call control standards that support multimedia communications over local area networks The H 323 network call controls and capability provided by the H 323 call control functions includes the following e H 323 gateway VoIP Switch e H 323 gatekeeper e g RADVision Server Discovery Configuration and Operation e H 323 call capabilities Coding Profiles or Codecs Voice Network Delay Buffers The voice network configuration options include general network information H 323 H 225 and H 245 configuration settings gateway gatekeeper and registration parameters and Real T
342. nformation on ISDN terminators see VSB Jumpers on page 2 16 and also Chapter 3 Network Dialing Schemes The NT LT TE toggle switch is physically similar to the VSD Cross Over toggle switch on the VSB but functionally different as it is used to select either a network terminator or terminal equipment as an endpoint For a description of the Cross Over toggle switch on the digital voice switching daughtercards see VSD Cross Over Toggle Switch on page 2 9 and Cabling on page 2 10 NT LT means that each NT port emulates the network side or line terminator point of the ISDN connections to the ISDN PSTN network e g connections to PBX Key Set BRI TelSet Group 4 SDN facsimile machine TE means that each TE port emulates the terminal side of the ISDN connections to the ISDN network e g PBX Key Set CO Central Office switch and ISDN telephone switch VSB Pinouts The Euro BRI VoIP daughtercard VSB uses the 8 pin RJ 45 jacks in the figures and tables on the following page to connect the voice ports on the card to voice devices in the VoIP network that support digital connections e g PBX Key Set BRI TelSets Group 4 ISDN facsimile machine CO Central Office switch and ISDN telephone switch For more details on the VSB pinouts see VSD Pinouts on page 2 11 Page 2 13 Voice Switching Daughtercard Euro BRI ISDN VSB Configured as TE RJ 45 Specifications Pin Number Standard Signal
343. ng channel 2 1 1 12 em guard out 400 voice signaling channel 2 2 13 24 em guard out 20000 voice signaling channel 2 3 1 30 em guard out 60000 Remarks In order to use this command the voice signaling protocol command must be set to the corre sponding protocol type of E amp M Wink Start Immediate Start or Delay Start Signaling Page 5 88 VoIP Commands voice signaling em dial tone Command Usage Set Ear amp Mouth signaling dial tone generation on incoming calls on off Syntax Options voice signaling channel lt s ol port startChannel endChannel gt em dial tone on off Definitions slot Specifies chassis slot number where VSM is installed e g 2 port Specifies physical port number on voice daughtercard e g 1 startChannel The first number in the range of voice channels e g 1 endChannel The last number in the range of voice channels e g 30 Syntax Note Be sure to separate the start and end range numbers with a hyphen e g 1 30 on Turns ON E amp M dial tone generation for incoming calls off Turns OFF E amp M dial tone generation for incoming calls Default The default setting is none Command Examples voice signaling channel 2 1 1 12 em dial tone on voice signaling channel 2 2 13 24 em dial tone off voice signaling channel 2 3 1 30 em dial tone on Remarks In order to use this command the voice signaling protocol command must be set to the corre s
344. ng on hook by the call answerer to the call originator Syntax Options voice signaling channel lt s ol pori startChannel endChannel gt fxs gs answer clear detect lt value gt Definitions slot Specifies chassis slot number where VSM is installed e g 2 port Specifies physical port number on voice daughtercard e g 1 startChannel The first number in the range of voice channels e g 1 endChannel The last number in the range of voice channels e g 30 Syntax Note Be sure to separate the start and end range numbers with a hyphen e g 1 30 value Specifies the minimum time to wait if answering party hangs up before on hook condition declared in milliseconds from 1 to 60 000 e g 300 Syntax Note Do not use commas when entering the fxs gs answering party clear detect value for example 1 000 will return a syntax error message Default The default value is 100 milliseconds Command Examples voice signaling channel 2 1 1 12 fxs gs answer clear detect 100 voice signaling channel 2 2 13 24 fxs gs answer clear detect 30000 voice signaling channel 2 3 1 30 fxs gs answer clear detect 60000 Remarks The voice signaling protocol command must be set to the corresponding protocol type before any commands for E amp M Wink Start Immediate Start and Delay Start Signaling and FXS FXO Loop and Ground Start commands will take effect Page 5 129 VoIP Commands voice signaling fxs gs min ring gro
345. ng on this channel A no signal mode CAS or no signal mode CCS means that no bits are reserved for signal ing on this channel The CAS and CCS are ignored Page 5 49 VoIP Commands voice port trap generation Command Usage Set voice port trap generation enable disable Indicates if line status change trap is sent to the network management system NMS Not available this release Syntax Options voice port lt slot port gt trap generation enable disable Definitions slot Specifies slot number of voice switching daughtercard installed in switching module e g 2 port Specifies physical port number on voice daughtercard e g 1 enable Turns ON trap generation on voice port disable Turns OFF trap generation on voice port Default The default setting is disable Command Examples voice port 2 1 trap generation disable voice port 2 2 trap generation enable Remarks To use this command the voice daughtercard connection type must be set to T1 E1 El ISDN PRI or BRI Euro via the voice port interface type command Page 5 50 VoIP Commands voice port isdn protocol Command Usage Specify ISDN connection protocol for ISDN BRI Euro ports Syntax Options voice port lt slot port gt isdn protocol net user qmaster qslave Definitions slot Specifies slot number of voice switching daughtercard installed in switching mo
346. ng out tone digit duration 2 0 0 000 000 eee eee 5 70 voice signaling out tone interdigit duration 0 0 0 0 02000 00005 5 71 voice signaling out dialing type saaana aaa eee 5 72 voice signaling call duration limit 0 0 0 000000 ee 5 73 voice signaling answer wait limit ouaa aaa eee 5 74 voice signaling hang up wait limit 2 2 020 000 0000 00 a 5 75 voice signaling fax holdover 4 pi Aik he ie le ee ee leds abe Be 5 76 voice signaling companding 0 saaa ee 5 77 voice signaling receive Sain wi pene bey oralen ale p tae teat eae yee paws 5 78 voice signaling transmit gain 2 ee 5 79 voice signaling idle Noise cop ee kek ond eR He WA Ee antes 5 80 voice signaling em on hook debounce 00 0000 5 81 voice signaling em off hook debounce 0 00000 5 82 voice signaling em seize detect 2 0 0 ee 5 83 voice signaling em clear detect 2 0 nauau aaa a 5 84 voice signaling em clear confirm detect 0 20 0 000 00 e eee 5 85 voice signaling em clear confirm wait max 0000 00 eee eee 5 86 voice signaling em guardall 2 2 ee 5 87 voice signaling em guard out 2 eee 5 88 voice signaling em dialtone 1 0 00 eee 5 89 voice signaling em min connection time 0 2 0 0 0000s 5 90 voice signaling em hang up wait 0 2 0c eee 5 91 voice signaling emw in wink wait min 0 0 0 0 cee eee ee 5 92 voice signaling emw in wink wait max 1
347. nnection switch type to Euro ISDN PRI E1 30 B D channels Syntax Notes If the voice daughtercard connection port type is set to PRI E1 the voice port isdn connection switch type command uses the default value of net5 The port connection type must be set via the voice port inter face type command to indicate the number of channels avail able on the port e g 2 channels BRI Euro 30 channels E1 PRI ISDN Default The default setting is net5 for VSD and net3 for VSB Command Examples voice port 2 1 isdn switch type net5 voice port 2 2 isdn switch type net3 Remarks The voice port isdn connection switch type command is used to configure the type of switch connection for the ISDN ports at the voice daughtercard level Specification of the E1 ISDN protocol is optional unless E1 ISDN PRI or BRI Euro is used In the user mode set through the voice port isdn protocol command the ISDN connection switch type uses the switch type to which the ISDN link is connected In the network mode set through the voice port isdn protocol command the ISDN connec tion switch type commands selects the switch type to be emulated Page 5 53 VoIP Commands voice port bri line type Command Usage Specify ISDN EURO BRI line type point to point point to multipoint Point to point not available this release Syntax Options voice port lt slot port gt isdn bri line type point to point point to
348. nnel Syntax Options voice channel lt s ot porl startChannel endChannel gt assign preferred voice fax modem coding profile lt codingProfName gt Definitions slot Specifies the chassis slot number where VSM is installed e g 2 startChannel The first number in the range of voice channels e g 1 endChannel The last number in the range of voice channels e g 30 Syntax Note Be sure to separate the start and end range numbers with a hyphen e g 1 30 voice Assigns preferred voice coding profile to channel fax Assigns preferred fax coding profile to channel modem Assigns preferred modem coding profile to channel data Assigns preferred data coding profile to channel codingProfName Identifies coding profile by name e g salemprof1 maximum length of 40 characters The following characters are permitted in the coding profile name a z A Z 0 9 space and Ss 2 HA_ amp I lt gt CQO IKI all Indicates channel uses all preferred coding profiles Default None see remarks below Command Example voice channel 2 1 1 12 assign preferred voice coding profile salemprof1 voice channel 2 2 13 24 assign preferred fax coding profile calabprof1 voice channel 2 3 1 30 assign preferred modem coding profile salemprof2 Remarks Preferred coding profiles must be assigned before activating the voice switching daughtercard It is highly recommended that if voice calls are to be processed that this c
349. nt CPE instead of from a local service provider e g CLEC Certified Local Exchange Carrier Note PBX and Key Systems setup installation and configura tion procedures are beyond the scope of this manual Gateway devices intercept then direct electric signals between networked devices With VoIP gateways translate transmission formats between voice CPE and H 323 IP network call control endpoints and terminals including communications procedures between gateways They also translate between codecs perform call setup teardown on LANs and on circuit switched tele phone networks Gateways are entrance and exit points into VoIP networks that without hardwiring perform code and protocol conversions as well as signal filtering VoIP gateways contain a user definable phone directory database of phone number to IP address mappings this is called an Alcatel VoIP Network Dialing Scheme AVNDS See Chap ter 3 Network Dialing Schemes for details Modifications to the local phone directory data base are downloaded through the IP network to the switch and may be accessed using the VoIP configuration interface The phone directory database is built as the VoIP network is configured and is contained in the VoIP configuration boot file vsmboot asc Numbering plans phone groups and destinations as part of the AVNDS comprise a portion of the phone directory database used by Alcatel s H 323 VoIP gateway Page 1 7 Elements of a Conve
350. number of rings permitted to elapse before answering incoming calls per ring from 1 to 65 535 e g 2 rings The value must be at least or caller ID will not function properly Syntax Note Do not use commas when entering the fxs gs call originate clear detect value for example 10 000 will return a syntax error message Default The default value is 2 rings Command Examples voice signaling channel 2 1 1 12 fxo Is answer after 2 voice signaling channel 2 2 13 24 fxo Is answer after 30000 voice signaling channel 2 3 1 30 fxo Is answer after 65535 Remarks The voice signaling protocol command must be set to the corresponding protocol type before any commands for E amp M Wink Start Immediate Start and Delay Start Signaling and FXS FXO Loop and Ground Start commands will take effect Page 5 123 VoIP Commands voice signaling fxo ls loop current debounce Command Usage Specify Foreign Exchange Office Loop Start FXO LS debounce for loop current detector Syntax Options voice signaling channel lt s ol pori starntChannel endChannel gt fxo Is loop current debounce lt value gt Definitions slot Specifies chassis slot number where VSM is installed e g 2 port Specifies physical port number on voice daughtercard e g 1 startChannel The first number in the range of voice channels e g 1 endChannel The last number in the range of voice channels e g 30 Syntax Note Be su
351. numbers with a hyphen e g 1 30 Turns ON call progress tone detection for specified telephony signaling channel Turns OFF call progress tones detection for specified telephony signaling channel Turns call progress tone detection ON or OFF according to the call progress tone detec tion parameter in the currently loaded coding profile The default setting is off Page 5 150 VoIP Commands voice signaling call progress tone detection configuration Command Usage Set call signaling for call progress tone detection configuration default alternate Syntax Options voice signaling channel lt s oi port startChannel endChannel gt call progress tone detection configuration default alternate Definitions slot Specifies chassis slot number where VSM is installed e g 2 port Specifies physical port number on voice daughtercard e g 1 startChannel The first number in the range of voice channels e g 1 endChannel The last number in the range of voice channels e g 30 Syntax Note Be sure to separate the start and end range numbers with a hyphen e g 1 30 default Use default call progress tone detection configuration for specified telephony signaling channel alternate Use alternate call progress tone detection configuration for specified telephony signaling channel Default The default setting is default Command Examples voice signaling channel 2 1 1 12 call p
352. o 32 000 e g 2000 Syntax Notes Do not use commas when entering the value for voice fax coding profile silence detection time for example 2 000 will return a syntax error message no Disables silence detection A no silence detect time 100 or any other number of millisec onds disables silence detection Default The default value is 5 milliseconds Command Example voice coding profile salemprof1 no silence detect time voice coding profile salemprof1 silence detect time value 100 voice coding profile calabprof2 silence detect time value 100 Page 5 212 VoIP Commands voice coding profile silence detect level Command Usage Specify voice fax coding profile silence signal level Syntax Options voice coding profile lt codingProfName gt silence detect level lt signal_level gt Definitions codingProfName Identifies coding profile by name e g salemprof1 maximum length of 40 characters The following characters are permitted in the coding profile name a z A Z 0 9 space and Ss gt HA_ amp I lt gt CO IKI signal_level Specifies voice fax coding profile silence signal level in decibels Values may range from 50 through 40 e g 42 50 40 etc Default The default value is 50 decibels Command Example voice coding profile salemprof1 silence detect level 50 voice coding profile calabprof2 silence detect level 40 Page
353. o the default setting i e 0 Syntax Note This command must be set in relation to the voice signaling fxs gs ring cadence coefficient command Default The default value is 0 Command Examples voice signaling channel 2 1 1 12 fxs gs ring ID default voice signaling channel 2 2 13 24 fxs gs ring ID 0 voice signaling channel 2 3 1 30 fxs gs ring ID 7 Remarks The voice signaling protocol command must be set to the corresponding protocol type before any commands for E amp M Wink Start Immediate Start and Delay Start Signaling and FXS FXO Loop and Ground Start commands will take effect The ring cadence that is set for the first channel on the first port is automatically set for all remaining FXS FXO ports All ports must have the same ring cadence On the OmniAccess 512 the ring cadence can only be specified for port 1 On the Omni Switch Router the ring cadence can only be specified for port 1 or 9 for a dual VSA FXS FXS in an HSX H Page 5 136 VoIP Commands voice signaling fxo gs connection loop open debounce Command Usage Specify Foreign Exchange Office Ground Start FXS GS debounce interval for loop open detection Syntax Options voice signaling channel lt s ol pori starntChannel endChannel gt fxo gs connection loop open debounce lt value gt Definitions slot Specifies chassis slot number where VSM is installed e g 2 port Specifies physical port number on voic
354. od or to eliminate the possibility of toll fraud from the PSTN Page 3 31 VoIP Networks with PSTN Example 13 North American PSTN Calls Overview In this dialing scheme two voice switching daughtercards are used to translate area codes and telephone numbers All eleven digits in the telephone numbers are unique across the VoIP network and the voice switching daughtercards are responsible for all telephone number routing 411 and 911 calls can be handled as well using this dialing scheme Calls that are not routed across the VoIP network will be dropped and inserted referred to as Drop and Insert into the PSTN Minimal to no PBX re configuration is required however due to less than 99 995 reliability of Voice over IP networks this dialing scheme is not recommended unless passthrough is used on some channels Passthrough not available this release To call a 2000 extension off of PBX 1 the caller dials an eleven digit NANP telephone number In the overview diagram below the voice daughtercard strips off the first seven digits and then forwards the last four digits of the dialed number O Voice 411 911 1 npa 3 Daughtercard 1 IP 192 168 11 2 5 Port 1720 R i stripped digits 1 xxx xxx Extensions off of PBX 1 A 2000 2999 1 818 878 See Diagrams No Amer Calls Outbound Inbound
355. of voice channels e g 30 Syntax Note Be sure to separate the start and end range numbers with a hyphen e g 1 30 Specifies the time period between ring cycles ringing pulse plus time between ring pulses to detect ringing in milliseconds from 1 to 60 000 e g 2000 Syntax Note Do not use commas when entering the fxo ls between ring cycles ring detection value for example 10 000 will return a syntax error message The default value is 2000 milliseconds Remarks The voice signaling protocol command must be set to the corresponding protocol type before any commands for E amp M Wink Start Immediate Start and Delay Start Signaling and FXS FXO Loop and Ground Start commands will take effect Page 5 120 VoIP Commands voice signaling fxo ls ringing inter pulse Command Usage Specify Foreign Exchange Office FXO Loop Start time between ring pulses to detect ringing Syntax Options voice signaling channel lt s ol pori stantChannel endChannel gt fxo Is ringing inter pulse lt value gt Definitions slot Specifies chassis slot number where VSM is installed e g 2 port Specifies physical port number on voice daughtercard e g 1 startChannel The first number in the range of voice channels e g 1 endChannel The last number in the range of voice channels e g 30 Syntax Note Be sure to separate the start and end range numbers with a hyphen e g
356. ofile cp2 caller id off voice coding profile cp2 switchover off Page 5 177 VoIP Commands SSR SR SR SCR a SE CG SHR kk kkk Voice Coding Profile cp3 voice coding profile cp3 voice coding profile cp3 codec type fax t 38 voice coding profile cp3 fax rate 14400 voice coding profile cp3 fax transmit level 7 voice coding profile cp3 fax carrier detect threshold high voice coding profile cp3 fax timeout 10 voice coding profile cp3 fax t 38 high speed packet rate 20 voice coding profile cp3 fax t 38 low speed redundancy 4 voice coding profile cp3 fax t 38 high speed redundancy 2 voice coding profile cp3 fax t 38 training check field method network voice coding profile cp3 silence detect level 45 Voice Coding Profile cp4 voice coding profile cp4 voice coding profile cp4 codec type g 711 alaw voice coding profile cp4 voice packet interval 20 voice coding profile cp4 voice activity detector on voice coding profile cp4 voice network delay buffer nominal delay 80 voice coding profile cp4 voice network delay buffer max delay 160 voice coding profile cp4 voice echo canceller on voice coding profile cp4 voice echo canceller non linear on voice coding profile cp4 voice echo canceller tail 16 voice coding profile cp4 voice network delay buffer mode adaptive voice coding profi
357. ofile lt codingProf Name gt voice echo canceller tail length lt value gt Definitions codingProfName Identifies coding profile by name e g salemprof1 maximum length of 40 characters The following characters are permitted in the coding profile name a z A Z 0 9 space and Ss 2 HA_ amp I lt gt CO IKI value Specifies voice echo canceller tail length for specified coding profile in milliseconds from 0 to 16 e g 16 4 8 16 are the only legal values for this release Syntax Notes To use this command the voice echo canceller mode must be enabled via the coding profile voice echo canceller command Default The default value is 16 Command Example voice coding profile salemprof1 voice echo canceller tail length 16 voice coding profile calabprof2 voice echo canceller tail length 0 voice coding profile salemprof1 voice echo canceller tail length 128 Remarks Page 5 201 VoIP Commands voice coding profile echo canceller refresh configuration Command Usage Specify coding profile echo canceller refresh configuration state Syntax Options voice coding profile lt codingProfName gt echo canceller refresh configuration frozen refresh Definitions codingProfName Identifies coding profile by name e g salemprof1 maximum length of 40 characters The following characters are permitted in the coding profile name a z A Z 0 9 space and
358. ofile by name e g salemprof1 maximum length of 40 characters The following characters are permitted in the coding profile name a z A Z 0 9 space and i HA_ amp I lt gt CQO IKI on Turns ON voice activity detector for specified coding profile off Turns OFF voice activity detector for specified coding profile Default The default setting is on Command Example voice coding profile salemprof1 voice activity detector on voice coding profile calabprof2 voice activity detector off Page 5 189 VoIP Commands voice coding profile voice activity detection threshold mode Command Usage Set coding profile voice activity threshold mode adaptive relative Syntax Options voice coding profile lt codingProfName gt voice activity detection threshold mode adaptive relative Definitions codingProfName Identifies coding profile by name e g salemprof1 maximum length of 40 characters The following characters are permitted in the coding profile name a z A Z 0 9 space and Ss 2 HA_ amp I K lt gt QO It adaptive Indicates adaptive voice activity detection audio threshold mode for specified coding pro file relative Indicates relative voice activity detection audio threshold mode for specified coding pro file Syntax Notes To use this command the voice activity detector mode must be enabled via the voice coding profile voice activity detector command I
359. oice numbering plan 5 251 Activate voice numbering plan not available this release 5 253 Network Dialing Scheme Numbering Plan Hunt Method Specify outgoing hunting method of voice numbering plan destinations group 5 255 Network Dialing Scheme Numbering Plan Description Define specified voice numbering plan optional 5 256 Network Dialing Scheme Associate Numbering Plan Associate or disassociate destinations with numbering plans by name 5 257 Associate or disassociate phone groups with numbering plans by name 5 258 SYSTEM WIDE VoIP COMMANDS View voice switching daughtercard parameters 5 260 View voice switching daughtercard port parameters 5 261 View voice switching daughtercard channel parameters 5 262 View voice switching daughtercard network parameters 5 263 STATISTICS Channel Level Set voice daughtercard statistics collection on off not available this release 5 264 Reset all channel statistics not available this release 5 265 View Statistics View telephony statistics not available this release 5 266 View channel statistics not available this release 5 267 View voice play out statistics not available this release 5 268 View DSP receive and transmit statistics not available this release 5 269 View error statistics not available this release 5 270 View modem statistics not available this release 5 271 View fax statistics not available this release 5 272 View ISDN level
360. oice signaling protocol command must be set to the corresponding protocol type before any commands for E amp M Wink Start Immediate Start and Delay Start Signaling and FXS FXO Loop and Ground Start commands will take effect Page 5 92 VoIP Commands voice signaling emw in wink wait max Command Usage Specify maximum Ear amp Mouth wink delay on incoming calls Syntax Options voice signaling channel lt s ol port stantChannel endChannel gt emw in wink wait max imum lt value gt Definitions slot Specifies chassis slot number where VSM is installed e g 2 port Specifies physical port number on voice daughtercard e g 1 startChannel The first number in the range of voice channels e g 1 endChannel The last number in the range of voice channels e g 30 Syntax Note Be sure to separate the start and end range numbers with a hyphen e g 1 30 imum Optional command syntax Type either max or maximum in the command line value Specifies the maximum delay in milliseconds from 5 to 60 000 e g 3000 before begin ning the wink on the E ead after detecting a line seizure on the M lead for incoming calls Syntax Note Do not use commas when entering the maximum E amp M wink delay value on incoming calls for example 3 000 will return a syntax error message Default The default value is 3000 Command Examples voice signaling channel 2 1 1 12 emw in wink wait maximum 30
361. oise value for example 1 000 will return a syntax error message voice signaling channel 2 1 1 12 idle noise 0 voice signaling channel 2 2 13 24 idle noise 1000 voice signaling channel 2 3 1 30 idle noise 7000 voice signaling channel 2 4 1 30 idle noise 7000 Page 5 80 VoIP Commands voice signaling em on hook debounce Command Usage Specify E amp M signaling time for transition debounce to on hook Syntax Options voice signaling channel lt s ol porl startChannel endChannel gt em on hook debounce lt value gt Definitions slot Specifies chassis slot number where VSM is installed e g 2 port Specifies physical port number on voice daughtercard e g 1 startChannel The first number in the range of voice channels e g 1 endChannel The last number in the range of voice channels e g 30 Syntax Note Be sure to separate the start and end range numbers with a hyphen e g 1 30 value Specifies the E amp M debounce delay interval transition to on hook state in milliseconds from 5 to 1 000 e g 50 Syntax Note Do not use commas when entering the E amp M transition to on hook state or debounce transition value for example 1 000 will return a syntax error message Default The default value is 50 Command Examples voice signaling channel 2 1 1 12 em on hook debounce 50 voice signaling channel 2 2 13 24 em on hook debounce 5 voice signaling channel 2 3 1 30 em on hoo
362. ommand the voice signaling protocol command must be set to the corre sponding protocol type of E amp M Wink Start Immediate Start or Delay Start Signaling Page 5 82 VoIP Commands voice signaling em seize detect Command Usage Specify E amp M signaling time to wait before declaring on hook seize detect i e amount of time M lead must be off hook before an incoming call is declared Syntax Options voice signaling channel lt s ol port startChannel endChannel gt em seize detect lt value gt Definitions slot Specifies chassis slot number where VSM is installed e g 2 port Specifies physical port number on voice daughtercard e g 1 startChannel The first number in the range of voice channels e g 1 endChannel The last number in the range of voice channels e g 30 Syntax Note Be sure to separate the start and end range numbers with a hyphen e g 1 30 value Specifies the E lead seize detect delay interval in milliseconds from 5 to 5 000 e g 50 before an incoming call is declared M lead must be off hook before an incoming call can be declared Syntax Note Do not use commas when entering the E amp M seize detect value on the E lead for example 5 000 will return a syntax error message Default The default value is 150 Command Examples voice signaling channel 2 1 1 12 em seize detect 150 voice signaling channel 2 2 13 24 em seize detect 5 voice signaling channel 2 3
363. ommand be issued as it speeds up the process during the h 323 call setup procedure By default cp5 default coding profile is automatically assigned as the preferred voice coding profile for every voice channel on the switch See create coding profile command By default cp3 default coding profile is automatically assigned as the preferred fax coding profile for every voice channel on the switch See create coding profile command There is no default coding profile automatically assigned as the preferred modem coding profile g 711 for every voice channel on the switch See create coding profile command Page 5 182 VoIP Commands voice coding profile coding type Command Usage Specify codec type for coding profile See table of codec types on next page for more details Syntax Options voice coding profile lt codingProf Name gt codec type lt codec_type gt Definitions codingProfName Identifies coding profile by name e g salemprof1 maximum length of 40 characters The following characters are permitted in the coding profile name a z A Z 0 9 space and Sss HA_ amp I lt gt CQO It codec_type The specified codec type Command choices include g 711 mulaw specifies PCM Mu Law audio g 711 alaw specifies PCM A Law audio g 723 1 53 specifies g 723 1 5 3 Kbps speech and audio g 723 1 63 specifies g 723 1 6 3 Kbps speech and audio g 729ab specifies g 729ab s
364. ommands are divided into seven major categories consist as listed below ing of the following subcategories Command Category Command Subcategory Voice Switching Daughtercards Dialing Timers Gateway Mode Voice Ports Channel Properties Voice Channel Mode PLAR Private Line Automatic Ringdown Voice Channel Initialization Telephony Signaling Interface General Signaling Ear amp Mouth E amp M Foreign Exchange Station FXS Foreign Exchange Office FXO Call Signaling Capabilities Inbound Outbound Caller ID Call Progress Tones Echo and Acoustic Echo Cancellers Overrides for Call Signaling Coding Profiles Codecs Voice Mode Parameters Voice Network Buffers Voice Activity Detection Tone Detection Echo Canceller Facsimile Modem Facsimile T 38 Modem Silence Detection General Caller ID Voice Network Interface H 323 Gateway Discovery H 323 Gateway Configuration H 323 Gateway Operations Network Dialing Scheme e Destinations e Phone Groups Parameters e Numbering Plans Hunt Method System Wide VoIP e Voice Switching Daughtercard Parameters General Telephony and Telephony Channels Voice Play Out Voice Daughtercard DSP Receive and Transmit Errors Modem Fax and ISDN statistics Page 5 1 VoIP Commands To use this chapter refer to the command task list below to find the page number for a specific task The commands use a simple line at a time prompt
365. omplex VoIP Network with H 323 gatekeeper Page 3 3 Introduction No Dialing Scheme Examples VoIP Networks with PSTN Decision Criteria 13 North American PSTN Four Digit Extensions and Direct Inward Dial DID Unique NANP extensions Unique Site Prefix DID 14 International ISDN PSTN Four Digit Extensions and Direct Inward Dial DID No Amer and Intl Sites DID 15 North American PSTN Eleven Digit Extensions Eleven Digit NANP Extensions with PSTN 16 17 North American PSTN Fax over IP Network North American PSTN VSD VSA Mixed Toll Saving Fax Calls Mixed Digital and Analog Voice Daughtercards PSTN at remote site 18 North American PSTN Caller ID Static Analog Voice Daughtercard gen erating predetermined static caller ID No Dialing Scheme Examples VoIP Networks with Interoperability Decision Criteria 19 H 323 Gateway Microsoft NetMeeting w o FastStart VoIP to 3rd Party H 323 Soft ware 20 H 323 Gateway Cisco Routers VoIP to 3rd Party H 323 Hard ware 21 H 323 Gateway OmniPCX 4400 VoIP to OmniPCX LIOE card 22 Omni PCX 4400 E1 QSIG Interoperating via E1 QSIG 23 Omni PCX 4400 Euro PRI Interoperating via Euro PRI 24 Other PBXs T1 Other PBXs Euro BRI Interoperating with 3rd Party PBX via T1 Interoper
366. onfiguration PBX 2 Configuration Expects to receive four digits on channels Expects to receive four digits on channels 1 through 1 through 12 on trunks D or G and then uses 12 on trunks R or GH and then uses these digits to these digits to route calls to lines A route calls to lines B Routes calls starting with 1 to lines A Routes calls starting with 2 to lines B Routes calls starting with 2 to channels 13 through Routes calls starting with 1 to channels 13 through 24 on trunks D or G and then the VoIP network 24 on trunks CE or H and then the VoIP network uses these digits to route calls to trunks CE or CH uses these digits to route calls to trunks D or G Page 3 19 VoIP Networks without PSTN Example 7 Remarks Supported VoIP features and main CLI commands used with this dialing scheme are as follows Features Supported H 323 gateway to voice daughtercard A Primary CLI Commands Used voice destination local channel page 5 231 Local channel four hunt groups 12 channels per group T1 voice numbering plan hunt method page 5 255 voice numbering plan destination member page 5 257 voice numbering plan phone group member page 5 258 Site prefix no site prefix D voice phone group site prefix page 5 238 Voice phone group type four digit local extensions L voice phone group type page 5 240 voice phone group format
367. ons voice daughter card lt s ot card_number gt stat istic s collection on off Definitions slot Specifies chassis slot number where VSM is installed e g 2 card_number Specifies the voice daughtercard position number e g 1 istic Optional command syntax Type either stats or statistics in the command line on Turns ON statistics collection for specified voice daughtercard off Turns OFF statistics collection for specified voice daughtercard Syntax Notes This command must be issued and activated from within the vsmboot asc file Default None Command Example voice daughter card 2 1 statistics collection on voice daughter card 2 2 stats collection off Remarks Use of this command can cause significant degradation in the performance of a VoIP daugh tercard In certain instances a daughtercard may appear non operational Symptoms exhibited may include dead air h 323 connection failures lost packets jitter etc This command should only be used in a tightly controlled environment and under the discretion of qualified person nel It is strongly recommended that this command be tested extensively under high traffic loads before using in a real time VoIP network Page 5 264 VoIP Commands voice channel reset all statistics Command Usage Reset all statistics for one or more specified voice channels Not available this release Syntax Options voice channel lt s ol port startC
368. ot be used in North America See also VSD Jumpers on page 2 12 Voice Switching Daughtercard Euro BRI ISDN Network or Line Terminator NT LT Terminal Equipment TE The NT LT and TE jumpers J29 and J30 are used to set the type of terminator on the VSB daughtercards When the shunts are removed from these jumpers NT LT is set as the termi nator type this is the default setting for both jumpers When these jumpers and switches are set to either NT LT or TE the voice port isdn protocol command must also be set to the same corresponding setting For details on using this command see Chapter 5 VoIP Commands Note J29 and J30 must match settings on NT LT TE Cross Over toggle switches The default setting for the toggle and corresponding jumpers is NT see illustra tion for VSB Jumpers on page 2 16 Default J29 NT LT on port 1 no shunts on pins 1_2 Default J29 NT LT on port 2 no shunts on pins 3_4 Default J30 NT LT on port 3 no shunts on pins 1_2 Default J30 NT LT on port 4 no shunts on pins 3_4 TE j29 TE on port 1 requires shunts on pins 1_2 TE J29 TE on port 2 requires shunts on pins 3_4 TE J30 TE on port 3 requires shunts on pins 1_2 TE J30 TE on port 4 requires shunts on pins 3_4 For VSB jumpers J29 and J30 only the following five NT LT TE port configurations are allowed e All four ports can be configured as TE ports are TE TE TE TE e All four
369. ot file example which depicts the correspond ing CLI commands Page 4 8 Setup and Installation Filename vsmboot asc Description Enterprise Dialing Scheme between two OA 512s Dialing Scheme with four digit extensions This is a minimum voice text config file The voice daughtercard will not start up properly if not installed on the switch before power is applied voice echo on IP Mask must voice daughter card 474 imas 255 255 255 0 be listed i 9 voice dau htercard 4 1 ipaddre S 127 0 0 0 gt g voice dau htercard 4 1 Tpdefault gatew V 127 0 0 1 gt lt 4 g g CLI commands f AVNDS in this section eer ee 1 Insert AVNDS i voice destination VSD_1 h 323 192 168 200 31 1720 voice destination VSD_2 h 323 192 168 200 32 1720 voice destination To VSD_1 port 1 local channel VSD_1 1 1 24 voice destination To VSD_1 port 2 local channel VSD_1 2 1 24 Destination Create Local Page 4 9 Setup and Installation Prefix Dialing Type Format Nos to Include In Range of Digits Strip Digits Outgoing Hunt Method Associate Destinations Associate Phone Groups Page 4 10 l This corresponds to the Trunk labeled T1 D on dialing scheme example 1 voice phone group Ext of PBX_1 voice phone group Ext of PBX_1 site prefix off voice phone group Ext of PBX_1 type local extension voice p
370. ot use commas when entering the fxs ls on hook debounce transition value for example 1 000 will return a syntax error message Default The default value is 20 milliseconds Command Examples voice signaling channel 2 1 1 12 fxs Is on hook debounce 200 voice signaling channel 2 2 13 24 fxs Is on hook debounce 500 voice signaling channel 2 3 1 30 fxs Is on hook debounce 1000 Remarks The voice signaling protocol command must be set to the corresponding protocol type before any commands for E amp M Wink Start Immediate Start and Delay Start Signaling and FXS FXO Loop and Ground Start commands will take effect A minimum debounce value of 250 must be set for analog voice switching VSA daughter cards Page 5 108 VoIP Commands voice signaling fxs ls off hook debounce Command Usage Specify Foreign Exchange Station Loop Start FXS LS debounce interval to off hook transition Syntax Options voice signaling channel lt s ol port startChannel endChannel gt fxs Is off hook debounce lt value gt Definitions slot Specifies chassis slot number where VSM is installed e g 2 port Specifies physical port number on voice daughtercard e g 1 startChannel The first number in the range of voice channels e g 1 endChannel The last number in the range of voice channels e g 30 Syntax Note Be sure to separate the start and end range numbers with a hyphen e g 1 30 value Specif
371. ound start time to wait before declaring on hook by answerer 5 129 Specify FXS ground start time to wait after ring ground before grounding tip 5 130 Specify maximum FXS ground start time to wait for loop to close after ground tip 5 131 Specify minimum FXS ground start time between open loop and idle state 5 132 Set FXS ground start to generate outbound caller ID on off 5 133 Specify FXS ground start debounce interval for off hook 5 134 Specify FXS ground start debounce interval for ring ground detector 5 135 Signaling Attributes Foreign Exchange Office FXO Ground Start Signaling Specify FXO ground start debounce interval for loop open detection 5 137 Specify maximum FXO ground start time between ring ground and tip ground 5 138 Specify FXO ground start debounce interval for tip ground detector 5 139 Specify FXO ground start debounce for incoming ring signal 5 140 Specify FXO ground start time between consecutive ring cycles 5 141 Specify FXO ground start time between consecutive ring pulses 5 142 Set FXO ground start to detect inbound caller ID on off 5 143 Specify FXO ground start number of rings allowed before answering 5 144 Specify FXO ground start debounce interval for loop current detector 5 145 Specify FXO ground start debounce interval for battery reversal detector 5 146 Signaling Attributes Outbound Caller ID Set outbound caller ID name private unavailable to transmit 5 147 Set outbound caller ID number published non published to
372. oup member page 5 258 Site prefix no site prefix I voice phone group site prefix page 5 238 Voice phone group type four digit local extensions L voice phone group type page 5 240 voice phone group format page 5 243 voice phone group add numbers page 5 247 Strip digit length no strip digits CR voice phone group strip digit length page 5 244 Digital Interface type T1 W voice port interface type page 5 34 Page 3 30 VoIP Networks with PSTN Example 13 VoIP Networks with PSTN Example 13 North American PSTN and VoIP Calls This dialing scheme is used for calls going through the North American PSTN and the VoIP Network The following four diagrams are used to demonstrate how these calls are handled e North American PSTN Calls Overview e North American PSTN Calls Outbound e North American PSTN Calls Inbound e North American PSTN Calls VoIP Network Note that DID Direct Inward Dial is used only on inbound calls and that all calls are connected using the North American Numbering Plan NANP that also includes Canada See Dialing Scheme Example 15 for details on North American and International calls going through the PSTN or the VoIP network To use this dialing scheme the voice phone group type must be set to NANP extensions The site prefix digits and strip digits must be set to seven digits NANP PSTN numbers depend on the configura
373. oups on the daughtercard Page 5 29 VoIP Commands voice daughter card cadence coefficient Command Usage Set cadence coefficient or continental ring tone North America Europe for all ports on an analog voice switching daughtercard VSA Syntax Options voice daughter card lt s oi card_number gt vsa cadence coefficient north america europe Definitions slot Specifies chassis slot number where VSM is installed e g 2 card_number Specifies the voice daughtercard position number e g 1 north america Sets the cadence coefficient to North America europe Sets the cadence coefficient to Europe Syntax Note This command must be set in relation to the voice daughter card ring ID command Default The default setting is north america Command Examples voice daughter card 2 1 vsa cadence coefficient north america voice daughter card 2 2 vsa cadence coefficient europe Remarks When this command is used the P33 and P34 jumpers on the VSA daughtercard must be set accordingly for ring voltage amplitude P33 and ring frequency P34 See Chapter 2 VoIP Daughtercards for details Page 5 30 VoIP Commands voice daughter card ring id Command Usage Set ring ID for the VSA cadence coefficient specified for all ports on an analog voice switch ing daughtercard VSA Syntax Options voice daughter card lt s ot card_numbe gt vsa ring id 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
374. pe FXS AA voice port interface type page 5 34 voice signaling companding page 5 77 voice port interface type page 5 34 Page 3 66 AVNDS Master List of Features by CLI Command AVNDS Master List of Features by CLI Command Refer to the table below for a list of VoIP features used in the AVNDS along with the most common commands used for setting up each feature Corresponding page numbers for the VoIP CLI Commands chapter are also included Features Supported Primary CLI Commands Used H 323 gateway to voice daughtercard A H 323 gateway to H 323 gatekeeper RADVision B voice destination local channel page 5 231 voice network card h 323 gatekeeper control page 5 217 voice network h 323 gatekeeper mode page 5 218 voice network h 323 gatekeeper address page 5 219 voice network h 323 gatekeeper associate page 5 223 H 323 gateway to H 323 device C Local channel individual hunt groups 48 channels per group T1 D voice destination h 323 endpoint page 5 230 voice numbering plan hunt method page 5 255 voice numbering plan destination member page 5 257 voice numbering plan phone group member page 5 258 Local channel four hunt groups 12 channels per group T1 voice numbering plan hunt method page 5 255 voice numbering plan destination member page 5 257 voice numbering plan phone group member page 5 258 Local channel two hunt gro
375. pecified coding profile Sets fax modem carrier detect threshold to 26 dBm for specified coding profile The default setting is high Page 5 206 VoIP Commands voice coding profile fax timeout Command Usage Specify coding profile inactivity detection time to automatically tear down fax Syntax Options voice coding profile lt codingProfName gt fax timeout lt value gt Definitions codingProfName Identifies coding profile by name e g salemprof1 maximum length of 40 characters The following characters are permitted in the coding profile name a z A Z 0 9 space and s 2 HA_ amp I lt gt CQO IKI value Specifies voice coding profile fax timeout no activity time on fax modem connection before call is cleared in milliseconds from 10 to 32 000 seconds e g 20 Syntax Note Do not use commas when entering the voice coding profile fax timeout value for example 1 000 will return a syntax error message Default The default value is 20 milliseconds Command Example voice coding profile salemprof1 fax time out value 20 voice coding profile salemprof2 fax time out value 12000 voice coding profile calabprof2 fax time out value 32000 Page 5 207 VoIP Commands voice coding profile fax t 38 high speed packet rate Command Usage Specify coding profile T 38 high speed fax rate Syntax Options voice coding profile lt
376. peech and audio CS CELP fax t 38 specifies fax t 38 real time codec type Default The default codec type is g 723 1 63 also referred to as cp5 or default coding profile 5 Command Example voice coding profile salemprof1 codec type pem mulaw voice coding profile calabprof1 codec type pcm alaw voice coding profile salemprof2 codec type g 723 1 53 voice coding profile calabprof2 codec type fax t 38 Remarks PCM stands for Pulse Code Modulation ADPCM stands for Adaptive Differential Pulse Code Modulation CS CELP stands for Conjugate Structure Algebraic Code Excited Linear Prediction The H 245 H 323 control functions allow the voice switching daughtercard to negotiate the codec type at runtime Page 5 183 VoIP Commands Use the table below to determine the VPI and VIF for the codec type selected as per the voice coding profile codec type command Codec Description Voice Modem Voice Voice Type Fax Packet Information Interval Field VIF VPI Time Size Allowed Reference g 711 mulaw G 711 PCM Mu Law Yes Yes Yes 20 640 bits 30 1280 bits 40 1920 bits g 711 alaw G 711 PCM A Law Yes Yes Yes 20 640 bits 30 1280 bits 40 1920 bits g 723 53 G 723 1 5 3 kbps Yes No No 30 ms 192 bits g 723 63 coding G 723 1 6 3 kbps coding 60 ms 384 bits g 729ab G 729 Annex A Yes No No 10 ms 80 bits Annex B 8 kbps coding 20 ms 160 bi
377. plan2 disassociate destination member to_vsd2 Remarks This command is used to append a destination hunting target to the associated numbering plan for telephone number hunting The numbering plan destination list is used to hunt for destinations targets Each numbering plan destination list requires at least one member Page 5 257 VoIP Commands voice numbering plan phone group member Command Usage Associate or disassociate phone groups with numbering plans by name Syntax Options voice numbering plan lt NumberingPlanName gt associate disassociate phone group member lt PhoneGroupName gt Definitions NumberingPlanName_ Identifies the numbering plan by name e g salem plan1 maximum length of 40 charac ters The following characters are permitted in the numbering plan name a z A Z 0 9 space and A_ amp 1 lt gt C 1 associate Indicates specified phone group associated with specified numbering plan disassociate Indicates specified phone group disassociated with specified numbering plan PhoneGroupName Identifies the phone group by name e g calab_engr1 maximum length of characters 60 The following characters are permitted in the phone group name a z A Z 0 9 space and A_ amp 1 lt gt QOTIt Syntax Notes To use this command the destination member must first be associated via the associate destination member com
378. ponding protocol type of E amp M Wink Start Immediate Start or Delay Start Signaling Page 5 89 VoIP Commands voice signaling em min connection time Command Usage Specify minimum Ear amp Mouth signaling connection time Syntax Options voice signaling channel lt s ol port startChannel endChannel gt em min imum connect time lt value gt Definitions slot Specifies chassis slot number where VSM is installed e g 2 port Specifies physical port number on voice daughtercard e g 1 startChannel The first number in the range of voice channels e g 1 endChannel The last number in the range of voice channels e g 30 Syntax Note Be sure to separate the start and end range numbers with a hyphen e g 1 30 imum Optional command syntax Type either min or minimum in the command line value Specifies the minimum time period in milliseconds from 0 to 20 000 e g 2000 that a connection is maintained Syntax Note Do not use commas when entering the minimum E amp M connec tion value for example 2 000 will return a syntax error message Default The default value is 2000 Command Examples voice signaling channel 2 3 1 30 em minimum connection time 1000 Remarks If the remote or called end disconnects during the specified minimum E amp M connection time the disconnect is acknowledged by a dial tone In order to use this command the voice signaling protocol command m
379. ponent table above Contact customer service if these files cannot be located Locate the master vsmboot asc file and the file for the selected dialing scheme vsmboot asc 01 24 to use as per Chapter 3 Network Dialing Schemes and then copy the files to a Network Administrator s workstation connected to the VoIP switch A dial ing scheme must be selected as there is no default dialing scheme in place Contact customer service if these files cannot be located Insert contents of selected dialing scheme file vsmboot asc 01 24 into master vsmboot asc file above the voice daughtercard activate line and then save the master vsmboot asc file by the same name in a different directory so as not to overwrite the origi nal master vsmboot asc file Do not change the name of the filenames and keep them lowercase as they are case sensitive Do not use any type of view commands in any VSM boot files at any time as they may cause the switch to time out or hang Refer to Appen dix A VSM Boot Files to see complete boot file examples The last two lines of the vsmboot asc file must always be the voice daughtercard activate line followed by a comment mark only on the next line otherwise the file will not load properly later It is important that all entries be kept in the same order in which they appear in the master vsmboot asc file as the incorrect order will negatively impact boot time For a visual reference see the e
380. ports can be configured as NT Ports are NT NT NT NT e Ports 1 2 and 3 configured as TE and port 4 configured as NT ports are TE TE TE NT e Ports 1 and 3 configured as TE and port 2 and 4 configured as NT ports are TE NT TE NT e Port 1 configured as TE and port 2 3 and 4 configured as NT ports are TE NT NT NT Impedance The impedance jumpers J16 J18 J20 and J22 are used to set the resistance to the alternat ing current on the VSB daughtercards When the shunts are removed from these jumpers the standard impedance of 100 Ohms will not be fed to the designated port this is the default setting for all four jumpers Default J16 no impedance on port 1 no shunts on pins 1_2 and pins 3_4 Default J18 no impedance on port 2 no shunts on pins 1_2 and pins 3_4 Default J20 no impedance on port 3 no shunts on pins 1_2 and pins 3_4 Default J22 no impedance on port 4 no shunts on pins 1_2 and pins 3_4 J16 add impedance on port 1 requires shunts on pins 1_2 and pins 3_4 J18 add impedance on port 2 requires shunts on pins 1_2 and pins 3_4 20 add impedance on port 3 requires shunts on pins 1_2 and pins 3_4 J22 add impedance on port 4 requires shunts on pins 1_2 and pins 3_4 Page 2 17 Voice Switching Daughtercard Euro BRI ISDN Power Feeds The power feed jumpers J25 J26 J27 and J28 are used to set the power feeds on the VSB daughtercards When the shunts are removed from t
381. processing 1 10 H 245 in band call controls 1 8 H 245 protocol 1 15 H 323 automatic call answering 5 25 H 323 call capabilities 1 15 H 323 device 3 5 H 323 endpoint destination 3 2 H 323 endpoints 1 8 H 323 faststart calls 5 23 H 323 gatekeeper 1 8 1 15 3 3 H 323 gateway configuration 5 216 operations 5 216 H 323 gateway VoIP Switch 1 15 H 323 local channel destination 3 2 H 323 network call control 1 10 H 323 Voice over IP VoIP gateway 1 1 H 323 VoIP gateway 2 1 image files 4 1 master configuration boot file 4 1 H 323 VoIP telephone calls 1 4 hearing or speech impaired 5 152 HRE X device 2 25 Hunt Groups 3 3 3 11 hunt method 1 16 5 228 round robin 3 17 3 19 top down 3 11 3 13 3 15 I image files 4 1 image upgrade 2 4 in band signaling 1 13 inseize collisions 3 7 Index Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN 1 13 integrity check 5 107 Interface type 3 5 International PSTN 3 37 International Telecommunication Union ITU Standards 1 17 Internet facsimile protocol T 38 1 17 IP address 4 4 IP address mappings AVNDS 1 7 IP address translations gatekeeper 1 8 IP Telephony 1 1 devices 4 2 IP Telephony and Internetworking standards 1 17 ISDN Integrated Services Digital Network 1 13 ITU H 323 Standards abbreviated 1 17 ITU T Recommendation G 165 Echo Cancellers 5 197 J jitter 1 12 1 13 5 186 jumper configuration 4 6 L LED indicators 2 7 2 15 2 21 line build out 5 40 line co
382. pulse Definitions slot Specifies slot number of voice daughtercard installed in switching module e g 2 port Specifies physical port number on voice daughtercard e g 1 startChannel The first number in the range of voice channels e g 1 endChannel The last number in the range of voice channels e g 30 Syntax Note Be sure to separate the start and end range numbers with a hyphen e g 1 30 tone Specifies use of Dual Tone Multifrequency DTMF dialing pulse Specifies use of rotary pulse dialing Default The default value is tone Command Examples voice signaling channel 2 1 1 12 out dialing type tone voice signaling channel 2 2 13 24 out dialing type pulse Remarks DTMF Dual Tone Multi Frequency tones are comprised of eight tones divided into high and low frequency groups for signaling dialed numbers Each DTMF tone has one high and one low tone each corresponding to a key on a push button dialing pad Older and less commonly used rotary or circular dials cause breaks in the call circuit flow to signal each number dialed Page 5 72 VoIP Commands voice signaling call duration limit Command Usage Specify maximum call time length channel timing The call is automatically terminated when the allotted call time length is exceeded Syntax Options voice signaling channel lt s ol port startChannel endChannel gt no call duration limit lt value gt Definitions slot Sp
383. r CK according to the hunt method used Page 3 11 VoIP Networks without PSTN Example 3 Remarks Supported VoIP features and main CLI commands used with this dialing scheme are as follows Features Supported H 323 gateway to voice daughtercard A Primary CLI Commands Used voice destination local channel page 5 231 Local channel two hunt groups 24 channels per group T1 F voice numbering plan hunt method page 5 255 voice numbering plan destination member page 5 257 voice numbering plan phone group member page 5 258 Site prefix no site prefix GD voice phone group site prefix page 5 238 Voice phone group type four digit local extensions L voice phone group type page 5 240 voice phone group format page 5 243 voice phone group add numbers page 5 247 Strip digit length no strip digits CR voice phone group strip digit length page 5 244 Digital Interface type T1 W voice port interface type page 5 34 Page 3 12 VoIP Networks without PSTN Example 4 VoIP Networks without PSTN Example 4 One Hunt Group 60 Channels Across Two E1s This dialing scheme uses one hunt group spanning two E1 Euro PRD trunks to make a single 60 channel trunk Hunt groups are called voice numbering plans in the AVNDS Voice numbering plans relate phone groups and destinations In this example the voice daughtercards are using th
384. r analog voice switching VSA daughter cards Page 5 116 VoIP Commands voice signaling fxo ls supervisory disconnect detection Command Usage Set Foreign Exchange Office Loop Start FXO LS supervisory disconnect detection signal enable disable Syntax Options voice signaling channel lt s ol porl startChannel endChannel gt fxo Is supervisory disconnect detection on off Definitions slot Specifies chassis slot number where VSM is installed e g 2 port Specifies physical port number on voice daughtercard e g 1 startChannel The first number in the range of voice channels e g 1 endChannel The last number in the range of voice channels e g 30 Syntax Note Be sure to separate the start and end range numbers with a hyphen e g 1 30 on Turns ON fxo ls detection of supervisory disconnect for specified telephony signaling channel off Turns OFF fxo Is detection of supervisory disconnect for specified telephony signaling channel Syntax Note To use this command properly the duration of the fxo Is super visory disconnect signal must be specified via the voice signal ing fxo Is supervisory disconnect command Default The default setting is on Command Examples voice signaling channel 2 1 1 12 fxo Is supervisory disconnect detection on voice signaling channel 2 2 13 24 fxo Is supervisory disconnect detection off Remarks The voice signaling protocol command must be
385. r assistance also confirm that all phones fax machines are connected to the switch VSA are on hook For information on the ring cadence CLI command see Chapter 5 VoIP Commands 11 Reapply power to switch to load all contents of the master vsmboot asc file Watch console for VoIP error conditions as not all errors display in the error file For an OA 512 when the file has completely loaded the following screen message appears Configuration complete for voice daughtercard in slot 4 submodule 1 Notes 4 The screen message will be different for OSRs depend ing on the slot number entered in the modified vsmboot asc file The Reboot command is not applicable to VoIP in the switch The switch must be powered ON OFF instead 12 From the console screen type Is at the prompt Look for any vsmboot asc 01 99 err files The list of files that would typically display for the OA 512 are shown below oa5 cmd oa5 cnf oa5 cfg mpm log oaSisdn img oaSdiag img t1e1drv img oaSdrv img oa5 img oa5_text_cfg img vsoa img vsmboot asc 13 If the error file is listed in addition to the above files correct the offending CLI command s in the modified master vsmboot asc file save the file and download it again to the flash 14 Turn OFF power to the switch and then repeat Steps 10 and 11 and if necessary Steps 12 and 13 15 Set VoIP switch including other digital devices e g OmniPCX 4400 connected to VoIP swi
386. r at channel startup for specified telephony signaling channel off Turns OFF acoustic echo canceller at channel startup for specified telephony signaling channel Default The default setting is off Command Example voice signaling channel 2 1 1 12 acoustic echo canceller mode off voice signaling channel 2 2 13 24 acoustic echo canceller mode on Remarks Acoustic echo cancellers handle signal transmission echoes on calls originating from or being sent to IP telephones by isolating and filtering the signals Acoustic echo cancellers function as comfort noise generators Page 5 158 VoIP Commands voice signaling acoustic echo canceller non linear processor Command Usage Set acoustic echo canceller non linear processor mode on off Syntax Options voice signaling channel lt s ol porl startChannel endChannel gt acoustic echo canceller non linear processor on off Definitions slot Specifies chassis slot number where VSM is installed e g 2 port Specifies physical port number on voice daughtercard e g 1 startChannel The first number in the range of voice channels e g 1 endChannel The last number in the range of voice channels e g 30 Syntax Note Be sure to separate the start and end range numbers with a hyphen e g 1 30 on Turns ON non linear acoustic echo canceller for specified telephony signaling channel off Turns OFF non linear acoustic echo canceller for sp
387. re used for exchanging information between out of band signaling networks and telecommuni Page 1 13 H 323 VoIP Gateway Voice and Convergence Features cations nodes in the network ISDN does not use T1 or DS 1 robbed bit signaling where bits are taken from voice data to carry signaling Alcatel H 323 gateways support in band and out of band signaling Encoding Once signaling types are determined they are analyzed and converted by the appropriate DSP voice coder vocoder into digital signals which are ultimately converted and expanded back re modulated into real voice More specifically after signal recognition and analysis DSPs convert encode the amplitude of incoming analog signals into digital form using codecs or CODer DECoders The basic encoding schemes or companding methods in use today are for PCM which encodes analog signals into digital signals Although the PCM companding methods used for T1 which follows Mu Law and E1 which follows A Law differ mainly in their algorithms their purpose is much the same Companding is a contraction for compression and expan sion However A Law and Mu Law are incompatible They use different methods for exam ple to sample analog signals Next the digitally encoded signals are compressed using industry standard vocoders These are devices that use speech compression decompression algorithms to analyze and convert analog waveforms into digital signals and reduce relat
388. re to separate the start and end range numbers with a hyphen e g 1 30 value Specifies the time to use as a debouncer delay interval for debouncing the loop current detector in milliseconds from 0 to 60 000 e g 20 Syntax Note Do not use commas when entering the fxs ls debounce loop current detector value for example 10 000 will return a syntax error message Default The default value is 20 milliseconds Command Examples voice signaling channel 2 1 1 12 fxo Is loop current debounce 20 voice signaling channel 2 2 13 24 fxo Is loop current debounce 30000 voice signaling channel 2 3 1 30 fxo Is loop current debounce 60000 Remarks The voice signaling protocol command must be set to the corresponding protocol type before any commands for E amp M Wink Start Immediate Start and Delay Start Signaling and FXS FXO Loop and Ground Start commands will take effect Page 5 124 VoIP Commands voice signaling fxo ls battery reversal debounce Command Usage Specify Foreign Exchange Office Loop Start FXO LS debounce for battery reversal detector Syntax Options voice signaling channel lt s ol port startChannel endChannel gt fxo Is battery reversal debounce lt value gt Definitions slot Specifies chassis slot number where VSM is installed e g 2 port Specifies physical port number on voice daughtercard e g 1 startChannel The first number in the range of voice channels e g
389. re voice channels Not available this release Syntax Options voice channel lt s o port startChannel endChannel gt reset telephony channel stat istic s Definitions slot port channel istic Default None Command Example voice channel 2 1 1 12 reset telephony level statistics voice channel 2 1 13 24 reset telephony level stats Specifies chassis slot number where VSM is installed e g 2 Specifies physical port number on voice daughtercard e g 1 Specifies port channel number range in which to reset all telephony channel statistics e g 1 12 cumulative since channel was placed in service Optional command syntax Type either stats or statistics in the command line Syntax Notes This command only works from within the command line inter face and cannot be used from within the vsmboot asc file Page 5 275 VoIP Commands voice channel reset voice playout stats Command Usage Reset DSP voice play out statistics for one or more voice channels Not available this release Syntax Options voice channel lt s ol port startChannel endChannel gt reset voice playout stat istic s Definitions slot port channel istic Default None Command Example Specifies chassis slot number where VSM is installed e g 2 Specifies physical port number on voice daughtercard e g 1 Specifies port channel number range in which to reset DS
390. receive one to 24 digits on L and then then uses these digits to route calls to voice daughter uses these digits to route calls to voice daughter card 2 card 1 Routes all 1 603 598 calls to trunk L Routes all 1 818 878 calls to trunk Q Routes all 1 npa nxx xxxx PSTN calls to trunk R Routes all 1 npa nxx xxxx PSTN calls to trunk T Routes all PSTN calls to trunk R Routes all PSTN calls to trunk T Page 3 36 VoIP Networks with PSTN Example 14 VoIP Networks with PSTN Example 14 North American PSTN International PSTN and VoIP Calls This dialing scheme is used for calls going through the North American PSTN International PSTN and the VoIP network The following four diagrams are used to demonstrate how these calls are handled e North American PSTN International PSTN and VoIP Calls Overview Not available this release e North American PSTN and International PSTN Calls Outbound Not available this release e North American PSTN and International PSTN Calls Inbound Not available this release e North American PSTN and International PSTN Calls VoIP Network Not available this release See Dialing Scheme Example 13 for details on calls going only through the North American PSTN and the VoIP network Voice daughtercards using either North American or International PSTN dialing schemes cannot handle PBXs with extensions starting with 0 1 411 or
391. res and main CLI commands used with this dialing scheme are as follows Features Supported Primary CLI Commands Used H 323 gateway to voice daughtercard A voice destination local channel page 5 231 Local channel individual hunt groups 48 channels per group T1 D voice numbering plan hunt method page 5 255 voice numbering plan destination member page 5 257 voice numbering plan phone group member page 5 258 Local channel two hunt groups 24 channels per group T1 F voice numbering plan hunt method page 5 255 voice numbering plan destination member page 5 257 voice numbering plan phone group member page 5 258 Site prefix no site prefix voice phone group site prefix page 5 238 Site prefix single or multiple digits Q Voice phone group type four digit local extensions L voice phone group site prefix page 5 238 voice phone group site prefix digits page 5 239 voice phone group type page 5 240 voice phone group format page 5 243 voice phone group add numbers page 5 247 Voice phone group type NANP exten sions N voice phone group type page 5 240 voice phone group format page 5 243 voice phone group add numbers page 5 247 Voice phone group type PSTN NANP P voice phone group type page 5 240 voice phone group format page 5 243 voice phone group add numbers page 5 247 Strip digit length no strip digits
392. rged Network Gateways are considered H 323 terminals or H 323 endpoints in H 323 IP networks Termi nals are also the endpoints where telephone lines connect to network circuits Terminals provide real time two way communications for local area network LAN endpoint destina tions All terminals as such must support voice communications and H 245 in band call controls to use and negotiate channels See also abbreviated International Telecommunica tion Union ITU Standards on page 1 17 VoIP H 323 Gatekeeper Optional The H 323 Gatekeeper server or workstation is the device that verifies client VoIP privileges and translates telephone numbers into IP addresses It should be noted that H 323 gatekeep ers are not required to use Alcatel s H 323 VoIP Gateway In lieu of an H 323 VoIP gate keeper Alcatel s H 323 VoIP gateway uses its patent pending Alcatel VoIP Network Dialing Scheme AVNDS to perform IP address translations Note Gatekeeper setup installation and configuration procedures are beyond the scope of this manual Alcatel recommends and has tested extensively use of Alcate s H 323 VoIP gateway with the NT100 RADVision Gatekeeper Gatekeeper devices identify track and control traffic flowing through them and perform other functions such as gateway registration admission and bandwidth controls Page 1 8 Elements of a Converged Network
393. ription Compatible Alcatel At least one of the following IP telephony devices must be used in conjunction with and Third Party Voice over IP in the switch contact customer support for the most current list Other Components generic PBXs and Key Systems have not been tested but may be used at customer s discretion e Alcatel OmniPCX 4400 eLucent Definity G3 PBX Partner ACS Key System e Nortel Option 11 PBX ICS Key System eChannel bank for test purposes H 323 Gatekeeper optional NT100 RADVision H 323 gatekeeper software recommended but other H 323 gate keepers may be used See vendor s operational manual for install instructions Assumptions and Recommendations The following assumptions and recommendations should be considered before installing VoIP in the switch e Existing IP network is fully operational and ready for installation of VoIP Some key elements to consider includes adequate bandwidth reliable end to end round trip packet delay time and quality of service QoS for example See the Quality of Service QoS user guide for more information Note Alcatel s H 323 VoIP Gateway automatically prioritizes all VoIP calls via QoS ToS Type of Service controls For more information on ToS see the switch manual e A VoIP dialing scheme has been developed to accommodate enterprise specific call capa bilities Both IP network and telephone networks must be converged using an appropriate di
394. rof1 maximum length of 40 characters The following characters are permitted in the coding profile name a z A Z 0 9 space and Ss 2 HA_ amp I lt gt CO IKI gain_value Specifies fax modem transmit TX gain for specified voice coding profile in decibels Values may range from 13 through 0 e g 13 2 etc Default The default value is 13 decibels Command Example voice coding profile salemprof1 fax transmit level 13 voice coding profile calabprof2 fax transmit level 0 Page 5 205 VoIP Commands voice coding profile fax carrier detect threshold Command Usage Specify coding profile fax modem carrier detect threshold Syntax Options voice coding profile lt codingProfName gt fax carrier detect threshold low medium high Definitions codingProfName low medium high Default Command Example voice coding profile salemprof1 fax carrier detect threshold high voice coding profile salemprof2 fax carrier detect threshold medium voice coding profile calabprof1 fax carrier detect threshold low Identifies coding profile by name e g salemprof1 maximum length of 40 characters The following characters are permitted in the coding profile name a z A Z 0 9 space and Ss 2 HA_ amp I lt gt CO IKI Sets fax modem carrier detect threshold to 43 dBm for specified coding profile Sets fax modem carrier detect threshold to 33 dBm for s
395. rogress tone detection configuration default voice signaling channel 2 2 13 24 call progress tone detection configuration alternate Remarks This command is used to specify which configuration to use for call progress tone detection Each configuration contains filter configuration information threshold and filter coefficients and a table containing cadence information of all the call progress tones that need to be detected Each configuration whether default or alternate has a filter configuration for dial tone ring back including three supported cadences bust and congestion If the alternative tone detection configuration is selected the tone detection process is limited to a busy tone and other detected tones are ignored Page 5 151 VoIP Commands voice signaling v 18 tone detection threshold hang time Command Usage Set V 18 Annex A signal duration threshold for tone detection Syntax Options voice signaling channel lt s ol pori startChannel endChannel gt v 18 tone detection threshold hang time lt value gt Definitions slot Specifies chassis slot number where VSM is installed e g 2 port Specifies physical port number on voice daughtercard e g 1 startChannel The first number in the range of voice channels e g 1 endChannel The last number in the range of voice channels e g 30 Syntax Note Be sure to separate the start and end range numbers with a hyphen e g 1 3
396. runk The user would dial 1 603 598 2xxx to call an extension off of PBX 2 for example The VoIP daughtercard will strip the first seven digits and forward the last four digits to the PBX Any number used as a site prefix cannot be used for the first digit of any valid extension k stripped l digits l D Extensions a 1 818 878 2000 to 2999 HT1 Voice off of PBX 1 A z aa aa T1 2000 IP 192 168 11 2 2 2999 G Port 1720 WAN eee PBX 2 stripped Extensions digits H off of PBX 2 e 1 603 598 2000 to 2999 HT4 3 kees leseese J aughtercar 2000 B 2 a Ti S 2999 iT E IP 192 168 12 2 SS Ta Port 1720 Example 11 Trunk Groups and Eleven Digit Extensions LEGEND for Diagram Components PBX 1 Configuration PBX 2 Configuration Expects to receive four digits on trunk D and then uses these digits to route calls to lines A Expects to receive four digits on trunk GH and then uses these digits to route calls to lines B or trunk E Routes calls starting with 2 to lines A Routes calls starting with 2 to lines B Routes calls starting with 1 603 598 to trunk G and then the VoIP network uses these digits to route calls to trunk CH Routes calls
397. s Command Usage Reset error statistics for one or more voice channels Not available this release Syntax Options voice channel lt s o port startChannel endChannel gt reset error stat istic s Definitions slot Specifies chassis slot number where VSM is installed e g 2 port Specifies physical port number on voice daughtercard e g 1 channel Specifies port channel number range in which to reset error statistics e g 1 12 cumula tive for the current call on specified channel istic Optional command syntax Type either stats or statistics in the command line Syntax Notes This command only works from within the command line inter face and cannot be used from within the vsmboot asc file Default None Command Example voice channel 2 1 1 12 reset error statistics voice channel 2 1 13 24 reset error playout stats Page 5 278 VoIP Commands voice channel reset modem stats Command Usage Reset modem statistics for one or more voice channels Not available this release Syntax Options voice channel lt s ol port startChannel endChannel gt reset modem stat istic s Definitions slot port channel istic Default None Command Example voice channel 2 1 1 12 reset modem statistics voice channel 2 1 13 24 reset modem stats Specifies chassis slot number where VSM is installed e g 2 Specifies physical port number on voice dau
398. s voice coding profile single frequency tone detection Command Usage Set coding profile single frequency call progress tone detection on off Syntax Options voice coding profile lt codingProf Name gt single frequency tone detection on off Definitions codingProfName Identifies coding profile by name e g salemprof1 maximum length of 40 characters The following characters are permitted in the coding profile name a z A Z 0 9 space and Sss HA_ amp I lt gt CO IKI on Turns ON single frequency call progress tone detection control off Turns OFF single frequency call progress tone detection control Default The default setting is off Command Examples voice coding profile salemprof1 single frequency tome detection off voice coding profile calapprof2 single frequency tome detection off Remarks The DSPs on the voice switching daughtercard support 2600 hz tone detection Page 5 196 VoIP Commands voice coding profile voice echo canceller Command Usage Set coding profile voice echo canceller on off Syntax Options voice coding profile lt codingProfName gt voice echo canceller on off Definitions codingProfName Identifies coding profile by name e g salemprof1 maximum length of 40 characters The following characters are permitted in the coding profile name a z A Z 0 9 space and Ss
399. s DIMMs and Available Channels All digital VoIP daughtercards have four vocoder channels available per DSP chip DSPs are scalable in increments of three in DSP DIMM modules to better accommodate the needs of a VoIP network and to reduce costs since the number of DSPs required is based on the number of simultaneous vocoder channels needed DIMM stands for DSP Interface Manage ment Module not Dual Inline Memory Module Voice switching daughtercards such as the VSD T1 E1 card can contain up to 15 digital signal processors running at 100 MIPS millions of instructions per second providing voice processing functions for up to 60 DS Os or 60 Digital Service 0 channels 24 DS Os are equal to one DS 1 or T1 channel The number of populated DIMMs DSPs on the digital voice daughtercards determines how many channels which are bidirectional are available on the card e g 12 bidirectional chan nels per DIMM or a maximum of 60 bidirectional channels with 4 additional DIMMS The number of simultaneous channels available on a particular digital voice switching daughter card can be determined easily by counting the DIMMs on the card The illustration on the next page shows a VSD T1 E1 card fully populated with standard DSPs and additional DIMMs As a minimum configuration three DSPs come standard on the digital cards to provide 12 channels 4 bidirectional channels per DSP however it is strongly recommended that only fully populated 1
400. s For specific details on the precise types of calls handled see Chapter 2 VoIP Daughtercards and Chapter 5 VoIP Commands As with standard T1 El ISDN Euro telephone service VoIP calls can be transmitted full duplex simultaneously in both directions Likewise Alcatel s H 323 VoIP gateway digitizes phone or fax call signals and uses one of these call transmission services depending on the type of call to channel the calls i e carry information to a destination point in the VoIP network Depending on the configuration of the VoIP network the calls may also go through the PSTN For more details on the digitizing process see Payload Packetization and Digital Signal Processing on page 1 12 for more details This chapter provides general background information on VoIP networks clients gateways and gatekeepers and includes a list of key features provided specifically by Alcatel s H 323 VoIP network A VoIP call scenario is illustrated and described along with details on the tech nologies used in VoIP to explain how calls can be placed over IP Elements of converged VoIP network are also shown and described and significant telephone and data communica tions technologies are explained in relation to the VoIP gateway Technical standards for the most prominent technologies used in Voice over IP are briefly summarized at the end of this chapter since as a whole H 323 ITU standards define the major components using VoIP tech
401. s physical port number on voice daughtercard e g 1 The first number in the range of voice channels e g 1 The last number in the range of voice channels e g 30 Syntax Note Be sure to separate the start and end range numbers with a hyphen e g 1 30 Specifies the acoustic echo canceller hands free speaker gain in milliseconds from 0 to 31 e g 10 Syntax Note To use this command the acoustic echo canceller must be enabled via the voice signaling acoustic echo canceller non linear processor command and the acoustic echo canceller output command must be set to hands free The default value is 10 milliseconds Remarks Acoustic echo cancellers handle signal transmission echoes on calls originating from or being sent to IP telephones by isolating and filtering the signals Acoustic echo cancellers function as comfort noise generators Page 5 162 VoIP Commands voice signaling override in band call progress tones Command Usage Override call signaling for detection of call progress tones on off relative This command should only be used under the supervision of trained personnel Syntax Options voice signaling channel lt s ol port stantChannel endChannel gt no override in band call progress tones on off Definitions slot Specifies chassis slot number where VSM is installed e g 2 port Specifies physical port number on voice daughtercard e g 1
402. s starting with 2 to lines B Routes calls starting with 2 to trunks Q CX CL M CN or O and then the VoIP network uses these digits to route calls to trunk Routes calls starting with 1 to trunks CX and then the VoIP network uses these digits to route calls to trunks Q GX L M GND or O according to the hunt method used Page 3 17 VoIP Networks without PSTN Example 6 Remarks Supported VoIP features and main CLI commands used with this dialing scheme are as follows Features Supported H 323 gateway to voice daughtercard A Primary CLI Commands Used voice destination local channel page 5 231 Local channel one hunt group 48 channels across two T1s G voice numbering plan hunt method page 5 255 voice numbering plan destination member page 5 257 voice numbering plan phone group member page 5 258 Site prefix no site prefix D voice phone group site prefix page 5 238 Voice phone group type four digit local extensions L voice phone group type page 5 240 voice phone group format page 5 243 voice phone group add numbers page 5 247 Strip digit length no strip digits CR voice phone group strip digit length page 5 244 Digital Interface type T1 W voice port interface type page 5 34 Page 3 18 VoIP Networks without PSTN Example 7 VoIP Networks without PSTN Example 7
403. ssis slot number where VSM is installed e g 2 port Specifies physical port number on voice daughtercard e g 1 startChannel The first number in the range of voice channels e g 1 endChannel The last number in the range of voice channels e g 30 Syntax Note Be sure to separate the start and end range numbers with a hyphen e g 1 30 value Specifies the minimum time to wait if answering party hangs up before on hook condition declared in milliseconds from 1 to 60 000 e g 300 Syntax Note Do not use commas when entering the fxs ls answering party clear detect value for example 1 000 will return a syntax error message Default The default value is 300 milliseconds Command Examples voice signaling channel 2 1 1 12 fxs Is answer clear detect 300 voice signaling channel 2 2 13 24 fxs Is answer clear detect 30000 voice signaling channel 2 3 1 30 fxs Is answer clear detect 60000 Remarks The voice signaling protocol command must be set to the corresponding protocol type before any commands for E amp M Wink Start Immediate Start and Delay Start Signaling and FXS FXO Loop and Ground Start commands will take effect Page 5 112 VoIP Commands voice signaling fxs ls supervisory disconnect wait Command Usage Specify Foreign Exchange Station Loop Start FXS LS time to wait after supervisory discon nect before declaring on hook Syntax Options voice signaling
404. st be set to ISDN PRI E1 via the voice port interface type command If use of the ISDN protocol for Telephony Signaling is specified then all channels on the port must be set to ISDN E1 ISDN PRI or BRI Euro the setting must also match the daughtercard connection type set via the voice port interface type command Page 5 68 VoIP Commands voice signaling out wait Command Usage Specify time to wait before first tone digit is sent dialed out after going off hook Syntax Options voice signaling channel lt s oi port startChannel endChannel gt out wait lt value gt Definitions slot Specifies slot number of voice daughtercard installed in switching module e g 2 port Specifies physical port number on voice daughtercard e g 1 startChannel The first number in the range of voice channels e g 1 endChannel The last number in the range of voice channels e g 30 Syntax Note Be sure to separate the start and end range numbers with a hyphen e g 1 30 value When tone dialing is used specifies in milliseconds from 0 ms to 20 000 the time to delay after going off hook before sending the first outbound dial digit e g 20000 Syntax Note Do not use commas when entering the time to delay after going off hook before sending the first outbound dial digit for exam ple 20 000 will return a syntax error message Default The default value is 400 Command Examples voice signaling chan
405. startChannel The first number in the range of voice channels e g 1 endChannel The last number in the range of voice channels e g 30 Syntax Note Be sure to separate the start and end range numbers with a hyphen e g 1 30 no Optional command syntax Syntax Note If no is used then ON and OFF cannot be specified on Turns ON passing of in band call progress tones as voice data after net connect and before tele connect state for specified telephony signaling channel off Turns OFF passing of in band call progress tone as voice data after net connect and before tele connect state for specified telephony signaling channel Default The default setting is no override in band call progress tones Command Examples voice signaling channel 2 1 1 12 no override in band call progress tones voice signaling channel 2 2 13 24 override in band call progress tones on Page 5 163 VoIP Commands voice signaling override full call progress tones Command Usage Override call signaling for call progress tone detection configuration default alternate This command should only be used under the supervision of trained personnel Syntax Options voice signaling channel lt s ol port startChannel endChannel gt no override full call progress tones on off Definitions slot Specifies chassis slot number where VSM is installed e g 2 port Specifies physical port number on voice daughtercard e g 1 s
406. starting with 1 818 878 to trunk and then the VoIP network uses these digits to route calls to trunk D Page 3 27 VoIP Networks without PSTN Example 11 Remarks Supported VoIP features and main CLI commands used with this dialing scheme are as follows Features Supported H 323 gateway to voice daughtercard A Primary CLI Commands Used voice destination local channel page 5 231 Local channel two hunt groups 24 channels per group T1 F voice numbering plan hunt method page 5 255 voice numbering plan destination member page 5 257 voice numbering plan phone group member page 5 258 Site prefix single or multiple digits Q voice phone group site prefix page 5 238 Voice phone group type four digit local extensions L voice phone group type page 5 240 voice phone group format page 5 243 voice phone group add numbers page 5 247 Voice phone group type eleven digit local extensions M voice phone group type page 5 240 voice phone group format page 5 243 voice phone group add numbers page 5 247 Strip digit length 7 V Digital Interface type T1 W voice phone group strip digit length page 5 244 voice port interface type page 5 34 Page 3 28 VoIP Networks without PSTN Example 12 H 323 Gatekeeper VoIP Networks without PSTN Example 12 This dialing scheme is used to connect voice switching dau
407. string must contain dialed digits and limited use of field separators Field separators hyphens in sequence indicate empty field two field sepa rators are not allowed in sequence as part of a valid format string A dialed digit cannot follow an x At least one x is required If no format is specified then the phone group numbers to include in range of digits command is not allowed Command can use only 1 2 3 4 or 7 numbering scheme x designators Designators are not allowed in area code or prefixes unless long distance designator is used in which case three designators must be used in the prefix but never the area code e g 818 123 000x 1 818 xxx xxxx Allowed digits include 000 through 999 Page 5 241 VoIP Commands International Extensions intended for daughtercard to daughtercard calls e If NANP extensions used then voice switching daughtercard recognizes vari able number of dialed digits i e between 10 and 26 digits 26 digits when long distance designator s and site prefix included See international PSTN extensions for more information on site prefixes e If H 323 gatekeeper control is set to ON via the voice network card h 323 gate keeper control command then the telephone extensions are set via the phone group numbers to include in range of digits command and automatically regis tered with the gatekeeper as an alias e Format string must contain dialed digits and limited use of field s
408. systems Series H 323 Series H Audiovisual and Multimedia Systems Infrastructure of audiovisual services systems and terminal equipment for audiovisual services H 323 this standard is specifically concerned with recommendations for real time audio video and or data and facsimile transmissions over H 323 Packet based Multimedia Communications Systems In reference to Alcatel s enterprise VoIP the series as a whole relates to gateway devices used in VoIP to handle audio video data and facsimile transmission over IP or packet networks The standard specifically includes the newer ITU recommendations for the Internet facsimile protocol T 38 that is used to 1 exchange messages and data between facsimile gateways connected via an IP network and 2 message transport depending upon bandwidth availabil ity using either TCP IP or UDP IP network protocols T 38 is incorporated into the first release of Alcatel s enterprise VoIP Series H 225 Series H Transmission of Non Telephone Signals infrastructure of audiovi sual services Transmission multiplexing and synchronization H 225 this standard is specif ically concerned with recommendations for narrowband visual telephone services defined in H 200 AV 120 Series transmission paths for local area networks LANs providing non guaran teed quality of service QoS which is less than that of ISDN PRI protection and recovery mechanisms This recommendation describes how non
409. ta G SAA A A Page 2 11 Voice Switching Daughtercard Digital VSD Jumpers The following jumpers are factory set on the VSD daughtercard and should not be changed by the customer unless under the direction of Customer Support Note that in general only jumpers which can be set with shunts or are associated with ports on the board are identi fied and described Caution This information is being provided solely for the purpose of repositioning a shunt which may have been inadvertently removed so as to prevent damage to the board and or possibly render the board or other components connected to the VSD inoperable Jumper No Shunt Position Default Port Description P3 no shunt on Pins 1_2 yes B RJ 45 connection P3 no shunt on Pins 3_4 yes A RJ 45 connection P7 no shunt on Pins 1_2 yes B RJ 45 connection P7 no shunt on Pins 3_4 yes B RJ 45 connection P7 no shunt on Pins 5_6 yes A RJ 45 connection P7 no shunt on Pins 7_8 yes A RJ 45 connection P10 Pins 1_2 yes B RJ 45 connection P10 Pins 3_4 yes A RJ 45 connection Other VSD Jumpers Jumper No Shunt Position Default Description P17 Pins 2_3 yes Backplane interface Hbus Page 2 12 Voice Switching Daughtercard Euro BRI ISDN Voice Switching Daughtercard Euro BRI ISDN The Euro BRI voice switching daughtercard VSB is used to provide the European ISDN BRI
410. tal Interface type E1 ISDN PRI Euro PRD Y voice port interface type page 5 34 voice signaling companding page 5 77 Page 3 60 VoIP Networks with Interoperability Example 24 VoIP Networks with Interoperability Example 24 Other PBXs with T1 This dialing scheme is used to connect a voice daughtercard to a Lucent Definity G3 running the following operating system System G3siV4 Software Version G34 i 04 0 054 0 Extensions off of PBX 1 1 818 878 2000 1 npa nxx xxxx Voice Daughtercard 1 to 878 2999 D T1 2000 su 2999 Extensions off of PBX 1 B IP 192 168 11 2 Port 1720 6 Voice Daughtercard T lt a 6035982000 g to 6035982999 lt a 1 603 598 2000 1 npa nxx xxxx to 598 2999 OO HR IP 192 168 12 2 Port 1720 Definity G3 Example 24 Other PBXs with T1 LEGEND for Diagram Components PBX 1 Configuration PBX 2 Configuration Expects to receive eleven digits on trunk D and then uses these digits to route calls to lines A Expects to receive eleven digits on trunk and then uses these digits to route calls to lines B Routes calls starting with 1 818 878 2xxx to lines A Routes calls starting with 1 603 598 2xxx to lines B Routes calls starting with 1 603 598 2xxx to tr
411. talled in an OSR containing either one or two VoIP daughtercards of the same type is referred to specifically as a VSX or VSX switching module for details see VSX Switching Module on page 2 25 For information on configuring either of these switches refer to the appropriate switch user manual This chapter also depicts the port pinouts and jumper settings for all of the VoIP daughter cards where necessary as well as the Deadman switch and Cross Over toggle switches avail able on certain voice daughtercards The front panels for the VoIP daughtercards including the front and bottom views of the cards are shown to illustrate certain components relative to important operations of the H 323 VoIP gateway in the switch All VoIP daughtercards can be field installed For details on installing the cards see also Chapter 4 Setup and Installation For details on configuring the switch to run VoIP see Chapter 3 Network Dialing Schemes and Chapter 5 VoIP Commands Page 2 1 Introduction VoIP Daughtercard Types There are two types of VoIP daughtercards digital and analog The digital voice switching daughtercards includes the VSD daughtercard used for digital calls placed in either North America and or Europe and the VSB daughtercard used specifically for digital calls placed in Europe The analog voice switching daughtercard VSA is used only in North America for placing analog POTS Plain Old Telephone Service calls e
412. tart Immediate Start and Delay Start Signaling and FXS FXO Loop and Ground Start commands will take effect Page 5 130 VoIP Commands voice signaling fxs gs max wait loop Command Usage Specify Foreign Exchange Station Ground Start FXS GS maximum time to wait for loop to close after grounding tip Syntax Options voice signaling channel lt s ol port startChannel endChannel gt fxs gs max imum wait loop lt value gt Definitions slot Specifies chassis slot number where VSM is installed e g 2 port Specifies physical port number on voice daughtercard e g 1 startChannel The first number in the range of voice channels e g 1 endChannel The last number in the range of voice channels e g 30 Syntax Note Be sure to separate the start and end range numbers with a hyphen e g 1 30 imum Optional command syntax Type either max or maximum in the command line value Specifies the maximum time to wait after ring ground detection for loop to close after grounding tip but before disconnecting line in milliseconds from 0 to 65535 e g 100 Syntax Note Do not use commas when entering the maximum fxs gs time to wait value for loop to close after grounding tip for example 10 000 will return a syntax error message Default The default value is 100 milliseconds Command Examples voice signaling channel 2 1 1 12 fxs gs maximum wait loop 100 voice signaling channel 2 1 13 24 fxs gs ma
413. tart Signaling and FXS FXO Loop and Ground Start commands will take effect Page 5 141 VoIP Commands voice signaling fxo gs ringing inter pulse Command Usage Specify Foreign Exchange Office Ground Start FXO GS time between consecutive ring pulses Syntax Options voice signaling channel lt s ol port stantChannel endChannel gt fxo gs ringing inter pulse lt value gt Definitions slot Specifies chassis slot number where VSM is installed e g 2 port Specifies physical port number on voice daughtercard e g 1 startChannel The first number in the range of voice channels e g 1 endChannel The last number in the range of voice channels e g 30 Syntax Note Be sure to separate the start and end range numbers with a hyphen e g 1 30 value Specifies the time between fxo gs start time between consecutive ring pulses in the same ring cycle in milliseconds from 1 to 60 000 e g 550 to detect ringing Syntax Note Do not use commas when entering the fxo gs start time between consecutive ring pulses to detect ringing for example 5 000 will return a syntax error message Default The default value is 550 milliseconds Command Examples voice signaling channel 2 1 1 12 fxo gs ringing inter pulse 550 voice signaling channel 2 2 13 24 fxo gs ringing inter pulse 30000 voice signaling channel 2 3 1 30 fxo gs ringing inter pulse 60000 Remarks The voice signaling protocol command must
414. tart Signaling minimum E amp M delay start response to off hook state maximum E amp M delay start response to off hook state time to ignore incoming digits after E amp M delay start E amp M delay start signal detection minimum E amp M delay start detection time on M lead maximum E amp M delay start detection time on M lead maximum time to wait for E amp M delay start detection Page 5 63 VoIP Commands Foreign Exchange Station FXS Loop Start LS Signaling FXS LS debounce interval to on hook transition FXS LS debounce interval to off hook transition FXS LS time to wait before declaring off hook FXS LS minimum time to wait before declaring on hook by originator FXS LS minimum time to wait before declaring on hook by answerer FXS LS time to wait after supervisory disconnect before declaring on hook FXS LS duration of supervisory disconnect FXS LS to generate outbound caller ID on off Foreign Exchange Office FXO Loop Start LS signaling FXO LS incoming ring signal debounce interval FXO LS debounce interval to on hook transition FXO LS supervisory disconnect detection signal enable disable FXO LS duration of supervisory disconnect detection signal FXO LS time before originating calls while receiving calls FXO LS time between ring cycles to detect ringing FXO LS time between ring pulses to detect ringing FXO LS to detect inbound caller ID on off FXO LS number of rings allowed before answering FXO LS debou
415. tartChannel The first number in the range of voice channels e g 1 endChannel The last number in the range of voice channels e g 30 Syntax Note Be sure to separate the start and end range numbers with a hyphen e g 1 30 no Optional command syntax Syntax Note If no is used then ON and OFF cannot be specified on Use full call progress tones for specified telephony signaling channel off Use full call progress tones for specified telephony signaling channel Default The default setting is no override full call progress tones Command Examples voice signaling channel no override full call progress tones voice signaling channel override full call progress tones on Remarks This command is used to specify which configuration to use for call progress tone detection Each configuration contains filter information threshold and filter coefficients and a table containing cadence information of all the call progress tones that need to be detected The information call progress tones is transferred as information type packets to a coding profile Full call progress tones means that all available call progress tones can be used in band Each configuration whether default or alternate has a filter configuration for dial tone ring back including three supported cadences bust and congestion If the alternative tone detection configuration is selected the tone detection process is limited to a busy tone and other dete
416. tch to route calls to VoIP network Analog devices should already be set as per Step 9 Assuming the entire VoIP network and the network dialing scheme AVNDS were prop erly configured the VoIP switch is now ready to receive and route calls Instructions for Additional VoIP Installations VoIP should be setup and installed in another switch in the same manner as described above with the following main exceptions e Do not download the modified master vsmboot asce file to the next VoIP switch installa tion A copy of that modified boot file should first be created saved to a different direc tory and then modified to be specific to the next installation e All modifications to the master vsmboot asc file must be done before downloading it to the Page 4 7 Setup and Installation flash on the next VoIP switch installation Example VSM Boot File vsmboot asc The VSM boot file example on the following page matches Dialing Scheme Example 1 as depicted in Chapter 3 Network Dialing Schemes To modify the vsmboot ase file to match the dialing scheme shown in the diagram the IP address mask and the IP address for the voice switching daughtercard must be changed entry of the default IP address gateway is also required The four digit extensions unique to the VoIP network must also be specified in addition to slot port and channel numbers among other pertinent details as shown below The modifications are indicated in the VSM bo
417. te 5 oie bho Sree ae edie Mee gets eee Be te le eee ote sald 2 12 Voice Switching Daughtercard Euro BRI ISDN 0 0 0 0 00 00 0000 0c eee 2 13 Digital Signal Processors DSPs and Available Channels 2 13 VSB Deadman Switch 1 2 0 00 ee 2 13 VSB NT LT TE Cross Over Toggle Switch 0 0 0 0 00 00000 2 13 VSB PINOUT aaa are tak eit utes ot ot Vole a ete ue ee ateth alate dete ed 2 13 VSB Front Panel sei sik tuie GS RE EG tS nt Beet a ip ee ea 2 15 VSB MIMI SIS etait had oan Rha E RG aod Sled BAe aha a ea wee 2 16 page v Table of Contents Voice Switching Daughtercard Analog oonan 2 19 VSA Front Paniel senna i eare baa dun eb ak OH eae we we a aE 2 21 VSA PINGUS i 2 6 04 05 i Bh A ed ed RR ee SE OS 2 22 VSAs and Digital Signal Processors DSPs DIMMs and Available Channels a Tor ahi Bh eh de hs hia Sh a eh OA ee a ee 2 22 VSAs and the Deadman Switch 0 0 0 20 00 0000 eee 2 22 VSAs and Cross Over Toggle Switches 0 0 000000 eee 2 22 NSA TUMPER 2 tei be dt ener toe id Subd tid a eh a RE tet eheti 2 23 VSX Switching Module 2 1 ee ees 2 25 VSX Technical Specifications 1 0 0 00 ee 2 25 VoIP Daughtercard Port Numbering Schemes 0 00 00000 ee eee 2 28 3 Network Dialing Schemes 0 00 000005 3 1 UAE ROMITCCIONA aan ara energie ong E cette Ba E a athe Ge Beat ae we ty 6 ah eos ee anc ance aes aia 3 1 How to Select a Network Dialing Sc
418. tect 5000 Remarks In order to use this command the voice signaling protocol command must be set to the corre sponding protocol type of E amp M Wink Start Immediate Start or Delay Start Signaling Page 5 84 VoIP Commands voice signaling em clear confirm detect Command Usage Specify E amp M signaling time to wait before confirming on hook Syntax Options voice signaling channel lt s ol pori stantChannel endChannel gt em clear confirm detect lt value gt Definitions slot Specifies chassis slot number where VSM is installed e g 2 port Specifies physical port number on voice daughtercard e g 1 startChannel The first number in the range of voice channels e g 1 endChannel The last number in the range of voice channels e g 30 Syntax Note Be sure to separate the start and end range numbers with a hyphen e g 1 30 value Specifies the E lead clear confirm detect delay interval in milliseconds from 5 to 5 000 e g 50 before call clear confirm is declared Syntax Note Do not use commas when entering the E amp M clear confirm detect transition value for example 1 000 will return a syntax error message Default The default value is 5000 Command Examples voice signaling channel 2 1 1 12 em clear confirm detect 5000 voice signaling channel 2 2 13 24 em clear confirm detect 5 voice signaling channel 2 3 1 30 em clear confirm detect 1000 Remarks
419. the minimum duration of the wink response to the M lead for detection for example 1 000 will return a syntax error message Default The default value is 100 milliseconds Command Examples voice signaling channel 2 1 1 12 emw out wink duration min 100 voice signaling channel 2 2 13 24 emw out wink duration min 30000 voice signaling channel 2 3 1 30 emw out wink duration min 60000 Remarks The voice signaling protocol command must be set to the corresponding protocol type before any commands for E amp M Wink Start Immediate Start and Delay Start Signaling and FXS FXO Loop and Ground Start commands will take effect Page 5 97 VoIP Commands voice signaling emw out wink duration max Command Usage Specify maximum E amp M wink duration Syntax Options voice signaling channel lt s ol port stantChannel endChannel gt emw out wink duration max imum lt value gt Definitions slot Specifies chassis slot number where VSM is installed e g 2 port Specifies physical port number on voice daughtercard e g 1 startChannel The first number in the range of voice channels e g 1 endChannel The last number in the range of voice channels e g 30 Syntax Note Be sure to separate the start and end range numbers with a hyphen e g 1 30 imum Optional command syntax Type either max or maximum in the command line value Specifies the maximum duration of the wink response on the M ead before
420. the range of voice channels e g 1 endChannel The last number in the range of voice channels e g 30 Syntax Note Be sure to separate the start and end range numbers with a hyphen e g 1 30 value Specifies the minimum time to wait if call originator hangs up before on hook condition declared in milliseconds from 1 to 60 000 e g 300 Syntax Note Do not use commas when entering the fxs Is call originate clear detect value for example 1 000 will return a syntax error message Default The default value is 300 milliseconds Command Examples voice signaling channel 2 1 1 12 fxs Is originate clear detect 300 voice signaling channel 2 1 13 24 fxs Is originate clear detect 30000 voice signaling channel 2 1 1 30 fxs Is originate clear detect 60000 Remarks The voice signaling protocol command must be set to the corresponding protocol type before any commands for E amp M Wink Start Immediate Start and Delay Start Signaling and FXS FXO Loop and Ground Start commands will take effect Page 5 111 VoIP Commands voice signaling fxs ls answer clear detect Command Usage Specify Foreign Exchange Station Loop Start FXS LS minimum time to wait before declaring on hook by answerer called party after the calling party has ended the call Syntax Options voice signaling channel lt s ol pori starntChannel endChannel gt fxs Is answer clear detect lt value gt Definitions slot Specifies cha
421. the type of switch connection for the ISDN ports at the voice daughtercard level Specification of the ISDN protocol is optional if not using E1 ISDN PRI or BRI Euro Use this table and illustration below to determine valid data bearer channel slot and port values applies to OS R with two voice switching daughtercards Interface Data Bearer Slot Port Type Channels Channels Number Number E1 ISDN PRI 16 1 30 2 9 1 4 BRI Euro 0 1 2 2 9 1 4 Page 5 55 VoIP Commands Page 5 56 Bearer B Channels 2 B D channels BRI Euro 31 B D channels E1 ISDN PRI VoIP Commands voice channel isdn b channel Command Usage Specify E1 ISDN bearer B channels Not available this release Syntax Options voice channel lt s ol porl channel gt isdn b channel lt port dchannel dsl_id gt Definitions slot Specifies slot number of voice switching daughtercard installed in switching module e g 2 port Specifies physical port number on voice daughtercard e g 1 channel Specifies bearer B channel number e g 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 31 for E1 ISDN PRI BRI Euro is limited to two bearer channels dsl_id Specified identification number for related D channel Syntax Notes The port connection type must also be set via the voice port interface type command to indi
422. the user use only shielded and grounded cables to ensure compliance with FCC Rules This equipment does not exceed Class A limits per radio noise emissions for digital apparatus set out in the Radio Interference Regulation of the Canadian Department of Communications Avis de conformit aux normes du minist re des Communications du Canada Cet quipement ne d passe pas les limites de Classe A d mission de bruits radio lectriques pour les appareils num riques telles que prescrites par le R glement sur le brouillage radio lectrique tabli par le minist re des Communications du Canada Lithium Batteries Caution There is a danger of explosion if the Lithium battery in your chassis is incorrectly replaced Replace the battery only with the same or equivalent type of battery recommended by the manufacturer Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturer s instructions The manufacturer s instructions are as follows Return the module with the Lithium battery to Alcatel The Lithium battery will be replaced at Alcatel s factory page iii page iv Table of Contents 1 VoIP Overview 1 1 IFOGUCH ONS e e a a a eee Ta To a e a a a aa 1 1 VolP Networks croceo Gn Eaa a AE eg Mh nt ip ee E 1 1 Getting Started with VOIP o6 5 08 ees Hk REA RE Re 1 2 VolP Telephone OAS hats Seer uri salsa Seg sabe irc Ah wie wong N ab edn AE R AE 1 4 A VolP Gall Scenario maseni epena Ag EE RA GR A oh EER RRS 1 4 Elements of a Con
423. the voice daughtercard H 323 gatekeeper e g 224 0 1 41 Syntax Notes H 323 display name string must be specified before the voice switching daughtercard is activated A non null string value is required To use this command the h 323 gatekeeper mode command for gatekeeper discovery must be set to MANUAL Default None Command Example voice network card 2 1 h 323 gatekeeper address 224 0 1 41 voice network card 2 2 h 323 gatekeeper address 224 0 1 42 Remarks This command is used to specify the address of the gatekeeper in the currently active H 323 zone when configured for manual mode Because port 1719 is used only the IP address needs to be specified Page 5 219 VoIP Commands voice network h 323 allow calls without gatekeeper Command Usage Set calls allowed or disallowed without gatekeeper voice switching daughtercard gateway endpoint not registered true false Syntax Options voice network card lt slot card_number gt h 323 allow calls without gatekeeper true false Definitions slot Specifies the chassis slot number where VSM is installed e g 2 card_number Specifies the voice daughtercard position number e g 1 true H 323 allows calls without gatekeeper false H 323 does not allow calls without gatekeeper Default The default setting is true Command Example voice network card 2 1 h 323 allow calls without gatekeeper true voice network card 2 2 h 323 allo
424. tics modem statistics fax statistics ISDN level 2 statistics Page 5 259 VoIP Commands view voice daughter card Command Usage Display voice switching daughtercard parameters at the daughtercard level Syntax Options view voice daughter card lt s ot card_number gt Definitions slot Specifies chassis slot number where VSM is installed e g 2 card_number Specifies physical port number on voice daughtercard e g 1 Default None Command Example view voice daughter card 2 1 view voice daughter card 2 2 view voice daughter card 3 1 view voice daughter card 3 2 Screen Output To view voice daughtercard parameters type view voice daughter card followed by valid slot and daughtercard port numbers e g view voice daughtercard 4 1 and then press lt Enter gt A screen similar to the following displays kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Viewing Daughter Card kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk voice daughtercard 4 1 ip address 127 0 0 0 voice daughtercard 4 1 ip mask 255 255 255 0 voice daughtercard 4 1 activate Page 5 260 VoIP Commands view voice port Command Usage Display voice switching daughtercard parameters at the port level Syntax Options view voice port lt s ol port gt Definitions slot Specifies chassis slot number where VSM is installed e g 2 port Specifies physical port number o
425. tify transmission circuits trunks for troubleshooting by a telephone company The circuit identifier is obtained from the tele phone company who may need or require this identifying information in order to fix line transmission problems Identification of the voice port circuit identifier is optional Page 5 38 VoIP Commands voice port nfas framing Command Usage Set E1 voice port NFAS Non Facility Associated Framing enable disable Syntax Options voice port lt s o port gt nfas framing enable disable Definitions slot Specifies slot number of voice switching daughtercard installed in switching module e g 2 port Specifies physical port number on voice daughtercard e g 1 enable Turns ON NFAS framing on E1 voice port disable Turns OFF NFAS framing on E1 voice port Default The default setting is disable Command Examples voice port 2 1 nfas framing disable voice port 2 1 nfas framing enable Remarks The voice port nfas framing command determines whether NFAS framing e g out of band signaling will be used with E1 or PRI E1 When NFAS framing is enabled the framing is based on bit 2 of Time Slot 0 NOT NFAS NFAS framing can only be enabled if the voice daughtercard connection port type is set to E1 E1 ISDN PRI or BRI Euro The port connection type can be set via the voice port interface type command Note This command is not supported on VSA modul
426. tion of the local exchange of which there are three types 1 those that support 7 digit dialing to get calls across the street nxx xxxx and 2 those that support 10 digit dial ing to get calls across the street npa nxx xxxx where NPA is the area code and 3 those that support 11 digit dialing to get calls across the street 1 npa nxx xxxx where npa is the area code When using voice phone group type NANP PSTN the PSTN functionality is supported with the following exceptions e DID extensions add numbers and the NANP PSTN cannot be the same numbers e DID extensions add numbers and the site prefix digits cannot be the same numbers e Site prefix digits and NANP PSTN numbers cannot be the same numbers The phone group type NANP PSTN may be substituted by using site prefixes forces callers to dial one or more digits e g 9 to place an external call For more information on using site prefixes see also VoIP Networks without PSTN Example 10 on page 3 25 Cautions 4 Voice daughtercards using either voice phone group type of NANP PSTN or International PSTN dialing schemes cannot handle PBXs with extensions starting with 0 1 411 or 911 The following extensions are also not allowed 0000 to 0999 1000 to 1999 4110 to 4119 and 9000 to 9999 For more details see Chapter 5 VoIP Commands Companies using Alcatel s VoIP feature are responsible for programming and testing all dialing schemes to reduce the likeliho
427. tion switch type net3 net5 ISDN VSB only E1 ISDN BRI Euro line type point to point point to multipoint ISDN Control and Bearer Channels VSB only E1 ISDN control Data or D channels E1 ISDN bearer B channels Page 5 15 VoIP Commands voice daughter card ip mask Command Usage Assign IP address mask to voice switching daughtercard Syntax Options voice daughter card lt s oi card_number gt ip mask lt ip_address gt Definitions slot Specifies the chassis slot number where VSM is installed e g 2 card_number Specifies the voice daughtercard position number e g 1 Syntax Note The OA 512 value is always 1 and the OS R values are always 1 to 2 ip_address Identifies the voice switching daughtercard by IP address mask e g 255 255 255 0 Default None Command Examples voice daughter card 2 1 ip address mask 255 255 255 0 voice daughter card 2 2 ip address mask 255 255 255 0 Remarks The IP subnet mask address must be the same as the IP subnet mask address used in the routing group for the VoIP gateway s See Chapter 4 Setup and Installation Page 5 16 VoIP Commands voice daughter card ip address Command Usage Assign IP address to voice switching daughtercard Syntax Options voice daughter card lt s o card_number gt ip address lt ip_address gt Definitions slot Specifies the chassis slot number wh
428. to separate the start and end range numbers with a hyphen e g 1 30 value Specifies the signal threshold time for single frequency tone detection in milliseconds from 0 to 65535 e g 50 Syntax Note Do not use commas when entering the single frequency tone detection threshold time for example 20 000 will return a syntax error message Default The default value is 50 milliseconds Command Examples voice signaling channel 2 1 1 12 single frequency tone detection threshold time 50 voice signaling channel 2 2 13 24 single frequency tone detection threshold time 20000 voice signaling channel 2 3 1 30 single frequency tone detection threshold time 65535 Page 5 156 VoIP Commands voice signaling echo canceller non linear sensitivity Command Usage Set echo canceller processor non linear signal sensitivity Syntax Options voice signaling channel lt s ol port stantChannel endChannel gt echo canceller non linear sensitivity lt value gt slot Specifies chassis slot number where VSM is installed e g 2 port Specifies physical port number on voice daughtercard e g 1 startChannel The first number in the range of voice channels e g 1 endChannel The last number in the range of voice channels e g 30 Syntax Note Be sure to separate the start and end range numbers with a hyphen e g 1 30 value Specifies the echo canceller non linear sensitivity in mi
429. transmit 5 148 Signaling Attributes Tones Set outbound tone table ringing silence 5 149 Set call progress tone detection off on relative 5 150 Set call progress tone detection configuration default alternate 5 151 Specify V 18 tone detection threshold hang time 5 152 Specify V 18 tone detection threshold level 5 153 Specify V 18 tone detection threshold fraction 5 154 Specify V 18 single tone detection threshold level 5 155 Specify V 18 single tone detection threshold time 5 156 Page 5 8 VoIP Commands Signaling Attributes Echo Canceller Specify echo canceller non linear sensitivity 5 157 Signaling Attributes Acoustic Echo Canceller Set acoustic echo canceller mode on off 5 158 Set acoustic echo canceller non linear processor on off 5 159 Set acoustic echo canceller output on off 5 160 Set acoustic echo canceller handset hs speaker gain 5 161 Set acoustic echo canceller hands free hf speaker gain 5 162 Signaling Attributes Override Call Signaling Capabilities Override call signaling for in band call progress tones on off 5 163 Override call signaling for full call progress tones on off 5 164 Override call signaling for ring back on off 5 165 Override call signaling for in band codec switching on off 5 166 Override call signaling for packet switch unit PSU codec switching on off 5 167 Override call
430. ts 30 ms 240 bits 40 ms 320 bits 50 ms 400 bits 60 ms 480 bits 70 ms 560 bits 80 ms 640 bits fax t 38 Fax Relay in T 38 No Yes No not applicable not applicable mode Page 5 184 VoIP Commands voice coding profile voice packet interval Command Usage Specify preferred coding profile voice packet interval VPD size and voice information field VIF size Syntax Options voice coding profile lt codingProfName gt voice packet interval lt packet_size gt Definitions codingProfName Identifies coding profile by name e g salemprof1 maximum length of 40 characters The following characters are permitted in the coding profile name a z A Z 0 9 space and Ss gt HA_ amp I lt gt CQO IKI packet_size Specifies voice packet interval in 10 millisecond increments Supported values include 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 and 80 Default The default packet size is 60 Command Example voice coding profile salemprof1 voice packet interval 10 voice coding profile calabprof2 voice packet interval 60 Remarks This command is used to set the size of the voice information field VIF in bits for a coding profile The VIF size is derived from the specified voice packet interval and the voice coding algorithm The voice coding algorithm must be specified before the desired voice packet interval Each codec type uses a different mathematical algorithm method to encode
431. ts together See the digital port configuration commands in Chapter 5 VoIP Commands specifically the voice port isdn protocol command used to control the QSIG protocol settings PBX 1 Digital Voice Port A D Deadman Normally Open disconnected Switch when power is re applied to card ques B z S y Switch Bus C VT Digital Voice Port Deadman Switch PSTN Fallback Call Protection Page 2 8 Voice Switching Daughtercard Digital VSD Cross Over Toggle Switch The Cross Over toggle switch for digital voice daughtercards VSDs only can be used to correct communication link errors between a daughtercard in the switch and a PBX or keyset due to the transmit TX and receive RX pins of the cable connecting the VoIP daughter card and the digital telephony device PBX or other voice device This will show up as the link LED not turning green see VSD Front Panel on page 2 7 If a communication link error occurs between the switch and the PBX or Key Set as such the blue Cross Over toggle switch as shown here on the top side of the board can be flipped to a Cross Over ON or OFF position after shutting down the VoIP switch and removing the affected daughtercard This will swap the transmit and receive connections for the designated port The default toggle position is to the left or OFF position Once the toggle switch has been flipped th
432. tween H 323 endpoints or agents Page 5 23 VoIP Commands voice daughter card h 323 in fast start Command Usage Set incoming H 323 Fast Start mode for gateway on off Syntax Options voice daughter card lt s ot card_number gt h 323 in coming fast start on off Definitions slot Specifies the chassis slot number where VSM is installed e g 2 card_number Specifies the voice daughtercard position number e g 1 coming Optional command syntax Type either in or incoming in the command line on Turns ON H 323 incoming fast start for specified voice network off Turns OFF H 323 incoming fast start for specified voice network Default The default setting is on Command Examples voice daughter card 2 1 h 323 incoming fast start off voice daughter card 2 1 h 323 in fast start on Remarks For a brief description of Fast Start mode see the voice network h 323 outgoing Fast Start command Fast Start commands take effect immediately and do not require use of the voice daughter card activate command Page 5 24 VoIP Commands voice daughter card h 323 auto answer Command Usage Set automatic answering for incoming calls on gateway on off Syntax Options voice daughter card lt s ot card_number gt h 323 auto matic answer on off Definitions slot Specifies slot number of switching module installed in chassis e g 2 card_number Sp
433. two T1 lines each In this example the cards are installed in a two VSX motherboards in the same Omni Switch Router to provide six T1 lines connected to a PBX Hunt groups are called voice numbering plans in the AVNDS Voice numbering plans relate phone groups and destinations In this example the voice daughtercards are using the round robin hunt method to determine where new calls will be routed Extensions J Voice Daughtercard aml 1 K IP 192 168 11 2 Port 1720 Voice off of PBX 1 D a 1000 1999 Daughtercard 3 rag O a M IP 192 168 13 2 Port 1720 Voice Daughtercard T T1 4 0 IP 192 168 14 2 Extensions off of PBX 2 Port 1720 Hunt Group Voice E Daughtercard 2000 2999 al 2000 to 2999 2 IP 192 168 12 2 X Port 1720 Example 6 One Hunt Group 144 Channels Across Six T1s LEGEND for Diagram Components PBX 1 Configuration PBX 2 Configuration Expects to receive four digits on trunks Q CX L M CN or O and then uses these digits to route calls to lines A Expects to receive four digits on trunk E and then uses these digits to route calls to lines B Routes calls starting with 1 to lines A Routes call
434. ty 5 5 157 voice signaling acoustic echo canceller mode 20000005 5 158 Table of Contents voice signaling acoustic echo canceller non linear processor 5 159 voice signaling acoustic echo canceller output 00000 5 160 voice signaling acoustic echo canceller handset speaker gain 5 161 voice signaling acoustic echo canceller hands free speaker gain 5 162 voice signaling override in band call progress tones 4 5 163 voice signaling override full call progress tones 000000005 5 164 voice signaling override ring back 0 0 0 0 000 ee 5 165 voice signaling override in band codec switching 0 5 166 voice signaling override psu codec switching 00000 5 167 voice signaling override network overlap dialing 5 168 voice signaling override information element transport 5 169 voice signaling override qsig information element transport 5 170 voice signaling override setup 2 ee ee 5 171 COdin S PrOnles 3 Aust suk oe ELEA A ol Ah Ade hel ah hel ak ate MB asad ae AEA AE 5 172 voice coding profile Aan ah hen Ae RA Rae RoR Boe Rea Mees A cae 5 174 Voice no c dime profile ss ite My SE ee yatua Men Mee eae PE pe poet 5 175 view voice COMIN Gr PTO len My ah oo bee tO ences ON tee AEE a Ged pee ee 5 176 voice coding profile all reset 2 0 eee 5 18
435. um time to wait for E amp M delay start detection for example 5 000 will return a syntax error message Default The default value is 170 milliseconds Command Examples voice signaling channel 2 1 1 12 emd out delay check 170 voice signaling channel 2 2 13 24 emd out delay check 30000 Remarks In order to use this command the voice signaling protocol command must be set to the corre sponding protocol type of E amp M Delay Start Signaling In order to use this command the integrity check for outgoing calls must be turned OFF via the voice signaling emd out integrity check command Page 5 107 VoIP Commands voice signaling fxs ls on hook debounce Command Usage Specify Foreign Exchange Station Loop Start FXS LS debounce interval to on book transition Syntax Options voice signaling channel lt s ol porl startChannel endChannel gt fxs Is on hook debounce lt value gt Definitions slot Specifies chassis slot number where VSM is installed e g 2 port Specifies physical port number on voice daughtercard e g 1 startChannel The first number in the range of voice channels e g 1 endChannel The last number in the range of voice channels e g 30 Syntax Note Be sure to separate the start and end range numbers with a hyphen e g 1 30 value Specifies the debounce delay interval transition to on hook state in milliseconds from 1 to 1 000 e g 20 Syntax Note Do n
436. und Command Usage Specify Foreign Exchange Station Ground Start FXS GS time to wait after ring before grounding tip Syntax Options voice signaling channel lt s ol port startChannel endChannel gt fxs gs min imum ring ground lt value gt Definitions slot Specifies chassis slot number where VSM is installed e g 2 port Specifies physical port number on voice daughtercard e g 1 startChannel The first number in the range of voice channels e g 1 endChannel The last number in the range of voice channels e g 30 Syntax Note Be sure to separate the start and end range numbers with a hyphen e g 1 30 imum Optional command syntax Type either min or minimum in the command line value Specifies the minimum time to wait after ring ground detection before line responds by grounding tip in milliseconds from 0 to 65535 e g 100 Syntax Note Do not use commas when entering the minimum fxs gs time to wait value after ring ground before grounding tip for example 10 000 will return a syntax error message Default The default value is 100 milliseconds Command Examples voice signaling channel 2 1 1 12 fxs gs minimum ring ground 100 voice signaling channel 2 2 13 24 fxs gs min ring ground 30000 voice signaling channel 2 2 1 30 fxs gs min ring ground 65535 Remarks The voice signaling protocol command must be set to the corresponding protocol type before any commands for E amp M Wink S
437. unk G and then the VoIP network uses these digits to route calls to trunk CE Routes calls starting with 1 818 878 2xxx to trunk CH and then the VoIP network uses these digits to route calls to trunk D Page 3 61 VoIP Networks with Interoperability Example 24 Remarks Supported VoIP features and main CLI commands used with this dialing scheme are as follows Features Supported H 323 gateway to voice daughtercard A Primary CLI Commands Used voice destination local channel page 5 231 Local channel two hunt groups 24 channels per group T1 F voice numbering plan hunt method page 5 255 voice numbering plan destination member page 5 257 voice numbering plan phone group member page 5 258 Site prefix no site prefix D voice phone group site prefix page 5 238 Voice phone group type eleven digit local extensions M voice phone group type page 5 240 voice phone group format page 5 243 voice phone group add numbers page 5 247 Strip digit length no strip digits CR voice phone group strip digit length page 5 244 Strip digit length 7 V voice phone group strip digit length page 5 244 Digital Interface type T1 W voice port interface type page 5 34 Page 3 62 VoIP Networks with Interoperability Example 25 VoIP Networks with Interoperability Example 25 Other PBXs with Euro BRI
438. upport IP connections over leased lines public frame relay ATM satellite and ISDN At each branch office location enterprises use routers to connect the remote LANs to the IP WAN When used with Alcatel s H 323 VoIP gateway these Virtual Private Networks or VPNs allow a portion of the Public Switched Telephone Network to be managed and used by the enterprise Alcatel s H 323 VoIP gateway provides the Voice over IP network capabilities by means of either digital or analog VoIP daughtercards installed in the switch The VoIP daughtercards specifically enable enterprises to control the call routing capabilities of their own organiza tions by using a portion of the PSTN Getting Started with VoIP Once an enterprise network is ready to provide VoIP using Alcatel s H 323 VoIP gateways Network Administrators can begin setting up VoIP networks by installing and configuring the appropriate voice switching daughtercard s As a whole Alcatel s VoIP H 323 gateways can be scaled from a minimum of two voice channels per switch to a maximum of 120 voice channels per switch Switches with the greatest VoIP scalability will use voice switching modules VSXs in Omni Switch Routers See Chapter 2 VoIP Daughtercards for further details on supported configurations and scalability Initially an Alcatel VoIP network dialing scheme AVNDS must also be selected and deployed via a text based configuration boot file wherein each daughtercard must
439. ups 24 channels per group T1 F voice numbering plan hunt method page 5 255 voice numbering plan destination member page 5 257 voice numbering plan phone group member page 5 258 Local channel one hunt group 48 channels across two T1s G voice numbering plan hunt method page 5 255 voice numbering plan destination member page 5 257 voice numbering plan phone group member page 5 258 Local channel one hunt group 60 channels across two Els CH voice numbering plan hunt method page 5 255 voice numbering plan destination member page 5 257 voice numbering plan phone group member page 5 258 Site prefix no site prefix GD voice phone group site prefix page 5 238 Site prefix single or multiple digits Q voice phone group site prefix page 5 238 voice phone group site prefix digits page 5 239 Voice phone group type three digit local extensions K voice phone group type page 5 240 voice phone group format page 5 243 voice phone group add numbers page 5 247 Voice phone group type four digit local extensions L voice phone group type page 5 240 voice phone group format page 5 243 voice phone group add numbers page 5 247 Voice phone group type eleven digit local extensions M voice phone group type page 5 240 voice phone group format page 5 243 voice phone group add numbers page 5 247 Voice phone group type NANP exten
440. using standard telephone connectors such as the 8 pin RJ 45 jacks used for transmission lines to be connected to each other in the event of a power fail ure until 1 power is re applied to the daughtercard and 2 the switch reboots to break the Deadman connection and allows VoIP calls to again be placed For more information on the RJ 45 jacks see VSD RJ 45 Specifications on page 2 11 The Deadman switch which resets after 200 ms also contains a watchdog timer Because the timer keeps the switch relays open when the Deadman switch disconnects the RJ 45s from each other they can be connected immediately to the framers terminating the digital or analog telephone line So if power is lost to the VSD or VSB the Deadman switch keeps the PSTN connection alive by connecting the two telephony ports together before the signals reach the framers In other words for all new incoming calls a connection is maintained between one port connected to a customer s PBX and the second port connected to the PSTN otherwise known as PSTN fallback No special configuration is required to use the Deadman switch on the VSD T1 cards however to use it on the VSD E1 cards one port on the card must be set to be the qmaster and the other port must be set to be the qslave Note 4 On VSD E1 cards setting both voice ports to qmaster or both ports to qslave will cause the two telephony switches to get alarms when the Deadman relay switch connects the two por
441. ust be set to the corre sponding protocol type of E amp M Wink Start Immediate Start or Delay Start Signaling Page 5 90 VoIP Commands voice signaling em hang up wait Command Usage Specify time to wait after Ear amp Mouth signaling hang up before disabling Syntax Options voice signaling channel lt s ol pori stantChannel endChannel gt em hang up wait lt value gt Definitions slot Specifies chassis slot number where VSM is installed e g 2 port Specifies physical port number on voice daughtercard e g 1 startChannel The first number in the range of voice channels e g 1 endChannel The last number in the range of voice channels e g 30 Syntax Note Be sure to separate the start and end range numbers with a hyphen e g 1 30 value Specifies the time period in milliseconds from 5 to 60 000 e g 2000 a port waits to hang up before signaling that the call is in a disabled state Syntax Note Do not use commas when entering the value for E amp M time to wait after signaling call hang up before disabling for example 2 000 will return a syntax error message Default The default value is 2000 Command Examples voice signaling channel 2 1 1 12 hang up wait 2000 voice signaling channel 2 2 13 24 em hang up wait 10000 voice signaling channel 2 2 1 30 em hang up wait 20000 Remarks In order to use this command the voice signaling protocol command must be set to the
442. utbound caller ID and voice channel initialization Voice Channel Configuration voice channel mode voice channel PLAR dial in phone number Channel Operational State voice channel initialization Gin service out of service Page 5 58 VoIP Commands voice channel mode Command Usage Specify voice channel mode telephony passthrough or PLAR Private Line Automatic Ring down used to complete calls on designated channels Establishes semi fixed bandwidth connections between points in the network Syntax Options voice channel lt s ot porl startChannel endChannel gt mode telephony pass through plar Definitions slot Specifies slot number of voice daughtercard installed in switching module e g 2 port Specifies physical port number on voice daughtercard e g 2 startChannel The first number in the range of voice channels e g 1 endChannel The last number in the range of voice channels e g 30 Syntax Note Be sure to separate the start and end range numbers with a hyphen e g 1 30 telephony Allows use of Numbering Plan to complete calls to specified hunted destination pass through Allows two DS 0 channels to be cross connected to complete calls not available this release plar Allows calls to be routed based upon telephone number configured to dialing plan Default The default setting is telephony Command Examples voice channel 2 2 1 12 mode telephony voice channel
443. verged Network 0 0 0 0 ee 1 7 VOIP 323 Client tact fee sok vate k tae fae Aenean aut aw Seas act 1 7 VoIP RA 323 Gateway i086 5 64 Heb pd GEER es De ES alee OM 1 7 VoIP H 323 Gatekeeper Optional 0 0 ee 1 8 H 323 VoIP Gateway Voice and Convergence Features 00 1 10 Signaling Control and Voice Interoperability Voice Features 1 11 H 323 Call Control and Network Interoperability Convergence Features 1 15 H 323 Network Call Control n aoaaa aaa eee 1 15 Alcatel VoIP Network Dialing Schemes AVNDS 0 00005 1 15 Switch Backplane Interface Seo oar Heed Bes eek RPA REA we Bee 1 16 VoIP Standards for Development 1 2 0 00 000 eee 1 17 Codec Support G 711 G 723 1 F208 okt tine hid bbe hae bad Rees 1 17 VON Voice on the Net Developments 000000 1 18 VolPvand VEANS ose iacea eh ach alee ean QBs ee Ree Aiea a ee IE 1 19 2 VoIP Daughtercards ee 2 1 KOLUN s 4 403 Sle As A EAE e ae HA HO HWE Re Ried dled Seed an bs 2 1 VoIP Daughtercard Types 0 0 naaa 2 2 Digital Signal Processors DSPs DIMMs and Available Channels 2 4 Voice Switching Daughtercard Digital 0 0 ee eee 2 6 VSD Front Panel ses ste oh dove ho ew oa wee GS Ms MRA AER ee 2 7 VSD Deadman Switch erie 95 concen ke eae alee ke Ea Bae 2 8 VSD Cross Over Toggle Switch 0 ee 2 9 VSD PinGuts 43 6 6 us wae RD yee BEM et Ee Re a 2 11 VSD TUPE es ce 5 o
444. voice daughtercard e g 1 startChannel The first number in the range of voice channels e g 1 endChannel The last number in the range of voice channels e g 30 Syntax Note Be sure to separate the start and end range numbers with a hyphen e g 1 30 value Specifies the time to wait before declaring off hook seize detect condition in millisec onds from 0 to 5 000 e g 150 Syntax Note Do not use commas when entering the fxs gs time to wait before declaring seize detect value for example 2 500 will return a syntax error message Default The default value is 150 milliseconds Command Examples voice signaling channel 2 1 1 12 fxs gs seize detect 150 voice signaling channel 2 2 13 24 fxs gs seize detect 2500 voice signaling channel 2 3 1 30 fxs gs seize detect 5000 Remarks The voice signaling protocol command must be set to the corresponding protocol type before any commands for E amp M Wink Start Immediate Start and Delay Start Signaling and FXS FXO Loop and Ground Start commands will take effect Page 5 126 VoIP Commands voice signaling fxs gs on hook debounce Command Usage Specify Foreign Exchange Station Ground Start FXS GS debounce interval for on hook tran sition Syntax Options voice signaling channel lt s ol pori startChannel endChannel gt fxs gs on hook debounce lt value gt Definitions slot Specifies chassis slot number where VSM is installed
445. vsb clock port command line Default The default is 1 Command Example voice daughter card 2 1 vsb external clock port 1 voice daughter card 2 2 vsb external clock port 2 Page 5 33 VoIP Commands voice port interface type Command Usage Specify voice daughtercard port digital connection interface type does not include analog interface This setting determines the number of channels per port Syntax Options voice port lt s ot port gt interface type t1 e1 e1 isdn pri bri euro Definitions slot Specifies slot number of voice switching daughtercard installed in switching module e g 2 port Specifies physical port number on voice daughtercard e g 1 t1 Specifies T1 as the voice daughtercard port connection interface type e1 Specifies E1 QSIG as the voice daughtercard port connection interface type e1 isdn pri Specifies PRI E1 SDN as the voice daughtercard port connection interface type bri euro Specifies BRI Euro Euro ISDN as the voice daughtercard port digital connection interface type This setting applies only to the VSB Syntax Notes If PRI El is specified this command sets the ISDN DS 1 type to PRI E1 also referred to as ISDN If T1 is specified Mu law companding must be selected via the voice signaling companding command Likewise if E1 either ISDN PRI or BRD is specified A law companding must be selected When a digital voice port interface type is specified a
446. w calls without gatekeeper false Page 5 220 VoIP Commands voice network h 323 allow calls without gatekeeper max tries Command Usage Specify number of registration attempts allowed before voice switching daughtercard gate way endpoint registration failure occurs Syntax Options voice network card lt sloi card_number gt h 323 allow calls without gatekeeper max imum tries lt value gt Definitions slot Specifies the chassis slot number where VSM is installed e g 2 card_number Specifies the voice daughtercard position number e g 1 imum Optional command syntax Type either max or maximum in the command line value Specifies number of registration attempts made by voice switching daughtercard before it is allowed to fail registration e g 4 Default The default value is 4 Command Example voice network card 2 1 h 323 allows calls without gatekeeper maximum tries 1 voice network card 2 2 h 323 allows calls without gatekeeper max tries 4 Remarks Once the number of unsuccessful registration attempts is passed the endpoint is only able to place calls if the h 323 allow calls without gatekeeper command is set to true Page 5 221 VoIP Commands voice network h 323 endpoint registration type Command Usage Specify voice switching daughtercard gateway endpoint registration type Gf gatekeeper used Syntax Options voice network card lt slot
447. will return a syntax error message Default The default value is 100 milliseconds Command Examples voice signaling channel 2 1 1 12 fxs gs minimum loop open 100 voice signaling channel 2 2 13 24 fxs gs min loop open 30000 voice signaling channel 2 2 1 30 fxs gs min loop open 65535 Remarks The voice signaling protocol command must be set to the corresponding protocol type before any commands for E amp M Wink Start Immediate Start and Delay Start Signaling and FXS FXO Loop and Ground Start commands will take effect Page 5 132 VoIP Commands voice signaling fxs gs caller id Command Usage Set Foreign Exchange Station Ground Start FXS GS to generate outbound caller ID on off Syntax Options voice signaling channel lt s ol port startChannel endChannel gt fxs gs caller id on off Definitions slot Specifies chassis slot number where VSM is installed e g 2 port Specifies physical port number on voice daughtercard e g 1 startChannel The first number in the range of voice channels e g 1 endChannel The last number in the range of voice channels e g 30 Syntax Note Be sure to separate the start and end range numbers with a hyphen e g 1 30 on Turns ON FXS GS caller ID for specified telephony signaling channel off Turns OFF FXS GS caller ID for specified telephony signaling channel Syntax Note The voice coding profile caller id command must be enabled to
448. x page 5 238 voice phone group site prefix digits page 5 239 Voice phone group type NANP exten sions N voice phone group type page 5 240 voice phone group format page 5 243 voice phone group add numbers page 5 247 Voice phone group type PSTN NANP P voice phone group type page 5 240 voice phone group format page 5 243 voice phone group add numbers page 5 247 Strip digit length no strip digits CR voice phone group strip digit length page 5 244 Digital Interface type FXS AA voice port interface type page 5 34 Digital Interface type FXO AB voice port interface type page 5 34 Page 3 50 VoIP Networks with Interoperability Example 19 VoIP Networks with Interoperability Example 19 H 323 Gateway to Microsoft NetMeeting without FastStart This dialing scheme example is used to connect a voice daughtercard to a Microsoft NetMeet ing H 323 compliant terminal with microphone 1 818 878 2000 to 2999 Voice Sr N Daughtercard off of PBX 1 1 npa nxx xxxx ath 2000 IP 192 168 11 2 a9 E 2999 P port 1720 Microsoft NetMeeting 1 818 878 3000 IP 192 168 12 2 Port 1720 Example 19 H 323 Gateway to Microsoft NetMeeting LEGEND for Diagram Components PBX 1 Configuration NetMeeting Configuration Expects to receiv
449. x Notes If this command is set to ON then call signaling for the Informa tion Element must be set to OFF via the override call signaling for ie transport command Default The default setting is no override qsig information element transport Command Examples voice signaling channel 2 1 1 12 no override qsig information element transport voice signaling channel 2 2 13 24 override qsig information element transport on voice signaling channel 2 3 1 30 override qsig information element transport off Page 5 170 VoIP Commands voice signaling override setup Command Usage Override call signaling for voice fax modem data setup on off This command should only be used under the supervision of trained personnel Syntax Options voice signaling channel lt s ol port stantChannel endChannel gt no override voice setup fax setup modem setup data setup on off Definitions slot Specifies chassis slot number where VSM is installed e g 2 port Specifies physical port number on voice daughtercard e g 1 startChannel The first number in the range of voice channels e g 1 endChannel The last number in the range of voice channels e g 30 Syntax Note Be sure to separate the start and end range numbers with a hyphen e g 1 30 no Optional command syntax Syntax Note If no is used then ON and OFF cannot be specified on Turns ON voice fax hard coded modem or data call
450. x to lines A lines B Routes calls starting with 001 33 0 1 55 6 to Routes calls starting with 1 818 878 2xxx to trunk G and then the VoIP network uses these digits trunk H and then the VoIP network uses these digits to route calls to trunk E to route calls to trunk D Page 3 59 VoIP Networks with Interoperability Example 23 Remarks Supported VoIP features and main CLI commands used with this dialing scheme are as follows Features Supported H 323 gateway to voice daughtercard A Primary CLI Commands Used voice destination local channel page 5 231 Local channel two hunt groups 24 channels per group T1 F voice numbering plan hunt method page 5 255 voice numbering plan destination member page 5 257 voice numbering plan phone group member page 5 258 Site prefix no site prefix D voice phone group site prefix page 5 238 Voice phone group type eleven digit local extensions M voice phone group type page 5 240 voice phone group format page 5 243 voice phone group add numbers page 5 247 Voice phone group type INTL extension O voice phone group type page 5 240 voice phone group format page 5 243 voice phone group add numbers page 5 247 Strip digit length no strip digits CR Digital Interface type T1 W voice phone group strip digit length page 5 244 voice port interface type page 5 34 Digi
451. x wait loop 30000 voice signaling channel 2 1 1 30 fxs gs max wait loop 65535 Remarks The voice signaling protocol command must be set to the corresponding protocol type before any commands for E amp M Wink Start Immediate Start and Delay Start Signaling and FXS FXO Loop and Ground Start commands will take effect Page 5 131 VoIP Commands voice signaling fxs gs min loop open Command Usage Specify Foreign Exchange Station Ground Start FXS GS minimum time between open loop and idle state Syntax Options voice signaling channel lt s ol port startChannel endChannel gt fxs gs min imum loop open lt value gt Definitions slot Specifies chassis slot number where VSM is installed e g 2 port Specifies physical port number on voice daughtercard e g 1 startChannel The first number in the range of voice channels e g 1 endChannel The last number in the range of voice channels e g 30 Syntax Note Be sure to separate the start and end range numbers with a hyphen e g 1 30 imum Optional command syntax Type either min or minimum in the command line value Specifies the maximum time to wait after ring ground detection for loop to open after grounding tip but before returning line to idle state in milliseconds from 0 to 65535 e g 100 Syntax Note Do not use commas when entering the maximum fxs gs time to wait value for loop to open after grounding tip for example 10 000
452. xample 17 Mixed Digital and Analog Voice Daughtercards This dialing scheme illustrates how to connect a digital voice switching daughtercard VSD to an analog voice switching daughtercard VSA to send and receive calls It also depicts a remote PSTN connection as part of a VoIP network in which a VSA providing analog connec tions using Plain Old Telephone Service POTS is connected to the PSTN via a remote VSD PBX 2 can send four simultaneous PSTN calls on FXS LS lines to the VoIP network however it can only receive two simultaneous calls on FXO LS lines from the VoIP network On Voice Daughtercard 2 the Foreign Exchange Station FXS Loop Start lines are used to send calls to the VoIP network from the PBX via analog trunks whereas the Foreign Exchange Office FXO Loop Start lines are used to receive calls from the VoIP network and send them to the PBX p 2000 2999 9 x Voice Extensions 1000 1999 Daughtercard off of PBX 1 lt 1 IP 192 168 11 2 __ Port 1720 1000 p 1000 2999 i stripped E digit ort Extensions off of PBX 2 1000 1999 9 x Analog Voice Daughtercard 1 2 3 4 I 2000 2999 z 2 7 8 IP 192 168 12 2 Port 1720 2000 Example 17 Mixed Digital and Analog Voice Daughtercards LEG
453. xample dialing scheme file following these instructions Dialing Scheme Example 1 has been selected and used to demonstrate portions of a dial scheme vsmboot01 asc merged with the master vsmboot asc file which was then modi fied and saved to create a modified vsmboot asc file Multiple dialing schemes can be merged into the master vsmboot asc file but only the master boot file Cor a modified copy of it on the flash can be used to configure and boot a VoIP network Note that there is no default dialing scheme A standard text editor may be used to merge and modify the files Step 6 Most CLI configuration data required by the switch to run VoIP are pre installed as default settings on the voice daughtercard when the VoIP image file is downloaded to the switch as a result the master vsmboot asc file contains only the minimum configuration data namely commands which must be modified to be enterprise specific Modify the following entries in the merged vsmboot asc file to be enterprise specific and then save the file again also be sure to make adjustments relative to standard switch settings e g slot port in any CLI commands in which they are necessary The default settings can be changed by entering the appropriate CLI command s in the vsmboot asc file as per Chapter 5 VoIP Commands For assistance when entering certain values such as slot port and channel numbers in the command syntax refer to the configuration table at the b
454. ximum length of 40 characters The following characters are permitted in the coding profile name a z A Z 0 9 space and Ss 2 HA_ amp I lt gt CQO IK Optional command syntax Type either max or maximum in the command line Specifies the voice network buffer maximum delay in milliseconds from 1 to 1000 e g 30 The maximum delay should be at least two times greater than the nominal delay in milliseconds MaxDelay k packet time where k gt j 2 Syntax Notes Do not use commas when entering the voice network buffer maximum delay value for example 1 000 will return a syntax error message The default value is 240 milliseconds voice coding profile salemprof1 voice network delay buffer maximum delay 240 voice coding profile salemprof2 voice network delay buffer max delay 500 voice coding profile calabprof1 voice network delay buffer max delay 1000 Remarks Maximum delays must not be greater than the values shown in the following table Coding Profile Voice Network Buffer Codec Maximum Delay G 711 64 kbps 160 ms G 729ab 500 ms G 723 1 500 ms Page 5 188 VoIP Commands voice coding profile voice activity detector Command Usage Set coding profile for voice activity detector on off Syntax Options voice coding profile lt codingProf Name gt voice activity detector on off Definitions codingProfName Identifies coding pr
455. y Signaling functions includes the following e Call Progress Tone and Tone Detection detects individual in band frequencies and converts them into tones or other signaling events e g answer or busy signals e Dialing Timers used to time incoming signaling events e g how long to wait for a wink start or how long to wait for another digit e E amp M Signaling Common Wink Start Immediate Start and Delay Start customizes attribute settings or parameters to match CPE Available only on VSD T1 e Foreign Exchange Station FXS Loop Start customizes attribute settings or parame ters to match CPE e Foreign Exchange Office FXO Loop Start customizes attribute settings or parame ters to match CPE e Caller ID looks for Caller ID information e g calling party telephone number between first and second ring The telephony signaling configuration options for telephone signaling interfaces e g ring delay and cadence ringing rhythm are assigned to the physical ports on the daughtercard including the T1 and E1 line specifications All options are defined at the channel level Parameters for telephony signaling and VoIP network preferences are pre configured in text based configuration files referred to as vsmboot asc files The parameters are stored in the boot files and subsequently assigned to a daughtercard and or its components For more details on setting these parameters see also Chapter 5 VoIP

VoIP Gateway User Manual R4-5

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents